2
When Your First Photo Can’t Wait
❚❚
Getting Ready
1
Insert the battery (
0
77).
For information on charging the battery,
see “Charging the Battery” (
0
72).
2
Insert a memory card (
0
81).
3
Attach a lens (
0
83).
•
Align the white dot on the lens with the
white dot on the camera body (
q
) and
rotate the lens in the direction shown
(
w
).
•
A strap can be attached to the camera.
For more information, see “Attaching
the Strap” (
0
71).
4
Turn the camera on and then choose a
language and set the clock (
0
85).
When Your First Photo Can’t Wait
128
GB
Z 9 Model Name: N2014
3
When Your First Photo Can’t Wait
❚❚
Take (
0
88) and View (
0
97) Pictures
1
To focus, press the shutter-release
button halfway (i.e., lightly press the
shutter-release button, stopping when
it is pressed halfway).
2
Without lifting your finger from the
shutter-release button, press the
button the rest of the way down to take
the picture.
3
View the picture.
4
Package Contents
Be sure all items listed here were included with your camera.
•
Memory cards are sold separately.
•
MH-33 battery chargers and EH-7P charging AC adapters are sold
separately in some countries or regions.
D
The Nikon Download Center
Visit the Nikon download center to download firmware updates, NX Studio
and other Nikon software, and manuals for Nikon products including
cameras, NIKKOR lenses, and flash units.
https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/
Package Contents
❏
Camera
❏
BF-N1 body cap
❏
EN-EL18d rechargeable Li-ion
battery with terminal cover
❏
MH-33 battery charger
❏
EH-7P charging AC adapter
(supplied with a plug adapter
attached in countries or
regions where required; shape
depends on country of sale—
0
75)
❏
HDMI/USB cable clip (
0
847)
❏
AN-DC24 strap (
0
71)
❏
Warranty
❏
User’s Manual
❏
UC-E24 USB cable (
0
323)
❏
BS-1 accessory shoe cover
(comes attached to camera;
0
846)
5
About This Document
❚❚
Symbols
This document employs the following symbols. Use them to help locate
the information you need.
❚❚
Conventions
•
This camera uses CFexpress (Type B) and XQD memory cards. Memory
cards of all types are referred to throughout this document as
“memory cards”. Where it is necessary to distinguish between the
different types, the terms “CFexpress memory card” and “XQD
memory card” may be used.
•
Throughout this document, battery chargers are referred to as
“battery chargers” or “chargers”.
•
Throughout this document, the display in camera monitor and
viewfinder during shooting is referred to as the “shooting display”. In
most cases, the illustrations show the monitor.
•
Throughout this document, smartphones and tablets are referred to
as “smart devices”.
•
Throughout this document, the term “default settings” is used to refer
to the settings in effect at shipment. The explanations in this
document assume that default settings are used.
About This Document
D
This icon marks notes, information that should be read before
using this product.
A
This icon marks tips, additional information you may find helpful
when using this product.
0
This icon marks references to other sections in this document.
6
Table of Contents
When Your First Photo Can’t Wait ....................................................................2
Package Contents ...................................................................................................4
About This Document ...........................................................................................5
For Your Safety .......................................................................................................25
Notices ......................................................................................................................30
Getting to Know the Camera and Its Menus 34
Parts of the Camera ..............................................................................................34
Camera Body .................................................................................34
The Control Panel ........................................................................41
The Monitor ...................................................................................42
The Viewfinder .............................................................................46
Touch Controls .............................................................................53
The Menus ...............................................................................................................59
The
G
Button ...........................................................................59
The
i
Button (the
i
Menu) ......................................................65
First Steps 71
Attaching the Strap ..............................................................................................71
Charging the Battery ...........................................................................................72
The Battery Charger ...................................................................72
The Charging AC Adapter: Charging ...................................75
Inserting the Battery ............................................................................................77
Removing the Battery ................................................................79
Battery Level .................................................................................80
Inserting Memory Cards .....................................................................................81
Removing Memory Cards .........................................................82
Attaching a Lens ....................................................................................................83
Detaching Lenses ........................................................................84
Camera Setup .........................................................................................................85
Table of Contents
7
Table of Contents
Basic Photography and Playback 88
Taking Photographs ............................................................................................ 88
Shooting Videos ................................................................................................... 93
Playback ................................................................................................................... 97
Viewing Videos ............................................................................ 98
Deleting Unwanted Pictures ................................................101
Shooting Settings 102
Image Recording Options (Image Area, Quality, and Size) .................102
Adjusting Image Area Settings ............................................102
Adjusting Image Quality ........................................................105
Choosing an Image Size .........................................................108
Focus .......................................................................................................................110
Focus Mode ................................................................................110
AF-Area Mode ............................................................................113
Choosing a Subject Type for Autofocus ...........................119
Focus Point Selection ..............................................................123
The Touch Shutter ....................................................................124
Focus Lock ...................................................................................126
Manual Focus .............................................................................129
Exposure ................................................................................................................132
Choosing a Shooting Mode ..................................................132
Long Time-Exposures (Mode M Only) ...............................138
Autoexposure Lock ..................................................................141
Exposure Compensation .......................................................143
Release Mode ......................................................................................................145
Choosing a Release Mode .....................................................145
High-Speed Frame Capture (C30/C120) ...........................149
Using the Self-Timer (
E
) ........................................................152
8
Table of Contents
ISO Sensitivity ......................................................................................................154
About ISO Sensitivity ..............................................................154
Auto ISO Sensitivity Control .................................................156
White Balance .....................................................................................................158
About White Balance ..............................................................158
Fine-Tuning White Balance ..................................................163
Choosing a Color Temperature ...........................................167
Preset Manual ............................................................................170
Bracketing .............................................................................................................177
Auto Bracketing Set .................................................................177
Exposure and Flash Bracketing ...........................................178
White Balance Bracketing .....................................................183
ADL Bracketing .........................................................................187
Picture Controls ..................................................................................................192
About Picture Controls ...........................................................192
Modifying Picture Controls ...................................................195
Custom Picture Controls ........................................................199
Location Data ......................................................................................................204
Location Data Options ...........................................................204
Two-Button Reset ..............................................................................................209
Photo Shooting Menu ............................................................209
Video Recording Menu ..........................................................211
Custom Settings Menu ...........................................................212
Other Settings ...........................................................................213
Video Recording 214
Video File Types ..................................................................................................214
Tone Mode ..................................................................................215
Video Frame Size and Rate Options ............................................................216
Average Bit Rate .......................................................................217
9
Table of Contents
Video Image Area Options ..............................................................................218
Points to Note When Filming Videos ..........................................................220
Recording HLG Video .......................................................................................223
View Assist ..................................................................................224
Recording N-Log Video ....................................................................................225
View Assist ..................................................................................226
Viewing and Retouching Pictures 227
Viewing Pictures .................................................................................................227
Full-Frame Playback ................................................................227
Thumbnail Playback ................................................................228
Photo Information .............................................................................................230
File Information .........................................................................231
Exposure Data ............................................................................232
Highlight Display ......................................................................232
RGB Histogram ..........................................................................233
Shooting Data ............................................................................235
Overview ......................................................................................239
The
i
Button (Playback Mode) ......................................................................241
Photos ...........................................................................................241
Videos ...........................................................................................245
Videos (Playback Paused) ......................................................246
Playback Zoom ....................................................................................................247
Using Playback Zoom .............................................................247
Protecting Pictures from Deletion ...............................................................249
Rating Pictures ....................................................................................................251
Selecting Pictures for Upload ........................................................................253
Filtered Playback ................................................................................................255
[Filtered Playback Criteria] ....................................................255
Viewing Slide Shows .........................................................................................257
During the Show .......................................................................258
10
Table of Contents
Deleting Pictures ................................................................................................259
Using the Delete Button ........................................................259
Deleting Multiple Pictures ....................................................260
Creating Retouched Copies ...........................................................................264
RAW Processing ........................................................................267
Trim ...............................................................................................273
Resize ............................................................................................274
D-Lighting ...................................................................................280
Straighten ...................................................................................281
Distortion Control ....................................................................282
Perspective Control .................................................................283
Monochrome .............................................................................284
Overlay (Add) .............................................................................285
“Lighten” and “Darken” ..........................................................287
Editing Videos .....................................................................................................290
Trimming Videos ......................................................................290
Saving Selected Frames as JPEG Stills ..............................294
Voice Memos 295
Recording Voice Memos .................................................................................295
Playing Voice Memos .......................................................................................298
Deleting Voice Memos ...........................................................299
Connecting to HDMI TVs and Recorders 300
Connecting to HDMI Devices ........................................................................300
TVs ........................................................................................................................... 301
Recorders ..............................................................................................................302
Adjusting Settings ...................................................................302
YCbCr and Bit Depth ...............................................................308
External Recording Control ..................................................310
11
Table of Contents
Connecting to Smart Devices 311
The SnapBridge App .........................................................................................311
What SnapBridge Can Do for You ......................................312
Wireless Connections .......................................................................................313
Connecting via Bluetooth (Pairing) ...................................313
Connecting via Wi-Fi (Wi-Fi Mode) ....................................317
Connecting to Computers or FTP Servers 321
Making the Connection ...................................................................................321
Computers: Connecting via USB .........................................321
Computers: Connecting via Ethernet or
Wireless LAN .........................................................................322
FTP Servers: Connecting via Ethernet or
Wireless LAN .........................................................................322
Computers: Connecting via USB ..................................................................323
Installing NX Studio .................................................................323
Copying Pictures to a Computer Using NX Studio .......324
Computers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN .........................327
What Ethernet and Wireless LAN Can Do for You ........327
The Wireless Transmitter Utility ..........................................328
Wireless LAN ...............................................................................329
Ethernet Connections .............................................................346
Uploading Pictures ..................................................................354
Camera Control .........................................................................361
Ending the Connection to the Computer ........................365
FTP Servers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN ........................366
Wireless LAN ...............................................................................367
Ethernet .......................................................................................382
Uploading Pictures ..................................................................389
Ending the Connection to the FTP Server .......................396
12
Table of Contents
Troubleshooting Wireless LAN and Ethernet Connections ................397
Problems and Solutions .........................................................397
Error Codes .................................................................................399
Connecting to Other Cameras 401
What Inter-camera Connections Can Do for You ...................................401
Camera-Based Remote Photography
(Synchronized Release) .....................................................401
Clock Synchronization
(Synchronize Date and Time) .........................................401
Synchronized Release ......................................................................................402
Configuring and Using Synchronized Release ..............402
Synchronizing Camera Clocks .......................................................................421
Flash Photography 422
“On-Camera” Versus “Remote” .....................................................................422
Camera-Mounted Flash Units ..............................................422
Remote Flash Photography ..................................................422
Using an On-Camera Flash .............................................................................423
Flash Control Mode ...........................................................................................426
Flash Modes .........................................................................................................429
Flash Compensation .........................................................................................432
Adjusting Flash Compensation ...........................................432
FV Lock ...................................................................................................................434
Remote Flash Photography 437
What Is Remote Flash Photography? ..........................................................437
Using Remote Flash Units .....................................................438
Radio AWL ............................................................................................................439
Establishing a Wireless Connection ...................................439
Remote Flash Photography ..................................................444
Adding a Shoe-Mounted Flash Unit ..................................452
13
Table of Contents
Optical AWL ..........................................................................................................453
Using Optical AWL with the SB-5000 or SB-500 ............454
Menu Guide 464
Defaults ..................................................................................................................464
Photo Shooting Menu Defaults ...........................................464
Video Recording Menu Defaults .........................................468
Custom Settings Menu Defaults .........................................471
Playback Menu Defaults ........................................................483
Setup Menu Defaults ..............................................................485
Network Menu Defaults .........................................................489
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options .................................491
Shooting Menu Bank.................................................................................493
Renaming Shooting Menu Banks .......................................494
Copying Shooting Menu Banks ...........................................494
Restoring Default Settings ....................................................495
Extended Menu Banks ..............................................................................496
Storage Folder .............................................................................................497
Renaming Folders ....................................................................497
Select Folder by Number .......................................................498
Select Folder from List ............................................................500
File Naming...................................................................................................502
Role Played by Card in Slot 2..................................................................503
Deleting Copies .........................................................................505
Image Area....................................................................................................506
Image Quality...............................................................................................506
Image Size .....................................................................................................507
RAW Recording ...........................................................................................507
ISO Sensitivity Settings.............................................................................508
White Balance ..............................................................................................510
Set Picture Control.....................................................................................510
Manage Picture Control ...........................................................................510
Color Space...................................................................................................511
14
Table of Contents
Active D-Lighting .......................................................................................512
Long Exposure NR......................................................................................514
High ISO NR ..................................................................................................515
Vignette Control.........................................................................................516
Diffraction Compensation.......................................................................517
Auto Distortion Control ...........................................................................517
Photo Flicker Reduction...........................................................................518
Metering........................................................................................................520
Flash Control................................................................................................521
Flash Control Mode .................................................................522
Wireless Flash Options ...........................................................523
Remote Flash Control .............................................................524
Radio Remote Flash Info ........................................................524
Focus Mode..................................................................................................525
AF-Area Mode..............................................................................................525
AF Subject Detection Options...............................................................525
Vibration Reduction ..................................................................................526
Auto Bracketing ..........................................................................................527
Multiple Exposure......................................................................................528
Creating a Multiple Exposure ..............................................530
HDR Overlay .................................................................................................537
Taking HDR Photographs ......................................................538
Interval Timer Shooting ...........................................................................542
Interval-Timer Photography .................................................545
Time-Lapse Video.......................................................................................556
Recording Time-Lapse Videos .............................................558
Focus Shift Shooting.................................................................................568
Focus Shift Photography .......................................................569
1
The Video Recording Menu: Video Recording Options ..................576
Shooting Menu Bank ................................................................................577
Extended Menu Banks..............................................................................577
Storage Folder.............................................................................................577
File Naming ..................................................................................................578
15
Table of Contents
Destination ...................................................................................................578
Video File Type ............................................................................................578
Frame Size/Frame Rate.............................................................................579
Image Area....................................................................................................579
ISO Sensitivity Settings.............................................................................580
White Balance ..............................................................................................581
Set Picture Control.....................................................................................581
Manage Picture Control ...........................................................................581
HLG Quality...................................................................................................582
Active D-Lighting........................................................................................583
High ISO NR ..................................................................................................583
Vignette Control .........................................................................................584
Diffraction Compensation.......................................................................584
Auto Distortion Control............................................................................584
Video Flicker Reduction ...........................................................................585
Metering ........................................................................................................586
Focus Mode ..................................................................................................586
AF-Area Mode..............................................................................................586
AF Subject Detection Options ...............................................................587
Subject Detection .....................................................................587
AF When Subject Not Detected ..........................................587
Vibration Reduction...................................................................................587
Electronic VR.................................................................................................587
Microphone Sensitivity.............................................................................588
Attenuator.....................................................................................................589
Frequency Response.................................................................................589
Wind Noise Reduction ..............................................................................589
Mic Jack Plug-in Power.............................................................................590
Headphone Volume ..................................................................................590
Timecode.......................................................................................................591
External Rec. Cntrl (HDMI).......................................................................592
16
Table of Contents
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings ..............................593
Custom Settings Bank...............................................................................597
Renaming Custom Settings Banks .....................................597
Copying Custom Settings Banks ........................................597
Restoring Default Settings ....................................................597
a: Focus ......................................................................................................... 598
a1: AF-C Priority Selection ..............................................................598
a2: AF-S Priority Selection...............................................................599
a3: Focus Tracking with Lock-On .................................................600
Blocked Shot AF Response ...................................................600
Subject Motion ..........................................................................600
a4: Focus Points Used.......................................................................601
a5: Store Points by Orientation.....................................................602
a6: AF Activation ................................................................................604
a7: Focus Point Persistence............................................................605
a8: Limit AF-Area Mode Selection................................................606
a9: Focus Mode Restrictions ..........................................................606
a10: Focus Point Wrap-Around.....................................................606
a11: Focus Point Display .................................................................607
Manual Focus Mode ................................................................607
Dynamic-Area AF Assist .........................................................607
AF-C In-Focus Display .............................................................608
a12: Built-in AF-Assist Illuminator................................................609
a13: Focus Peaking............................................................................610
Focus Peaking Display ............................................................610
Focus Peaking Sensitivity ......................................................610
Focus Peaking Highlight Color ............................................610
a14: Manual Focus Ring in AF Mode...........................................611
b: Metering/Exposure.............................................................................. 612
b1: ISO sensitivity Step Value ........................................................612
b2: EV Steps for Exposure Cntrl ....................................................612
17
Table of Contents
b3: Easy Exposure Compensation................................................613
b4: Matrix Metering Face Detection............................................613
b5: Center-Weighted Area..............................................................614
b6: Fine-Tune Optimal Exposure..................................................615
b7: Keep Exp. When f/ Changes....................................................616
c: Timers/AE Lock....................................................................................... 617
c1: Shutter-Release Button AE-L...................................................617
c2: Self-Timer .......................................................................................617
c3: Power Off Delay ...........................................................................618
d: Shooting/Display .................................................................................. 619
d1: Continuous Shooting Speed ..................................................619
d2: Maximum Shots per Burst .......................................................619
d3: Limit Release Mode Selection ................................................620
d4: Sync. Release Mode Options ..................................................620
d5: Extended Shutter Speeds (M).................................................621
d6: Limit Selectable Image Area...................................................621
d7: File Number Sequence .............................................................622
d8: View Mode (Photo Lv)...............................................................624
d9: Starlight View (Photo Lv)..........................................................626
d10: Warm Display Colors...............................................................626
d11: LCD Illumination.......................................................................627
d12: View All in Continuous Mode ..............................................629
d13: Release Timing Indicator .......................................................629
d14: Image Frame ..............................................................................630
d15: Grid Type.....................................................................................630
d16: Virtual Horizon Type................................................................631
Roll .................................................................................................632
Pitch ...............................................................................................633
d17: Custom Monitor Shooting Display ....................................634
d18: Custom Viewfinder Shooting Display...............................636
18
Table of Contents
e: Bracketing/Flash.................................................................................... 637
e1: Flash Sync Speed ........................................................................637
e2: Flash Shutter Speed...................................................................639
e3: Exposure Comp. for Flash........................................................639
e4: Auto
c
ISO Sensitivity Control ...............................................640
e5: Modeling Flash ............................................................................640
e6: Auto Bracketing (Mode M) ......................................................641
e7: Bracketing Order.........................................................................642
e8: Flash Burst Priority......................................................................643
f: Controls..................................................................................................... 644
f1: Customize
i
Menu ....................................................................644
View Memory Card Info .........................................................645
Split-Screen Display Zoom ...................................................646
f2: Custom Controls (Shooting) ....................................................647
Command Dials ........................................................................658
f3: Custom Controls (Playback).....................................................659
Command Dials ........................................................................663
f4: Control Lock...................................................................................665
f5: Reverse Dial Rotation .................................................................666
f6: Release Button to Use Dial .......................................................666
f7: Reverse Indicators .......................................................................667
f8: Reverse Ring for Focus...............................................................667
f9: Focus Ring Rotation Range ......................................................668
f10: Control Ring Response............................................................669
f11: Full-Frame Playback Flicks .....................................................670
Flick Up/Flick Down .................................................................670
Flick Advance Direction .........................................................671
g: Video ......................................................................................................... 672
g1: Customize
i
Menu...................................................................672
Multi-Selector Power Aperture ...........................................673
Multi Selector Exposure Comp. ...........................................673
19
Table of Contents
g2: Custom Controls .........................................................................674
Command Dials .........................................................................681
g3: Control Lock..................................................................................682
g4: Limit AF-Area Mode Selection ...............................................683
g5: Focus Mode Restrictions..........................................................683
g6: AF Speed........................................................................................684
g7: AF Tracking Sensitivity..............................................................685
g8: View Assist.....................................................................................685
g9: Zebra Pattern ...............................................................................686
Pattern Tone Range .................................................................686
Pattern ..........................................................................................686
Highlight Threshold .................................................................686
Mid-tone Range ........................................................................687
g10: Limit Zebra Pattern Tone Range.........................................688
g11: Grid Type.....................................................................................688
g12: Custom Monitor Shooting Display ....................................689
g13: Custom Viewfinder Shooting Display...............................691
D
The Playback Menu: Managing Pictures .............................................692
Delete..............................................................................................................693
Playback Folder...........................................................................................694
Playback Display Options ........................................................................694
Delete Pictures from Both Slots.............................................................695
Dual-Format Recording PB Slot.............................................................695
Filtered Playback Criteria.........................................................................696
Picture Review .............................................................................................696
After Delete...................................................................................................697
After Burst, Show........................................................................................698
Rotate Tall......................................................................................................698
Copy Image(s)..............................................................................................699
Copying Pictures .......................................................................699
20
Table of Contents
B
The Setup Menu: Camera Setup ...............................................................706
Format Memory Card................................................................................708
Language ......................................................................................................708
Time Zone and Date..................................................................................709
Monitor Brightness ....................................................................................709
Monitor Color Balance..............................................................................710
Viewfinder Brightness...............................................................................711
Viewfinder Color Balance ........................................................................712
Finder Display Size (Photo Lv) ...............................................................712
Limit Monitor Mode Selection...............................................................713
Auto Rotate Info Display..........................................................................713
AF Fine-Tuning Options...........................................................................714
Creating and Saving Fine-Tuning Values ........................716
Choosing a Default Fine-Tuning Value ............................ 717
Non-CPU Lens Data ...................................................................................718
Save Focus Position...................................................................................718
Sensor Shield Behavior at Power Off...................................................719
Clean Image Sensor...................................................................................719
Image Dust Off Ref Photo........................................................................720
Acquiring Image Dust Off Reference Data ......................720
Pixel Mapping..............................................................................................723
Image Comment.........................................................................................724
Input Comment ........................................................................724
Attach Comment ......................................................................724
Copyright Information .............................................................................725
Artist/Copyright ........................................................................725
Attach Copyright Information .............................................725
21
Table of Contents
IPTC..................................................................................................................726
Creating, Renaming, Editing, and Copying Presets .....727
Deleting Presets ........................................................................727
Embedding Presets ..................................................................728
Copying Presets to a Memory Card ...................................728
Copying Presets to the Camera ...........................................729
Voice Memo Options.................................................................................732
Voice Memo Control ...............................................................732
Audio Output (Playback) .......................................................732
Camera Sounds ...........................................................................................733
Shutter Sound ............................................................................733
Beep On/Off ................................................................................733
Volume .........................................................................................733
Pitch ...............................................................................................734
Silent Mode...................................................................................................735
Touch Controls ............................................................................................736
Enable/Disable Touch Controls ...........................................736
Glove Mode ................................................................................736
HDMI ...............................................................................................................736
USB Connection Priority...........................................................................737
Location Data (Built-In).............................................................................737
Wireless Remote (WR) Options..............................................................738
LED Lamp ....................................................................................738
Link Mode ....................................................................................739
Assign Remote (WR) Fn Button .............................................................741
Conformity Marking ..................................................................................741
Battery Info ...................................................................................................742
USB Power Delivery ...................................................................................744
Energy Saving (Photo Mode)..................................................................746
Slot Empty Release Lock ..........................................................................747
22
Table of Contents
Save/Load Menu Settings .......................................................................748
Save Menu Settings .................................................................753
Load Menu Settings ................................................................753
Reset All Settings........................................................................................754
Firmware Version .......................................................................................754
F
The Network Menu: Network Connections ........................................755
Airplane Mode.............................................................................................756
Wired LAN .....................................................................................................756
Connect to Smart Device.........................................................................757
Pairing (Bluetooth) ..................................................................757
Select Pictures for Upload .....................................................758
Wi-Fi connection ......................................................................758
Upload While Off ......................................................................759
Location Data (Smart Device) ..............................................759
Connect to Computer...............................................................................760
Network Settings ......................................................................760
Connection Type ......................................................................762
Options ........................................................................................763
Connect to FTP Server ..............................................................................765
Network Settings ......................................................................765
Options ........................................................................................768
Connect to Other Cameras .....................................................................770
Synchronized Release .............................................................770
Network Settings ......................................................................770
Group Name ...............................................................................772
Master/Remote .........................................................................772
Remote Camera List ................................................................772
Synchronize Date and Time .................................................772
USB ..................................................................................................................773
Start via LAN.................................................................................................773
Router Frequency Band ...........................................................................774
MAC Address................................................................................................774
23
Table of Contents
O
My Menu/
m
Recent Settings ...................................................................775
O
My Menu: Creating a Custom Menu ............................775
m
Recent Settings: Accessing Recently-Used
Settings ...................................................................................780
Troubleshooting 781
Before Contacting Customer Support ........................................................781
Problems and Solutions ...................................................................................783
Battery/Display ..........................................................................783
Shooting ......................................................................................784
Playback .......................................................................................790
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi (Wireless Networks) ........................792
Miscellaneous ............................................................................793
Alerts and Error Messages ...............................................................................794
Alerts .............................................................................................794
Error Messages ..........................................................................797
Technical Notes 801
Compatible Lenses and Accessories ...........................................................801
Camera Displays .................................................................................................802
The Monitor ................................................................................802
The Viewfinder ..........................................................................809
The Control Panel .....................................................................813
Compatible Flash Units ....................................................................................816
The Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS) ......................816
Features Available with CLS-Compatible Flash
Units .........................................................................................816
Notes on Optional Flash Units .............................................835
24
Table of Contents
Compatible Accessories ..................................................................................840
Calibrating Batteries ................................................................850
Attaching a Power Connector and AC Adapter ............852
Software ................................................................................................................854
Caring for the Camera ......................................................................................856
Long-Term Storage .................................................................856
Cleaning ......................................................................................857
Image Sensor Cleaning ..........................................................858
Manual Cleaning ......................................................................860
Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions ..........................................862
Cautions: Using the Camera .................................................862
Cautions: Using Batteries ......................................................866
Cautions: Using the Charger ................................................869
Cautions: Using the Charging AC Adapter ......................869
Specifications ......................................................................................................870
Nikon Z 9 Digital Camera ......................................................870
Approved Memory Cards ................................................................................886
Memory Card Capacity ....................................................................................887
Battery Endurance .............................................................................................889
Trademarks and Licenses ................................................................................892
Cautions: Location Data (GPS/GLONASS) .................................................897
Notices ...................................................................................................................898
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) ............................................................901
Index 907
25
For Your Safety
To prevent damage to property or injury to yourself or to others, read “For
Your Safety” in its entirety before using this product.
After reading these safety instructions, keep them readily accessible for
future reference.
For Your Safety
A
DANGER: Failure to observe the precautions marked with this icon
carries a high risk of death or severe injury.
A
WARNING: Failure to observe the precautions marked with this icon
could result in death or severe injury.
A
CAUTION: Failure to observe the precautions marked with this icon
could result in injury or property damage.
A
WARNING
Do not use while walking or operating a vehicle.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in accidents or other injury.
Do not disassemble or modify this product. Do not touch internal parts
that become exposed as the result of a fall or other accident.
Failure to observe these precautions could result in electric shock or other
injury.
Should you notice any abnormalities such as the product producing
smoke, heat, or unusual odors, immediately disconnect the battery or
power source.
Continued operation could result in fire, burns or other injury.
26
For Your Safety
Keep dry. Do not handle with wet hands. Do not handle the plug with
wet hands.
Failure to observe these precautions could result in fire or electric shock.
Do not let your skin remain in prolonged contact with this product
while it is on or plugged in.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in low-temperature burns.
Do not use this product in the presence of flammable dust or gas such
as propane, gasoline or aerosols.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in explosion or fire.
Do not directly view the sun or other bright light source through the
lens.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in visual impairment.
Do not aim the flash or AF-assist illuminator at the operator of a motor
vehicle.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in accidents.
Keep this product out of reach of children.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in injury or product
malfunction. In addition, note that small parts constitute a choking hazard.
Should a child swallow any part of this product, seek immediate medical
attention.
Do not entangle, wrap or twist the straps around your neck.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in accidents.
Do not use batteries, chargers, or AC adapters not specifically
designated for use with this product. When using batteries, chargers,
and AC adapters designated for use with this product, do not:
•
Damage, modify, forcibly tug or bend the cords or cables, place them
under heavy objects, or expose them to heat or flame.
•
Use travel converters or adapters designed to convert from one
voltage to another or with DC-to-AC inverters.
Failure to observe these precautions could result in fire or electric shock.
27
For Your Safety
Do not handle the plug when charging the product or using the AC
adapter during thunderstorms.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in electric shock.
Do not handle with bare hands in locations exposed to extremely high
or low temperatures.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in burns or frostbite.
A
CAUTION
Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun or other strong light sources.
Light focused by the lens could cause fire or damage to product’s internal
parts. When shooting backlit subjects, keep the sun well out of the frame.
Sunlight focused into the camera when the sun is close to the frame could
cause fire.
Turn the product off when its use is prohibited. Disable the location
data feature. End location tracking. Disable wireless features when the
use of wireless equipment is prohibited.
The radio-frequency emissions produced by this product could interfere
with equipment onboard aircraft or in hospitals or other medical facilities.
Remove the battery and disconnect the AC adapter if this product will
not be used for an extended period.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in fire or product
malfunction.
Do not fire the flash in contact with or in close proximity to the skin or
objects.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in burns or fire.
28
For Your Safety
Do not leave the product where it will be exposed to extremely high
temperatures, for an extended period such as in an enclosed
automobile or in direct sunlight.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in fire or product
malfunction.
Do not look directly at the AF-assist illuminator.
Failure to observe this precaution could have adverse effects on vision.
Do not transport cameras or lenses with tripods or similar accessories
attached.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in injury or product
malfunction.
Do not touch the memory card when a high-temperature
warning is displayed in the monitor or viewfinder.
The memory card will be hot, potentially causing burns or
causing the card to be dropped and damaged when removed.
A
DANGER (Batteries)
Do not mishandle batteries.
Failure to observe the following precautions could result in the batteries
leaking, overheating, rupturing, or catching fire:
•
Use only rechargeable batteries approved for use in this product.
•
Do not expose batteries to flame or excessive heat.
•
Do not disassemble.
•
Do not short-circuit the terminals by touching them to necklaces,
hairpins, or other metal objects.
•
Do not expose batteries or the products in which they are inserted to
powerful physical shocks.
•
Do not step on batteries, pierce them with nails, or strike them with
hammers.
Charge only as indicated.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in the batteries leaking,
overheating, rupturing, or catching fire.
29
For Your Safety
If battery liquid comes into contact with the eyes, rinse with plenty of
clean water and seek immediate medical attention.
Delaying action could result in eye injuries.
Follow the instructions of airline personnel.
Batteries left unattended at high altitudes in an unpressurized environment
may leak, overheat, rupture, or catch fire.
A
WARNING (Batteries)
Keep batteries out of reach of children.
Should a child swallow a battery, seek immediate medical attention.
Keep batteries out of reach of household pets and other animals.
The batteries could leak, overheat, rupture, or catch fire if bitten, chewed, or
otherwise damaged by animals.
Do not immerse batteries in water or expose to rain.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in fire or product
malfunction. Immediately dry the product with a towel or similar object
should it become wet.
Discontinue use immediately should you notice any changes in the
batteries, such as discoloration or deformation. Cease charging
EN-EL18d rechargeable batteries if they do not charge in the specified
period of time.
Failure to observe these precautions could result in the batteries leaking,
overheating, rupturing, or catching fire.
When batteries are no longer needed, insulate the terminals with tape.
Overheating, rupture, or fire may result should metal objects come into
contact with the terminals.
If battery liquid comes into contact with a person's skin or clothing,
immediately rinse the affected area with plenty of clean water.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in skin irritation.
30
Notices
•
No part of the documentation included with this product may be
reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or
translated into any language in any form, by any means, without Nikon’s
prior written permission.
•
Nikon reserves the right to change the appearance and specifications of
the hardware and software described in this documentation at any time
and without prior notice.
•
Nikon will not be held liable for any damages resulting from the use of this
product.
•
While every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this
documentation is accurate and complete, we would appreciate it were you
to bring any errors or omissions to the attention of the Nikon
representative in your area (address provided separately).
●
Notice Concerning Prohibition of Copying or Reproduction
Note that simply being in possession of material that has been digitally
copied or reproduced by means of a scanner, digital camera, or other device
may be punishable by law.
•
Items prohibited by law from being copied or reproduced
Do not copy or reproduce paper money, coins, securities, government
bonds, or local government bonds, even if such copies or reproductions
are stamped “Sample”.
The copying or reproduction of paper money, coins, or securities which are
circulated in a foreign country is prohibited.
Unless the prior permission of the government has been obtained, the
copying or reproduction of unused postage stamps or post cards issued by
the government is prohibited.
The copying or reproduction of stamps issued by the government and of
certified documents stipulated by law is prohibited.
Notices
31
Notices
•
Cautions on certain copies and reproductions
The government has issued cautions on copies or reproductions of
securities issued by private companies (shares, bills, checks, gift certificates,
etc.), commuter passes, or coupon tickets, except when a minimum of
necessary copies are to be provided for business use by a company. Also,
do not copy or reproduce passports issued by the government, licenses
issued by public agencies and private groups, ID cards, and tickets, such as
passes and meal coupons.
•
Comply with copyright notices
Under copyright law, photographs or recordings of copyrighted works
made with the camera cannot be used without the permission of the
copyright holder. Exceptions apply to personal use, but note that even
personal use may be restricted in the case of photographs or recordings of
exhibits or live performances.
●
Use Only Nikon Brand Electronic Accessories
Nikon cameras are designed to the highest standards and include complex
electronic circuitry. Only Nikon brand electronic accessories (including
lenses, chargers, batteries, AC adapters, and flash accessories) certified by
Nikon specifically for use with this Nikon digital camera are engineered and
proven to operate within the operational and safety requirements of this
electronic circuitry.
The use of non-Nikon electronic accessories could damage the
camera and may void your Nikon warranty. The use of
third-party rechargeable Li-ion batteries not bearing the Nikon
holographic seal shown at right could interfere with normal operation of the
camera or result in the batteries overheating, igniting, rupturing, or leaking.
For more information about Nikon brand accessories, contact a local
authorized Nikon dealer.
32
Notices
●
Memory Cards
•
Memory cards may be hot after use. Observe due caution when removing
memory cards from the camera.
•
Do not perform the following operations during formatting or while data
are being recorded, deleted, or copied to a computer or other device.
Failure to observe these precautions could result in loss of data or in
damage to the camera or card.
- Do not remove or insert memory cards.
- Do not turn the camera off.
- Do not remove the battery.
- Do not disconnect AC adapters.
•
Do not touch the card terminals with your fingers or metal objects.
•
Do not use excessive force when handling memory cards. Failure to
observe this precaution could damage the card.
•
Do not bend or drop memory cards or subject them to strong physical
shocks.
•
Do not expose memory cards to water, heat, or direct sunlight.
•
Do not format memory cards in a computer.
33
Notices
D
Before Taking Important Pictures
Before taking pictures on important occasions (such as at weddings or
before taking the camera on a trip), take a test shot to ensure that the camera
is functioning normally. Nikon will not be held liable for damages or lost
profits that may result from product malfunction.
D
Life-Long Learning
As part of Nikon’s “Life-Long Learning” commitment to ongoing product
support and education, continually-updated information is available on-line
at the following sites:
•
For users in the U.S.A.: https://www.nikonusa.com/
•
For users in Europe: https://www.europe-nikon.com/support/
•
For users in Asia, Oceania, the Middle East, and Africa:
https://www.nikon-asia.com/
Visit these sites to keep up-to-date with the latest product information, tips,
answers to frequently-asked questions (FAQs), and general advice on digital
imaging and photography. Additional information may be available from the
Nikon representative in your area. See the following URL for contact
information: https://imaging.nikon.com/
34
Parts of the Camera
Getting to Know the Camera
and Its Menus
Camera Body
Parts of the Camera
5
9
7
6
8
12
8
1314 11 10
412 3
1
Release mode dial lock release
(
0
145)
2
BKT button (
0
177)
3
c
button (
0
429)
4
Stereo microphone (for videos;
0
93)
5
Video-record button (
0
93)
6
S
(
Q
) button (
0
154)
7
E
button (
0
143)
8
Eyelet for camera strap (
0
71)
9
E
(focal plane mark;
0
131)
10
Control panel (
0
41, 813)
11
GNSS antenna (
0
204)
12
Accessory shoe (for optional
flash unit;
0
423, 816)
13
I
button (
0
132)
14
c
button (
0
145)
35
Parts of the Camera
21
12 3 4
10 912 11
7
5
6
8
15
16
17
13
14
18
19
20
1
Power switch (
0
85, 88)
2
Shutter-release button (
0
88)
3
AF-assist illuminator (
0
90, 609)
Red-eye reduction lamp
(
0
429)
Self-timer lamp (
0
152)
4
M
button (
0
50, 713)
5
Flash sync terminal cover
6
Ten-pin remote terminal cover
7
Cover for microphone,
headphone, and Ethernet
connectors
8
Cover for USB and HDMI
connectors
9
Focus-mode button (
0
110)
10
Battery chamber cover latch
(
0
77)
11
Battery chamber cover (
0
77)
12
Lens mounting mark (
0
83)
13
Flash sync terminal (
0
425)
14
Ten-pin remote terminal
15
Charge lamp (
0
75)
16
Ethernet connector (
0
346,
382)
17
Connector for external
microphone (
0
845)
18
Headphone connector (
0
590)
19
HDMI connector (
0
300)
20
USB connector (
0
323, 744)
21
Body cap (
0
83)
36
Parts of the Camera
23451
14
6
7
13
9
11
12
10
8
1
Microphone (for voice memos;
0
295)
2
U
button (
0
158)
3
T
button (
0
105)
4
b
button (
0
295)
5
Network indicator (
0
360, 395)
6
Monitor (
0
53, 124)
7
Speaker (
0
99)
8
Eyepiece release (
0
843)
9
O
(
Q
) button (
0
101, 259)
10
g
(Fn4) button (
0
192, 249)
11
Release mode dial (
0
145)
12
Rubber eyecup (
0
843)
13
Viewfinder (
0
46)
14
Eye sensor (
0
50)
37
Parts of the Camera
17 1618
7
6
8
9
12
11
13
14
10
15
3
2
145
1
Diopter adjustment control
(
0
52)
2
DISP button (
0
44, 48)
3
Photo/video selector (
0
88, 93)
4
AF-ON button (
0
128)
5
Sub-selector (
0
123, 126, 141)
6
Main command dial (
0
666)
7
i
button (
0
65, 241)
8
J
button (
0
60)
9
Multi selector (
0
60)
10
X
button (
0
129, 228, 247)
11
G
button (
0
59, 464)
12
K
button (
0
97, 227)
13
W
(
Q
) button (
0
63, 228, 247)
14
AF-ON button for vertical
shooting (
0
128)
15
Main command dial for vertical
shooting (
0
666)
16
Multi selector for vertical
shooting (
0
123)
17
Memory card access lamp
(
0
91, 94)
18
i
button for vertical shooting
(
0
65, 241)
38
Parts of the Camera
14
13
12
11
10
17
16
15
9
3
2
4
5
7
8
6
1
1
Lens release button (
0
84)
2
Lens mount (
0
83, 131)
3
CPU contacts
4
Image sensor (
0
858)
5
Fn3 button
6
Tripod socket
7
Sub-command dial for vertical
shooting (
0
666)
8
Shutter-release button lock for
vertical shooting (
0
92)
9
Fn button for vertical shooting
(
0
143)
10
Security slot (for anti-theft
cable;
0
40)
11
S
button for vertical
shooting (
0
154)
12
Shutter-release button for
vertical shooting
13
Memory card slot cover latch
(
0
81)
14
Memory card slot cover (
0
82)
15
Fn2 button (
0
102)
16
Fn1 button (
0
493)
17
Sub-command dial (
0
666)
39
Parts of the Camera
D
Do Not Touch the Image Sensor or Sensor Shield
Under no circumstances should you poke or exert pressure on the image
sensor or sensor shield (
0
719) or subject them to powerful air currents from
a blower. Failure to observe this precaution could scratch or otherwise
damage the sensor or shield. For information on cleaning the image sensor,
see “Image Sensor Cleaning” (
0
858).
A
Notes on the Monitor
The angle of the monitor can be adjusted.
A
Product Serial Number
The serial number for this product can be found
by opening the monitor.
40
Parts of the Camera
A
The GNSS Antenna
If possible, stay in the open when using location data services. Keep the
antenna pointed to the sky for best reception.
A
The LCD Illuminator
Rotating the power switch to
D
activates the backlights for the
buttons and control panels (LCD
illuminator). The backlights will
remain lit for a few seconds after the
power switch is released. The
backlights turn off when the switch
is rotated to
D
a second time or the shutter is released. Activating the button
backlight makes the camera easier to use in the dark.
A
The Security Slot
The security slot serves as an attachment point
for third-party anti-theft cables. It is compatible
and intended for use with Kensington security
cable locks. For more information, see the
documentation provided with the security cable
lock.
41
Parts of the Camera
The Control Panel
The control panel lights when the camera is on. At default settings, the
following indicators are displayed. For more information, see “Camera
Displays” (
0
802) in “Technical Notes”.
213
12
13
14
1011 8 7
4
5
6
9
1
Shooting mode (
0
132)
2
Shutter speed (
0
133, 135)
3
Aperture (
0
134, 135)
4
Battery indicator (
0
80)
5
Exposure indicator
Exposure (
0
136)
Exposure compensation
(
0
143)
6
ISO sensitivity (
0
154)
7
Number of exposures
remaining (
0
81, 887)
Available recording time (
0
93)
8
ISO sensitivity indicator (
0
154)
Auto ISO sensitivity indicator
(
0
156)
9
Release mode (
0
145)
10
Memory card icon (Slot 2;
0
503)
11
Memory card icon (Slot 1;
0
503)
12
AF-area mode indicator (
0
113)
13
Focus mode (
0
110)
14
Shooting menu bank (
0
493)
42
Parts of the Camera
The Monitor
At default settings, the following indicators appear in the monitor. For
more information, see “Camera Displays” (
0
802) in “Technical Notes”.
❚❚
Photo Mode
1
10
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9
11
1
Shooting mode (
0
132)
2
Release mode (
0
145)
3
Focus mode (
0
123)
4
AF-area mode (
0
113)
5
t
icon (
0
87)
6
White balance (
0
158)
7
Active D-Lighting (
0
512)
8
Picture Control (
0
192)
9
Image area (
0
102)
10
Image size (
0
108)
11
Image quality (
0
105)
43
Parts of the Camera
4
3
11
57
6
9
8
13
12
10
1
2
1
Exposure indicator
Exposure (
0
136)
Exposure compensation
(
0
143)
2
i
icon (
0
65, 241)
3
Battery indicator (
0
80)
4
Number of exposures
remaining (
0
81, 887)
5
ISO sensitivity (
0
154)
6
ISO sensitivity indicator (
0
154)
Auto ISO sensitivity indicator
(
0
156)
7
Aperture (
0
134, 135)
8
Shutter speed (
0
133, 135)
9
Metering (
0
520)
10
Touch shooting (
0
124)
11
Vibration reduction indicator
(
0
526)
12
Focus point (
0
123)
13
View mode (photo live view;
0
624)
44
Parts of the Camera
A
Using the Monitor with the Camera in “Tall” Orientation
When the camera is rotated to take pictures in “tall”
(portrait) orientation, the display in the monitor rotates to
match (photo mode only).
A
Choosing a Display
Press the DISP button to cycle the shooting
display. Choose from up to five displays, each
with a customizable selection of icons and
indicators. The items displayed can be selected
using Custom Setting d17 [Custom monitor
shooting display] (
0
634).
46
Parts of the Camera
The Viewfinder
At default settings, the following indicators appear in the viewfinder.
For more information, see “Camera Displays” (
0
802) in “Technical
Notes”.
❚❚
Photo Mode
2 4 5 78 961 3 1110
1
View mode (photo live view;
0
624)
2
t
icon (
0
87)
3
Release mode (
0
145)
4
Focus mode (
0
110)
5
AF-area mode (
0
113)
6
White balance (
0
158)
7
Active D-Lighting (
0
512)
8
Picture Control (
0
192)
9
Image quality (
0
105)
10
Image size (
0
108)
11
Image area (
0
102)
47
Parts of the Camera
3 25 4910 78 6 1
11
1
Battery indicator (
0
80)
2
Number of exposures
remaining (
0
81, 887)
3
ISO sensitivity (
0
154)
4
ISO sensitivity indicator (
0
154)
Auto ISO sensitivity indicator
(
0
156)
5
Exposure indicator
Exposure (
0
136)
Exposure compensation
(
0
143)
6
Aperture (
0
134)
7
Shutter speed (
0
133, 135)
8
Shooting mode (
0
132)
9
Vibration reduction (
0
526)
10
Metering (
0
520)
11
Focus point (
0
123)
48
Parts of the Camera
A
Using the Viewfinder with the Camera in “Tall” Orientation
When the camera is rotated to take pictures in “tall”
(portrait) orientation, the display in the viewfinder
rotates to match (photo mode only).
A
Choosing a Display
Press the DISP button to cycle the shooting
display. Choose from up to four displays, each
with a customizable selection of icons and
indicators. The items displayed can be selected
using Custom Setting d18 [Custom viewfinder
shooting display] (
0
636).
50
Parts of the Camera
❚❚
The Monitor Mode Button and the Eye Sensor
Placing your eye to the viewfinder activates
the eye sensor, switching the display from the
monitor to the viewfinder. Note that the eye
sensor will also respond to other objects, such
as your fingers.
•
The viewfinder can be used for menus and
playback if desired.
•
Press the
M
(monitor mode) button to cycle
between viewfinder and monitor displays.
51
Parts of the Camera
•
Press the
M
button to cycle through the displays as follows.
[Automatic display switch]: The camera automatically
switches between the viewfinder and monitor displays
based on information from the eye sensor.
[Viewfinder only]: The monitor remains blank. The
viewfinder is used for shooting, menus, and playback.
[Monitor only]: The monitor is used for shooting, menus,
and playback. The viewfinder display will remain blank even
if you put your eye to the viewfinder.
[Prioritize viewfinder]: The camera functions in a manner
similar to existing digital SLR cameras.
During photo mode, placing your eye to the viewfinder
turns the viewfinder on; the monitor remains off after you
take your eye away.
52
Parts of the Camera
D
The Diopter Adjustment Control
•
The viewfinder can be focused by lifting and
rotating the diopter adjustment control.
•
Be careful not to put your fingers or fingernails
in your eye.
•
After adjusting diopter, push the diopter
adjustment control back into its original
position.
D
Tilting the Monitor
Putting your eye to the camera when the monitor is tilted will not trigger the
viewfinder if both the following conditions are met:
•
[Automatic display switch] or [Prioritize viewfinder] is selected for
monitor mode, and
•
a menu, picture, or other display currently appears in the monitor.
A
Extended Use
When using the viewfinder for extended periods, you can select [Adjust for
ease of viewing] for Custom Setting d8 [View mode (photo Lv)] to ensure
that viewfinder brightness and hue are adjusted for ease of viewing.
A
Limit Monitor Mode Selection
You can limit the choice of monitor modes available using the [Limit
monitor mode selection] item in the setup menu.
53
Parts of the Camera
Touch Controls
The touch-sensitive monitor offers a variety of
controls that can be operated by touching the
display with your fingers. During viewfinder
photography, touch controls are disabled and
cannot be used for focus or the like.
❚❚
Focusing and Releasing the Shutter
•
Touch the monitor to focus on the selected
point (touch AF).
•
In photo mode, the shutter will be released
when you lift your finger from the display
(touch shutter).
•
Touch shutter/AF settings can be adjusted
by tapping the
W
icon (
0
124).
❚❚
Adjusting Settings
•
Tap highlighted settings in the display.
•
You can then choose the desired option by
tapping icons or sliders.
54
Parts of the Camera
•
Tap
Z
or press
J
to select the chosen
option and return to the previous display.
❚❚
Playback
•
Flick left or right to view other pictures
during full-frame playback.
•
In full-frame playback, touching the bottom of the display brings up a
frame-advance bar. Slide your finger left or right over the bar to scroll
rapidly to other pictures.
•
To zoom in on a picture displayed during
full-frame playback, use a stretch gesture or
give the display two quick taps. You can
adjust the zoom ratio using stretch gestures
to zoom in and pinch gestures to zoom out.
55
Parts of the Camera
•
Use slide gestures to view other parts of the picture during zoom.
•
Giving the display two quick taps while zoom is in effect cancels zoom.
•
To “zoom out” to a thumbnail view, use a
pinch gesture during full-frame playback.
Use pinch and stretch to choose the number
of pictures displayed from 4, 9, and 72
frames.
❚❚
Viewing Videos
•
Videos are indicated by a
1
icon; to start
playback, tap the on-screen guide.
•
Tap the display to pause. Tap again to
resume.
•
Tap
Z
to exit to full-frame playback.
56
Parts of the Camera
❚❚
The
i
Menu
•
Tap the
i
icon to display the
i
menu
during shooting (
0
65).
•
Tap items to view and change options.
•
You can choose the items displayed in the
i
menu (
0
70).
❚❚
Text Entry
•
When a keyboard is displayed, you can enter text by tapping the keys.
•
To position the cursor, tap
e
or
f
or tap directly in the text display
area.
•
To cycle through the upper- and lower-case and symbol keyboards,
tap the keyboard selection button.
1
2
3
1
Text display area
2
Keyboard area
3
Keyboard selection
57
Parts of the Camera
❚❚
Navigating the Menus
•
Slide up or down to scroll.
•
Tap a menu icon to choose a menu.
•
Tap menu items to display options. You
can then choose the desired option by
tapping icons or sliders.
•
To exit without changing settings, tap
Z
.
58
Parts of the Camera
D
Cautions: The Touch Screen
•
The touch screen responds to static electricity. It may not respond when
touched with fingernails or gloved hands. For improved response when
using the touch screen with gloves, select [ON] for [Touch controls]>
[Glove mode] in the setup menu.
•
Do not touch the screen with sharp objects.
•
Do not use excessive force.
•
The screen may not respond when covered with third-party protective
films.
•
The screen may not respond when touched simultaneously in multiple
locations.
A
Enabling or Disabling Touch Controls
Touch controls can be enabled or disabled using the [Touch controls] item
in the setup menu.
59
The Menus
The
G
Button
Press the
G
button to view the menus.
* You can choose the menu displayed. The default is [MY MENU].
The Menus
9
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
C
[PHOTO SHOOTING MENU]
(
0
491)
2
1
[VIDEO RECORDING MENU]
(
0
576)
3
A
[CUSTOM SETTINGS MENU]
(
0
593)
4
D
[PLAYBACK MENU] (
0
692)
5
B
[SETUP MENU] (
0
706)
6
F
[NETWORK MENU] (
0
755)
7
O
[MY MENU]/
m
[RECENT SETTINGS]
*
(
0
775)
8
d
(help) icon (
0
63)
9
Current settings
60
The Menus
❚❚
Using the Menus
You can navigate the menus using the multi selector and
J
button.
1
Highlight the icon for the current menu.
Press
4
to place the cursor in the menu-selection area.
2
Select a menu.
Press
1
or
3
to select the desired menu.
1
Move cursor up
2
Select the highlighted item
3
Display sub-menu, select
highlighted item, or move
cursor right
4
Move cursor down
5
Cancel and return to previous
menu, or move cursor left
61
The Menus
3
Position the cursor in the selected menu.
Press
2
to position the cursor in the selected menu.
4
Highlight a menu item.
Press
1
or
3
to highlight a menu item.
5
Display options.
Press
2
to display options for the selected menu item.
62
The Menus
6
Highlight an option.
Press
1
or
3
to highlight an option.
7
Select the highlighted option.
•
Press
J
to save changes and exit.
•
To exit without making a selection, press
the
G
button.
•
To exit the menus and return to shooting mode, press the shutter-
release button halfway.
D
Grayed-Out Items
•
Some items and menu options may be
unavailable depending on camera status.
Unavailable items are displayed in gray.
•
In some cases, pressing
J
when a grayed-out
item is highlighted will display a message
explaining why the item is unavailable.
63
The Menus
A
ON/OFF Only Items
If the only options available for the current item
are [ON] and [OFF], you can switch from [ON] to
[OFF] or vice versa simply by pressing
J
, pressing
the multi selector right (
2
), or tapping the item
in the display.
A
The
d
(Help) Icon
•
Where available, a description of the currently-selected item can be viewed
by pressing the
W
(
Q
) button.
•
Press
1
or
3
to scroll.
•
Press
W
(
Q
) again to return to the menus.
A
Touch Controls
You can also navigate the menus using touch controls (
0
53).
64
The Menus
A
Text Entry
A keyboard is displayed when text entry is required, for example if you are
called on to enter a file name or the like. Enter text as described below.
•
Enter characters at the current cursor position by highlighting them with
the multi selector arrow keys and then pressing
J
.
•
To move the cursor left or right in the text display area, rotate the main
command dial.
•
To cycle through the upper- and lower-case and symbol keyboards,
highlight the keyboard selection icon and press
J
. The keyboard selection
icon may not be available in some cases.
•
If a character is entered when the text display area is full, the rightmost
character will be deleted.
•
To delete the character under the cursor, press the
O
(
Q
) button.
•
To complete entry, press
X
.
•
To exit without completing text entry, press
G
.
1
2
3
1
Text display area
2
Keyboard area
3
Keyboard selection
65
The Menus
The
i
Button (the
i
Menu)
For quick access to frequently-used settings, press the
i
button or tap
the
i
icon to view the
i
menu.
•
Different menus are displayed in photo and
video modes.
•
Options can be viewed by tapping items in
the display or by highlighting items and
pressing
J
; selections can then be made
using the multi selector.
•
Items for which the camera displays an on-
screen guide can be adjusted by
highlighting them in the
i
menu and
rotating a command dial. In some cases,
adjustments can be made using both the
main and sub-command dials.
66
The Menus
D
Grayed-Out Items
Some items and menu options may be
unavailable depending on camera status.
Unavailable items are displayed in gray.
A
Using the
i
Menu with the Camera in “Tall” Orientation
When the camera is rotated to take pictures in “tall”
(portrait) orientation, the
i
menu for photo mode
rotates to match.
67
The Menus
❚❚
The Still Photography
i
Menu
Pressing the
i
button during still photography displays the items listed
below. Highlight the desired item using the multi selector and press
J
to view options.
123456
87 9 10 11 12
1
Set Picture Control (
0
192)
2
White balance (
0
158)
3
Image quality (
0
105)
4
Image size (
0
108)
5
AF-area mode/subj. detection
(
0
113)
6
Focus mode (
0
110)
7
Metering (
0
520)
8
Vibration reduction (
0
526)
9
Shooting menu bank (
0
493)
10
Custom controls (shooting)
(
0
597)
11
Airplane mode (
0
756)
12
View memory card info (
0
645)
68
The Menus
❚❚
The Video
i
Menu
Pressing the
i
button during video recording displays the items listed
below. Highlight the desired item using the multi selector and press
J
to view options.
123456
87 9 10 11 12
1
Set Picture Control (
0
192)
2
White balance (
0
158)
3
Frame size/frame rate (
0
216)
4
Microphone sensitivity (
0
588)
5
AF-area mode/subj. detection
(
0
113)
6
Focus mode (
0
110)
7
Electronic VR (
0
587)
8
Vibration reduction (
0
587)
9
Shooting menu bank (
0
493)
10
Custom controls (
0
597)
11
Airplane mode (
0
756)
12
Destination (
0
578)
69
The Menus
❚❚
The Playback
i
Menu
Pressing the
i
button during playback displays a context-sensitive
i
menu of playback options.
Photos
Videos Videos (playback paused)
70
The Menus
❚❚
Customizing the
i
Menu
The items displayed in the
i
menu during shooting can be chosen using
Custom Setting f1 or g1 [Customize
i
menu].
1
Highlight Custom Setting f1 or g1
[Customize
i
menu] and press
J
.
See “The
G
Button” (
0
59) for
information on using the menus.
2
Highlight the position you want to
change and press
J
.
A list of the items available for the
selected position will be displayed.
3
Highlight the desired item and press
J
.
•
The item will be assigned to the selected
position and the options shown in Step
2 will be displayed.
•
Repeat Steps 2 and 3 as desired.
4
Press the
G
button.
Changes will be saved and the Custom Settings menu will be
displayed.
71
Attaching the Strap
First Steps
To attach a strap (whether the supplied strap or one that has been
purchased separately):
Attaching the Strap
72
Charging the Battery
Charge the supplied EN-EL18d battery before use.
D
Caution: The Battery and Charger
Read and follow the warnings and cautions in “For Your Safety” (
0
25) and
“Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions” (
0
862).
The Battery Charger
•
Before charging the battery, connect the EH-7P charging AC adapter
to the MH-33 battery charger. Choose a location where the charger
will remain stable and free from vibration during use.
Charging the Battery
6h
4h
2
h
100
80
50
CHA
RGE %
CALI
BR
ATION
CHARGE %
6h
4h
2h
100
80
50
1
Signal contacts
2
Charge lamps (green)
73
Charging the Battery
•
To charge the battery, plug the charging AC adapter in to a household
power outlet. The charge lamps flash while charging is in progress and
stop flashing as charging completes.
•
Insert the battery (terminals first), aligning the end of the battery with
the guide and then sliding the battery in the direction indicated until
it clicks into place.
•
An exhausted battery will fully charge in about 4 hours.
•
As charging progresses, the charge lamps will light one at a time until
charging is complete and all three lamps are lit.
•
Battery status is shown by the charge lamps:
Charge lamps
Charge state
<50% ≥50%, <80%
≥80%,
<100%
100%
100%
I
(off)
I
(off)
H
(flashes)
K
(on)
80%
I
(off)
H
(flashes)
K
(on)
K
(on)
50%
H
(flashes)
K
(on)
K
(on)
K
(on)
74
Charging the Battery
D
Caution: Charging EN-EL18d Batteries
EN-EL18d rechargeable Li-ion batteries are not compatible with MH-26a or
MH-26 battery chargers. Be sure to use the MH-33 when charging EN-EL18d
batteries via a charger.
D
If the Charge Lamps Flash Rapidly
If the charge lamps flash rapidly (8 times a second):
•
The battery was not inserted correctly: Unplug the charger and remove
and reinsert the battery.
•
The ambient temperature is too hot or too cold: Use the battery charger
at temperatures within the designated temperature range (0–40 °C/+32–
104 °F).
If the problem persists, unplug the charger and end charging. Bring the
battery and charger to a Nikon-authorized service representative.
75
Charging the Battery
The Charging AC Adapter: Charging
When inserted in the camera, the battery can be charged using the
supplied EH-7P charging AC adapter.
•
After confirming that the camera is off, connect the charging AC
adapter (
q
) and plug the adapter in. The battery will charge while the
camera is off. Keep the plug straight during insertion and removal.
•
The camera charge lamp (
w
) lights amber while charging is in
progress. The lamp turns off when charging is complete.
•
An exhausted battery will fully charge in about 3 hours and
40 minutes.
•
When charging is complete, unplug the charging AC adapter and
disconnect it from the camera.
76
Charging the Battery
D
Caution: Charging EN-EL18a/EN-EL18 Batteries
The charging AC adapter cannot be used to charge EN-EL18a or EN-EL18
rechargeable Li-ion batteries. Use an MH-26a battery charger.
D
Caution: The Charging AC Adapter
•
If the battery cannot be charged using the charging AC adapter, for
example because the battery is not compatible or the temperature of the
camera is elevated, the charge lamp will flash rapidly for about 30 seconds
and then turn off. If the charge lamp is off and you did not observe the
battery charging, turn the camera on and check the battery level.
•
Batteries with a “4” (
l
) showing for [Battery info] > [Battery age] in the
setup menu cannot be charged.
A
The Charging AC Adapter: Power Delivery
•
If [ON] is selected for [USB power delivery] in the setup menu, the
charging AC adapter will supply power to the camera when the camera is
on.
•
The battery will not charge while the camera is powered by an outside
power source.
•
For more information, see “‘Power Delivery’ Versus ‘Charging’” (
0
745).
A
Computer USB Power Delivery and Battery Charging
•
Computers will supply current to power the camera or charge the battery
only when connected via a UC-E25 USB cable (available separately;
0
843).
The supplied USB cable cannot be used for this purpose.
•
Depending on the model and product specifications, some computers will
not supply current to power the camera or charge the battery.
77
Inserting the Battery
Turn the camera off before inserting or removing the battery.
1
Remove the BL-7 battery chamber
cover.
Lift the battery chamber cover latch, turn
it to the open (
A
) position (
q
) and remove
the battery chamber cover (
w
).
2
Attach the cover to the battery.
•
If the battery release is positioned so
that the arrow (
H
) is visible, slide the
battery release to cover the arrow (
H
).
•
Insert the two projections on the battery
into the matching slots in the cover as
shown. The battery release will slide
aside to completely reveal the arrow
(
H
).
Inserting the Battery
78
Inserting the Battery
3
Insert the battery.
Insert the battery fully and securely as
shown.
4
Latch the cover.
•
Rotate the battery chamber cover latch to the closed position (
q
)
and fold it down as shown (
w
).
•
Be sure the cover is securely latched to prevent the battery from
becoming dislodged during operation.
79
Inserting the Battery
Removing the Battery
Before removing the battery, turn the camera
off, lift the battery chamber cover latch, and
turn it to the open (
A
) position.
D
Removing the Battery Chamber Cover
To unlatch the battery chamber cover so that it can be removed from the
battery, slide the battery release in the direction indicated by the arrow (
H
)
until it stops.
D
The Battery Chamber Cover
•
Use BL-7 battery chamber covers only; other battery chamber covers cannot be
used with this camera.
•
You can leave the cover attached when charging batteries in a charger.
•
To prevent dust accumulating inside the battery chamber, replace the
battery chamber cover on the camera when the battery is not inserted.
80
Inserting the Battery
Battery Level
•
The battery level is shown in the shooting display and control panel
while the camera is on.
•
The battery level display changes as the battery level diminishes, from
L
through
K
,
J
,
I
, and
H
. When the battery level falls to
H
,
suspend shooting and charge the battery or ready a spare battery.
•
If the message [Shutter release disabled. Recharge battery.] is
displayed, charge or exchange the battery.
D
The Standby Timer
The camera uses a standby timer to help reduce the drain on the battery. If
no operations are performed for about 30 seconds, the standby timer will
expire and the monitor, viewfinder, and control panel will turn off. A few
seconds prior to turning off, the monitor and viewfinder will dim. They can
be reactivated by pressing the shutter-release button halfway. The length of
time before the standby timer expires automatically can be selected using
Custom Setting c3 [Power off delay] > [Standby timer].
Monitor Viewfinder Control panel
81
Inserting Memory Cards
The camera is equipped with two memory card slots (Slots 1 and 2),
allowing simultaneous use of two memory cards.
•
Turn the camera off before inserting or removing memory cards.
•
Holding the memory card in the orientation shown, slide it straight
into the slot until it clicks into place.
A
Number of Exposures Remaining
•
When the camera is on, the shooting display and control panel show the
number of photographs that can be taken at current settings.
•
Values over 1000 are rounded down to the
nearest hundred. For example, values between
8000 and 8099 are shown as 8.0 k.
•
If no memory cards are inserted, an [–E–]
indicator will be displayed.
Inserting Memory Cards
128
GB
82
Inserting Memory Cards
Removing Memory Cards
After confirming that the memory card access
lamp is off, turn the camera off, open the
memory card slot cover, and press the card in
to eject it (
q
). The card can then be removed
by hand (
w
).
D
Memory Card High-Temperature Warning
As indicated on the inside of the memory card
slot cover, memory cards inserted in the camera
may become hot. Do not attempt to remove
memory cards if a high-temperature warning
appears in the shooting display; instead, wait for
the camera to cool and the warning to clear from
the display.
A
Slot Icons
The location of the current picture is shown by an
icon at the bottom left corner of the playback
display.
128
GB
83
Attaching a Lens
•
The camera can be used with Z mount lenses. The lens generally used
in this document for illustrative purposes is a NIKKOR Z 50mm f/1.8 S.
•
Be careful to prevent dust entering the camera.
•
Confirm that the camera is off before attaching the lens.
- Remove the camera body cap (
q
,
w
) and rear lens cap (
e
,
r
).
- Align the mounting marks on the camera (
t
) and lens (
y
). Do not
touch the image sensor or lens contacts.
Attaching a Lens
84
Attaching a Lens
- Rotate the lens as shown until it clicks into place (
u
).
•
Remove the front lens cap before taking pictures.
D
F Mount Lenses
•
Be sure to attach the FTZ II/FTZ mount adapter (available separately)
before using F mount lenses (
0
844).
•
Attempting to attach F mount lenses directly to the camera could damage
the lens or image sensor.
Detaching Lenses
•
After turning the camera off, press and hold
the lens release button (
q
) while turning
the lens in the direction shown (
w
).
•
After removing the lens, reattach the lens
caps and camera body cap.
85
Camera Setup
Turn the camera on, choose a language, and set the clock. Before using
the camera for the first time, follow the steps below to choose a
language and time zone and set the clock so that the correct time and
date will be recorded with any pictures you take.
1
Press
G
, and in the setup menu
highlight [Language] and press
2
.
For information on using the menus, see
“Using the Menus” (
0
60).
2
Select a language.
Press
1
or
3
to highlight the desired language and press
J
(the
languages available vary with the country or region in which the
camera was originally purchased).
3
Highlight [Time zone and date] and
press
2
.
Camera Setup
86
Camera Setup
4
Choose a time zone.
•
Select [Time zone] in the [Time zone
and date] display.
•
The display lists selected cities in the
chosen zone and the difference
between the time in the chosen zone
and UTC.
•
Highlight a time zone in the [Time zone] display and press
J
.
5
Turn daylight saving time on or off.
•
Select [Daylight saving time] in the
[Time zone and date] display.
•
Select [ON] (daylight saving time on) or
[OFF] (daylight saving time off).
•
Selecting [ON] advances the clock one
hour; to undo the effect, select [OFF].
6
Set the clock.
•
Select [Date and time] in the [Time
zone and date] display.
•
Press
J
after using the multi selector to
set the clock to the date and time in the
selected time zone in the [Date and
time] display (note that the camera uses a 24-hour clock).
87
Camera Setup
7
Choose a date format.
•
Select [Date format] in the [Time zone
and date] display.
•
Highlight the desired date (year, month,
and day) display order and press
J
.
8
Exit the menus.
Lightly press the shutter-release button
halfway to exit to shooting mode.
D
The
t
Icon
A flashing
t
icon in the shooting display indicates that the camera clock has
been reset. The date and time recorded with new photographs will not be
correct; use the [Time zone and date] > [Date and time] option in the setup
menu to set the clock to the correct time and date. The camera clock is
powered by an independent clock battery. The clock battery charges when
the main battery is inserted in the camera. It takes about 2 days to charge.
Once charged, it will power the clock for about a month.
88
Taking Photographs
Basic Photography and
Playback
The basic steps involved in taking photographs are described below.
D
Lenses with Retractable Barrels
Lenses with retractable barrels must be extended
before use. Rotate the zoom ring as shown until
the lens clicks into the extended position.
1
Select photo mode by rotating the
photo/video selector to
C
.
Taking Photographs
89
Taking Photographs
2
Ready the camera.
Holding the handgrip in your right hand and cradling the camera
body or lens with your left, bring your elbows in against the sides of
your chest.
3
Frame the photograph.
Position the main subject near the center
of the frame.
Landscape (wide)
orientation
Portrait (tall) orientation
90
Taking Photographs
4
To focus, press the shutter-release
button halfway (i.e., lightly press the
shutter-release button, stopping when
it is pressed halfway).
•
The focus point will be displayed in
green when the camera focuses. If the
camera is unable to focus, the focus
point will flash red.
•
The AF-assist illuminator may light to
assist the focus operation if the subject
is poorly lit.
•
You can also focus by pressing the AF-ON button.
D
The AF-Assist Illuminator
Do not obstruct the AF-assist illuminator while it is lit.
91
Taking Photographs
5
Without lifting your finger from the
shutter-release button, press the
button the rest of the way down to take
the picture.
D
The Memory Card Access Lamp
The memory card access lamp will light while the
photograph is being recorded. Do not remove the
memory card or battery.
A
The Touch Shutter
You can also take a photograph by touching the
monitor. Touch your subject to focus and lift your
finger to release the shutter (
0
124).
92
Taking Photographs
A
Framing Photos in Portrait (“Tall”) Orientation
The camera is equipped with controls for use in
portrait (“tall”) orientation, including vertical
shutter-release,
S
, Fn, AF-ON, and
i
buttons,
main and sub-command dials, and a multi
selector.
•
Rotate the vertical shooting
shutter-release button lock to L to
avoid accidentally operating these
controls when the camera is in
landscape (“wide”) orientation.
A
Using Zoom in Photo Mode
To zoom in on the display in photo mode (to a maximum of approximately
16×), press the
X
button.
•
Use the
X
and
W
(
Q
) buttons to zoom in and out.
•
A navigation window showing the area currently visible will appear at the
bottom right corner of the display.
•
Use the multi selector to scroll to areas of the frame not visible in the
monitor.
93
Shooting Videos
The basic steps involved in shooting videos are described below.
1
Select video mode by rotating the
photo/video selector to
1
.
Note that optional flash units cannot be
used when the camera is in video mode.
2
Press the video-record button to start
recording.
•
A recording indicator will be displayed in the monitor. The
monitor also shows the time remaining, or in other words the
approximate amount of new footage that can be recorded to the
memory card.
Shooting Videos
123
1
Recording indicator
2
Video recording time (length of
footage recorded)
3
Time remaining
94
Shooting Videos
•
The camera can be refocused during recording by pressing the
AF-ON button.
•
Sound is recorded via the video microphone. Do not cover the
video microphone during recording.
•
You can also focus by tapping your subject in the monitor.
3
Press the video-record button again to end recording.
D
The Memory Card Access Lamp
The memory card access lamp will light while the
video is being recorded. Do not remove the
memory card or battery.
D
The
0
Icon
A
0
icon indicates that videos cannot be recorded.
95
Shooting Videos
D
Cautions: Recording Videos
•
Video recording will end automatically if:
- the maximum length is reached,
- you switch modes using the photo/video selector, or
- the lens is removed.
•
Sounds made by the camera may be audible in footage recorded:
- during autofocus,
- during vibration reduction, or
- when power aperture is used.
D
Memory Card High-Temperature Warning
During video recording, memory cards may
become hot and a high-temperature warning
may appear in the shooting display. Do not
attempt to remove the memory card; instead,
wait for the camera to cool and the warning to
clear from the display.
96
Shooting Videos
D
Cautions: Photography and Video Recording
•
You may notice the following in the shooting display. These phenomena
will also be visible in any photos or footage recorded with the camera:
- flicker or banding in scenes lit by such sources as fluorescent, mercury
vapor, or sodium lamps,
- distortion during motion (individual subjects such as trains or cars
moving at high speed through the frame may be distorted, or the entire
frame may appear distorted when the camera is panned horizontally),
- jagged edges, color fringing, moiré, or bright spots,
- bright regions or bands in scenes lit by flashing signs and other
intermittent light sources or when the subject is briefly illuminated by a
strobe or other bright, momentary light source, or
- flicker when power aperture is used during video recording.
•
Note that noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) and
unexpected colors may appear if you use the
X
button to zoom in on the
view through the lens.
•
When recording, avoid pointing the camera at the sun or other powerful
light sources. Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to
the camera’s internal circuitry.
A
Using Zoom in Video Mode
The
X
button can also be used to zoom in on the display in video mode
(
0
92).
•
Pressing
X
during recording zooms the display in to a 1:1 (100%) zoom
ratio. Press
W
(
Q
) to cancel zoom.
•
When viewing videos, you can zoom in on the current frame when
playback is paused.
97
Playback
Press the
K
button to view photos and
videos in the monitor or viewfinder after
shooting.
•
Press
4
or
2
or flick left or right to view
additional pictures.
•
Videos are indicated by a
1
icon. Tap the
a
icon in the display or press the
J
button to
start playback.
•
To end playback and return to shooting mode, press the shutter-
release button halfway.
Playback
98
Playback
Viewing Videos
The video playback display and controls are described below.
❚❚
The Video Playback Display
During video playback, the display shows the length of the video, the
current playback position, and the other indicators listed below. Your
approximate position in the video can also be ascertained from the
video progress bar.
12
3
4
576
1
1
icon
2
Length
3
a
icon
4
Current position/total length
5
Volume
6
Progress bar
7
Guide
99
Playback
❚❚
Video Playback Controls
The following operations can be performed while playback is in
progress:
Operation Description
Pause Press
3
to pause playback.
Resume
Press the
J
button to resume playback when
playback is paused or during rewind/advance.
Rewind/advance
Press
4
to rewind,
2
to advance. Speed increases
with each press, from 2× to 4× to 8× to 16×.
Start slow-motion
playback
Press
3
while the video is paused to start slow-
motion playback.
Jog rewind/advance
•
Press
4
or
2
while the video is paused to
rewind or advance one frame at a time.
•
Keep
4
or
2
pressed for continuous rewind or
advance.
Skip 10 s
Rotate the sub-command dial one stop to skip
ahead or back 10 s.
Skip 10 frames
Rotate the main command dial one stop to skip
ahead or back 10 frames.
Skip to last or first
frame
•
Keep
4
or
2
pressed to skip respectively to the
first frame or last frame.
•
The first frame is indicated by a
h
in the top
right corner of the display, the last frame by a
i
.
100
Playback
Zoom in
Press
X
to zoom in on the current frame while
playback is paused.
Adjust volume Press
X
to increase volume,
W
(
Q
) to decrease.
Edit video
To display video
i
menu, pause playback and
press the
i
button.
Exit Press
1
or
K
to exit to full-frame playback.
Resume shooting
Press the shutter-release button halfway to return
to shooting mode.
Operation Description
101
Playback
Deleting Unwanted Pictures
Press the
O
(
Q
) button to delete the current
picture. Note that pictures cannot be recovered
once deleted.
•
Display a picture you want to delete and
press the
O
(
Q
) button to display a
confirmation dialog. Press the
O
(
Q
) button
again to delete the picture and return to
playback.
•
To exit without deleting the picture, press
K
.
A
The Playback Menu [Delete] Item
Use [Delete] in the playback menu to:
•
delete multiple pictures,
•
delete all pictures currently rated
d
(candidate for deletion),
•
delete all pictures taken on selected dates, or
•
delete all pictures in selected folders.
102
Image Recording Options (Image Area, Quality, and Size)
Shooting Settings
Adjusting Image Area Settings
At default settings, image area can be selected by holding the Fn2
button and rotating a command dial.
•
Image area settings can be displayed by
selecting [Image area] in the photo
shooting menu.
Image Recording Options (Image Area,
Quality, and Size)
103
Image Recording Options (Image Area, Quality, and Size)
❚❚
Choose Image Area
Choose the image area. The following options are available:
Option Description
c
[FX (36×24)]
Record pictures in FX format with an angle of view
equivalent to a 35 mm format camera.
a
[DX (24×16)]
Pictures are recorded in DX format. To calculate the
approximate focal length of the lens in 35 mm
format, multiply by 1.5.
•
Image-area selection is fixed at [DX (24×16)]
when a DX lens is attached.
m
[1:1 (24×24)] Pictures are recorded with an aspect ratio of 1:1.
Z
[16:9 (36×20)] Pictures are recorded with an aspect ratio of 16:9.
1
FX (36×24)
2
DX (24×16)
3
1:1 (24×24)
4
16:9 (36×20)
104
Image Recording Options (Image Area, Quality, and Size)
❚❚
DX Crop Alert
If [ON] is selected for this option in the
camera menus, the image area icon in the
shooting display will flash when DX (24×16) is
selected.
105
Image Recording Options (Image Area, Quality, and Size)
Adjusting Image Quality
Choose the image quality option used when photographs are recorded.
❚❚
Choosing an Image Quality Option
Hold the
T
button and rotate the main command dial.
A
The Photo Shooting Menu [Image Quality] Option
Image quality can also be adjusted using the [Image quality] item in the
photo shooting menu.
106
Image Recording Options (Image Area, Quality, and Size)
Option Description
[RAW + JPEG fine
m
]
Record two copies of each photo: an NEF (RAW)
picture and a JPEG copy.
•
For the JPEG copy, you can choose from options
prioritizing image quality or file size. Choose
options with a star (“
m
”) to maximize image
quality. Choose options without a star (“
m
”) to
ensure that the JPEG copies all have more or less
the same file size.
•
Only the JPEG copy is displayed during playback. If
only one memory card was inserted in the camera
when the photos were recorded, the NEF (RAW)
copies can only be viewed using a computer.
•
If the photo was recorded with only one memory
card inserted or with [Overflow] or [Backup]
selected for [Role played by card in Slot 2] and
two memory cards inserted, deleting the JPEG
copy on the camera will also delete the NEF (RAW)
picture.
[RAW + JPEG fine]
[RAW + JPEG
normal
m
]
[RAW + JPEG
normal]
[RAW + JPEG
basic
m
]
[RAW + JPEG basic]
[RAW] Record photos in NEF (RAW) format.
[JPEG fine
m
]
Record photos in JPEG format. ”Fine” produces
higher quality pictures than ”normal” and ”normal”
higher quality pictures than “basic”.
•
Choose options with a star (“
m
”) to maximize
image quality. Choose options without a star (“
m
”)
to ensure that the JPEG copies all have more or less
the same file size.
[JPEG fine]
[JPEG normal
m
]
[JPEG normal]
[JPEG basic
m
]
[JPEG basic]
107
Image Recording Options (Image Area, Quality, and Size)
A
NEF (RAW)
•
NEF (RAW) files have the extension “*.nef”.
•
The process of converting NEF (RAW) pictures to other highly-portable
formats such as JPEG is referred to as “NEF (RAW) processing”. During this
process, Picture Controls and settings such as exposure compensation and
white balance can be freely adjusted.
•
The RAW data themselves are unaffected by NEF (RAW) processing and
their quality will remain intact even if the pictures are processed multiple
times at different settings.
•
NEF (RAW) processing can be performed using [Retouch]> [RAW
processing (current picture)] or [RAW processing (multiple pictures)] in
the playback
i
menu or on a computer using Nikon’s NX Studio software.
NX Studio is available free-of-charge from the Nikon Download Center.
A
“NEF (RAW) + JPEG”
If [RAW Slot 1 - JPEG Slot 2] is selected for [Role played by card in Slot 2],
the NEF (RAW) copies will be recorded to the card in Slot 1 and the JPEG
copies to the card in Slot 2 (
0
503).
108
Image Recording Options (Image Area, Quality, and Size)
Choosing an Image Size
Choose a size for new JPEG pictures. The size for JPEG pictures can be
selected from [Large], [Medium], and [Small].
❚❚
Choosing an Image Size
Hold the
T
button and rotate the sub-command dial.
A
The Photo Shooting Menu [Image Size] Item
Image size can also be adjusted using the [Image size] item in the photo
shooting menu.
109
Image Recording Options (Image Area, Quality, and Size)
The number of pixels in the picture varies with the option selected for
image area (
0
102).
A
Print Size
Print size in inches equals image size in pixels divided by printer resolution in
dots per inch (dpi; 1 inch = 2.54 cm).
Image area Image size Size when printed at 300 dpi
[FX (36×24)]
Large
(8256 × 5504 pixels)
Approx. 69.9 × 46.6 cm/
27.5 × 18.3 in.
Medium
(6192 × 4128 pixels)
Approx. 52.4 × 35.0 cm/
20.6 × 13.8 in.
Small
(4128 × 2752 pixels)
Approx. 35.0 × 23.3 cm/
13.8 × 9.2 in.
[DX (24×16)]
Large
(5392 × 3592 pixels)
Approx. 45.7 × 30.4 cm/
18.0 × 12.0 in.
Medium
(4032 × 2688 pixels)
Approx. 34.1 × 22.8 cm/
13.4 × 9.0 in.
Small
(2688 × 1792 pixels)
Approx. 22.8 × 15.2 cm/
9.0 × 6.0 in.
[1:1 (24×24)]
Large
(5504 × 5504 pixels)
Approx. 46.6 × 46.6 cm/
18.3 × 18.3 in.
Medium
(4128 × 4128 pixels)
Approx. 35.0 × 35.0 cm/
13.8 × 13.8 in.
Small
(2752 × 2752 pixels)
Approx. 23.3 × 23.3 cm/
9.2 × 9.2 in.
[16:9 (36×20)]
Large
(8256 × 4640 pixels)
Approx. 69.9 × 39.3 cm/
27.5 × 15.5 in.
Medium
(6192 × 3480 pixels)
Approx. 52.4 × 29.5 cm/
20.6 × 11.6 in.
Small
(4128 × 2320 pixels)
Approx. 35.0 × 19.6 cm/
13.8 × 7.7 in.
110
Focus
Focus Mode
Control how the camera focuses.
❚❚
Choosing a Focus Mode
The focus mode can be selected by holding the focus-mode button and
rotating the main command dial.
A
[Focus Mode]
The focus mode can also be selected using the [Focus mode] items in the
photo shooting and video recording menus.
Focus
111
Focus
Option Description
AF-S [Single AF]
•
Use with stationary subjects. When you press the
shutter-release button halfway to focus, the focus
point will turn from red to green and focus will
lock. If the camera fails to focus, the focus point
will flash red and the shutter release will be
disabled.
•
At default settings, the shutter can only be
released if the camera is able to focus (focus
priority).
AF-C
[Continuous
AF]
•
Use for shots of athletes and other moving
subjects. The camera adjusts focus continuously in
response to changes in the distance to the subject
while the shutter-release button is pressed
halfway.
•
At default settings, the shutter can be released
whether or not the subject is in focus (release
priority).
AF-F
[Full-time
AF]
•
The camera adjusts focus continuously in response
to subject movement or changes in composition.
•
When you press the shutter-release button
halfway to focus, the focus point will turn from red
to green and focus will lock.
•
This option is only available in video mode.
MF
[Manual
focus]
Focus manually (
0
129). The shutter can be released
whether or not the subject is in focus.
112
Focus
D
Cautions: Autofocus
•
The camera may be unable to focus if:
- the subject contains lines parallel to the long edge of the frame,
- the subject lacks contrast,
- the subject in the focus point contains areas of sharply contrasting
brightness,
- the focus point includes night-time spot lighting or a neon sign or other
light source that changes in brightness,
- flicker or banding appears under fluorescent, mercury-vapor, sodium-
vapor, or similar lighting,
- a cross (star) filter or other special filter is used,
- the subject appears smaller than the focus point, or
- the subject is dominated by regular geometric patterns (e.g., blinds or a
row of windows in a skyscraper).
•
The display may brighten or darken while the camera focuses.
•
The focus point may sometimes be displayed in green when the camera is
unable to focus.
•
The camera may take longer to focus when lighting is poor.
A
Low-Light AF
For improved focus when shooting under low light, select [ON] for Custom
Setting d9 [Starlight view (photo Lv)]. This option takes effect only in photo
mode.
113
Focus
AF-Area Mode
Choose how the camera selects the focus point for autofocus.
•
In modes other than [Auto-area AF], the focus point can be
positioned using the sub-selector (
0
123) or multi selector.
❚❚
Choosing an AF-Area Mode
To choose the AF-area mode, hold the focus-mode button and rotate
the sub-command dial.
A
[AF-Area Mode]
The AF-area mode can also be selected using the [AF-area mode] items in
the photo shooting and video recording menus.
114
Focus
Option Description
3
[Pinpoint AF]
•
With a focus area smaller than that employed for
single-point AF, pinpoint AF is used for pinpoint
focus on a selected spot in the frame.
•
Focusing may be slower than with single-point AF.
•
Recommended for shots involving static subjects,
such as buildings, in-studio product photography,
or close-ups.
•
This option is only available when photo mode is
selected and [Single AF] is chosen for focus mode.
d
[Single-point
AF]
•
The camera focuses on a point selected by the
user.
•
Use with stationary subjects.
115
Focus
d
[Dynamic-
area AF (S)]
•
The camera focuses on a point selected by the
user. If the subject briefly leaves the selected point,
the camera will focus based on information from
surrounding focus points.
•
This option is only available when photo mode is
selected and [Continuous AF] is chosen for focus
mode.
•
Use for photographs of athletes and other active
subjects that are hard to frame using single-point
AF.
•
The size of the area used for focus can be selected
from S (small), M (medium), and L (large). S is the
smallest and L the largest.
•
[Dynamic-area AF (S)]: Choose when there is time
to compose the photograph or when
photographing subjects that are moving
predictably (e.g., runners or race cars on a track).
•
[Dynamic-area AF (M)]: Choose when
photographing subjects that are moving
unpredictably (e.g., players at a football game).
•
[Dynamic-area AF (L)]: Choose when
photographing subjects that are moving quickly
and cannot be easily framed in the selected focus
point (e.g., birds).
e
[Dynamic-
area AF (M)]
f
[Dynamic-
area AF (L)]
Option Description
116
Focus
f
[Wide-area
AF (S)]
•
As for single-point AF except that the camera
focuses on a wider area.
•
Choose for snapshots, subjects that are in motion,
and other subjects that are difficult to photograph
using single-point AF.
•
During video recording, wide-area AF can be used
for smooth focus when making panning or tilting
shots or filming moving subjects.
•
If the selected focus area contains subjects at
different distances from the camera, the camera
will assign priority to the closest subject.
•
The focus areas for [Wide-area AF (L)] are larger
than those for [Wide-area AF (S)].
g
[Wide-area
AF (L)]
u
[3D-tracking]
•
The camera tracks focus on a selected subject.
•
Position the focus point over your subject and start
tracking by pressing
J
or AF-ON or by pressing
the shutter-release button halfway; focus will then
track the selected subject as it moves through the
frame. To end tracking and restore the previously-
selected focus point, press the
J
button.
•
If the subject leaves the frame, remove your finger
from the shutter-release button and recompose
the photograph with the subject in the selected
focus point.
•
This option is only available when photo mode is
selected and [Continuous AF] is chosen for focus
mode.
Option Description
117
Focus
D
Caution: 3D-Tracking and Subject Tracking
The camera may be unable to track subjects that:
•
are similar in color, brightness, or pattern to the background,
•
change visibly in size, color, or brightness,
•
are too large or too small,
•
are too bright or too dark,
•
move quickly, or
•
are obscured by other objects or leave the frame.
n
[Subject-
tracking AF]
•
Track focus on a selected subject.
•
Position the reticle over the target and start
tracking by pressing the shutter-release button
halfway or by pressing the
J
or AF-ON; the focus
point will track the selected subject as it moves
through the frame. To end tracking and restore the
starting focus point, press
J
.
•
This option is only available in video mode.
h
[Auto-area
AF]
•
The camera automatically detects the subject and
selects the focus area.
•
Use on occasions when you don’t have time to
select the focus point yourself, for portraits, or for
snapshots and other spur-of-the-moment photos.
Option Description
118
Focus
A s
: The Center Focus Point
In all AF-area modes except [Auto-area AF], [3D-tracking], and [Subject-
tracking AF], a dot appears in the focus point when it is in the center of the
frame.
A
Quick Focus-Point Selection
•
For quicker focus-point selection, choose [Alternating points] for Custom
Setting a4 [Focus points used] to use only a quarter of the available focus
points. Selecting [Alternating points] does not affect the number of
points available for [Pinpoint AF].
•
If you prefer to use the sub-selector for focus-point selection, you can
choose [Select center focus point] for Custom Setting f2 [Custom
controls (shooting)]> [Sub-selector center] to allow the center of the
sub-selector to be used to quickly select the center focus point.
119
Focus
Choosing a Subject Type for Autofocus
The class of subjects given priority during
autofocus can be chosen using the [AF
subject detection options] items in the
photo shooting and video recording menus,
which offer a choice of [Auto], [People],
[Animal], [Vehicle], and [Subject detection
off]. The subject detected by the camera is
indicated by a focus point.
•
In the case of the video recording menu, the choice of subject is made
via [AF subject detection options]> [Subject detection]. Separate
subject types can be selected for photo and video modes.
•
Subject detection is available when [Wide-area AF (S)], [Wide-area
AF (L)], [3D-tracking], [Subject-tracking AF], or [Auto-area AF] is
selected for [AF-area mode].
•
Human faces detected by the camera when
[People] is selected are identified by a
border indicating the focus point. If the
camera detects the subject’s eyes, the focus
point will instead appear over one or the
other of their eyes (face/eye-detection AF). If
the subject looks away after their face is
detected, the focus point will move to track their motion.
120
Focus
•
If a dog, cat, or bird is detected when
[Animal] is selected, the focus point will
appear over the face of the animal in
question (animal-detection AF). If the
camera detects the subject’s eyes, the focus
point will instead appear over one or the
other of their eyes. If the camera can detect
neither face nor eyes, it will display a focus point over the detected
animal.
•
If a car, motorcycle, train, airplane, or bicycle
is detected when [Vehicle] is selected, the
focus point will appear over the vehicle in
question. In the case of trains, the camera
will detect only the front end. With planes,
the camera will detect the body, nose, or
cockpit depending on the aircraft’s size.
•
If [Auto] is selected, the camera will detect humans, animals, and
vehicles and choose a subject for focus automatically.
•
To disable AF subject detection altogether, choose [Subject
detection off].
•
If more than one subject of the selected type is detected, a gray focus
point will appear over each of the subjects detected. If [Auto-area AF]
is selected for [AF-area mode],
e
and
f
icons will appear on the
focus point selected by the camera. The focus point can be positioned
over the other subjects by pressing
4
or
2
.
•
During playback, you can zoom in on the subject used for focus by
pressing
J
.
121
Focus
D
Caution: Face/Eye-Detection AF
Subject detection may not perform as expected if:
•
the subject’s face is too large or small relative to the frame,
•
the subject’s face is too brightly or dimly lit,
•
the subject is wearing glasses or sunglasses,
•
the subject’s face or eyes are obscured by hair or other objects, or
•
the subject moves excessively during shooting.
D
Cautions: Animal-Detection AF
•
Subject detection may not perform as expected if:
- the subject’s face is too large or small relative to the frame,
- the subject’s face is too brightly or dimly lit,
- the subject’s face or eyes are obscured by fur or the like,
- the subject’s face and eyes are of similar colors, or
- the subject moves excessively during shooting.
•
The camera may display a border around subjects that are not dogs, cats,
or birds but which resemble these animals.
•
The light from the AF-assist illuminator may adversely affect the eyes of
some animals; when using animal-detection AF, select [OFF] for Custom
Setting a12 [Built-in AF-assist illuminator].
122
Focus
D
Cautions: Vehicle-Detection AF
•
Subject detection may not perform as expected with subjects that are:
- too large or small relative to the frame,
- too bright or too dark,
- partially hidden,
- similar in color to surrounding objects, or
- moving quickly.
•
The camera may fail to detect vehicles of some shapes and colors.
Alternatively, it may display a border around subjects that are not vehicles.
D
Subject Detection
The performance of subject-detection may drop:
•
during high-speed frame capture or
•
if either [HLG] or [N-Log] is selected as the tone mode for [Video file type]
> [ProRes 422 HQ 10-bit (MOV)] or [H.265 10-bit (MOV)] in the video
recording menu.
123
Focus
Focus Point Selection
Except when [Auto-area AF] is selected for AF-area mode, the focus
point can be selected manually, allowing photographs to be composed
with the subject positioned almost anywhere in the frame.
•
Use the multi selector to select the focus point while the standby
timer is on.
•
Pressing
J
selects the center focus point.
A
The Sub-Selector
•
The sub-selector can be used for focus-point
selection in place of the multi selector.
•
Exposure and focus lock while the center of the
sub-selector is pressed.
•
Be careful not to put your fingers in your eye
while using the sub-selector with your eye to
the viewfinder.
A
Portrait (“Tall”) Orientation
You may find it convenient to use the vertical multi selector when taking
photographs in portrait (“tall”) orientation.
A
Using the Sub-Selector and Vertical Multi Selector
You can press the centers of the sub-selector and
vertical multi selector or tilt them as shown. The
controls may not function as expected when
pressed from the side.
A
Focus-Point Lock
Focus-point selection can be locked by choosing [ON] for Custom Setting f4
or g3 [Control lock]> [Focus-point lock].
124
Focus
The Touch Shutter
Touch the display to focus on the selected
point. The shutter will be released when you
lift your finger from the display.
Tap the icon shown in the illustration to
choose the operation performed by tapping
the display.
Option Description
W
[Touch
shutter/
touch AF]
•
Touch the display to focus on the selected point and
lift your finger to release the shutter.
•
When choosing an eye using touch controls, note
that the camera may not focus on the eye on the
side you intend. Use the multi selector to choose the
desired eye.
•
If [Auto-area AF] is selected for AF-area mode, the
camera will focus on the chosen point, release the
shutter, and track the selected subject. Press
J
to
end subject tracking.
•
Available only in photo mode.
X
[Off] Touch shutter disabled.
125
Focus
D
Cautions: Taking Pictures Using Touch Shooting Options
•
Touch controls cannot be used for manual focus.
•
The shutter-release button can be used to take pictures when the
W
icon is
displayed.
•
During burst photography, touch controls can be used only to take one
picture at a time. Use the shutter-release button for burst photography.
•
In self-timer mode, focus locks on the selected subject when you touch the
monitor and the shutter is released about 10 seconds after you lift your
finger from the display. If the number of shots selected is greater than 1,
the remaining shots will be taken in a single burst.
f
[Position
focus
point]
•
Touch the display to position the focus point. The
camera will not focus and lifting your finger from the
display will not release the shutter.
•
If [Subject-tracking AF] or [Auto-area AF] is
selected for AF-area mode, focus will track the
subject at the chosen point. Press
J
to end subject
tracking.
V
[Touch AF]
•
Touch the display to focus on the selected point.
Lifting your finger from the display does not release
the shutter.
•
If [Subject-tracking AF] or [Auto-area AF] is
selected for AF-area mode, the camera will focus on
and track the subject at the chosen point. Press
J
to
end subject tracking.
Option Description
126
Focus
Focus Lock
Use focus lock in cases in which the camera has trouble focusing with
autofocus.
•
Use focus lock to lock focus on the current subject when AF-C is
selected for focus mode.
•
When using focus lock, choose an AF-area mode other than [Auto-
area AF].
1
Position the subject in the selected focus point and press the
shutter-release button halfway.
2
Press the center of the sub-selector.
•
Keeping the shutter-release button
pressed halfway (
q
), press the center of
the sub-selector (
w
) to lock focus. Focus
will remain locked while the center of
the sub-selector is pressed, even if you
lift your finger from the shutter-release
button.
•
Exposure will also lock.
•
AE-L icons will appear in the displays.
127
Focus
3
Keeping the center of the sub-selector
pressed, recompose the photograph
and shoot.
Do not change the distance between the
camera and the subject. If the distance to
the subject changes, release the lock and
focus again at the new distance.
D
Locking Focus When AF-S Is Selected for Focus Mode
Focus locks while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. You can also
lock focus by pressing the center of the sub-selector.
D
Taking Multiple Shots at the Same Focus Distance
•
If you locked focus by pressing the center of the sub-selector, focus will
remain locked between shots if you keep the center of the sub-selector
pressed.
•
If you locked focus by pressing the shutter-release button halfway, focus
will remain locked if you keep the button pressed halfway between shots.
128
Focus
A
Locking Focus with the AF-ON Button
•
The AF-ON button can be used for focus in place of the shutter-release
button.
•
When [AF-ON only] is selected for Custom Setting a6 [AF activation],
focus can be initiated only by pressing the AF-ON button; the camera will
not focus when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. Focus will
remain locked after the AF-ON button is released. To end focus lock, press
the AF-ON button again.
129
Focus
Manual Focus
Manual focus is available in manual focus mode. Use manual focus
when, for example, autofocus does not produce the desired results.
•
Position the focus point over your subject
and rotate the focus or control ring until the
subject is in focus.
•
For greater precision, press the
X
button to
zoom in on the view through the lens.
130
Focus
•
The focus indicator (
I
) in the shooting display can be used to confirm
whether the subject in the selected focus point is in focus (electronic
rangefinding). The focus point will also light green when the subject is
in focus.
•
When using manual focus with subjects not suited to autofocus, note
that the in-focus indicator (
I
) may be displayed when the subject is
not in focus. Zoom in on the view through the lens and check focus.
Use of a tripod is recommended when the camera is having trouble
focusing.
1
2
1
Focus distance indicator
2
Focus indicator
Focus
indicator
Description
(steady)
The subject is in focus.
(steady)
The focus point is in front of the subject.
(steady)
The focus point is behind the subject.
(flashes)
The camera is unable to focus.
131
Focus
D
Lenses with Focus-Mode Selection
Manual focus mode can be chosen using focus-mode selection controls on
the lens (where available).
D
The Focal Plane Mark and Flange-Back Distance
Focus distance is measured from the focal plane
mark (
E
) on the camera body, which shows the
position of the focal plane inside the camera (
q
).
Use this mark when measuring the distance to
your subject for manual focus or macro
photography. The distance between the focal
plane and the lens mounting flange is known as
the “flange-back distance” (
w
). On this camera,
the flange-back distance is 16 mm (0.63 in.).
A
Focus Peaking
•
If [ON] is selected for Custom Setting a13
[Focus peaking]> [Focus peaking display],
objects that are in focus will be indicated by
colored outlines that appear when focus is
adjusted manually (focus peaking).
•
Note that the focus peaking display may not
appear if the camera is unable to detect
outlines. Check focus in the shooting display.
132
Exposure
Choosing a Shooting Mode
To choose a shooting mode, hold the
I
button and rotate the main
command dial. The selected option is shown in the shooting display
and control panel.
Exposure
Mode Description
P
Programmed
auto (
0
133)
Use for snapshots and in other situations in
which there is little time to adjust camera
settings. The camera chooses both shutter
speed and aperture automatically.
S
Shutter-
priority auto
(
0
133)
Use to freeze or blur motion. You choose the
shutter speed; the camera adjusts aperture
automatically.
A
Aperture-
priority auto
(
0
134)
Use to blur backgrounds or bring both
foreground and background into focus. You
choose the aperture; the camera adjusts
shutter speed automatically.
M Manual (
0
135)
You control both shutter speed and aperture.
Choose a shutter speed of “Bulb” or “Time” for
long time-exposures.
133
Exposure
❚❚
P (Programmed Auto)
•
In this mode, the camera automatically adjusts shutter speed and
aperture according to a built-in program to ensure optimal exposure
in most situations.
•
Different combinations of shutter speed and aperture that produce
the same exposure can be selected by rotating the main command
dial (“flexible program”).
- While flexible program is in effect, a
flexible program indicator (
U
) is displayed.
- To restore default shutter speed and
aperture settings, rotate the main
command dial until the indicator is no
longer displayed. Flexible program can
also be ended by choosing another mode
or turning the camera off.
❚❚
S (Shutter-Priority Auto)
•
In shutter-priority auto, you choose the
shutter speed while the camera
automatically adjusts aperture for optimal
exposure. Choose fast shutter speeds to
“freeze” motion, slow shutter speeds to
suggest motion by blurring moving objects.
•
Rotate the main command dial to set the
shutter speed.
•
Shutter speed can be set to values between
1
/
32000
s and 30 s.
•
Shutter speed can be locked at the selected value (
0
665, 682).
134
Exposure
❚❚
A (Aperture-Priority Auto)
•
In aperture-priority auto, you choose the
aperture while the camera automatically
adjusts shutter speed for optimal exposure.
•
Aperture can be adjusted by rotating the
sub-command dial.
•
The minimum and maximum values for
aperture vary with the lens.
•
Aperture can be locked at the selected value (
0
665, 682).
135
Exposure
❚❚
M (Manual)
•
You control both shutter speed and aperture. Choose this mode for
long time-exposures of such subjects as fireworks or the night sky
(“Bulb” or “Time” photography,
0
138).
•
Shutter speed and aperture can be adjusted with reference to the
exposure indicators by rotating the command dials.
•
Rotate the main command dial to choose
the shutter speed. Shutter speed can be set
to values between
1
/
32000
s and 30 s or to
“Bulb” or “Time”.
•
Aperture can be adjusted by rotating the
sub-command dial.
•
The minimum and maximum values for
aperture vary with the lens.
•
Shutter speed and aperture can be locked
at the selected values (
0
665, 682).
136
Exposure
D
Exposure Indicators
The exposure indicators in the monitor, viewfinder, and control panel show
whether the photograph would be under- or over-exposed at current
settings. The exposure indicators can be read as follows (the display varies
with the option selected for Custom Setting b2 [EV steps for exposure
cntrl]):
The orientation of the exposure indicators can be reversed using Custom
Setting f7 [Reverse indicators].
D
Exposure Warning
The displays will flash if the selected settings exceed the limits of the
exposure metering system.
Display
[1/3 step] selected for [EV steps for exposure cntrl]
Optimal
exposure
Underexposed
by
1
/
3
EV
Overexposed by
over 3
1
/
3
EV
Monitor
Viewfinder/
control panel
137
Exposure
A
Extended Shutter Speeds
For shutter speeds as slow as 900 s (15 minutes), select [ON] for Custom
Setting d5 [Extended shutter speeds (M)].
A
Long Exposures
At speeds slower than 1 s, the shutter speed displayed by the camera may
differ from the actual exposure time. The actual exposure times at shutter
speeds of 15 and 30 seconds, for example, are respectively 16 and 32
seconds. The exposure time will again match the selected shutter speed at
speeds of 60 seconds and slower.
A
Auto ISO Sensitivity Control (Mode M)
If auto ISO sensitivity control (
0
156) is enabled, ISO sensitivity will
automatically be adjusted for optimal exposure at the selected shutter speed
and aperture.
138
Exposure
Long Time-Exposures (Mode M Only)
The camera offers two options for long time-exposures: “Bulb” and
“Time”. Long time-exposures can be used for pictures of fireworks, night
scenery, the stars, or moving lights.
1
Keep the camera steady, for example by using a tripod.
2
Hold the
I
button and rotate the main command dial to select
mode M.
A 35-second exposure shot at a shutter speed of “Bulb”
and an aperture of f/25
Shutter
speed
Description
Bulb
The shutter remains open while the shutter-release button is
held down.
Time
The exposure starts when the shutter-release button is
pressed and ends when the button is pressed a second time.
139
Exposure
3
Rotate the main command dial to choose a shutter speed of Bulb
(“Bulb”) or Time (“Time”).
Note that the exposure indicators are not displayed at a shutter
speed of Bulb or Time.
4
Focus and start the exposure.
•
“Bulb”: Press the shutter-release button all the way down to start
the exposure. Keep the shutter-release button pressed during the
exposure.
•
“Time”: Press the shutter-release button all the way down to start
the exposure.
5
End the exposure.
•
“Bulb”: Lift your finger from the shutter-release button.
•
“Time”: Press the shutter-release button all the way down a
second time.
Bulb Time
140
Exposure
D
Long Time-Exposures
•
Note that “noise” (bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels or fog) may
be present in long exposures.
•
Bright spots and fog can be reduced by choosing [ON] for [Long exposure
NR] in the photo shooting menu.
•
Nikon recommends using a fully-charged battery, the supplied charging
AC adapter, or an optional AC adapter and power connector to prevent
loss of power during long exposures.
•
To prevent blur, use of a tripod or a device such as an optional remote cord
or wireless remote controller is recommended.
141
Exposure
Autoexposure Lock
Use autoexposure lock to recompose photographs after setting
exposure for a specific area of the subject. Exposure lock comes in
handy when the area used to set exposure is much brighter or darker
than its surroundings.
1
With the subject positioned in the
selected focus point and the shutter-
release button pressed halfway, press
the center of the sub-selector to lock
exposure.
•
While the center of the sub-selector is
pressed, exposure will lock at the value
metered in an area of the subject
determined by the selected metering
option.
•
An AE-L icon will appear in the
shooting display.
•
If autofocus is enabled, focus will also
lock.
142
Exposure
2
Keeping the center of the sub-selector
pressed, recompose the photograph
and shoot.
A
Locking Exposure with the Shutter-Release Button
If [On (half press)] is selected for Custom Setting c1 [Shutter-release
button AE-L], exposure will lock while the shutter-release button is pressed
halfway.
A
Metered Area
•
With [Spot metering], exposure will be locked at the value metered in a
circle centered on the current focus point.
•
With [Center-weighted metering], exposure will be locked at the value
metered in a 12-mm circle in the center of the display.
A
Adjusting Shutter Speed and Aperture
The following settings can be adjusted while the center of the sub-selector is
pressed:
•
The new values can be confirmed in the shooting display and control
panel.
Mode Setting
P Shutter speed and aperture (flexible program;
0
133)
S Shutter speed
A Aperture
143
Exposure
Exposure Compensation
Exposure compensation is used to alter exposure from the value
suggested by the camera. It can be used to make pictures brighter or
darker.
❚❚
Adjusting Exposure Compensation
Hold the
E
button and rotate a command
dial.
•
Choose from values between –5 EV
(underexposure) and +5 EV (overexposure).
Values between –3 EV and +3 EV are
available in video mode.
•
At default settings, changes to exposure
compensation are made in increments of
1
/
3
EV. The size of the increments can be
changed using Custom Setting b2 [EV steps
for exposure cntrl].
•
Higher values make the subject brighter, lower values darker.
−1 EV No exposure
compensation
+1 EV
144
Exposure
•
E
icons and exposure indicators appear in the shooting display and
control panel. In modes other than M, the zero (“0”) at the center of
the exposure indicator flashes. The current value for exposure
compensation can be confirmed by pressing the
E
button.
•
Normal exposure can be restored by setting exposure compensation
to ±0.0. Exposure compensation is not reset when the camera is
turned off.
A
Mode M
•
In mode M, exposure compensation affects only the exposure indicator;
shutter speed and aperture do not change.
•
When auto ISO sensitivity control (
0
156) is in effect, ISO sensitivity is
automatically adjusted according to the value selected for exposure
compensation.
A
Using a Flash
When an optional flash is used, exposure compensation affects both flash
level and exposure, altering the brightness of both the main subject and the
background; if desired, the effect can be restricted to the background using
Custom Setting e3 [Exposure comp. for flash].
Monitor Viewfinder Control panel
145
Release Mode
Choosing a Release Mode
To choose the operation performed when the
shutter-release button is pressed all the way
down, hold the release mode dial lock release
and rotate the release mode dial.
•
Stop when the pointer aligns with the
desired setting.
Release Mode
Mode Description
U
Single frame
The camera takes one photograph each time the
shutter-release button is pressed.
V
Continuous
low-speed
The camera takes photographs at a selected rate
while the shutter-release button is pressed.
•
Choose from rates of from 10 to 1 fps. To choose
the frame rate, hold the
c
button and rotate a
command dial.
W
Continuous
high-speed
The camera takes photographs at a selected rate
while the shutter-release button is pressed. Use for
active subjects.
•
Choose from rates of from 20 to 10 fps. To choose
the frame rate, hold the
c
button and rotate a
command dial.
146
Release Mode
D
Frame Advance Rate
•
The frame rates for continuous low-speed and continuous high-speed
modes can also be selected using Custom Setting d1 [Continuous
shooting speed].
•
The actual frame rate when a frame advance rate of 8 fps is selected in
continuous low-speed mode is 7.5 fps.
•
The values given above for frame advance rate assume a focus mode of
AF-C, shooting mode M, a shutter speed of
1
/
250
s or faster, and default
values for all other settings. Frame advance rates may slow:
- during flash photography,
- in silent mode,
- when flicker is detected with [ON] selected for [Photo flicker reduction]
in the photo shooting menu,
- if aperture is stopped down to a very high f-number, or
- at slow shutter speeds.
•
When [ON] is selected for [Photo flicker reduction] in the photo shooting
menu (
0
518), the shooting display will briefly go dark during burst
photography.
E
Self-timer Take pictures with the self-timer (
0
152).
c
Quick release-
mode
selection
Hold the
c
button and rotate the main command
dial to select the release mode (
0
148).
•
Quick release-mode selection can be used to
choose high-speed frame capture modes with
frame rates of 30 or 120 fps (
0
149).
Mode Description
147
Release Mode
D
Cautions: Burst Photography
•
Depending on shooting conditions and memory card performance, the
memory card access lamp may light for anywhere from a few tens of
seconds to around a minute. Do not remove the memory card while the
memory card access lamp is lit. Not only could any unrecorded pictures be
lost, but the camera or memory card could be damaged.
•
At shutter speeds slower than
1
/
250
s, the shooting display does not update
in real time during burst photography. To track your subject during
shooting, choose shutter speeds faster than
1
/
250
s.
•
If the camera is switched off while the memory card access lamp is lit, it will
not power off until all pictures in the buffer have been recorded.
•
If the battery is exhausted while pictures remain in the buffer, the shutter
release will be disabled and the pictures transferred to the memory card.
•
Bursts shot at a frame rate of 20 fps in continuous high-speed mode will be
limited to a maximum of about 3 seconds if:
- a RAW + JPEG option is selected for image quality, or
-[JPEG Slot 1 - JPEG Slot 2] is selected for [Role played by card in Slot 2]
in the photo shooting menu.
A
The Memory Buffer
•
While the shutter-release button is pressed
halfway, the frame-count display will show the
number of pictures that can be stored in the
memory buffer.
•
When the buffer is full, the display will show
r000 and the frame rate will drop.
•
The number shown is approximate. The actual
number of photos that can be stored in the memory buffer varies with
camera settings and shooting conditions.
148
Release Mode
❚❚
Quick Release-Mode Selection
With the release mode dial
rotated to
c
, you can choose a
release mode by holding the
c
button and rotating the main
command dial.
•
Settings for the selected mode can be
adjusted by holding the
c
button and
rotating the sub-command dial.
•
High-speed frame capture modes with frame advance rates of 30 or
120 fps are available only when the release mode dial is rotated to
c
(
0
149).
149
Release Mode
High-Speed Frame Capture (C30/C120)
For high-speed burst
photography at frame rates of 30
or 120 fps, set the release mode
dial to
c
and then hold the
c
button and rotate the main
command dial to choose [C30] or
[C120].
•
The maximum length for bursts taken in these modes is
approximately four seconds.
150
Release Mode
•
Photos can be taken at the following settings:
•
The upper limit for ISO sensitivity is ISO 25600, even when higher
values (Hi 0.3 through Hi 2.0) are selected.
•
Pictures are recorded in JPEG format.
•
Exposure compensation is restricted to values between −3 and +3 EV,
although settings between −5 and +5 EV can be selected.
•
If a DX lens is attached when [C120] is selected, the release mode will
change to [C30] and image area will be fixed at [DX (24×16)].
•
The touch shutter can be used only to take one picture at a time. Use
the shutter-release button for high-speed frame capture.
Option C30 C120
Shutter speed
1
/
32000
to
1
/
60
s
1
/
32000
to
1
/
125
s
[Image area]
[FX (36×24)] or
[DX (24×16)]
[FX (36×24)] only
[Image quality][JPEG normal] only
[Image size][Large] only [Small] only
151
Release Mode
D
High-Speed Frame Capture: Restrictions
High-speed frame capture cannot be combined with some camera features,
including:
•
flexible program,
•
photo flicker reduction,
•
flash photography,
•
bracketing,
•
multiple exposures,
•
HDR overlay,
•
interval-timer photography,
•
time-lapse video recording, and
•
focus shift.
152
Release Mode
Using the Self-Timer (
E
)
In self-timer mode, pressing the shutter-release button all the way
down starts a timer, and a photo is taken when the timer expires.
1
Rotate the release mode dial
to
E
(self-timer mode).
Hold the release mode dial
lock release and rotate the
release mode dial to
E
.
2
Frame the photograph and focus.
The timer will not start if the shutter
cannot be released, as may be the case,
for example, if the camera is unable to
focus when AF-S is selected for focus
mode.
3
Start the timer.
•
Press the shutter-release button all the
way down to start the timer; the self-
timer lamp will begin to flash. The lamp
stops flashing two seconds before the
timer expires.
•
To turn the self-timer off before a
photograph is taken, rotate the release
mode dial to another setting.
•
The timer duration, the number of shots
taken, and the interval between shots
can be selected using Custom Setting c2
[Self-timer].
153
Release Mode
A
Setting the Timer
To choose the timer duration, press and hold the
c
button and rotate a command dial.
154
ISO Sensitivity
About ISO Sensitivity
The camera’s sensitivity to light (ISO sensitivity) can be adjusted
according to the amount of light available. In general, choosing higher
values allows faster shutter speeds at the same aperture. Choose from
settings of from ISO 64 to 25600. Extended settings of from about 0.3 to
1 EV (ISO 32 equivalent) below ISO 64 and 0.3 to 2 EV (ISO 102400
equivalent) above ISO 25600 are also available.
❚❚
Adjusting ISO Sensitivity
Hold the
S
(
Q
) button and rotate the main command dial.
•
Your selection is shown in the shooting
display and control panel.
•
At default settings, changes to ISO
sensitivity are made in increments of
1
/
3
EV.
The size of the increments can be changed
using Custom Setting b1 [ISO sensitivity
step value].
D
High ISO Sensitivities
The higher the ISO sensitivity, the less light needed to make an exposure,
allowing pictures to be taken when lighting is poor and helping prevent blur
when the subject is in motion. Note, however, that the higher the sensitivity,
the more likely the picture is to be affected by “noise” in the form of
randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines.
•
“Noise” can be reduced by enabling high ISO noise reduction. High ISO
noise reduction can be enabled using the [High ISO NR] items in the photo
shooting and video recording menus.
ISO Sensitivity
155
ISO Sensitivity
A
The Photo Shooting Menu [ISO Sensitivity Settings] Option
ISO senstivity can also be adjusted using the [ISO
sensitivity settings] item in the photo shooting
menu.
A
Hi 0.3–Hi 2.0
A setting of [Hi 0.3] corresponds to an ISO sensitivity approximately 0.3 EV
higher than ISO 25600 (ISO 32000 equivalent) and [Hi 2.0] to an ISO
sensitivity approximately 2 EV higher (ISO 102400 equivalent). Note that
pictures taken at these settings are particularly prone to “noise” in the form
of randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines.
A
Lo 0.3–Lo 1.0
[Lo 0.3] corresponds to an ISO sensitivity about 0.3 EV below ISO 64 (ISO 50
equivalent). [Lo 1.0] is roughly 1 EV below ISO 100 (ISO 32 equivalent). Use
for larger apertures or slower shutter speeds when lighting is bright.
Highlights may be overexposed. In most cases, ISO sensitivities of ISO [64] or
above are recommended.
156
ISO Sensitivity
Auto ISO Sensitivity Control
Auto ISO sensitivity control automatically adjusts ISO sensitivity if
optimal exposure cannot be achieved at the value selected by the user.
You can select an upper limit for auto ISO sensitivity control (100–Hi 2.0)
to prevent ISO sensitivity being raised too high.
❚❚
Enabling Auto ISO Sensitivity Control
•
Hold the
S
button and rotate the sub-
command dial to select from ISO AUTO
(auto ISO sensitivity control enabled) and
ISO (auto ISO sensitivity control disabled).
•
When auto ISO sensitivity control is enabled, the shooting display will
show ISO AUTO and control panel ISO-A. When sensitivity is altered
from the value selected by the user, the ISO sensitivity will be shown
in the displays.
•
Maximum sensitivity can be adjusted using the [ISO sensitivity
settings] item in the photo shooting menu.
Monitor Control panel
157
ISO Sensitivity
D
Cautions: Auto ISO Sensitivity Control
•
If the value currently selected for [ISO sensitivity] is higher than that
chosen for [Maximum sensitivity], the value chosen for [ISO sensitivity]
will serve as the upper limit for auto ISO sensitivity control.
•
During flash photography, shutter speed is limited to the range defined by
the values selected for Custom Settings e1 [Flash sync speed] and e2
[Flash shutter speed]. If the value selected for [Minimum shutter speed]
is not in this range, the value selected for Custom Setting e2 [Flash shutter
speed] becomes the effective minimum shutter speed.
•
Except in mode M, videos are recorded using auto ISO sensitivity control.
Auto ISO sensitivity control can be enabled for video recording in mode M
by selecting [ON] for [ISO sensitivity settings]> [Auto ISO control (mode
M)] in the video recording menu.
158
White Balance
About White Balance
White balance ensures that colors appear natural regardless of the color
of the light source. The default setting (
4
) is suitable for use with most
light sources, but if it fails to produce the desired results, other settings
can be selected according to the weather or light source.
❚❚
Adjusting White Balance
To choose a white balance option, hold the
U
button and rotate the
main command dial. The selected option is shown by an icon in the
shooting display.
Options for the selected setting, if any, can be selected by holding the
U
button and rotating the sub-command dial.
White Balance
159
White Balance
Option
Color
temperature
*
Description
4
[Auto]
The camera adjusts white balance for
optimal results with most light
sources. If an optional flash unit is
used, white balance will be adjusted in
accord with the conditions in effect
when the flash fires.
i
[Keep
white (reduce
warm colors)]
Approx. 3500–
8000 K
Eliminate the warm color cast
produced by incandescent lighting.
j
[Keep
overall
atmosphere]
Approx. 3500–
8000 K
Partially preserve the warm color cast
produced by incandescent lighting.
k
[Keep
warm lighting
colors]
Approx. 3500–
8000 K
Preserve the warm color cast
produced by incandescent lighting.
D
[Natural light
auto]
Approx. 4500–
8000 K
White balance is adjusted for non-
artificial light sources, producing more
life-like colors than does [Auto] when
used under natural light.
H
[Direct
sunlight]
Approx.
5200 K
Use with subjects lit by direct sunlight.
G
[Cloudy] Approx. 6000K Use in daylight under overcast skies.
M
[Shade] Approx. 8000K Use in daylight with subjects in shade.
J
[Incandescent] Approx. 3000K Use under incandescent lighting.
160
White Balance
* Values when fine-tuning is set to 0.
I
[Fluorescent]
Use under fluorescent lighting; choose
bulb type according to light source.
[Cool-white
fluorescent]
Approx. 4200K
[Day white
fluorescent]
Approx. 5000K
[Daylight
fluorescent]
Approx. 6500K
5
[Flash] Approx. 5400K Use for flash photography.
K
[Choose color
temperature]
Approx. 2500–
10000K
Direct color-temperature selection.
•
To choose a color temperature, hold
the
U
button and rotate the sub-
command dial.
L
[Preset manual]
Measure white balance directly from a
subject or light source or copy white
balance from an existing photograph.
•
To choose a white balance preset,
hold the
U
button and rotate the
sub-command dial.
•
To enter direct measurement mode,
press and hold the
U
button
(
0
170).
Option
Color
temperature
*
Description
161
White Balance
D D
[Natural Light Auto]
D
[Natural light auto] may not produce the desired results under artificial
light. Choose
4
[Auto] or an option that matches the light source.
D
Studio Flash Lighting
4
[Auto] may not produce the desired results with large studio flash units.
Use preset manual white balance or set white balance to
5
[Flash] and use
fine-tuning to adjust white balance.
A
Auto
•
The photo info [Basic shooting data] page for
pictures shot with
4
[Auto] or
D
[Natural
light auto] selected for white balance lists the
color temperature selected by the camera at
the time the picture was taken (
0
235). You can
use this as reference when choosing a value for
K
[Choose color temperature].
•
To view the [Basic shooting data] page during playback, go to [Playback
display options] in the playback menu and place checks (
M
) next to
[Shooting data] and [Basic shooting data].
162
White Balance
A
The [White Balance] Options
White balance can also be adjusted from the
photo shooting and video recording menus.
A
Color Temperature
The perceived color of a light source varies with the viewer; some may have a
red cast while others appear blue. Color temperature is an objective measure
of the color of a light source, expressed in Kelvins (K). The lower the color
temperature, the redder the cast (
q
); the higher the temperature, the bluer
the cast (
w
).
A
Choosing a Color Temperature
In general, choose lower values if your pictures have a red cast or to
intentionally make pictures bluer, higher values if your pictures are tinged
blue or to intentionally make pictures redder.
3000 4000 5000 6000 8000 10000 [
K
]
163
White Balance
Fine-Tuning White Balance
1
Select [White balance] in the photo
shooting menu, highlight the desired
option, and press
2
as often as
necessary to display fine-tuning
options.
For information on fine-tuning [Preset
manual] white balance, see “Fine-Tuning
Preset Manual White Balance” (
0
176).
2
Fine-tune white balance.
•
Use the multi selector to position the
cursor on the grid. The cursor can be
moved up to six steps from the center
along either of the A (amber)–B (blue)
and G (green)–M (magenta) axes. The
selected value is displayed to the right
of the grid.
•
The A (amber)–B (blue) axis corresponds to color temperature and
is ruled in increments of 0.5. A change of 1 is equivalent to
approximately 5 mired.
•
The G (green)–M (magenta) axis has effects similar to color
compensation filters and is ruled in increments of 0.25. A change
of 1 is equivalent to approximately 0.05 diffuse density units.
164
White Balance
3
Save changes.
•
Press
J
to save changes and exit to the menus.
•
If white balance has been fine-tuned, an
asterisk (“
U
”) will appear in the white
balance icon.
165
White Balance
A
The
i
Menu
Pressing
J
when [White balance] is highlighted
in the
i
menu displays a list of white balance
options. If an option other than
K
[Choose color
temperature] is highlighted, fine-tuning options
can be displayed by pressing
3
. Any changes to
fine-tuning options can be previewed in the
display.
•
Tap the arrows in the display or use the multi selector to fine-tune white
balance.
•
Press
J
to save changes and return to the
i
menu.
•
If white balance has been fine-tuned, an
asterisk (“
U
”) will appear in the white balance
icon.
G
Increase green
B
Increase blue
A
Increase amber
M
Increase magenta
166
White Balance
A
The Information Display
To choose a white balance setting using the
command dials, press the
U
button while
shooting information is displayed. The selected
setting can be fine-tuned using the multi
selector.
A
White Balance Fine-Tuning
The colors on the fine-tuning axes are relative, not absolute. Selecting more
of a color on a given axis does not necessarily result in that color appearing
in pictures. For example, moving the cursor to B (blue) when a “warm”
setting such as
J
[Incandescent] is selected will make pictures slightly
“colder” but will not actually make them blue.
A
“Mired”
Values in mired are calculated by multiplying the inverse of the color
temperature by 10
6
. Any given change in color temperature produces a
greater difference in color at low color temperatures than it would at higher
color temperatures. For example, a change of 1000 K produces a much
greater change in color at 3000 K than at 6000 K. Mired is a measure of color
temperature that takes such variation into account, and as such is the unit
used in color-temperature compensation filters.
E.g.: Change in color temperature (in Kelvin) : Value in mired
•
4000 K–3000 K = 1000 K : 83 mired
•
7000 K–6000 K = 1000 K : 24 mired
167
White Balance
Choosing a Color Temperature
❚❚
Using the Menus
Choose a color temperature by entering values for the A (amber)–B
(blue) and G (green)–M (magenta) axes.
1
Select [White balance] in the photo shooting menu, then
highlight
K
[Choose color temperature] and press
2
.
2
Choose a color temperature.
•
Press
4
or
2
to highlight digits on the
amber (A)–blue (B) axis and press
1
or
3
to change.
•
Press
4
or
2
to highlight the value for
the green (G)–magenta (M) axis and
press
1
or
3
to change.
3
Save changes.
•
Press
J
to save changes and exit to the menus.
•
If a value other than 0 is selected for the
green (G)–magenta (M) axis, an asterisk
(“
U
”) will appear in the white balance
icon.
168
White Balance
❚❚
Using Buttons (Amber–Blue Only)
To adjust color temperature when [Choose color temperature] is
selected for white balance, hold the
U
button and use the multi
selector or rotate the sub-command dial.
•
Hold the
U
button and rotate the sub-command dial to choose a
color temperature in mireds.
•
To highlight a digit, hold the
U
button and press
4
or
2
. Press
1
or
3
to edit the highlighted digit.
•
Changes apply only to the A (amber)–B (blue) axis.
•
The selected setting takes effect when the
U
button is released.
D
Cautions: Color-Temperature Selection
•
Do not use color-temperature selection with fluorescent light sources;
instead, use the
I
[Fluorescent] option.
•
When using color-temperature selection with other light sources, take a
test shot to determine if the selected value is appropriate.
169
White Balance
A
The
i
Menu
Pressing
J
when [White balance] is highlighted in the
i
menu displays a list
of white balance options. When
K
[Choose color temperature] is
highlighted, color temperature options can be viewed by pressing
3
.
•
Press
4
or
2
to highlight digits on the A–B (amber–blue) axis. You can also
highlight the G–M (green–magenta) axis.
•
Press
1
or
3
to edit the selected item.
•
Press
J
to save changes and return to the
i
menu.
•
If a value other than 0 is selected for the green (G)–magenta (M) axis, an
asterisk (“
U
”) will appear in the white balance icon.
Value for Amber–Blue
axis
Value for Green–
Magenta axis
170
White Balance
Preset Manual
White balance settings such as
4
[Auto],
J
[Incandescent], and
K
[Choose color temperature] may fail to produce the desired results
under mixed lighting or lighting with a strong color cast. Should this
occur, white balance can be set to a value measured under the light
source used in the final photograph. Two methods are available for
setting preset white balance:
D
White Balance Presets
Changes to white balance presets d-1 through d-6 apply to all shooting
menu banks (A–D). For example, changes to presets made when shooting
menu bank A is selected also apply to shooting menu banks B through D.
Method Description
Direct measurement
Measure white balance in a selected area of the
frame (
0
171).
Copying a value from
existing photograph
Copy white balance from a photo on a memory
card (
0
174).
171
White Balance
❚❚
Direct Measurement
The camera can store up to six values for preset manual white balance.
1
Hold the
U
button and rotate the main command dial to select
L
.
2
Select a preset.
Hold the
U
button and rotate the sub-command dial until the
desired white balance preset (d-1 to d-6) is displayed.
3
Select direct measurement mode.
•
Release the
U
button briefly and then
press the
U
button until the
L
icon
in the monitor starts to flash.
•
A white balance target (
r
) will appear in
the center of the frame.
172
White Balance
4
Position the white balance target (
r
)
over a white or gray object and measure
a value for preset manual white
balance.
•
Position the target (
r
) using the multi
selector.
•
To measure white balance, press the shutter-release button all the
way down or press
J
.
•
You can also position the target (
r
) and measure white balance
by tapping the display.
•
Target selection will not be available if an optional flash unit is
attached. Frame the shot so that the white or gray reference
object is in the center of the display.
•
If the camera is unable to measure white balance, a message will
be displayed and the camera will return to direct measurement
mode. Try measuring white balance again, for example with the
target (
r
) positioned over a different area of the subject.
5
Press the
i
button to exit direct measurement mode.
173
White Balance
D
The Preset Manual White Balance Menu
The preset manual white balance menu can be accessed by selecting [White
balance]>
L
[Preset manual] in the photo shooting menu. The preset
manual white balance menu offers options for copying values for preset
manual white balance from an existing photograph or adding comments to
or protecting white balance presets.
D
Protected Presets
White balance presets indicated by
g
icons are protected and cannot be
changed.
D
Preset Manual: Selecting a Preset
•
At shipment, presets d-1 through d-6 are set to 5200 K, equivalent to the
H
[Direct sunlight] white balance option.
•
White balance presets can be viewed by
selecting [White balance]>
L
[Preset
manual] in the photo shooting menu. To recall
a stored value, highlight a preset using the
multi selector and press
J
.
D
Direct Measurement Mode
Direct measurement mode will end if no operations are performed in the
time selected for Custom Setting c3 [Power off delay]> [Standby timer].
D
Measuring White Balance
Preset manual white balance cannot be measured during high-speed frame
capture or multiple exposures.
174
White Balance
❚❚
Copying White Balance from a Photograph
Follow the steps below to copy a value for white balance from an
existing photograph to a selected preset.
1
Select [White balance] in the photo
shooting menu, then highlight [Preset
manual] and press
2
.
2
Select a destination.
•
Using the multi selector, highlight the
destination preset (d-1 to d-6).
•
Press
X
to view the preset manual white
balance menu.
3
Choose [Select picture].
Highlight [Select picture] and press
2
to
view the pictures on the current memory
card.
175
White Balance
4
Highlight the source picture.
•
Highlight the desired picture using the
multi selector.
•
To view the highlighted picture full
frame, press and hold the
X
button.
5
Copy white balance.
•
Press
J
to copy the white balance value for the highlighted
photograph to the selected preset.
•
If the highlighted photograph has a comment, the comment will
be copied to the comment for the selected preset.
176
White Balance
A
Fine-Tuning Preset Manual White Balance
The selected preset can be fine-tuned by
selecting [Fine-tune] in the preset manual white
balance menu.
A
“Edit Comment”
To enter a descriptive comment of up to 36
characters for the current white balance preset,
select [Edit comment] in the preset manual
white balance menu. Enter a comment as
described in “Text Entry” (
0
64).
A
“Protect”
To protect the current white balance preset,
select [ON] for [Protect] in the preset manual
white balance menu. The preset cannot be
modified as long as [ON] is selected for [Protect].
177
Bracketing
Bracketing automatically varies exposure, flash level, Active D-Lighting
(ADL), or white balance slightly with each shot, “bracketing” the current
value. Bracketing can be used in situations in which getting the right
settings is difficult and there is not time to check results and adjust
settings with each shot, or to experiment with different settings for the
same subject.
Auto Bracketing Set
Bracketing is adjusted using the [Auto
bracketing]> [Auto bracketing set] item in
the photo shooting menu, which contains the
following options:
Bracketing
Option Description
[AE & flash bracketing]
The camera varies exposure and flash level
over a series of photographs.
[AE bracketing]
The camera varies exposure over a series of
photographs.
[Flash bracketing]
The camera varies flash level over a series of
photographs.
[WB bracketing]
The camera creates multiple copies of each
photograph, each with a different white
balance.
[ADL bracketing]
The camera varies Active D-Lighting (ADL)
over a series of exposures.
178
Bracketing
Exposure and Flash Bracketing
Vary exposure and/or flash level over a series of photographs. To
perform exposure and/or flash bracketing:
1
Choose the number of shots.
•
Hold the BKT button and rotate the main command dial to choose
the number of shots in the bracketing sequence.
•
At settings other than [0F], a bracketing icon and indicator will
appear in the shooting display and control panel.
No exposure
compensation
−1 EV +1 EV
179
Bracketing
2
Select an exposure increment.
•
Hold the BKT button and rotate the sub-command dial to choose
the exposure increment.
•
When [1/3 step] is selected for Custom Setting b2 [EV steps for
exposure cntrl], the size of the increment can be chosen from
0.3 (
1
/
3
), 0.7 (
2
/
3
), 1.0, 2.0, and 3.0 EV. Bracketing programs with an
increment of 2.0 or 3.0 EV offer a maximum of 5 shots. If a value of
7 or 9 was selected in Step 1, the number of shots will
automatically be set to 5.
•
The bracketing programs with an increment of 0.3 EV are listed
below.
Control
panel
Exposure and flash
bracketing
indicator
No. of
shots
Bracketing order
0F 0.3 00
3F 0.3 3 0/−0.3/+0.3
5F 0.3 5 0/−0.7/−0.3/+0.3/+0.7
7F 0.3 7
0/−1.0/−0.7/−0.3/
+0.3/+0.7/+1.0
9F 0.3 9
0/−1.3/−1.0/−0.7/−0.3/
＋
0.3/
＋
0.7/
＋
1.0/
＋
1.3
180
Bracketing
3
Take pictures.
•
Take the number of pictures in the bracketing
program.
•
The modified values for shutter speed and aperture
are shown in the display.
•
While bracketing is in effect, the shooting display shows a
bracketing icon, a bracketing progress indicator, and the number
of shots remaining in the bracketing sequence. After each shot, a
segment will disappear from the indicator and the number of
shots remaining will be reduced by one.
•
The control panel shows a
M
icon and a bracketing progress
indicator. A segment disappears from the indicator after each
shot.
•
Exposure changes due to bracketing are added to those made
with exposure compensation.
No. shots: 3
Increment: 0.7
Display after first shot
No. shots: 3
Increment: 0.7
Display after first shot
181
Bracketing
A
Bracketing Options
When [AE & flash bracketing] is selected, the camera varies both exposure
and flash level. Select [AE bracketing] to vary only exposure, [Flash
bracketing] to vary only flash level. Note that flash bracketing is available in
i-TTL and, where supported, auto aperture (
q
A) flash control modes only
(
0
425, 816).
A
Exposure and Flash Bracketing
•
[Number of shots] and [Increment] can also be selected via the [Auto
bracketing] item in the photo shooting menu.
•
In continuous release modes, shooting will pause after the number of shots
specified in the bracketing program have been taken. Shooting will resume
the next time the shutter-release button is pressed.
•
If the camera is turned off before all shots in the sequence have been
taken, bracketing will resume from the first shot in the sequence when the
camera is turned on.
182
Bracketing
A
Exposure Bracketing
The settings (shutter speed and/or aperture) altered during exposure
bracketing vary with the shooting mode.
1If [ON] is selected for [ISO sensitivity settings]> [Auto ISO sensitivity
control] in the photo shooting menu, the camera will automatically vary
ISO sensitivity for optimum exposure when the limits of the camera
exposure system are exceeded.
2If [ON] is selected for [ISO sensitivity settings]> [Auto ISO sensitivity
control] in the photo shooting menu, the camera will vary ISO sensitivity.
3 Use Custom Setting e6 [Auto bracketing (mode M)] to choose whether
the camera varies both shutter speed and aperture or any one of shutter
speed, aperture, and ISO sensitivity when [OFF] is selected for [ISO
sensitivity settings] > [Auto ISO sensitivity control] in the photo
shooting menu.
❚❚
Cancelling Bracketing
To cancel bracketing, press the BKT button and rotate the main
command dial until the number of shots in the bracketing sequence is
zero (0F). The program last in effect will be restored the next time
bracketing is activated. Bracketing can also be cancelled by performing
a two-button reset (
0
209), although in this case the bracketing
program will not be restored the next time bracketing is activated.
Mode Setting
P Shutter speed and aperture
1
S Aperture
1
A Shutter speed
1
M Shutter speed
2, 3
183
Bracketing
White Balance Bracketing
The camera creates multiple copies of each photograph, each with a
different white balance. To use white balance bracketing:
1
Choose the number of shots.
•
Hold the BKT button and rotate the main command dial to choose
the number of shots in the bracketing sequence.
•
At settings other than [0F], a bracketing icon and indicator will
appear in the shooting display and control panel.
184
Bracketing
2
Select a white balance increment.
•
Hold the BKT button and rotate the sub-command dial to choose
the white balance increment.
•
The size of the increment can be chosen from 1 (1 step), 2 (2 steps),
or 3 (3 steps).
•
Each step is equivalent to 5 mired. Higher “A” values correspond to
increased amounts of amber. Higher “B” values correspond to
increased amounts of blue.
•
The bracketing programs with an increment of 1 are listed below.
Control
panel
White balance
bracketing
indicator
No. of
shots
White
balance
increment
Bracketing
order
0F 1 01 0
3F 1 3 1A, 1B 0/A1/B1
5F 1 5 1A, 1B 0/A2/A1/B1/B2
7F 1 71A, 1B
0/A3/A2/A1/
B1/B2/B3
9F 1 91A, 1B
0/A4/A3/A2/A1/
B1/B2/B3/B4
185
Bracketing
3
Take pictures.
•
Each shot will be processed to create the number of
copies specified in the bracketing program, and each
copy will have a different white balance.
•
Modifications to white balance are added to the white balance
adjustment made with white balance fine-tuning.
•
If the number of shots in the bracketing program is greater than
the number of exposures remaining, the shutter release will be
disabled. Shooting can begin when a new memory card is
inserted.
D
White Balance Bracketing Restrictions
White balance bracketing is not available at image quality settings of NEF
(RAW) or NEF (RAW) + JPEG.
A
White Balance Bracketing
•
[Number of shots] and [Increment] can also be selected via the [Auto
bracketing] item in the photo shooting menu.
•
White balance bracketing affects only color temperature (the amber–blue
axis in the white balance fine-tuning display). No adjustments are made on
the green–magenta axis.
•
If the camera is turned off while the memory card access lamp is lit, the
camera will power off only after all photographs in the sequence have
been recorded.
•
In self-timer mode, the number of copies specified in the white balance
bracketing program will be created each time the shutter is released,
regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting c2 [Self-timer]>
[Number of shots].
186
Bracketing
❚❚
Cancelling Bracketing
To cancel bracketing, press the BKT button and rotate the main
command dial until the number of shots in the bracketing sequence is
zero (0F). The program last in effect will be restored the next time
bracketing is activated. Bracketing can also be cancelled by performing
a two-button reset (
0
209), although in this case the bracketing
program will not be restored the next time bracketing is activated.
187
Bracketing
ADL Bracketing
The camera varies Active D-Lighting (ADL) over a series of exposures. To
use ADL bracketing:
1
Choose the number of shots.
•
Hold the BKT button and rotate the main command dial to choose
the number of shots in the bracketing sequence.
•
At settings other than [0F], a bracketing icon and indicator will
appear in the shooting display and control panel.
188
Bracketing
•
The number of shots determines the bracketing sequence:
•
If you selected 5 shots, you can choose from bracketing sequences
[H1] and [H2] by holding the BKT button and rotating the sub-
command dial.
•
If you chose more than two shots, proceed to Step 3.
No. of shots Bracketing sequence
2
[Off]
→
Value selected in Step 2
3
[Off]
→
[Low]
→
[Normal]
4
[Off]
→
[Low]
→
[Normal]
→
[High]
5
[H1]
[Off]
→
[Low]
→
[Normal]
→
[High]
→
[Extra high 1]
[H2]
[Low]
→
[Normal]
→
[High]
→
[Extra high 1]
→
[Extra high 2]
189
Bracketing
2
Choose the Active D-Lighting amount.
•
Hold the BKT button and rotate the sub-command dial to choose
the Active D-Lighting setting for the second shot when the
number of shots in the bracketing sequence is 2.
•
The bracketing sequence varies with the Active D-Lighting
amount as follows:
Amount Bracketing sequence
[L]
[Off]
→
[Low]
[N]
[Off]
→
[Normal]
[H]
[Off]
→
[High]
[H1]
[Off]
→
[Extra high 1]
[H2]
[Off]
→
[Extra high 2]
[AUTO]
[Off]
→
[Auto]
190
Bracketing
3
Take pictures.
•
Take the number of pictures in the
bracketing program.
•
While bracketing is in effect, the
shooting display shows an ADL bracketing icon and the number of
shots remaining in the bracketing sequence. After each shot, the
number of shots remaining will be reduced by one.
•
The control panel shows a
M
icon and a bracketing progress
indicator. A segment disappears from the indicator after each
shot.
D
ADL Bracketing
•
[Number of shots] and [Amount] can also be selected via the [Auto
bracketing] item in the photo shooting menu.
•
In continuous release modes, shooting will pause after the number of shots
specified in the bracketing program have been taken. Shooting will resume
the next time the shutter-release button is pressed.
•
If the camera is turned off before all shots in the sequence have been
taken, bracketing will resume from the first shot in the sequence when the
camera is turned on.
No. shots: 3 Display after first shot
191
Bracketing
❚❚
Cancelling Bracketing
To cancel bracketing, press the BKT button and rotate the main
command dial until the number of shots in the bracketing sequence is
zero (0F). The program last in effect will be restored the next time
bracketing is activated. Bracketing can also be cancelled by performing
a two-button reset (
0
209), although in this case the bracketing
program will not be restored the next time bracketing is activated.
192
Picture Controls
About Picture Controls
Choose image processing (“Picture Control”) options for new photos
according to the scene or your creative intent.
❚❚
Choosing a Picture Control
At default settings, Picture Controls can be selected by holding the
g
(Fn4) button and rotating the main command dial. The selected
option is shown by an icon in the shooting display.
•
When a Creative Picture Control is selected, the effect level can be
chosen by holding the
g
(Fn4) button and rotating the sub-
command dial.
•
The Picture Control for videos can be selected by pressing the
g
(Fn4) button in video mode.
Picture Controls
193
Picture Controls
Option Description
n
[Auto]
The camera automatically adjusts hues and
tones based on the [Standard] (photo mode) or
[Neutral] (video mode) Picture Control.
Q
[Standard]
Standard processing for balanced results.
Recommended for most situations.
R
[Neutral]
Minimal processing for natural results. Choose
for photographs that will later be processed or
retouched.
S
[Vivid]
Pictures are enhanced for a vivid, photoprint
effect. Choose for photographs that emphasize
primary colors.
T
[Monochrome] Take monochrome photographs.
o
[Portrait]
Smooth complexions for natural-looking
portraits.
p
[Landscape] Shoot vibrant landscapes and cityscapes.
q
[Flat]
Details are preserved over a wide tone range,
from highlights to shadows. Choose for
photographs that will later be extensively
processed or retouched.
k
01–
k
20
Creative
Picture Control
Creative Picture Controls offer unique
combinations of hue, tone, saturation, and other
settings tuned for particular effects. Choose from
a total of 20 options, including [Dream] and
[Morning].
194
Picture Controls
D
“Set Picture Control”
•
Picture Controls can also be selected using the [Set Picture Control] items
in the photo shooting and video recording menus.
•
The [Set Picture Control] item in the video recording menu also offers a
[Same as photo settings] option that sets the Picture Control for videos to
the same as that used for photographs.
195
Picture Controls
Modifying Picture Controls
Picture Controls can be adapted to suit the scene or the photographer’s
creative intent.
1
Select a Picture Control.
Select [Set Picture Control] in the photo
shooting or video recording menu and
then highlight the desired Picture Control
and press
2
.
2
Adjust settings.
•
Press
1
or
3
to highlight settings. Press
4
or
2
to choose a value in increments
of 1, or rotate the sub-command dial to
choose a value in increments of 0.25.
•
The options available vary with the
Picture Control selected.
•
To quickly adjust levels for balanced [Sharpening], [Mid-range
sharpening], and [Clarity], highlight [Quick sharp] and press
4
or
2
.
•
To abandon any changes and start over from default settings,
press the
O
(
Q
) button.
3
Save changes and exit.
Press
J
to save changes. Picture Controls
that have been modified from default
settings are indicated by an asterisk (“
U
”).
196
Picture Controls
❚❚
Picture Control Settings
Option Description
[Effect level] Mute or heighten the effect of Creative Picture Controls.
[Quick sharp]
Use [Quick sharp] to quickly adjust levels for balanced
[Sharpening], [Mid-range sharpening], and [Clarity].
These parameters can also be adjusted individually.
[Sharpening] Control the sharpness of details and outlines.
[Mid-range
sharpening]
Adjust the sharpness of patterns and lines in the range
between [Sharpening] and [Clarity].
[Clarity]
Adjust overall sharpness and the sharpness of thicker
outlines without affecting brightness or dynamic range.
[Contrast] Adjust contrast.
[Brightness]
Raise or lower brightness without loss of detail in
highlights or shadows.
[Saturation] Control the vividness of colors.
[Hue] Adjust hue.
[Filter effects]
Simulate the effect of color filters on monochrome
pictures.
[Toning]
Choose the tint used in monochrome pictures. Pressing
3
when an option other than [B&W] (black-and-white)
is selected displays saturation options.
[Toning]
(Creative Picture
Controls)
Choose the shade of color used for Creative Picture
Controls.
197
Picture Controls
D
The
j
Indicator
The
j
indicator under the value display in the
Picture Control setting menu indicates the
previous value for the setting.
D
[A] (Auto)
•
Selecting the A (auto) option available for some settings lets the camera
adjust the setting automatically.
•
Results vary with exposure and the position of the subject in the frame.
D
[Filter Effects]
Choose from the following [Filter effects]:
* The term in parentheses is the name of the corresponding third-party
color filter for black-and-white photography.
D
The “Auto” Picture Control
Settings can be adjusted in the range [A−2] to
[A+2].
Option Description
[Y] (yellow)
*
These options enhance contrast and can be used to tone
down the brightness of the sky in landscape
photographs. Orange [O] produces more contrast than
yellow [Y], red [R] more contrast than orange.
[O] (orange)
*
[R] (red)
*
[G] (green)
*
Green softens skin tones. Use for portraits and the like.
198
Picture Controls
A
The
i
Menu
Highlighting [Set Picture Control] in the
i
menu and pressing
J
displays a Picture
Control list. Highlight a Picture Control and
press
3
to edit settings while previewing the
effect in the display.
•
Press
1
or
3
to highlight settings. Press
4
or
2
to choose a value in increments of 1, or
rotate the sub-command dial to choose a value in increments of 0.25.
•
The options available vary with the Picture Control selected.
•
To abandon any changes and start over from default settings, press the
O
(
Q
) button.
•
Press
J
to save changes.
•
Picture Controls that have been modified from
default settings are indicated by an asterisk
(“
U
”).
199
Picture Controls
Custom Picture Controls
Save modified Picture Controls as custom Picture Controls.
❚❚
Creating Custom Picture Controls
1
Highlight [Manage Picture Control] in
the photo shooting or video recording
menu and press
2
.
2
Select [Save/edit].
Highlight [Save/edit] and press
2
to view
[Choose Picture Control] options.
Option Description
[Save/edit]
Create a new custom Picture Control based on an existing
preset or custom Picture Control, or edit existing custom
Picture Controls.
[Rename] Rename custom Picture Controls.
[Delete] Delete custom Picture Controls.
[Load/save] Copy custom Picture Controls to and from a memory card.
200
Picture Controls
3
Select a Picture Control.
•
Highlight an existing Picture Control
and press
2
to display edit options.
•
To save a copy of the highlighted Picture
Control without further modification,
press
J
. [Save as] options will be
displayed; proceed to Step 5.
4
Adjust settings.
•
The options and procedure are the same
as for [Set Picture Control].
•
Press
J
to display [Save as] options
when settings are complete.
•
To abandon any changes and start over
from default settings, press the
O
(
Q
)
button.
5
Select a destination.
Choose a destination for the custom
Picture Control (C-1 through C-9).
201
Picture Controls
6
Name the Picture Control.
•
Pressing
2
when a destination is
highlighted in the previous step displays
the [Rename] text-entry dialog.
•
The default name, created by adding a
two-digit number to the name of the
existing Picture Control, appears in the
text display area. The two-digit number
is generated automatically by the camera.
•
Custom Picture Control names can be up to nineteen characters
long.
•
For information on text entry, see “Text Entry” (
0
64).
7
Press the
X
button.
•
Text entry will end.
•
The new Picture Control will be added to
the Picture Control list.
202
Picture Controls
D
The Original Picture Control Icon
The original preset Picture Control on which the
custom Picture Control is based is indicated by
an icon in the edit display.
D
Custom Picture Control Options
The options available with custom Picture Controls are the same as those on
which the custom Picture Control was based.
203
Picture Controls
D
Sharing Custom Picture Controls
The [Load/save] item in the [Manage Picture
Control] menu can be used to copy custom
Picture Controls from the camera to a memory
card. You can also delete custom Picture Controls
or copy them from a memory card to the camera
(the memory card must be inserted in Slot 1, as
memory cards inserted in Slot 2 will not be
detected).
•
[Copy to camera]: Copy (import) custom Picture Controls from the
memory card to the camera. The Picture Controls are copied to custom
Picture Controls C-1 through C-9 on the camera and can be named as
desired.
•
[Delete from card]: Delete selected custom Picture Controls from the
memory card.
•
[Copy to card]: Copy (export) a custom Picture Control from the camera to
a memory card. Highlight a destination (1 through 99) for the selected
Picture Control and press
J
to export it to the memory card.
204
Location Data
The built-in location data unit records the camera’s current latitude,
longitude, and altitude, together with the current time (Coordinated
Universal Time, or UTC). Location data embedded in pictures can be
viewed in the location data page of the playback photo info display
(
0
238).
Location Data Options
To enable or disable the location data function or adjust location data
settings, highlight [Location data (built-in)] in the setup menu and
press
2
.
Location Data
Option Description
[Record
location data]
Select [ON] to enable the location data function.
[Standby timer]
If [ON] is selected when [Record location data] is set to
[ON], the standby timer will expire if no operations are
performed for the period chosen using Custom Setting
c3 [Power off delay]> [Standby timer]. Choose this
option to reduce the drain on the battery.
[Set clock from
satellite]
Select [ON] to synchronize the camera clock with the
time reported by the location data function.
[Create log]
Record a track log.
•
[Log location data]: The camera will log location data
at the interval chosen using [Log interval] for the time
selected for [Log length]. To end, pause, or resume the
log, highlight [Log location data] and press
2
.
•
[Log interval]: Choose how often the camera logs its
current location.
•
[Log length]: Choose how long logging will continue.
205
Location Data
❚❚
The Satellite Signal Indicator
Signal strength is shown by a
o
icon in the
shooting display.
•
o
(static): The camera records the current
latitude, longitude, and altitude.
•
o
(flashing): The camera is unable to
determine its location from the satellite
signal; location data are not recorded. Wait for the
o
icon to stop
flashing.
•
o
not displayed: The
o
icon clears from the display if no signal is
received for two seconds. Location data will not be recorded with
pictures taken when the icon is not displayed. Note, however, that
location data previously acquired may be recorded with pictures
taken after the icon has cleared from the display.
[Log list]
List track logs by date.
•
Where multiple logs were recorded on the same day,
an identifier appears after the date.
•
The camera can store up to 100 track logs.
•
To delete a log, highlight it and press
O
(
Q
).
[Position]
View the latitude, longitude, altitude, and Coordinated
Universal Time (UTC) currently reported by the built-in
location data unit. UTC data are provided by the built-in
location data unit independently of the camera clock.
Option Description
206
Location Data
D
Cautions: Location Data
•
Turning the camera off does not disable the location data function. The
location data function can be disabled by selecting [OFF] for [Location
data (built-in)]> [Record location data] in the setup menu.
•
The location data recorded with videos are those reported at the start of
recording.
•
The camera may in certain cases need additional time to acquire location
data, for example immediately after the battery is inserted, when the
location data function is enabled for the first time, or after an extended
period of disuse.
•
The positions of navigation satellites change constantly. This may slow or
prevent the acquisition of location data in some locations or at certain
hours of the day.
•
Satellite signals may be blocked or reflected in the locations listed below,
rendering the data acquired less accurate or preventing its acquisition
altogether.
- In buildings or under ground
- Between tall buildings
-Under bridges
- In tunnels
- Near power lines or similar structures
- In dense forest
- In metal briefcases or other containers
•
The presence of cellular telephones or other devices that produce strong
electromagnetic fields or transmit on frequencies close to those of
navigation satellites may interfere with the acquisition of location data.
•
Where the error in the signal from the satellite is very large, the location
reported by the camera may differ from its actual location by up to several
hundred meters.
•
Due to variability in the precision of the location data acquired, differences
between geodetic systems, and other factors, the location data embedded
in pictures may differ from the location in which they were actually
recorded.
207
Location Data
D
Cautions: Track Logs
•
Track logs will not be recorded if the camera clock is not set or if no
memory card is inserted.
•
To prevent logs being interrupted, be sure the camera battery is fully
charged.
•
Tracking ends if:
- the camera battery runs low,
- the battery is removed, or
-[OFF] is selected for [Location data (built-in)]> [Record location data].
•
Location data will not be logged while the camera is unable to acquire a
satellite signal.
D
Track Logs
•
The time remaining appears in the [Location data (built-in)] display while
logging is in progress.
•
Logs are not interrupted when the camera is turned off or the standby
timer expires. Be sure to monitor the battery level while logging is in
progress.
•
Logs are stored in the “NIKON” > “GNSS” folder on the memory card and
have names of the form “Nyymmddx.log”. Here “yy” is the last two digits of
the current year, “mm” the month, “dd” the day, “x” a single-character
identifier from 0 (zero) to Z assigned in ascending order by the camera, and
“.log” the extension (thus the first log recorded on October 15, 2021, will be
named “N2110150.log”).
•
Logs are in NMEA format. There is however no guarantee that they will
display correctly in all software or on all devices.
208
Location Data
A
SnapBridge
•
You can also use the SnapBridge app to download location data to the
camera from a smartphone or tablet (smart device) via a wireless link even
when location data cannot be acquired using the camera’s built-in location
data unit. See SnapBridge online help for details.
•
Location data downloaded from the smart device will be recorded with
pictures even if [OFF] is selected for [Location data (built-in)]> [Record
location data]. Location data recording can be ended by disabling the
location data feature in the SnapBridge app.
209
Two-Button Reset
The camera settings listed below can be restored to default values by
pressing the two buttons marked with green
I
dots (BKT and
E
) at the
same time and holding them for over two seconds (the shooting display
and control panel turn off briefly while settings are reset).
Photo Shooting Menu
With the exceptions of multiple exposure, interval timer, time-lapse
video, and focus shift, only settings in the current shooting menu bank
are affected.
Two-Button Reset
Option Default
ISO sensitivity settings
ISO sensitivity 100
Auto ISO sensitivity control ON
Maximum sensitivity 25600
Maximum sensitivity with
c
Same as without flash
Minimum shutter speed Auto
White balance
AUTO > Keep white (reduce warm
colors)
Fine-tune A-B: 0, G-M: 0
210
Two-Button Reset
1 The number of shots is reset to zero. The bracketing increment for
exposure, flash, and white balance bracketing is reset to 1. The amount
for the second shot in two-shot ADL bracketing programs is reset to
[Auto].
2 If a multiple exposure is currently in progress, shooting will end and a
multiple exposure will be created from exposures recorded to that point.
If [On (series)] or [On (single photo)] is selected, the multiple exposure
mode will be reset to [Off]. [Number of shots], [Overlay mode], [Save
individual pictures (RAW)] and [Overlay shooting] are not reset.
3[On (series)] and [On (single photo)] are reset to [Off]. [HDR strength]
and [Save individual pictures (RAW)] are not reset.
Set Picture Control Auto
Active D-Lighting Off
Photo flicker reduction OFF
Metering Matrix metering
Focus mode Single AF
AF-area mode Single-point AF
Auto bracketing Off
1
Multiple exposure Off
2
HDR overlay Off
3
Option Default
211
Two-Button Reset
Video Recording Menu
Option Default
ISO sensitivity settings
Maximum sensitivity 25600
Auto ISO control (mode M) ON
ISO sensitivity (mode M) 100
White balance Same as photo settings
Set Picture Control Same as photo settings
HLG quality
Quick sharp 0
Contrast 0
Saturation 0
Hue 0
Active D-Lighting Off
Focus mode Full-time AF
AF-area mode Single-point AF
Electronic VR OFF
212
Two-Button Reset
Custom Settings Menu
Option Default
a9 [Focus mode restrictions] No restrictions
d8 [View mode (photo Lv)] Show effects of settings
d9 [Starlight view (photo Lv)]OFF
d10 [Warm display colors]OFF
e2 [Flash shutter speed]1/60s
f4 [Control lock]
[Shutter speed lock]OFF
[Aperture lock]OFF
[Focus-point lock]OFF
g3 [Control lock]
[Shutter speed lock]OFF
[Aperture lock]OFF
[Focus-point lock]OFF
g5 [Focus mode restrictions] No restrictions
213
Two-Button Reset
Other Settings
Option Default
Focus point Center
Preset focus point Center
Shooting mode P
Flexible program Off
Exposure compensation Off (0.0)
AE lock (hold) Off
Flash mode Fill flash
Flash compensation Off (0.0)
FV lock Off
214
Video File Types
Video Recording
Use [Video file type] in the video recording menu to choose the video
file type.
•
You have a choice of MOV and MP4 formats.
Video File Types
Option Description YCbCr
[ProRes 422 HQ
10-bit (MOV)]
Choose for footage destined for editing
post-production.
•
You have a choice of two tone modes:
[SDR] and [N-Log].
•
Footage is recorded using All-I inter-frame
compression.
•
Audio is recorded in Linear PCM format.
4:2:2
[H.265 10-bit
(MOV)]
This format assumes the footage will be
processed on a powerful computer.
•
You have a choice of three tone modes:
[SDR], [HLG], and [N-Log].
•
Footage is recorded using long GOP inter-
frame compression.
•
Audio is recorded in Linear PCM format.
4:2:0
[H.265 8-bit
(MOV)]
This format offers superior compression.
•
Footage is recorded using long GOP inter-
frame compression.
•
Audio is recorded in Linear PCM format.
[H.264 8-bit
(MP4)]
A widely-supported file type.
•
Footage is recorded using long GOP inter-
frame compression.
•
Audio is recorded in AAC format.
215
Video File Types
Tone Mode
To choose the tone mode, highlight [ProRes 422 HQ 10-bit (MOV)] or
[H.265 10-bit (MOV)] and press
2
.
•
Videos shot using [H.265 8-bit (MOV)] and [H.264 8-bit (MP4)] use
[SDR]; tone-mode selection is not available.
Option Description
[SDR]
This mode supports a normal range of brightnesses (dynamic
range).
[HLG]
This mode supports HDR (high dynamic range;
0
223). It has
a wider dynamic range than SDR.
•
It is available only when [H.265 10-bit (MOV)] is selected
for [Video file type].
[N-Log]
This mode uses Nikon’s unique log curve. Choose for pictures
with a wide dynamic range. 3D LUTs for use with N-Log
curves can be applied post-production for pictures that
display beautifully on monitors that support Rec. 709 (
0
225).
216
Video Frame Size and Rate Options
Video frame size (in pixels) and frame rate can be selected using [Frame
size/frame rate] in the video recording menu. The options available for
frame size vary with the settings chosen for [Video file type] in the
video recording menu.
Video Frame Size and Rate Options
Option
1
Video file type
ProRes 422
HQ 10-bit
H.265 10-bit/
8-bit
H.264 8-bit
[7680×4320; 30p]
2, 3
—
4
—
[7680×4320; 25p]
2, 3
—
4
—
[7680×4320; 24p]
2, 3
—
4
—
[3840×2160; 120p]
2, 4
—
4
—
[3840×2160; 100p]
2, 4
—
4
—
[3840×2160; 60p]
4
44
—
[3840×2160; 50p]
4
44
—
[3840×2160; 30p]
4
44
—
[3840×2160; 25p]
4
44
—
[3840×2160; 24p]
4
44
—
[1920×1080; 120p]
2
44
—
[1920×1080; 100p]
2
44
—
[1920×1080; 60p]
444
[1920×1080; 50p]
444
[1920×1080; 30p]—
44
[1920×1080; 25p]—
44
[1920×1080; 24p]—
44
217
Video Frame Size and Rate Options
1 The frame rates for 120p, 100p, 60p, 50p, 30p, 25p, and 24p are
respectively 119.88 fps, 100 fps, 59.94 fps, 50 fps, 29.97 fps, 25 fps, and
23.976 fps.
2Fixes [Electronic VR] in the video recording menu at [OFF].
3 Videos are recorded in 8K UHD. Not available with DX lenses.
4 Videos are recorded in 4K UHD.
Average Bit Rate
The average bit rate for each [Frame size/frame rate] option is shown
below.
•
ProRes 422 HQ data specifications are available from the Apple
website.
Option
Video file type
H.265 10-bit H.265 8-bit H.264 8-bit
[7680×4320; 30p]
Approx.
400 Mbps
Approx.
370 Mbps
—
[7680×4320; 25p]—
[7680×4320; 24p]—
[3840×2160; 120p]—
[3840×2160; 100p]—
[3840×2160; 60p]
Approx.
340 Mbps
Approx.
300 Mbps
—
[3840×2160; 50p]—
[3840×2160; 30p]
Approx.
190 Mbps
Approx.
150 Mbps
—
[3840×2160; 25p]—
[3840×2160; 24p]—
[1920×1080; 120p]—
[1920×1080; 100p]—
[1920×1080; 60p]
Approx.
100 Mbps
Approx.
80 Mbps
Approx.
50 Mbps
[1920×1080; 50p]
[1920×1080; 30p]
Approx.
50 Mbps
Approx.
40 Mbps
Approx.
30 Mbps
[1920×1080; 25p]
[1920×1080; 24p]
218
Video Image Area Options
The image area for videos can be selected using [Image area]>
[Choose image area] in the video recording menu. The crop used for
filming video varies with the option selected. Regardless of the option
selected, the aspect ratio is 16:9.
•
Select [FX] to shoot videos in what is referred to as “FX-based video
format”, [DX] to shoot in “DX-based video format”.
•
Selecting [DX] for [Choose image area] or mounting a DX lens on the
camera with [3840×2160; 120p], [3840×2160; 100p], [1920×1080;
120p], or [1920×1080; 100p] chosen for [Frame size/frame rate]
increases the apparent focal length by approximately 2.3× when
compared to FX format.
Video Image Area Options
219
Video Image Area Options
•
The option currently selected is shown by
an icon in the display. If [ON] is chosen for
[Image area]> [DX crop alert] in the video
recording menu, an image-area icon will
flash in the shooting display when the DX
or 2.3× crop is selected.
•
The sizes of the different crops are shown below.
•
DX-based video format is selected automatically when a DX lens is
attached.
•
When 7680 × 4320 is selected for frame size, image area is fixed at
[FX]. The frame size changes to 3840 × 2160 when a DX lens is
attached.
•
Selecting [ON] for [Electronic VR] in the video recording menu
reduces the size of the crop.
Format Size
FX-based video format Approx. 35.9 × 20.2 mm
DX-based video format Approx. 23.5 × 13.2 mm
2.3× Approx. 16.7 × 9.4 mm
220
Points to Note When Filming Videos
Note the following points when recording videos:
•
Each video can be up to 125 minutes in length.
•
Each video recorded to a card with a capacity of 32 GB or less will be
saved across a maximum of 8 files. Each of these files will be a
maximum of 4 GB in size. The number of files and the length of each
file vary with the options selected for [Frame size/frame rate].
•
If [ProRes 422 HQ 10-bit (MOV)] is selected for [Video file type] in
the video recording menu and the memory card has a capacity of
32 GB or less, recording will automatically end when the file reaches
4 GB in size. Videos are not recorded across multiple files.
•
Depending on memory card write speed, shooting may end before
the maximum length is reached.
•
A
0
icon (
0
94) indicates that videos cannot be recorded.
•
[Spot metering] is not available during video recording.
•
Flash lighting (
0
423) cannot be used.
Points to Note When Filming Videos
221
Points to Note When Filming Videos
A
Video Recording: Shooting Mode
The exposure settings that can be adjusted during filming vary with the
shooting mode:
1 Exposure control in mode S is the same as in mode P.
2 The maximum ISO sensitivity for videos recorded with [ON] selected for
[Electronic VR] in the video recording menu is ISO 25600.
3 The upper limit for ISO sensitivity can be selected using the [ISO
sensitivity settings]> [Maximum sensitivity] item in the video
recording menu.
4If [ON] is selected for [ISO sensitivity settings] > [Auto ISO control
(mode M)] in the video recording menu, the upper limit for ISO
sensitivity can be selected using [Maximum sensitivity].
A
Adjusting White Balance During Video Recording
White balance can be adjusted during video recording by holding the
U
button and rotating a command dial.
Mode Aperture Shutter speed ISO sensitivity
2
P, S
1
—— —
3
A
4
——
3
M
44 4
4
222
Points to Note When Filming Videos
A
Using a Fixed Shutter Speed
In mode M, shutter speed can be set to values between
1
/
25
s and
1
/
32000
s
(the slowest available shutter speed varies with the frame rate).
A
Wireless Remote Controllers and Remote Cords
If [Record videos] is selected for Custom Setting g2 [Custom controls]>
[Shutter-release button], the shutter-release buttons on optional wireless
remote controllers and remote cords can be pressed halfway to focus or
pressed all the way down to start and end video recording.
A
Using an External Microphone
Third-party microphones with 3.5 mm mini-jack plugs can be used to record
audio for videos.
•
Use [Mic jack plug-in power] in the video recording menu to choose
whether the power for the external microphone is supplied by the camera
(
0
590).
223
Recording HLG Video
Video recorded in Hybrid Log Gamma (HLG) format can be used for HDR
broadcasting and the like. To record HLG video, select [H.265 10-bit
(MOV)] for [Video file type] in the video recording menu and choose
the [HLG] tone mode.
•
o
will appear in the shooting display.
•
For optimal color reproduction when viewing HLG footage, use
computers, operating systems, applications, monitors, and other
equipment compatible with HDR.
D
Cautions: HLG Video
•
The lowest value available for the [ISO sensitivity settings] > [Maximum
sensitivity] item in the video recording menu is ISO 800.
•
The lowest value available for the [ISO sensitivity settings]> [ISO
sensitivity (mode M)] item in the video recording menu is ISO 400.
•
ISO sensitivities of Hi 0.3 through Hi 2.0 are not available.
•
Picture Control settings cannot be adjusted using the [Set Picture
Control] item in the video recording menu. You can control the
appearance of HLG videos using [HLG quality] in the video recording
menu.
•
The [Active D-Lighting] item in the video recording menu is set to [Off]
and cannot be changed.
•
The display in the monitor may flicker or appear grainy.
•
The camera may have trouble focusing using autofocus but this does not
indicate a malfunction.
D
HDR (HLG) Output
Optimal color reproduction in HDR (HLG) footage output via HDMI can only
be achieved if your storage device, monitor, and other equipment support
HDR (HLG). If a signal is received from the connected device indicating that it
supports HDR (HLG), the camera will respond with a “gamma: HLG” identifier.
Recording HLG Video
224
Recording HLG Video
View Assist
You may find that the preview in the shooting display during HLG
recording lacks contrast. Selecting [ON] for Custom Setting g8 [View
assist] simplifies colors for enhanced contrast.
•
p
will appear in the shooting display.
•
Colors in the actual recorded footage are unaffected.
•
Contrast is also enhanced when HLG footage is viewed on the camera.
225
Recording N-Log Video
Log recording uses light levels digitized via a log function. To enable log
recording using Nikon’s unique “N-Log” log function, select [ProRes
422 HQ 10-bit (MOV)] or [H.265 10-bit (MOV)] for [Video file type] in
the video recording menu and choose [N-Log] as the tone mode.
Choose N-Log to preserve details in highlights and shadows and avoid
over-saturated colors when recording videos.
•
n
will appear in the shooting display.
•
N-Log recording is intended for footage that will be processed using
color grading post-production. Color grading can be used to achieve
multiple effects from a single sequence by processing it in different
ways.
•
Compatible third-party software is required for color grading.
•
Applying N-Log 3D LUTs during color grading produces video that
displays beautifully on monitors compatible with Rec. 709.
- N-Log 3D LUTs are available from the Nikon Download Center.
https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/
Recording N-Log Video
226
Recording N-Log Video
D
Cautions: N-Log Video
•
The lowest value available for the [ISO sensitivity settings] > [Maximum
sensitivity] item in the video recording menu is ISO 1600.
•
The lowest value available for the [ISO sensitivity settings]> [ISO
sensitivity (mode M)] item in the video recording menu is ISO 800.
•
ISO sensitivities of Hi 0.3 through Hi 2.0 are not available.
•
[Set Picture Control] and [High ISO NR] are not available in the video
recording menu.
•
The [Active D-Lighting] item in the video recording menu is set to [Off]
and cannot be changed.
•
The display in the monitor may flicker or appear grainy.
•
The camera may have trouble focusing using autofocus but this does not
indicate a malfunction.
View Assist
You may find that the preview in the shooting display during N-Log
recording lacks contrast. Selecting [ON] for Custom Setting g8 [View
assist] simplifies colors for enhanced contrast.
•
p
will appear in the shooting display.
•
Colors in the actual recorded footage are unaffected.
•
Contrast is also enhanced when N-Log footage is viewed on the
camera.
227
Viewing Pictures
Viewing and Retouching
Pictures
Full-Frame Playback
Press the
K
button to view the most recent picture full frame in the
display.
•
Press
4
to return to the previous frame,
2
to skip to the next frame.
•
Press
1
,
3
, or the DISP button to view more information on the
current picture (
0
230).
Viewing Pictures
228
Viewing Pictures
Thumbnail Playback
To view multiple pictures, press the
W
(
Q
)
button when a picture is displayed full frame.
•
The number of pictures displayed increases from 4 to 9 to 72 each
time the
W
(
Q
) button is pressed, and decreases with each press of
the
X
button.
•
Highlight pictures using
1
,
3
,
4
, or
2
.
229
Viewing Pictures
D
Touch Controls
Touch controls can be used when pictures are displayed in the monitor
(
0
54).
D
Rotate Tall
To display “tall” (portrait-orientation)
photographs in tall orientation, select [ON] for
[Rotate tall] in the playback menu.
D
Picture Review
When [On] is selected for [Picture review] in the playback menu,
photographs are automatically displayed after shooting; there is no need for
you to press the
K
button.
•
If [On (monitor only)] is selected, photos will not be displayed in the
viewfinder.
•
In continuous release modes, display begins when shooting ends, with the
first photograph in the current series displayed.
•
Pictures are not rotated automatically during picture review even when
[ON] is selected for [Rotate tall] in the playback menu.
230
Photo Information
Photo information is superimposed on pictures displayed in full-frame
playback. Press
1
,
3
, or the DISP button to cycle through photo
information as shown below.
* Displayed only if the corresponding option is selected for [Playback
display options] in the playback menu.
Photo Information
1
File information
2
Exposure data
*
3
Highlight display
*
4
RGB histogram
*
5
Shooting data
*
6
Overview data
*
7
None (picture only)
*
231
Photo Information
File Information
* Displayed only if [Focus point] is selected for [Playback display options]
in the playback menu.
1 3 6 7
8
1112
10 9
2 54
15
13
14
16
1
Voice memo indicator (
0
295)
2
Protect status (
0
249)
3
Retouch indicator (
0
264)
4
Upload marking (
0
253)
5
IPTC preset indicator (
0
726)
6
Focus point
*
(
0
123)
7
Frame number/total number of
frames
8
Image quality (
0
105)
9
Image size (
0
108)
10
Image area (
0
102)
11
Time of recording (
0
709)
12
Date of recording (
0
709)
13
Current card slot
14
Rating (
0
251)
15
Folder name (
0
497)
16
File name (
0
502)
232
Photo Information
Exposure Data
* Displayed in red if the picture was taken with auto ISO sensitivity control
enabled.
Highlight Display
54367
21
1
Current card slot
2
Folder number–frame number
(
0
497)
3
Shooting mode (
0
132)
4
Shutter speed (
0
133, 135)
5
Aperture (
0
134, 135)
6
Exposure compensation value
(
0
143)
7
ISO sensitivity
*
(
0
154)
1
1
Highlights (areas that may be
overexposed) flash in the
display.
233
Photo Information
RGB Histogram
D
Playback Zoom
To zoom in on the picture in the histogram
display, press
X
. The histogram will be updated
to show only the data for the portion of the
picture visible in the display. Use the multi
selector to scroll to areas of the frame not visible
in the monitor. Press
W
(
Q
) to zoom out.
2
3
4
5
1
1
White balance (
0
158)
Color temperature (
0
167)
Preset manual (
0
170)
White balance fine-tuning
(
0
163)
2
Histogram (RGB channel)
3
Histogram (red channel)
4
Histogram (green channel)
5
Histogram (blue channel)
234
Photo Information
D
Histograms
Histograms show tone distribution. Pixel brightness (tone) is plotted on the
horizontal axis and the number of pixels on the vertical axis.
•
If the picture contains objects
with a wide range of
brightnesses, the distribution of
tones will be relatively even.
•
If the picture is dark, the
distribution will be shifted to the
left.
•
If the picture is bright, the
distribution will be shifted to the
right.
Increasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution of tones to the
right, while decreasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution to the
left. Histograms can provide a rough idea of overall exposure when bright
ambient lighting makes it difficult to see pictures in the monitor.
D
The Histogram Display
•
RGB histograms show tone distribution.
•
Camera histograms may differ from those displayed in imaging
applications. Use them as a guide to actual tone distribution.
235
Photo Information
Shooting Data
View the settings in effect at the time the picture was taken. The
shooting data list has multiple pages, which can be viewed by pressing
1
or
3
. The information displayed can be selected using [Playback
display options]> [Detailed shooting data] in the playback menu.
❚❚
Basic Shooting Data
1 Displayed in red if the picture was taken with auto ISO sensitivity control
enabled.
2 Displayed if Custom Setting b6 [Fine-tune optimal exposure] has been
set to a value other than zero.
3 Also includes the color temperature for pictures taken using
4
[Auto]
or
D
[Natural light auto].
1
Metering (
0
520)
Shutter speed (
0
133, 135)
Aperture (
0
134, 135)
2
Shooting mode (
0
132)
ISO sensitivity
1
(
0
154)
6
5
4
3
2
1
7
8
9
10
11
3
Exposure compensation value
(
0
143)
Optimal exposure tuning
2
(
0
615)
4
Focal length
5
Lens data
6
Focus mode (
0
110)
AF-area mode (
0
113)
7
Vibration reduction (
0
526)
8
White balance
3
(
0
158)
9
White balance fine-tuning
(
0
163)
10
Color space (
0
511)
11
Camera name
236
Photo Information
❚❚
Flash Data
Flash data are displayed only for pictures taken with optional flash units
(
0
422, 437).
❚❚
Picture Control/HLG Data
The items displayed vary with the Picture Control in effect when the
picture was taken. The display for HLG videos shows the options
selected for [HLG quality] in the video recording menu.
3
2
1
4
1
Flash type
2
Remote flash control
3
Flash mode (
0
429)
4
Flash control mode (
0
426)
Flash compensation (
0
432)
1
1
Picture Control (
0
192)
HLG quality (
0
582)
237
Photo Information
❚❚
Other Shooting Data
❚❚
Copyright Information
Copyright information is only displayed if recorded using the
[Copyright information] item in the setup menu at the time the
picture was taken.
4
3
2
1
5
6
1
High ISO NR (
0
515)
Long-exposure noise reduction
(
0
514)
2
Active D-Lighting (
0
512)
3
HDR strength (
0
537)
4
Vignette control (
0
516)
5
History of retouches made
using [Retouch] option in
playback
i
menu (
0
264).
Changes are listed in the order
applied.
6
Image comment (
0
724)
1
2
1
Photographer (
0
725)
2
Copyright holder (
0
725)
238
Photo Information
❚❚
Location Data
Location data are displayed only if embedded in the picture at the time
it was taken.
❚❚
IPTC Data
3
2
1
4
1
Latitude
2
Longitude
3
Altitude
4
Universal Coordinated Time
(UTC)
12
11
10
9
8
13
14
5
4
3
2
1
6
7
1
Caption
2
Event ID
3
Headline
4
Object name
5
City
6
State
7
Country
8
Category
9
Supp. Cat.
(Supplemental categories)
10
Byline
11
Byline title
12
Writer/Editor
13
Credit
14
Source
240
Photo Information
1 Displayed in red if the picture was taken with auto ISO sensitivity control
enabled.
2 Displayed only if photo was taken with optional flash unit (
0
422, 437).
14
19
20
8 9 10 11 12 13
1234567
17 16 15
18
1
Voice memo indicator (
0
295)
2
Protect status (
0
249)
3
Retouch indicator (
0
264)
4
Upload marking (
0
253)
5
IPTC preset indicator (
0
726)
6
Location data indicator (
0
204)
7
Image comment indicator
(
0
724)
8
Metering (
0
520)
9
Shooting mode (
0
132)
10
Shutter speed (
0
133, 135)
11
Aperture (
0
134, 135)
12
ISO sensitivity
1
(
0
154)
13
Focal length
14
Active D-Lighting (
0
512)
15
Picture Control (
0
192)
16
Color space (
0
511)
17
Flash mode
2
(
0
429)
18
White balance (
0
158)
Color temperature (
0
167)
Preset manual (
0
170)
White balance fine-tuning
(
0
163)
19
Flash compensation
2
(
0
432)
Commander mode
2
20
Exposure compensation value
(
0
143)
241
The
i
Button (Playback Mode)
Pressing the
i
button during playback zoom or full-frame or thumbnail
playback displays the
i
menu for playback mode. Highlight items and
press
J
or
2
to select.
Press the
i
button again to return to playback.
Photos
The
i
Button (Playback Mode)
Option Description
[Quick crop]
1
Save a copy of the current picture cropped to the
area visible in the display. This option is not available
when RGB histograms are displayed (
0
233).
[Rating] Rate the current picture (
0
251).
[Select for upload
to smart device]
Select the current picture for upload (
0
253). The
option displayed varies with the destination currently
selected for upload.
[Select for upload
to computer]
[Select for upload
(FTP)]
242
The
i
Button (Playback Mode)
[Select all for
computer upload]
Mark for upload all pictures meeting the current filter
criteria (
0
255).
•
These options are displayed only if the camera is
connected to a computer or FTP server.
•
Videos over 4 GB in size cannot be selected for
upload.
[Select all for
upload (FTP)]
[Filtered playback]
View only pictures that match selected criteria
(
0
255).
[Filtered playback
criteria]
Choose filter criteria.
[Record voice
memo]
Add a voice memo to the current picture (
0
295).
[Play voice memo] Play the voice memo for the current picture (
0
298).
[Retouch]
Create a retouched copy of the current picture
(
0
264).
[Jump to copy on
other card]
If the current picture is one of a pair created with
[Backup], [RAW Slot 1 - JPEG Slot 2], or [JPEG Slot 1
- JPEG Slot 2] selected for [Role played by card in
Slot 2], choosing this option displays the copy on the
card in the other slot.
[Choose slot and
folder]
Choose a slot and folder for playback. Highlight a slot
and press
2
to display a list of the folders on the
memory card in the selected slot. You can then
highlight a folder and press
J
to view the pictures it
contains.
Option Description
243
The
i
Button (Playback Mode)
1 Available only during playback zoom.
2 Not available during playback zoom.
3 Available only when a retouched copy (indicated by a
p
icon) or the
source picture for a retouched copy is selected.
[Protect]
Add protection to or remove protection from the
current picture (
0
249).
[Unprotect all]
2
Remove protection from all pictures in the folder
currently selected for [Playback folder] in the
playback menu.
[IPTC]
Embed a selected IPTC preset in the current photo
(
0
726).
[Side-by-side
comparison]
3
Compare retouched copies to the originals.
[Slide show]
View a slide show; the current picture and all
following pictures are displayed one at a time in the
order recorded (
0
257).
Option Description
244
The
i
Button (Playback Mode)
A
[Side-by-Side Comparison]
Choose [Side-by-side comparison] to compare retouched copies with the
unretouched originals.
•
The source picture is displayed on the left, the retouched copy on the right.
•
The options used to create the copy listed at the top of the display.
•
Press
4
or
2
to switch between the source picture and the retouched
copy.
•
If the copy is an overlay created from multiple source pictures, press
1
or
3
to view the other pictures.
•
If the source has been copied multiple times, press
1
or
3
to view the
other copies.
•
To view the highlighted picture full screen, press and hold the
X
button.
•
Press
J
to return to playback with the highlighted picture displayed full-
frame.
•
To exit to playback, press the
K
button.
•
The source picture will not be displayed if the copy was created from a
photograph that is now protected.
•
The source picture will not be displayed if the copy was created from a
photograph that has since been deleted.
1
23
1
Options used to create copy
2
Source picture
3
Retouched copy
245
The
i
Button (Playback Mode)
Videos
Option Description
[Rating] Rate the current picture (
0
251).
[Select for upload
to computer]
Select the current picture for upload (
0
253). These
options are displayed only if the camera is connected
to a computer or FTP server.
[Select for upload
(FTP)]
[Select all for
computer upload]
Mark for upload all pictures meeting the current filter
criteria (
0
255).
•
These options are displayed only if the camera is
connected to a computer or FTP server.
•
Videos over 4 GB in size cannot be selected for
upload.
[Select all for
upload (FTP)]
[Filtered playback]
View only pictures that match selected criteria
(
0
255).
[Filtered playback
criteria]
Choose filter criteria.
[Volume control] Adjust playback volume.
[Trim video]
Trim footage from the current video and save the
edited copy in a new file (
0
290).
[Choose slot and
folder]
Choose a slot and folder for playback. Highlight a slot
and press
2
to display a list of the folders on the
memory card in the selected slot. You can then
highlight a folder and press
J
to view the pictures it
contains.
246
The
i
Button (Playback Mode)
Videos (Playback Paused)
[Protect]
Add protection to or remove protection from the
current picture (
0
249).
[Unprotect all]
Remove protection from all pictures in the folder
currently selected for [Playback folder] in the
playback menu.
[Slide show]
View a slide show; the current picture and all
following pictures are displayed one at a time in the
order recorded (
0
257).
Option Description
9
[Trim video] Trim unwanted footage (
0
290).
4
[Save current
frame]
Save a selected frame as a JPEG still (
0
294).
[Volume control] Adjust playback volume.
Option Description
247
Playback Zoom
To zoom in on a photo displayed in full-frame
playback, press
X
or
J
or give the display two
quick taps. [FX (36×24)]-format photos can
be zoomed in to a maximum of approximately
32× (Large pictures), 24× (Medium), or 16×
(Small). Faces detected during zoom are
indicated by white borders; rotate the sub-
command dial to view other faces.
Using Playback Zoom
Playback Zoom
To Description
Zoom in/
zoom out
•
Press the
X
button
or use stretch
gestures to zoom in.
•
To zoom out, press
W
(
Q
) or use pinch
gestures.
A navigation window is
displayed during the zoom ratio
is altered, with the area currently
visible indicated by a yellow
border. A bar below the
navigation window shows the
zoom ratio, turning green at 1 : 1
(100%). The navigation window
clears from the display after a few
seconds.
248
Playback Zoom
View other
areas of picture
Use the multi selector or glide gestures to view areas of
the picture not visible in the monitor. Keep the multi
selector pressed to scroll rapidly to other areas of frame.
Crop picture
To crop the picture to the area currently visible in the
monitor, press
i
and select [Quick crop].
Select faces
Faces detected during zoom
are indicated by white
borders in the navigation
window. Rotate the sub-
command dial or tap the on-
screen guide to view other
faces.
View other
pictures
Rotate the main command dial to view the same location
in other photos without changing the zoom ratio
(selecting a video cancels zoom). You can also view other
photos by tapping the
e
or
f
icon at the bottom of the
display.
Protect
pictures
Press the
g
(Fn4) button to toggle protection for the
current picture on or off (
0
249).
Exit to shooting
mode
Press the shutter-release button halfway or press the
K
button to exit.
View menus Press the
G
button to view the menus.
To Description
249
Protecting Pictures from Deletion
Pictures can be protected to prevent their being deleted accidentally.
Protected pictures will however be deleted when the memory card is
formatted (
0
708).
1
Select a picture.
•
Display the picture in full-frame playback or playback zoom.
•
Alternatively, you can highlight the picture in the thumbnail list
using the multi selector.
2
Press the
g
(Fn4) button.
•
Protected pictures are marked with a
P
icon.
•
To remove protection, display the
picture or highlight it in the thumbnail
list and press
g
(Fn4) again.
Protecting Pictures from Deletion
250
Protecting Pictures from Deletion
D
Voice Memos
Protecting photos also protects any voice memos recorded with the pictures.
Voice memos cannot be protected separately.
D
Caution: Uploading Protected Pictures via FTP
The copies on the FTP server will not be protected even if the originals are.
Markings can be added using ratings.
A
Removing Protection from All Pictures
To remove protection from all pictures in the folder or folders currently
selected for [Playback folder] in the playback menu, press the
g
(Fn4) and
O
(
Q
) buttons for about two seconds during playback.
251
Rating Pictures
Rate pictures.
1
Select the desired picture with the multi
selector and press the
i
button.
2
Highlight [Rating] and press
2
.
3
Choose a rating.
Rotate the main command dial to
highlight the desired rating and press
J
to select. Choose from ratings of from zero
to five stars, or select
d
to mark the
picture as a candidate for later deletion.
Rating Pictures
252
Rating Pictures
A
Ratings
Ratings can also be viewed in NX Studio.
A
Rating Pictures Using Camera Controls
If [Rating] has been assigned to a control using Custom Setting f3 [Custom
controls (playback)], pictures can be rated by holding the control and
rotating the main command dial.
253
Selecting Pictures for Upload
Follow the steps below to select the current picture for upload to a
smart device, computer, or ftp server.
•
The
i
menu items used to select pictures for upload vary with the type
of device connected:
-[Select for upload to smart device]: Displayed when the camera is
connected to a smart device using [Connect to smart device] in the
network menu (
0
757).
-[Select for upload to computer]: Displayed when the camera is
connected to a computer using [Connect to computer] in the
network menu (
0
760).
-[Select for upload (FTP)]: Displayed when the camera is connected
to an FTP server using [Connect to FTP server] in the network menu
(
0
765).
•
Videos cannot be selected for upload when the camera is connected
to a smart device via the SnapBridge app.
•
The maximum file size for videos uploaded by other means is 4 GB.
Selecting Pictures for Upload
254
Selecting Pictures for Upload
1
Select the desired picture and press the
i
button.
2
Highlight [Select for upload to smart
device], [Select for upload to computer],
or [Select for upload (FTP)] and press
J
.
Pictures destined for a smart device are
marked with a
W
icon, while those
destined for a computer or ftp server are
marked with
s
.
D
Removing Upload Marking
To remove upload marking, repeat Steps 1 and 2.
255
Filtered Playback
Select [Filtered playback] in the
i
menu to view only pictures that
meet the criteria chosen for [Filtered playback criteria] in the playback
menu or playback
i
menu.
[Filtered Playback Criteria]
Highlight options and press
J
to select (
M
) or
deselect (
U
). During filtered playback, only
pictures that meet all criteria marked with a
check (
M
) will be displayed.
Filtered Playback
Option Description
[Protect]
M
: Include protected pictures.
[Picture type]
M
: Include pictures of the selected types.
[Rating]
M
: Include pictures with selected ratings.
[Select for
upload to
computer]
•
Select (
M
) [Uploaded pictures] to include pictures
previously uploaded to a computer or ftp server.
•
Select (
M
) [Pictures not uploaded] to include pictures
that have yet to be uploaded.
•
Select (
M
) both options to include both pictures that
have and pictures that have yet to be uploaded.
[Select for
upload (FTP)]
[Voice memo]
M
: Include pictures with voice memos.
[Retouched
pictures]
M
: Include retouched pictures.
256
Filtered Playback
•
During filtered playback, a white border
appears around the display.
•
To end filtered playback, select [Filtered
playback] again.
257
Viewing Slide Shows
To view a slide show in which pictures are played back one at a time in
the order recorded, select [Slide show] in the
i
menu. You can also
choose how long any photos in the show are displayed.
1
Select the starting picture using the
multi selector and press the
i
button.
The slide show starts with the selected
picture and continues through all the
pictures recorded after it.
2
Highlight [Slide show] and press
2
.
To choose how long photos are displayed,
highlight [Frame interval] and press
2
.
3
Highlight [Start] and press
J
.
•
The slide show will start.
•
In the case of videos, the option selected for [Frame interval] is
ignored; instead, the starting frame will be displayed for short time
before video playback begins.
•
When the show ends, a message will be displayed before normal
playback resumes.
Viewing Slide Shows
258
Viewing Slide Shows
During the Show
The following operations can be performed while the show is in
progress:
To Description
Skip back/skip
ahead
Press
4
to return to the previous frame,
2
to skip to
the next frame.
View additional
photo info
Press
1
,
3
, or DISP to choose the photo info
displayed. To hide photo info, select [None (picture
only)].
Adjust volume Press
X
to increase volume,
W
(
Q
) to decrease.
Exit to playback
mode
Press
K
to end the slide show and return to the
playback display.
259
Deleting Pictures
Follow the steps below to delete pictures from memory cards. Note that
pictures cannot be recovered once deleted. Pictures that are protected,
however, cannot be deleted.
Using the Delete Button
Press the
O
(
Q
) button to delete the current picture.
1
Select the desired picture with the multi
selector and press the
O
(
Q
) button.
•
A confirmation dialog will be displayed.
•
To exit without deleting the picture,
press
K
.
2
Press the
O
(
Q
) button again.
The picture will be deleted.
A
Deleting Copies
If the picture selected in the playback display
when the
O
(
Q
) button is pressed was recorded
with two memory cards inserted and an option
other than [Overflow] selected for [Role played
by card in Slot 2], you will be prompted to
choose whether to delete both copies or only the
copy on the card in the current slot (
0
503).
Deleting Pictures
260
Deleting Pictures
Deleting Multiple Pictures
Use [Delete] in the playback menu to delete multiple pictures at once.
Note that depending on the number of pictures, some time may be
required for deletion.
Option Description
Q
[Selected pictures] Delete selected pictures.
d
[Candidates for
deletion]
Delete pictures rated
d
(candidate for
deletion).
i
[Pictures shot on
selected dates]
Delete all pictures taken on selected dates
(
0
262).
R
[All pictures]
Delete all pictures in the folder currently
selected for [Playback folder] in the playback
menu.
•
If two memory cards are inserted, you can
select the card from which pictures will be
deleted.
261
Deleting Pictures
❚❚
Deleting Selected Pictures
1
Select pictures.
•
Highlight pictures and press the
W
(
Q
) button to select; selected
pictures are marked with a check ( ). To remove the check ( )
and deselect the current picture, press the
W
(
Q
) button again.
•
Repeat until all the desired pictures are selected.
•
To view the highlighted picture full screen, press and hold the
X
button.
2
Delete the pictures.
•
Press
J
; a confirmation dialog will be
displayed.
•
Highlight [Yes] and press
J
to delete
the selected pictures.
262
Deleting Pictures
❚❚
Candidates for Deletion
1
Select pictures.
•
The camera will list all pictures rated
d
(candidate for deletion).
Pictures you do not currently wish to delete can be deselected by
highlighting them using the multi selector and pressing
W
(
Q
).
•
To view the highlighted picture full screen, press and hold the
X
button.
2
Delete the pictures.
•
Press
J
; a confirmation dialog will be displayed.
•
Highlight [Yes] and press
J
to delete the selected pictures.
❚❚
Pictures Shot on Selected Dates
1
Select dates.
•
Highlight dates using the multi selector
and press
2
to select; selected dates are
marked with
M
icons. Selected dates
can be deselected by pressing
2
again.
•
Repeat until you have selected all the
desired dates.
2
Delete the pictures.
•
Press
J
; a confirmation dialog will be
displayed.
•
Highlight [Yes] and press
J
to delete all
the pictures taken on the selected dates.
263
Deleting Pictures
❚❚
Deleting All Pictures
1
Choose a memory card.
Press
1
or
3
to highlight the slot
containing the memory card from which
the pictures will be deleted and press
J
.
2
Delete the pictures.
•
A confirmation dialog will be displayed
showing the name of the folder
containing the photos to be deleted.
Highlight [Yes] and press
J
to delete all
pictures from the folder. The folder is
that previously selected via [Playback
folder] in the playback menu.
•
Note that depending on the number of pictures, some time may
be required for deletion.
264
Creating Retouched Copies
Retouched copies can be created from
existing pictures. Retouched copies are saved
to new files, separate from the original
pictures.
Creating Retouched Copies
Option Description
[RAW processing
(current picture)]
Save a copy of the current NEF (RAW) picture in
another format such as JPEG (
0
267).
[RAW processing
(multiple pictures)]
Select multiple existing NEF (RAW) pictures for
conversion to JPEG or other formats (
0
269).
[Trim]
Create a cropped copy of the current photograph
(
0
273).
[Resize (current
picture)]
Create a small copy of the current photograph
(
0
274).
[Resize (multiple
pictures)]
Create small copies from one or more existing
photos (
0
276).
[D-Lighting] Brighten shadows (
0
280).
[Straighten] Straighten pictures (
0
281).
[Distortion control]
Reduce barrel distortion in pictures taken with
wide-angle lenses or pin-cushion distortion in
pictures taken with telephoto lenses (
0
282).
[Perspective control] Reduce the effects of perspective (
0
283).
[Monochrome]
Create a monochrome copy of the current
photograph (
0
284).
265
Creating Retouched Copies
1
Select the desired picture with the multi
selector and press the
i
button.
You will not need to select a picture if you
are using [RAW processing (multiple
pictures)] or [Resize (multiple pictures)],
as you will be prompted to choose the
pictures later.
2
Highlight [Retouch] and press
2
.
3
Highlight the desired option and press
2
.
4
Select retouch options.
•
For more information, see the section for the selected item.
•
To exit without creating a retouched copy, press
K
. This will
return you to the playback display.
5
Create a retouched copy.
•
For more information, see the section for the selected item.
•
Retouched copies are indicated by a
p
icon.
[Overlay (add)]
Overlay two pictures to create a new picture in
JPEG format (
0
285).
[Lighten]
Compare the pixels at each point in multiple
pictures and select the brightest to create a new
picture in JPEG format (
0
287).
[Darken]
Compare the pixels at each point in multiple
pictures and select the darkest to create a new
picture in JPEG format (
0
287).
Option Description
266
Creating Retouched Copies
D
Cautions: Retouch
•
The camera may not be able to display or retouch images that were taken
or retouched using other cameras or that have been retouched on a
computer.
•
If no actions are performed for a brief period, the display will turn off and
any unsaved changes will be lost. To increase the time the display remains
on, choose a longer menu display time using Custom Setting c3 [Power off
delay]> [Menus].
D
Cautions: Retouching Copies
•
Most items can be applied to copies created using other retouch options,
although multiple edits may result in reduced image quality or unnatural
colors.
•
The effect produced may vary with the order in which edits are performed.
•
Some items may be unavailable depending on the items used to create the
copy.
•
[Retouch] items in the
i
menu that cannot be applied to the current
picture are grayed out and unavailable.
D
Image Quality
•
Copies created from NEF (RAW) pictures are saved at an [Image quality] of
[JPEG fine
m
].
•
Copies created from JPEG pictures are the same quality as the original.
•
In the case of dual-format pictures recorded to the same memory card at
image-quality settings of RAW + JPEG, only the NEF (RAW) copy will be
retouched.
D
Image Size
Except in the case of copies created with [RAW processing (current
picture)], [RAW processing (multiple pictures)], [Trim], [Resize (current
picture)], and [Resize (multiple pictures)], copies are the same size as the
original.
267
Creating Retouched Copies
RAW Processing
RAW processing is used to save NEF (RAW) pictures in other formats,
such as JPEG. Use [RAW processing (current picture)] to process the
current picture, or [RAW processing (multiple pictures)] to process
multiple pictures.
D
Caution: RAW Processing
RAW processing is available only with NEF (RAW) images created with this
camera. Pictures in other formats and NEF (RAW) photos taken with other
cameras or Camera Control Pro 2 cannot be selected.
❚❚
Processing the Current Picture
1
Select [Retouch] in the
i
menu, then
highlight [RAW processing (current
picture)] and press
2
.
2
Choose a destination.
•
Press
1
or
3
to highlight a card slot and
press
J
.
•
You will not be prompted to select the
slot if only one memory card is inserted.
268
Creating Retouched Copies
3
Choose settings for the JPEG copy.
•
The settings in effect when the photograph was taken appear
below a preview.
•
To use the setting in effect when the photograph was taken, if
applicable, select [Original].
•
The effects can be previewed in the edit display. To view the
unedited picture, press and hold the DISP button.
•
[Exposure compensation] can only be set to values between –2
and +2 EV.
4
Copy the photograph.
Highlight [EXE] and press
J
to create a
JPEG copy of the selected photographs.
4
3
2
1
5
9
8
7
6
10
1
Image quality (
0
105)
2
Image size (
0
108)
3
White balance (
0
158)
4
Exposure compensation
(
0
143)
5
Set Picture Control (
0
192)
6
High ISO NR (
0
515)
7
Color space (
0
511)
8
Vignette control (
0
516)
9
Active D-Lighting (
0
512)
10
Diffraction compensation
(
0
517)
269
Creating Retouched Copies
❚❚
Processing Multiple Pictures
1
Select [Retouch] in the
i
menu, then
highlight [RAW processing (multiple
pictures)] and press
2
.
2
Choose how pictures are selected.
If you chose [Select picture(s)], proceed to Step 4.
3
Select the source slot.
•
Highlight the slot with the card
containing the NEF (RAW) images and
press
2
.
•
You will not be prompted to select the
slot if only one memory card is inserted.
Option Description
[Select
picture(s)]
Create JPEG copies of
selected NEF (RAW) pictures.
Multiple NEF (RAW) pictures
can be selected.
[Select
date]
Create JPEG copies of all NEF
(RAW) pictures taken on
selected dates.
[Select
folder]
Create JPEG copies of all NEF
(RAW) pictures in a selected
folder.
270
Creating Retouched Copies
4
Select photographs.
If you chose [Select picture(s)]:
•
Highlight pictures using the multi
selector.
•
To view the highlighted picture full
screen, press and hold the
X
button.
•
To select the highlighted picture, press
the
W
(
Q
) button. Selected pictures are marked with a check ( ).
To remove the check ( ) and deselect the current picture, press
the
W
(
Q
) button again. All pictures will be processed using the
same settings.
•
Press
J
to proceed once selection is complete.
If you chose [Select date]:
•
Highlight dates using the multi selector
and press
2
to select (
M
) or deselect
(
U
).
•
All images taken on dates marked with a
check (
M
) will be processed using the
same settings.
•
Press
J
to proceed once selection is complete.
If you chose [Select folder]:
Highlight a folder and press
J
to select; all images in the selected
folder will be processed using the same settings.
271
Creating Retouched Copies
5
Choose settings for the JPEG copies.
•
To use the settings in effect when the photographs were taken, if
applicable, select [Original].
•
The effects can be previewed in the edit display. To view the
unedited picture, press and hold the DISP button.
•
[Exposure compensation] can only be set to values between –2
and +2 EV.
4
3
2
1
5
9
8
7
6
10
1
Image quality (
0
105)
2
Image size (
0
108)
3
White balance (
0
158)
4
Exposure compensation
(
0
143)
5
Set Picture Control (
0
192)
6
High ISO NR (
0
515)
7
Color space (
0
511)
8
Vignette control (
0
516)
9
Active D-Lighting (
0
512)
10
Diffraction compensation
(
0
517)
272
Creating Retouched Copies
6
Copy the photographs.
•
Highlight [EXE] and press
J
to display a
confirmation dialog and then highlight
[Yes] and press
J
to create JPEG copies
of the selected photos.
•
To cancel the operation before all copies
have been created, press the
G
button; when a confirmation
dialog is displayed, highlight [Yes] and press
J
.
273
Creating Retouched Copies
Trim
Create a cropped copy of the current photograph. The photograph is
displayed with the selected crop shown in yellow; create a cropped
copy as described below.
D
Cautions: Cropped Pictures
•
Depending on the size of the cropped copy, playback zoom may not be
available when cropped copies are displayed.
•
The crop size appears at upper left in the crop
display. The size of the copy varies with crop
size and aspect ratio.
To Description
Size the crop Press
X
or
W
(
Q
) to choose the crop size.
Change the crop
aspect ratio
Rotate the main command dial to choose the crop
aspect ratio.
Position the crop Use the multi selector to position the crop.
Save the crop Press
J
to save the current crop as a separate file.
274
Creating Retouched Copies
Resize
Create small copies of selected photographs. Use [Resize (current
picture)] to resize the current picture, or [Resize (multiple pictures)] to
resize multiple pictures.
D
Caution: Resize
Depending on the copy size, playback zoom may not be available when
resized copies are displayed.
D
Resizing Cropped Pictures
Pictures cropped to aspect ratios of 4 : 3 or 3 : 4 cannot be resized.
❚❚
Resizing the Current Picture
1
Select [Retouch] in the
i
menu, then
highlight [Resize (current picture)] and
press
2
.
2
Choose a destination.
•
Press
1
or
3
to highlight a card slot and
press
J
.
•
You will not be prompted to select the
slot if only one memory card is inserted.
275
Creating Retouched Copies
3
Highlight the desired size and press
J
.
A copy will be saved at the selected size.
276
Creating Retouched Copies
❚❚
Resizing Multiple Pictures
1
Select [Retouch] in the
i
menu, then
highlight [Resize (multiple pictures)]
and press
2
.
2
Choose a size.
•
Highlight [Choose size] and press
2
.
•
Highlight the desired size (length in
pixels) using
1
and
3
and press
J
.
277
Creating Retouched Copies
3
Choose how pictures are selected.
If you chose [Select picture(s)], proceed to Step 5.
4
Select the source slot.
•
Highlight the slot with the card
containing the desired pictures and
press
2
.
•
You will not be prompted to select the
slot if only one memory card is inserted.
Option Description
[Select
picture(s)]
Resize selected pictures.
Multiple pictures can be
selected.
[Select
date]
Resize all pictures taken on
selected dates.
[Select
folder]
Resize all pictures in a
selected folder.
278
Creating Retouched Copies
5
Choose pictures.
If you chose [Select picture(s)]:
•
Highlight pictures using the multi
selector.
•
To view the highlighted picture full
screen, press and hold the
X
button.
•
To select the highlighted picture, press
the
W
(
Q
) button. Selected pictures are marked with a check ( ).
To remove the check ( ) and deselect the current picture, press
the
W
(
Q
) button again. The selected pictures will all be copied at
the size selected in Step 2.
•
Press
J
to proceed once selection is complete.
If you chose [Select date]:
•
Highlight dates using the multi selector
and press
2
to select (
M
) or deselect
(
U
).
•
All pictures taken on dates marked with
a check (
M
) will be copied at the size
selected in Step 2.
•
Press
J
to proceed once selection is complete.
If you chose [Select folder]:
Highlight a folder and press
J
to select; all pictures in the selected
folder will be copied at the size selected in Step 2.
279
Creating Retouched Copies
6
Save the resized copies.
•
A confirmation dialog will be displayed;
highlight [Yes] and press
J
to save the
resized copies.
•
To cancel the operation before all copies
have been created, press the
G
button; when a confirmation dialog is displayed, highlight [Yes]
and press
J
.
280
Creating Retouched Copies
D-Lighting
D-Lighting brightens shadows. It is ideal for dark or backlit
photographs.
The effect is shown in the display. To view the unedited picture, press
and hold the DISP button.
•
Press
1
or
3
to choose the amount of
correction performed. The effect can be
previewed in the edit display.
•
Press
J
to save the retouched copy.
Before After
281
Creating Retouched Copies
Straighten
Rotate pictures by up to ±5° in increments of
approximately 0.25°.
•
The effect can be previewed in the edit
display. To view the unedited picture, press
and hold the DISP button.
•
The greater the rotation, the more will be
trimmed from the edges.
•
Press
1
or
3
to choose the amount of straightening performed.
•
Press
J
to save the retouched copy.
282
Creating Retouched Copies
Distortion Control
Create copies with reduced peripheral
distortion, reducing barrel distortion in
pictures taken with wide-angle lenses or pin-
cushion distortion in pictures taken with
telephoto lenses.
•
If the camera detects distortion, it will offer a
choice of [Auto] and [Manual]. Select
[Auto] to let the camera correct distortion automatically.
•
If the camera is unable to detect distortion, the only option available
will be [Manual]. Select [Manual] to reduce distortion manually.
•
Note that [Manual] must be used with copies created using the
[Auto] option and with photos taken using the [Auto distortion
control] option in the photo shooting menu.
•
When [Manual] is selected, the effect can be previewed in the display.
To view the unedited picture, press and hold the DISP button.
•
Press
1
to reduce pin-cushion distortion,
3
to reduce barrel
distortion.
•
Press
J
to save the retouched copy.
D
Caution: Distortion Control
Note that greater amounts of distortion control result in more of the edges
being cropped out.
283
Creating Retouched Copies
Perspective Control
Create copies that reduce the horizontal and
vertical effects of perspective in photos taken
looking up from the base of a tall object.
•
The effect can be previewed in the edit
display. To view the unedited picture, press
and hold the DISP button.
•
Note that greater amounts of perspective control result in more of the
edges being cropped out.
•
For horizontal correction, highlight
J
and press
2
. Press
1
to
stretch the left edge,
3
to stretch the right.
•
For vertical correction, highlight
K
and press
2
. Press
1
to stretch
the top edge,
3
to stretch the bottom.
•
Press
J
to save the retouched copy.
Before After
284
Creating Retouched Copies
Monochrome
Copy photographs in a selected monochrome tint.
•
The effect can be previewed in the edit
display. To view the unedited picture, press
and hold the DISP button.
•
Highlighting [Sepia] or [Cyanotype] and
pressing
2
displays saturation options for
the selected monochrome tint; choose from
[High], [Normal], and [Low]. Press
J
to save
changes and return to the tint menu.
•
Press
J
to save the retouched copy.
Option Description
[Black-and-white] Copy photographs in black-and-white.
[Sepia] Copy photographs in sepia.
[Cyanotype] Copy photographs in blue-and-white monochrome.
285
Creating Retouched Copies
Overlay (Add)
Combine two existing photographs to create a single picture that is
saved separately from the originals.
1
Select [Retouch] in the
i
menu, then
highlight [Overlay (add)] and press
2
.
2
Select the pictures.
•
Highlight pictures using the multi
selector.
•
To view the highlighted picture full
screen, press and hold the
X
button.
•
To select the highlighted picture, press
the
W
(
Q
) button. Selected pictures are marked with a check ( ).
To remove the check ( ) and deselect the current picture, press
the
W
(
Q
) button again.
•
Pictures with different image areas cannot be selected.
•
Press
J
to proceed once the second picture is selected.
286
Creating Retouched Copies
3
Adjust balance.
The overlay can be previewed in the
display. Press
1
or
3
to adjust the
balance between the two pictures. Press
1
to make the first picture more visible
and the second less,
3
for the opposite
effect.
4
Save the overlay.
Press
J
to save the overlay.
D
Cautions: [Overlay (Add)]
•
Colors and brightness in the preview may differ from the final picture.
•
Only pictures created with this camera can be selected. Pictures created
with other models cannot be selected.
•
The overlay will be the same size as the smallest of the two component
pictures.
•
The overlay has the same photo info (including date of recording,
metering, shutter speed, aperture, shooting mode, exposure
compensation, focal length, and picture orientation) and values for white
balance and Picture Control as the first of the two pictures selected.
Copyright information, however, is not copied to the new picture. The
comment is similarly not copied; instead, the comment currently active on
the camera, if any, is appended.
287
Creating Retouched Copies
“Lighten” and “Darken”
The camera compares multiple selected pictures and selects only the
brightest or darkest pixels at each point in the picture to create a single
new JPEG copy.
1
Select [Retouch] in the
i
menu, then highlight [Lighten] or
[Darken] and press
2
.
•
[Lighten]: The camera compares the pixels in each picture and
uses only the brightest.
•
[Darken]: The camera compares the pixels in each picture and
uses only the darkest.
2
Choose how pictures are selected.
Option Description
[Select individual
pictures]
Select pictures for the overlay one-by-one.
[Select consecutive
pictures]
Select two pictures; the overlay will include the
two pictures and all the pictures between them.
[Select folder]
The overlay will include all pictures in the
selected folder.
288
Creating Retouched Copies
3
Select the source slot.
•
Highlight the slot with the card containing the desired pictures
and press
2
.
•
You will not be prompted to select the slot if only one memory
card is inserted.
4
Select the pictures.
If you chose [Select individual pictures]:
•
Highlight pictures using the multi selector.
•
To view the highlighted picture full screen, press and hold the
X
button.
•
To select the highlighted picture, press the
W
(
Q
) button.
Selected pictures are marked with a check ( ). To remove the
check ( ) and deselect the current picture, press the
W
(
Q
)
button again. The selected pictures will be combined using the
option selected in Step 1.
•
Press
J
to proceed once selection is complete.
If you chose [Select consecutive pictures]:
•
All pictures in a range chosen using the multi selector will be
combined using the option selected in Step 1.
-Use the
W
(
Q
) button to select the first and last pictures in the
desired range.
- The first and last pictures are indicated by icons and the
pictures between them by icons.
- You can alter your selection by using the multi selector to
highlight different pictures to serve as the first or last frame. Press
the center of the sub-selector to choose the current picture as
the new start or end point.
•
To view the highlighted picture full screen, press and hold the
X
button.
•
Press
J
to proceed once selection is complete.
289
Creating Retouched Copies
If you chose [Select folder]:
Highlight the desired folder and press
J
to overlay all pictures in
the folder using the option selected in Step 1.
5
Save the overlay.
•
A confirmation dialog will be displayed; highlight [Yes] and press
J
to save the overlay and display the resulting picture.
•
To interrupt the process and display a confirmation dialog before
the operation is complete, press the
G
button; to save the
current overlay “as is” without adding the remaining pictures,
highlight [Save and exit] and press
J
. To exit without creating an
overlay, highlight [Discard and exit] and press
J
.
D
Cautions: [Lighten]/[Darken]
•
Only pictures created with this camera can be selected. Pictures created
with other models cannot be selected.
•
The overlay will include only pictures created with the same options
selected for [Image area] > [Choose image area] in the photo shooting
menu.
•
The image quality setting for the completed overlay is that of the highest
quality picture it contains.
•
Overlays that include NEF (RAW) pictures will be saved at an image quality
of [JPEG fine
m
].
•
All JPEG pictures in the overlay must be the same size.
290
Editing Videos
Videos can be edited using the following options:
•
These options are not available with videos recorded with [ProRes
422 HQ 10-bit (MOV)] or [H.265 10-bit (MOV)] selected for [Video
file type] in the video recording menu.
Trimming Videos
1
Display a video full frame.
2
Pause the video on the new opening
frame.
•
Press
J
to start playback. Press
3
to
pause.
•
Your approximate position in the video
can be ascertained from the video
progress bar.
•
Press
4
or
2
or rotate the command dials to locate the desired
frame.
Editing Videos
Option Description
9
[Trim video] Trim unwanted footage.
4
[Save current
frame]
Save a selected frame as a JPEG still.
291
Editing Videos
3
Select [Trim video].
Press the
i
button, highlight [Trim
video], and press
2
.
4
Choose the start point.
To create a copy that begins from the
current frame, highlight [Start point] and
press
J
.
5
Confirm the new start point.
•
If the desired frame is not currently
displayed, press
4
or
2
to advance or
rewind a frame at a time.
•
Rotate the main command dial one stop
to skip ahead or back 10 frames.
•
Rotate the sub-command dial one stop
to skip ahead or back 10 s.
292
Editing Videos
6
Choose the end point.
Press the center of the sub-selector to
switch to the end-point selection tool (
x
)
and then select the closing frame (
x
) as
described in Step 5.
7
Press
1
to create the copy.
8
Preview the copy.
•
To preview the copy, highlight
[Preview] and press
J
(to interrupt the
preview and return to the save options
menu, press
1
).
•
To abandon the current copy and return
to Step 5, highlight [Cancel] and press
J
.
293
Editing Videos
9
Choose a save option.
Choose [Save as new file] to save the
edited copy as a new file. To replace the
original video with the edited copy,
choose [Overwrite existing file].
10
Save the copy.
Press
J
to save the copy.
D
Cautions: Trimming Videos
•
The copy will not be saved if there is insufficient space available on the
memory card.
•
Videos less than two seconds long cannot be edited using [Trim video].
•
Copies have the same time and date of creation as the original.
A
Removing Opening or Closing Footage
•
To remove only the closing footage from a video, highlight [End point]
and press
J
in Step 4, select the closing frame, and proceed to Step 7
without pressing the center of sub-selector in Step 6.
•
To remove only the opening footage, proceed to Step 7 without pressing
the center of sub-selector in Step 6.
A
The
i
Menu [Trim Video] Option
Videos can also be edited using the [Trim video] item in the
i
menu.
294
Editing Videos
Saving Selected Frames as JPEG Stills
1
Pause the video on the desired frame.
•
Press
3
to pause playback.
•
Your approximate position in the video
can be ascertained from the video
progress bar.
•
Press
4
or
2
or rotate the command
dials to locate the desired frame.
2
Choose [Save current frame].
Press the
i
button, then highlight [Save
current frame] and press
J
to create a
JPEG copy of the current frame.
D
[Save Current Frame]
•
Stills are saved at the dimensions selected for [Frame size/frame rate] in
the video recording menu when the video was recorded.
•
They cannot be retouched.
•
Some categories of photo information are not displayed during playback.
295
Recording Voice Memos
Voice Memos
Voice memos up to 60 seconds long can be added to photographs.
1
Select the photograph.
Only one voice memo can be recorded
per picture; additional voice memos
cannot be recorded for pictures already
marked with a
h
icon. The existing voice
memo must be deleted before another
can be recorded (
0
299).
2
Hold the
b
button.
•
Audio is recorded while the button is
pressed.
•
During recording, the camera displays a
b
icon and a countdown of the
remaining recording time, in seconds.
Recording Voice Memos
296
Recording Voice Memos
3
Release the
b
button.
•
Recording will end.
•
Pictures with voice memos are indicated
by
h
icons.
D
Recording Not Available
Voice memos cannot be added to videos or Image Dust Off reference data.
D
Recording Restrictions
Voice memos cannot be recorded if:
•
the photo/video selector is rotated to
1
or
•
a multiple exposure is in progress.
D
Caution: Recording Voice Memos
Touch controls are disabled and other pictures cannot be displayed while
recording is in progress.
D
Interrupting Recording
Pressing the shutter-release button or operating other camera controls may
end recording. During interval-timer photography, recording ends about
two seconds before the next shot is taken; recording also ends when the
camera is turned off.
297
Recording Voice Memos
D
Storage Location
Voice memos for pictures taken with two memory cards inserted and
[Backup], [RAW Slot 1 - JPEG Slot 2], or [JPEG Slot 1 - JPEG Slot 2] selected
for [Role played by card in Slot 2] in the photo shooting menu are recorded
with the copies on both cards.
D
Voice Memo File Names
Voice memo file names have the form “DSC_nnnn.WAV”. The voice memo
has the same file number (“nnnn”) as the picture with which it is associated.
For example, the voice memo for the picture “DSC_0002.JPG” would have
the file name “DSC_0002.WAV”. Voice memo file names can be viewed on a
computer.
•
Voice memos for photos recorded with [Adobe RGB] selected for [Color
space] in the photo shooting menu have names of the form
“_DSCnnnn.WAV”.
•
Voice memos for photos recorded with a prefix other than “DSC” selected
for [File naming] in the photo shooting menu will be recorded with the
selected prefix in place of “DSC”.
A
The
i
Menu
Recording can also be initiated by highlighting [Record voice memo] in the
playback
i
menu and pressing
J
. To end recording, press
J
a second time.
298
Playing Voice Memos
To play voice memos, press the
b
button
when viewing photographs marked with
h
icons.
D
Interrupting Playback
Pressing the shutter-release button or operating other camera controls may
end playback. Playback ends automatically when another picture is selected
or the camera is turned off.
A
The
i
Menu
Voice memos can also be played by highlighting [Play voice memo] in the
playback
i
menu and pressing
J
.
Playing Voice Memos
299
Playing Voice Memos
Deleting Voice Memos
To delete the voice memo from the current
photo, press the
O
(
Q
) button; a
confirmation dialog will be displayed as
shown.
•
To delete both the photo and the voice
memo, highlight [Picture and voice memo]
and press
O
(
Q
).
•
To delete only the voice memo, highlight [Voice memo only] and
press
O
(
Q
).
•
To exit without deleting either the photo or the voice memo, press
D
.
•
With dual-format pictures, you may opt to delete the voice memo only
from the picture on the card in the current slot by choosing [Selected
picture] in the confirmation dialog and then selecting [Voice memo
only].
300
Connecting to HDMI Devices
Connecting to HDMI TVs and
Recorders
The camera can be connected to TVs, recorders, and other devices
featuring HDMI connectors. Use a third-party type A HDMI cable. The
cable must be purchased separately. Always turn the camera off before
connecting or disconnecting a cable.
* Choose a cable with a connector that matches the connector on the HDMI
device.
Connecting to HDMI Devices
1
2
1
HDMI connector for connection
to camera
2
HDMI connector for connection
to external device
*
301
TVs
•
After tuning the TV to the HDMI input channel, turn the camera on
and press the
K
button to view pictures on the television screen.
•
Audio playback volume can be adjusted using the controls on the TV.
Camera controls cannot be used.
•
If the camera is paired with a smart device running the SnapBridge
app, the device can be used to control playback remotely while the
camera is connected to a TV. See SnapBridge online help for details.
•
Use an HDMI input connector compliant with HDMI 2.1 to connect to
televisions that support 8K input.
TVs
302
Recorders
In video mode, the camera can record directly to connected HDMI
recorders.
•
If a memory card is inserted in the camera when it is connected to a
recorder, video will be recorded both to the recorder and the memory
card. If no memory card is inserted, the footage will be recorded only
to the external device.
Adjusting Settings
Use the [HDMI] item in the setup menu to adjust settings for HDMI
output.
Recorders
Option Description
[Output
resolution]
The format for output to HDMI devices can be selected
from [Auto], [4320p (progressive)], [2160p
(progressive)], [1080p (progressive)], and [720p
(progressive)].
[Output
range]
The RGB video signal input range varies with the HDMI
device. [Auto], which matches the output range to the
HDMI device, is recommended in most situations. If the
camera is unable to determine the correct RGB video signal
output range for the HDMI device, you can choose from
the following options:
•
[Limited range]: For devices with an RGB video signal
input range of 16 to 235. Choose this option if you notice
a loss of detail in shadows.
•
[Full range]: For devices with an RGB video signal input
range of 0 to 255. Choose this option if you notice that
shadows are “washed out” or too bright.
303
Recorders
[Output
shooting info]
Choose whether shooting information is displayed on the
HDMI device. If [ON] is selected, icons and other
information in the shooting display will be recorded with
the footage saved to external recorders.
[Mirror
camera info
display]
Choose whether the display in the camera monitor
remains on while an HDMI device is connected.
•
If [OFF] is selected, the display will remain off, reducing
the drain on the camera battery.
•
[Mirror camera info display] will be fixed at [ON] while
[OFF] is selected for [Output shooting info].
Option Description
304
Recorders
❚❚
“Output Resolution”
•
When [Auto] is selected for [HDMI]> [Output resolution] in the
setup menu, the camera automatically detects whether the external
recorder supports the frame size and rate selected on the camera. If it
does not, the camera will search for a supported resolution and frame
rate in the order listed below. If no supported resolution and frame
rate is found, output will be suspended.
- No memory card inserted in camera:
Frame size/frame rate Output resolution/frame rate search order
[7680×4320; 30p] 4320/30p
V
2160/30p
V
1080/30p
[7680×4320; 25p] 4320/25p
V
2160/25p
V
1080/25p
[7680×4320; 24p] 4320/24p
V
2160/24p
V
1080/24p
[3840×2160; 120p]
2160/120p
V
1080/120p
V
2160/60p
V
1080/60p
V
2160/30p
V
1080/30p
[3840×2160; 100p]
2160/100p
V
1080/100p
V
2160/50p
V
1080/50p
V
2160/25p
V
1080/25p
[3840×2160; 60p]
2160/60p
V
1080/60p
V
2160/30p
V
1080/30p
[3840×2160; 50p]
2160/50p
V
1080/50p
V
2160/25p
V
1080/25p
[3840×2160; 30p] 2160/30p
V
1080/30p
[3840×2160; 25p] 2160/25p
V
1080/25p
[3840×2160; 24p] 2160/24p
V
1080/24p
305
Recorders
- Memory card inserted in camera:
•
When an option other than [Auto] is selected for [Output resolution],
the signal will be output at the selected resolution. HDMI output will
be suspended if:
- output resolution is higher than the current frame size or
- the recorder does not support the selected output resolution.
[1920×1080; 120p] 1080/120p
V
1080/60p
V
1080/30p
[1920×1080; 100p] 1080/100p
V
1080/50p
V
1080/25p
[1920×1080; 60p] 1080/60p
V
1080/30p
[1920×1080; 50p] 1080/50p
V
1080/25p
[1920×1080; 30p] 1080/30p
[1920×1080; 25p] 1080/25p
[1920×1080; 24p] 1080/24p
Frame size/frame rate Output resolution/frame rate search order
[7680×4320; 30p] 1080/30p
[7680×4320; 25p] 1080/25p
[7680×4320; 24p] 1080/24p
[3840×2160; 120p] 1080/60p
V
1080/30p
[3840×2160; 100p] 1080/50p
V
1080/25p
[3840×2160; 60p]–
[1920×1080; 24p]
Same as when no memory card is inserted in
the camera.
Frame size/frame rate Output resolution/frame rate search order
306
Recorders
D
Frame Rates for [Output Resolution] Options Other Than [Auto]
Video recording rates of 120p, 100p, 60p, or 50p will be adjusted as follows if
not compatible with the frame rate chosen for the external recorder.
•
120p: The frame rate will first drop to 60p. If 60p is also not supported, it
will drop to 30p.
•
100p: The frame rate will first drop to 50p. If 50p is also not supported, it
will drop to 25p.
•
60p: The frame rate will drop to 30p.
•
50p: The frame rate will drop to 25p.
D
Frame Rates for an [Output Resolution] of [720p (progressive)]
Footage filmed at a frame rate of 120p, 60p, 30p, or 24p is output at 60p.
Footage filmed at 100p, 50p, or 25p is output at 50p.
D
Caution: Filming with Memory Cards
Footage filmed at a frame size of 7680 × 4320 or at a frame size and rate of
3840 × 2160; 120p or 3840 × 2160; 100p will not be output via HDMI if
[4320p (progressive)] or [2160p (progressive)] is selected for [HDMI] >
[Output resolution] in the setup menu. Remove the memory cards from the
camera and record the footage to the external recorder.
307
Recorders
D
Zoom
•
The camera display can be zoomed in by pressing the
X
button during
recording, but this has no effect on the footage output to the recorder.
•
If no footage is currently being recorded, changes to zoom using the
X
button will be reflected both in the camera display and in the output to the
recorder. The output resolution however switches to [1080p
(progressive)], even if the option last selected for [HDMI] > [Output
resolution] in the setup menu was [4320p (progressive)] or [2160p
(progressive)].
308
Recorders
YCbCr and Bit Depth
The YCbCr value and bit depth for footage output to external HDMI
devices when [H.265 10-bit (MOV)] or [H.265 8-bit (MOV)] is selected
for [Video file type] in the video recording menu varies with the frame
size and rate.
Frame size/frame rate
Video file type
H.265 10-bit H.265 8-bit
[7680×4320; 30p]
4:2:0 10-bit 4:2:0 8-bit
[7680×4320; 25p]
[7680×4320; 24p]
[3840×2160; 120p]
[3840×2160; 100p]
[3840×2160; 60p]
4:2:2 10-bit 4:2:2 8-bit
[3840×2160; 50p]
[3840×2160; 30p]
[3840×2160; 25p]
[3840×2160; 24p]
[1920×1080; 120p]
[1920×1080; 100p]
[1920×1080; 60p]
[1920×1080; 50p]
[1920×1080; 30p]
[1920×1080; 25p]
[1920×1080; 24p]
309
Recorders
•
[ProRes 422 HQ 10-bit (MOV)] footage is output at a YCbCr value of
4:2:2 and a bit depth of 10 bits, regardless of the option selected for
[Frame size/frame rate].
•
[H.264 8-bit (MP4)] footage is output at a YCbCr value of 4:2:2 and a
bit depth of 8 bits, regardless of the option selected for [Frame size/
frame rate].
D
Recording to External Recorders That Support a Bit Depth of
10 Bits
The HDMI signal will be output at a bit depth of 10 bits only to HDMI
recorders that support this option.
310
Recorders
External Recording Control
Choosing [ON] for [External rec. cntrl (HDMI)] in the video recording
menu allows camera controls to be used to start and stop recording on
the external recorder.
•
For information on whether your recorder supports external recording
control, consult the manufacturer.
•
The camera display will turn off automatically when the time selected
for Custom Setting c3 [Power off delay]> [Standby timer] expires,
ending HDMI output. When recording videos to an external device,
select [Standby timer] and choose [No limit] or a time longer than
the anticipated recording time.
•
An icon will be displayed in the camera monitor when [ON] is selected:
A
is displayed if no footage is currently being recorded,
B
while videos are being recorded. During recording, check the recorder
and recorder display to ensure that footage is being saved to the
device.
•
Note that selecting [ON] may disrupt the footage output to the device.
311
The SnapBridge App
Connecting to Smart Devices
Use the SnapBridge app for wireless connections between
the camera and your smartphone or tablet (“smart device”).
•
SnapBridge apps can be downloaded from the Apple App Store
®
or on
Google Play™.
•
Visit the Nikon website for the latest SnapBridge news.
•
Carefully read any license agreements or the like displayed when
SnapBridge is launched and only proceed if you are willing to accept
them.
The SnapBridge App
312
The SnapBridge App
What SnapBridge Can Do for You
The tasks that can be performed using the SnapBridge app are outlined
below. For details, see the SnapBridge app online help:
https://nikonimglib.com/snbr/onlinehelp/en/index.html
❚❚
Downloading Pictures from the Camera
Download existing pictures to your smart device. They can also be
downloaded automatically as they are taken.
❚❚
Remote Photography
Control the camera and take pictures from the smart device.
D
Can’t Connect?
If you have trouble establishing a connection with the smart device, try:
•
turning the camera and smart device off and then on again, or
•
checking wireless settings on the smart device.
313
Wireless Connections
Use the SnapBridge app for wireless connections between the camera
and your smart device. You can connect via either Bluetooth (
0
313) or
Wi-Fi (
0
317). Connecting using Bluetooth allows pictures to be
uploaded automatically as they are taken.
Connecting via Bluetooth (Pairing)
Before connecting via Bluetooth for the first time, you will need to pair
the camera and smart device.
D
Before Pairing
•
Enable Bluetooth on the smart device. For details, see the documentation
provided with the device.
•
Ensure that the batteries in the camera and smart device are fully charged
to prevent the devices turning off unexpectedly.
•
Check that there is space available on the camera memory card.
Wireless Connections
314
Wireless Connections
❚❚
Pairing
Pair the camera and smart device as described below.
•
Some operations are performed
using the camera, others on the
smart device.
•
Additional instructions are available via SnapBridge online help.
1
Camera: Select [Connect to smart
device] > [Pairing (Bluetooth)] in the
network menu, then highlight [Start
pairing] and press
J
.
The camera name will be displayed in the
monitor.
315
Wireless Connections
2
Smart device: Launch the SnapBridge app and tap [Connect to
camera] in the tab.
If this is the first time you have launched the app, you should
instead tap [Connect to camera] in the welcome display.
3
Smart device: Follow the on-screen instructions.
•
When prompted, tap the category for your camera and then tap
the “pairing” option when prompted to choose the connection
type.
•
Tap the camera name when prompted.
4
Camera/smart device: After confirming that the camera and
smart device display the same authentication code, follow the
on-screen instructions on both devices to complete pairing.
•
Tap the pairing button on the smart device and press the
J
button on the camera.
•
The camera and smart device will each
display a message when pairing is
complete. The camera will then
automatically exit to the menus.
The camera and smart device are now paired.
For information on using the SnapBridge app, see online help.
316
Wireless Connections
D
Pairing Error
If you wait too long between pressing the button on the camera and tapping
the button on the smart device in Step 4, the device will display an error
message and pairing will fail.
•
If you are using an Android device, tap [OK] and return to Step 1.
•
If you are using an iOS device, dismiss the SnapBridge app and check that it
is not running in the background, then request iOS to “forget” the camera
before returning to Step 1. The request to “forget” the camera is made via
the iOS “Settings” app.
D
Disabling Bluetooth
To disable Bluetooth, select [OFF] for [Connect to smart device]> [Pairing
(Bluetooth)]> [Bluetooth connection] in the camera network menu.
❚❚
Connecting to a Previously-Paired Smart Device
Once the smart device has been paired with the camera, you will be
able to connect simply by enabling Bluetooth on both the smart device
and camera and launching the SnapBridge app.
317
Wireless Connections
Connecting via Wi-Fi (Wi-Fi Mode)
In Wi-Fi mode, the camera connects directly to the smart device via Wi-
Fi, no Bluetooth pairing required.
D
Before Connecting (Wi-Fi Mode)
•
Enable Wi-Fi on the smart device. For details, see the documentation
provided with the device.
•
Ensure that the batteries in the camera and smart device are fully charged
to prevent the devices turning off unexpectedly.
•
Check that there is space available on the camera memory card.
318
Wireless Connections
❚❚
Connecting
Follow the steps below to establish a connection between the camera
and smart device in Wi-Fi mode.
•
Some operations are performed
using the camera, others on the
smart device.
•
Additional instructions are available via SnapBridge online help.
1
Smart device: Launch the SnapBridge app, open the tab, tap
, and select [Wi-Fi mode].
If this is the first time you have launched the app, you should
instead tap [Connect to camera] in the welcome display. When
prompted, tap the category for your camera and then tap the
“Wi-Fi” option when prompted to choose the connection type.
2
Camera/smart device: Turn the camera on when prompted.
Do not use any of the controls in the app at this point.
319
Wireless Connections
3
Camera: Select [Connect to smart
device] > [Wi-Fi connection] in the
network menu, then highlight
[Establish Wi-Fi connection] and press
J
.
The camera SSID and password will be
displayed.
4
Smart device: Follow the on-screen instructions to establish a
Wi-Fi connection.
•
On iOS devices, the “Settings” app will launch. Tap [< Settings] to
open [Settings], then scroll up and tap [Wi-Fi] (which you’ll find
near the top of the settings list) to display Wi-Fi settings.
•
In the Wi-Fi settings display, select the camera SSID and enter the
password displayed by the camera in Step 3.
320
Wireless Connections
5
Smart device: After adjusting device settings as described in
Step 4, return to the SnapBridge app.
•
After establishing a Wi-Fi connection to the camera, the smart
device will display Wi-Fi mode options.
•
The camera will display a message
stating that the connection is complete.
The camera and smart device are now connected via Wi-Fi.
For information on using the SnapBridge app, see online help.
D
Terminating Wi-Fi Mode
To end the Wi-Fi connection, tap in the SnapBridge tab. When the
icon changes to , tap and select [Exit Wi-Fi mode.].
321
Making the Connection
Connecting to Computers or
FTP Servers
The camera can be connected to a computer or FTP server using any of
the methods below.
Computers: Connecting via USB
Connect the camera and computer
via USB and use NX Studio to
upload pictures to the computer
(
0
323).
•
The camera can be controlled
remotely from the computer
using optional Camera Control
Pro 2 software.
Making the Connection
Type
-
C
322
Making the Connection
Computers: Connecting via Ethernet or
Wireless LAN
Connect to a computer via Ethernet
or using the camera’s built-in
wireless LAN. You can upload
pictures to the computer or control
the camera remotely via a network
using optional Camera Control
Pro 2 software (
0
327).
FTP Servers: Connecting via Ethernet or
Wireless LAN
Upload pictures to an FTP server via
Ethernet or using the camera’s
built-in wireless LAN (
0
366).
D
Can’t Connect?
If you have trouble establishing a connection with a computer or FTP server,
try:
•
turning the camera off and then on again,
•
checking wireless settings on the computer or FTP server, or
•
restarting the computer or FTP server.
A
Wireless LAN and Ethernet Errors
For information on wireless- or Ethernet-related errors, see “Troubleshooting
Wireless LAN and Ethernet Connections” (
0
397).
FTP
323
Computers: Connecting via USB
Connect the camera using the supplied USB cable. You can then use
NX Studio software to copy pictures to the computer for viewing and
editing.
Installing NX Studio
You will need an Internet connection when installing NX Studio. Visit
the Nikon website for the latest information, including system
requirements.
•
Download the latest NX Studio installer from the website below and
follow the on-screen instructions to complete installation.
https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/
•
Note that you may be unable to download pictures from the camera
using earlier versions of NX Studio.
Computers: Connecting via USB
324
Computers: Connecting via USB
Copying Pictures to a Computer Using
NX Studio
See online help for detailed instructions.
1
Connect the camera to the computer.
After turning the camera off and ensuring that a memory card is
inserted, connect the supplied USB cable as shown.
A
Using a Card Reader
Pictures can also be copied from a memory card inserted in a third-party
card reader. You should however check that the card is compatible with
the card reader.
2
Turn the camera on.
•
The Nikon Transfer 2 component of NX Studio will start. Nikon
Transfer 2 image transfer software is installed as part of NX Studio.
•
If a message is displayed prompting you to choose a program,
select Nikon Transfer 2.
•
If Nikon Transfer 2 does not start automatically, launch NX Studio
and click the “Import” icon.
325
Computers: Connecting via USB
3
Click [Start Transfer].
Pictures on the memory
card will be copied to the
computer.
4
Turn the camera off.
Disconnect the USB cable when transfer is complete.
D
Windows 10 and Windows 8.1
Windows 10 and Windows 8.1 may
display an AutoPlay prompt when the
camera is connected.
Click the dialog and then click [Nikon
Transfer 2] to select Nikon Transfer 2.
326
Computers: Connecting via USB
D
macOS
If Nikon Transfer 2 does not start automatically, confirm that the camera is
connected and then launch Image Capture (an application that comes with
macOS) and select Nikon Transfer 2 as the application that opens when the
camera is detected.
D
Caution: Transferring Videos
Do not attempt to transfer videos from the memory card while it is inserted
in a camera of a different make or model. Doing so could result in the videos
being deleted without being transferred.
D
Cautions: Connecting to Computers
•
Do not turn the camera off or disconnect the USB cable while transfer is in
progress.
•
Do not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle. Be sure
also to keep the connectors straight when disconnecting the cable.
•
Always turn the camera off before connecting or disconnecting a cable.
•
To ensure that data transfer is not interrupted, be sure the camera battery
is fully charged.
D
USB Hubs
Connect the camera directly to the computer; do not connect the cable via a
USB hub or keyboard. Connect the camera to a pre-installed USB port.
327
Computers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
The camera can connect to computers either directly or via existing
networks using Wi-Fi (built-in wireless LAN) or a third-party Ethernet
cable inserted in the camera’s Ethernet connector.
What Ethernet and Wireless LAN Can Do for
You
Ethernet and wireless LAN connections can be used for the following
tasks:
❚❚
Uploading Pictures
Existing pictures can be uploaded
to the computer. They can also be
uploaded automatically as they are
taken.
❚❚
Controlling Cameras Remotely
Installing Camera Control Pro 2
(available separately) on a
networked computer gives you
control over the details of exposure
and other camera settings while
taking pictures remotely (
0
361).
Computers: Connecting via Ethernet or
Wireless LAN
328
Computers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
The Wireless Transmitter Utility
Before you will be able to connect to a wireless or Ethernet LAN, you will
need to pair the camera with the computer using Nikon’s Wireless
Transmitter Utility software.
•
Once the devices are paired, you will be able to connect to the
computer from the camera.
•
The Wireless Transmitter Utility is available for download from the
Nikon Download Center. Check the version and system requirements
and be sure to download the latest version.
https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/
329
Computers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
Wireless LAN
The camera can connect to computers either by direct wireless link
(access-point mode) or via a wireless router on an existing network,
including home networks (infrastructure mode).
❚❚
Direct Wireless Connection (Access-Point Mode)
The camera and computer connect
via direct wireless link. The camera
acts as a wireless LAN access point,
letting you connect when working
outdoors and in other situations in
which the computer is not already connected to a wireless network and
eliminating the need for complicated adjustments to settings. The
computer cannot connect to the Internet while connected to the
camera.
•
Before proceeding, check that the Wireless Transmitter Utility (
0
328)
is installed on the computer.
•
Confirm that [OFF] is selected for [Wired LAN] in the network menu.
1
Select [Connect to computer] in the
network menu, then highlight [Network
settings] and press
2
.
330
Computers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
2
Highlight [Create profile] and press
J
.
3
Name the new profile.
•
To proceed to the next step without
changing the default name, press
X
.
•
Whatever name you choose will appear
in the network menu [Connect to
computer]> [Network settings] list.
•
To rename the profile, press
J
. For information on text entry, see
“Text Entry” (
0
64). Press
X
to proceed after entering a name.
4
Highlight [Direct connection to
computer] and press
J
.
The camera SSID and encryption key will
be displayed.
331
Computers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
5
Establish a connection to the camera.
Windows:
•
Click the wireless LAN icon in
the taskbar.
•
Select the SSID displayed by
the camera in Step 4.
•
When prompted to enter the
network security key, enter
the encryption key displayed
by the camera in Step 4. The
computer will initiate a
connection to the camera.
macOS:
•
Click the wireless LAN icon in
the menu bar.
•
Select the SSID displayed by
the camera in Step 4.
•
When prompted to enter the
network security key, enter the
encryption key displayed by
the camera in Step 4. The
computer will initiate a
connection to the camera.
332
Computers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
6
Start pairing.
When prompted, launch the Wireless
Transmitter Utility on the computer.
7
Select the camera in the
Wireless Transmitter Utility.
Select the name displayed by
the camera in Step 6 and click
[Next].
333
Computers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
8
In the Wireless Transmitter Utility, enter
the authentication code displayed by
the camera.
•
The camera will display an
authentication code.
•
Enter the authentication code
in the dialog displayed by the
Wireless Transmitter Utility
and click [Next].
334
Computers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
9
Complete the pairing process.
•
When the camera displays a message
stating that pairing is complete, press
J
.
•
In the Wireless Transmitter
Utility, click [Next]; you will be
prompted to choose a
destination folder. For more
information, see online help
for the Wireless Transmitter
Utility.
•
A wireless connection will be established between the camera and
computer when pairing is complete.
335
Computers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
10
Check the connection.
When a connection is established, the
profile name will be displayed in green in
the camera [Connect to computer]
menu.
•
If the profile name is not displayed in
green, connect to the camera via the wireless network list on your
computer.
A wireless connection has now been established between the
camera and the computer.
Pictures taken with the camera can be uploaded to the computer as
described in“Uploading Pictures” (
0
354).
For information on controlling the camera from a computer using
Camera Control Pro 2, see “Camera Control” (
0
361).
336
Computers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
❚❚
Connecting in Infrastructure Mode
The camera connects to a computer
on an existing network (including
home networks) via a wireless
router. The computer can still
connect to the Internet while
connected to the camera.
•
Before proceeding, check that the Wireless Transmitter Utility (
0
328)
is installed on the computer.
•
Confirm that [OFF] is selected for [Wired LAN] in the network menu.
D
Infrastructure Mode
Connection to computers beyond the local area network is not supported.
You can connect only to computers on the same network.
1
Select [Connect to computer] in the
network menu, then highlight [Network
settings] and press
2
.
337
Computers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
2
Highlight [Create profile] and press
J
.
3
Name the new profile.
•
To proceed to the next step without
changing the default name, press
X
.
•
Whatever name you choose will appear
in the network menu [Connect to
computer]> [Network settings] list.
•
To rename the profile, press
J
. For information on text entry, see
“Text Entry” (
0
64). Press
X
to proceed after entering a name.
338
Computers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
4
Highlight [Search for Wi-Fi network]
and press
J
.
The camera will search for networks
currently active in the vicinity and list
them by name (SSID).
D
[Easy Connect]
•
To connect without entering an SSID or
encryption key, press
X
in Step 4. Next,
press
J
and choose from the following
options:
•
After connecting, proceed to Step 7.
Option Description
[Push-button
WPS]
For routers that support push-button WPS. Press the
WPS button on the router and then press the camera
J
button to connect.
[PIN-entry
WPS]
The camera will display a PIN. Using a computer,
enter the PIN on the router. For more information, see
the documentation provided with the router.
339
Computers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
5
Choose a network.
•
Highlight a network SSID and press
J
.
•
The band on which each SSID operates
is indicated by an icon.
•
Encrypted networks are indicated by a
h
icon. If the selected network is
encrypted (
h
), you will be prompted to enter the encryption key. If
the network is not encrypted, proceed to Step 7.
•
If the desired network is not displayed, press
X
to search again.
D
Hidden SSIDs
Networks with hidden SSIDs are indicated by
blank entries in the network list.
•
To connect to a network with a hidden
SSID, highlight a blank entry and press
J
.
Next, press
J
; the camera will prompt you
to provide an SSID.
•
Enter the network name and press
X
. Press
X
again; the camera will now prompt you to enter the encryption key.
340
Computers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
6
Enter the encryption key.
•
Press
J
and enter the encryption key for
the wireless router.
•
For more information, see the
documentation for the wireless router.
•
Press
X
when entry is complete.
•
Press
X
again to initiate the connection.
A message will be displayed for a few
seconds when the connection is
established.
341
Computers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
7
Obtain or select an IP address.
•
Highlight one of the following options
and press
J
.
•
Press
J
to proceed when the “configuration complete” message is
displayed.
Option Description
[Obtain
automatically]
Select this option if the network is configured to
supply the IP address automatically. A
“configuration complete” message will be
displayed once an IP address has been assigned.
[Enter
manually]
Enter the IP address and sub-net mask manually.
•
Press
J
; you will be prompted to enter the IP
address.
•
Rotate the main command dial to highlight
segments.
•
Press
4
or
2
to change the highlighted segment
and press
J
to save changes.
•
Next, press
X
; a “configuration complete”
message will be displayed. Press
X
again to
display the sub-net mask.
•
Press
1
or
3
to edit the sub-net mask and press
J
; a “configuration complete” message will be
displayed.
342
Computers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
8
Start pairing.
When prompted, launch the Wireless
Transmitter Utility on the computer.
9
Select the camera in the
Wireless Transmitter Utility.
Select the name displayed by
the camera in Step 8 and click
[Next].
343
Computers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
10
In the Wireless Transmitter Utility, enter
the authentication code displayed by
the camera.
•
The camera will display an
authentication code.
•
Enter the authentication code
in the dialog displayed by the
Wireless Transmitter Utility
and click [Next].
344
Computers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
11
Complete the pairing process.
•
When the camera displays a message
stating that pairing is complete, press
J
.
•
In the Wireless Transmitter
Utility, click [Next]; you will be
prompted to choose a
destination folder. For more
information, see online help
for the Wireless Transmitter
Utility.
•
A wireless connection will be established between the camera and
computer when pairing is complete.
345
Computers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
12
Check the connection.
When a connection is established, the
profile name will be displayed in green in
the camera [Connect to computer]
menu.
A wireless connection has now been established between the
camera and the computer.
Pictures taken with the camera can be uploaded to the computer as
described in“Uploading Pictures” (
0
354).
For information on controlling the camera from a computer using
Camera Control Pro 2, see “Camera Control” (
0
361).
346
Computers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
Ethernet Connections
The camera can connect to computers either directly or via existing
networks using a third-party Ethernet cable inserted in the camera’s
Ethernet connector.
❚❚
Connecting an Ethernet Cable
Connect an Ethernet cable to the camera’s Ethernet connector. Do not
use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle. Connect the
other end of the cable to a computer or router.
347
Computers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
❚❚
Ethernet Network Profiles
Before proceeding, check that an Ethernet cable is connected to the
camera and the Wireless Transmitter Utility (
0
328) is installed on the
computer.
1
Select [ON] for [Wired LAN] in the
network menu.
2
Select [Connect to computer] in the
network menu, then highlight [Network
settings] and press
2
.
3
Highlight [Create profile] and press
J
.
348
Computers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
4
Name the new profile.
•
To proceed to the next step without
changing the default name, press
X
.
•
Whatever name you choose will appear
in the network menu [Connect to
computer]> [Network settings] list.
•
To rename the profile, press
J
. For information on text entry, see
“Text Entry” (
0
64). Press
X
to proceed after entering a name.
349
Computers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
5
Obtain or select an IP address.
•
Highlight one of the following options
and press
J
.
•
Press
J
to proceed when the “configuration complete” message is
displayed.
Option Description
[Obtain
automatically]
Select this option if the network is configured to
supply the IP address automatically. A
“configuration complete” message will be
displayed once an IP address has been assigned.
[Enter
manually]
Enter the IP address and sub-net mask manually.
•
Press
J
; you will be prompted to enter the IP
address.
•
Rotate the main command dial to highlight
segments.
•
Press
4
or
2
to change the highlighted segment
and press
J
to save changes.
•
Next, press
X
; a “configuration complete”
message will be displayed. Press
X
again to
display the sub-net mask.
•
Press
1
or
3
to edit the sub-net mask and press
J
; a “configuration complete” message will be
displayed.
350
Computers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
6
Start pairing.
When prompted, launch the Wireless
Transmitter Utility on the computer.
7
Select the camera in the
Wireless Transmitter Utility.
Select the name displayed by
the camera in Step 6 and click
[Next].
351
Computers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
8
In the Wireless Transmitter Utility, enter
the authentication code displayed by
the camera.
•
The camera will display an
authentication code.
•
Enter the authentication code
in the dialog displayed by the
Wireless Transmitter Utility
and click [Next].
352
Computers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
9
Complete the pairing process.
•
When the camera displays a message
stating that pairing is complete, press
J
.
•
In the Wireless Transmitter
Utility, click [Next]; you will be
prompted to choose a
destination folder. For more
information, see online help
for the Wireless Transmitter
Utility.
•
A connection will be established between the camera and
computer when pairing is complete.
353
Computers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
10
Check the connection.
When a connection is established, the
profile name will be displayed in green in
the camera [Connect to computer]
menu.
A connection has now been established between the camera and
the computer.
Pictures taken with the camera can be uploaded to the computer as
described in“Uploading Pictures” (
0
354).
For information on controlling the camera from a computer using
Camera Control Pro 2, see “Camera Control” (
0
361).
354
Computers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
Uploading Pictures
Pictures can be selected for upload during playback. They can also be
uploaded automatically as they are taken.
•
Before uploading pictures, connect the
camera and computer via Ethernet or a
wireless network. Connect using a host
profile selected via the network menu
[Connect to computer]> [Network
settings] list.
•
When a connection is established, the
profile name will be displayed in green in
the camera [Connect to computer] menu.
355
Computers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
D
Destination Folders
By default, pictures are uploaded to the following folders:
•
Windows: \Users\(user name)\Pictures\Wireless Transmitter Utility
•
macOS: /Users/(user name)/Pictures/Wireless Transmitter Utility
The destination folder can be selected using the Wireless Transmitter Utility.
For more information, see online help for the Wireless Transmitter Utility.
D
Caution: Access Point Mode
Select a host profile and enable camera Wi-Fi before connecting.
D
Firewall Settings
TCP port 15740 and UDP port 5353 are used for connections to computers.
File transfer may be blocked if the server firewall is not configured to allow
access to these ports.
356
Computers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
❚❚
Selecting Pictures for Upload
1
Select [Picture transfer] for [Connect to
computer] > [Connection type] in the
network menu.
2
Press the
K
button on the camera and select full-frame or
thumbnail playback.
3
Select a picture and press the
i
button.
4
Highlight [Select for upload to
computer] and press
J
.
•
A white “priority upload” icon will
appear on the picture. If the camera is
currently connected to a network,
upload will begin immediately and the
icon will turn green.
•
Otherwise, upload will begin when a connection is established.
•
Repeat Steps 3–4 to upload additional pictures.
357
Computers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
D
Removing Upload Marking
•
Repeat Steps 3–4 to remove upload marking from selected pictures.
•
To remove upload marking from all pictures, select [Connect to
computer]> [Options] > [Deselect all?] in the network menu.
A
Filtering Pictures for Upload
The [Filtered playback] item in the playback
i
menu can be used to display
only pictures that meet chosen criteria (
0
255). The pictures can then all be
selected for upload by highlighting [Select all for computer upload] in the
i
menu and pressing
J
.
358
Computers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
❚❚
Uploading Photos as They Are Taken
To upload new photos as they are taken,
select [ON] for [Connect to computer]>
[Options]> [Auto upload] in the network
menu.
•
Upload begins only after the photo has
been recorded to the memory card. Be sure
a memory card is inserted in the camera.
•
Videos are not uploaded automatically. They must instead be
uploaded manually from the playback display.
❚❚
The Upload Icon
Upload status is indicated by the upload icon.
s
(white): Priority upload
The picture has been manually selected for
upload. Pictures marked with this icon will be
uploaded before pictures marked
W
(“upload”).
W
(white): Upload
The picture has been selected for upload but upload has not yet begun.
X
(green): Uploading
Upload in progress.
Y
(blue): Uploaded
Upload complete.
359
Computers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
❚❚
The [Connect to Computer] Upload Status Display
The [Connect to computer] display shows the following:
D
Loss of Signal
Wireless transmission may be interrupted if the signal is lost. Upload of
pictures with upload marking can be resumed by turning the camera off and
then on again once the signal has been re-established.
4 3 2
1
1
Status: The status of the
connection to the host. The
profile name is displayed in
green when a connection is
established.
While files are being
transferred, the status display
shows “Now uploading”
preceded by the name of the
file being sent. Errors are also
displayed here.
2
Signal strength: Ethernet
connections are shown by
d
.
When the camera is connected
to a wireless network, the icon
instead shows the wireless
signal strength.
3
Band: The band used by the
wireless network to which the
camera is connected in
infrastructure mode.
4
Pictures/time remaining: The
number of pictures remaining
and the time needed to send
them. The time remaining is an
estimate only.
360
Computers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
D
Caution: During Upload
Do not remove the memory card or disconnect the Ethernet cable during
upload.
D
Voice Memos
Voice memos will be included when the associated pictures are transmitted.
They cannot, however, be uploaded separately.
D
Interval-Timer Photography
Choose a long standby time before starting the interval timer, as upload will
be interrupted if the standby timer expires while interval-timer photography
is in progress.
D
Turning the Camera Off
The camera saves transfer marking when turned off and resumes upload
when next turned on.
A
Connection Status
Connection status is shown by the camera
network indicator.
Network indicator Status
I
(off) No connection.
K
(green) Waiting to connect.
H
(flashes green) Connected.
H
(flashes amber) Error.
361
Computers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
Camera Control
The camera can be controlled from a computer running Camera Control
Pro 2. Photos can be saved directly to the computer instead of to the
memory card and can consequently be taken even when no memory
card is inserted in the camera.
•
You will still need to insert a memory card when filming videos.
•
Note that the camera standby timer does not expire in camera control
mode.
•
Before using Camera Control Pro 2, connect
the camera and computer via Ethernet or a
wireless network. Connect using a host
profile selected via the network menu
[Connect to computer]> [Network
settings] list.
•
When a connection is established, the
profile name will be displayed in green in
the camera [Connect to computer] menu.
362
Computers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
1
Select [Camera control] for [Connect to
computer] > [Connection type] in the
network menu.
2
Launch the copy of Camera Control Pro 2 installed on the host
computer.
3
Control the camera using Camera Control Pro 2.
For information on taking pictures using Camera Control Pro 2, see
the online help or other documentation for Camera Control Pro 2.
363
Computers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
❚❚
The [Connect to Computer] Camera Control
Display
The [Connect to computer] display shows the following:
D
Loss of Signal
Loss of signal while the camera is connected to a wireless network may
disrupt the connection to Camera Control Pro 2. If the camera network
indicator flashes amber, select [End current connection] for [Connect to
computer]> [Network settings] in the network menu before connecting to
the network again. When the signal is re-established, the camera will
reconnect to Camera Control Pro 2 and resume upload of any pictures that
have yet to be transferred. Note that upload cannot be resumed if you turn
the camera off before transfer is complete.
1
3 2
1
Status: The status of the
connection to the host. The
profile name is displayed in
green when a connection is
established. Errors are also
displayed here (
0
397).
2
Signal strength: Ethernet
connections are shown by
d
.
When the camera is connected
to a wireless network, the icon
instead shows the wireless
signal strength.
3
Band: The band used by the
wireless network to which the
camera is connected in
infrastructure mode.
364
Computers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
D
Caution: Ethernet Networks
Do not disconnect the Ethernet cable during upload or while the camera is
on.
D
Caution: Wireless Networks
Response may slow on wireless networks.
D
Firewall Settings
TCP port 15740 and UDP port 5353 are used for connections to computers.
File transfer may be blocked if the server firewall is not configured to allow
access to these ports.
A
Connection Status
Connection status is shown by the camera
network indicator.
Network indicator Status
I
(off) No connection.
K
(green) Waiting to connect.
H
(flashes green) Connected.
H
(flashes amber) Error.
365
Computers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
Ending the
Connection to the Computer
You can end the connection by:
•
turning the camera off,
•
selecting [End current connection] for [Connect to computer]>
[Network settings] in the network menu, or
•
connecting to a smart device via Wi-Fi or Bluetooth.
D
Access-Point Mode
An error will occur if the computer’s wireless connection is disabled before
the camera’s. Disable camera’s connection first.
366
FTP Servers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
The camera can connect to FTP
servers and upload pictures via
existing networks using Wi-Fi (built-
in wireless LAN) or a third-party
Ethernet cable inserted in the
camera’s Ethernet connector. The
camera can also be connected to
FTP servers directly.
D
FTP Servers
•
Servers can be configured using standard FTP services—including IIS
(Internet Information Services)—available with Windows 10 (Enterprise/
Pro/Home).
•
Internet FTP connections and connection to FTP servers running third-
party software are not supported.
FTP Servers: Connecting via Ethernet or
Wireless LAN
FTP
367
FTP Servers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
Wireless LAN
The camera can connect to FTP servers either by direct wireless link
(access-point mode) or via a wireless router on an existing network,
including home networks (infrastructure mode).
❚❚
Direct Wireless Connection (Access-Point Mode)
The camera and FTP server connect
via direct wireless link. The camera
acts as a wireless LAN access point,
letting you connect when working
outdoors and in other situations in
which the computer is not already
connected to a wireless network and eliminating the need for
complicated adjustments to settings.
•
Create a host profile using the camera connection wizard.
•
Confirm that [OFF] is selected for [Wired LAN] in the network menu.
1
Select [Connect to FTP server] in the
network menu, then highlight [Network
settings] and press
2
.
FTP
368
FTP Servers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
2
Highlight [Create profile] and press
J
.
3
Highlight [Connection wizard] and
press
2
.
The connection wizard will launch.
D
Manual Configuration
Choose [Configure manually] to configure
settings manually.
369
FTP Servers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
4
Name the new profile.
•
To proceed to the next step without
changing the default name, press
X
.
•
Whatever name you choose will appear
in the network menu [Connect to FTP
server]> [Network settings] list.
•
To rename the profile, press
J
. For information on text entry, see
“Text Entry” (
0
64). Press
X
to proceed after entering a name.
5
Highlight [Direct connection to
computer] and press
J
.
The camera SSID and encryption key will
be displayed.
370
FTP Servers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
6
Establish a connection to the camera.
Windows:
•
Click the wireless LAN icon in
the taskbar.
•
Select the SSID displayed by
the camera in Step 5.
•
When prompted to enter the
network security key, enter
the encryption key displayed
by the camera in Step 5. The
computer will initiate a
connection to the camera.
macOS:
•
Click the wireless LAN icon in
the menu bar.
•
Select the SSID displayed by
the camera in Step 5.
•
When prompted to enter the
network security key, enter the
encryption key displayed by
the camera in Step 5. The
computer will initiate a
connection to the camera.
371
FTP Servers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
7
Choose the server type.
Highlight [FTP] or [SFTP] (secure FTP) and
press
J
to display a dialog where you can
choose a login method.
8
Log in.
Highlight one of the following options
and press
J
.
D
Firewall Settings
TCP ports 21 and 32768 through 61000 are used for [FTP], TCP ports 22
and 32768 through 61000 for [SFTP]. File transfer may be blocked if the
server firewall is not configured to allow access to these ports.
Option Description
[Anonymous
login]
Select this option if the server does not require a user
ID or password. This option can only be used with
servers that are configured for anonymous login. If
login is successful, the camera will prompt you to
choose a destination.
[Enter user ID]
Enter a user ID and password. Press
J
to log in when
entry is complete. If login is successful, the camera
will prompt you to choose a destination.
372
FTP Servers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
9
Choose a destination folder.
Highlight one of the following options
and press
J
.
10
Check the connection.
When a connection is established, the
profile name will be displayed in green in
the camera [Connect to FTP server]
menu.
•
If the profile name is not displayed in
green, connect to the camera via the wireless network list on the
FTP server.
A wireless connection has now been established between the
camera and the FTP server.
Pictures taken with the camera can be uploaded to the FTP server
as described in“Uploading Pictures” (
0
389).
Option Description
[Home folder]
Select this option to select the server’s home folder as
the destination for pictures uploaded from the camera.
A “setup complete” dialog will be displayed if the
operation is successful.
[Enter folder
name]
Enter the destination folder name manually. The folder
must already exist on the server. Enter the folder name
and path when prompted and press
J
to display the
“setup complete” dialog.
373
FTP Servers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
❚❚
Connecting in Infrastructure Mode
The camera connects to an FTP
server on an existing network
(including home networks) via a
wireless router.
•
Create a host profile using the
camera connection wizard.
•
Before connecting to a wireless network, confirm that [OFF] is
selected for [Wired LAN] in the network menu.
A
Infrastructure Mode
Infrastructure mode supports connection to FTP servers on different
networks.
1
Select [Connect to FTP server] in the
network menu, then highlight [Network
settings] and press
2
.
2
Highlight [Create profile] and press
J
.
FTP
374
FTP Servers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
3
Highlight [Connection wizard] and
press
2
.
The connection wizard will launch.
D
Manual Configuration
Choose [Configure manually] to configure
settings manually.
4
Name the new profile.
•
To proceed to the next step without
changing the default name, press
X
.
•
Whatever name you choose will appear
in the network menu [Connect to FTP
server]> [Network settings] list.
•
To rename the profile, press
J
. For information on text entry, see
“Text Entry” (
0
64). Press
X
to proceed after entering a name.
375
FTP Servers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
5
Highlight [Search for Wi-Fi network]
and press
J
.
The camera will search for networks
currently active in the vicinity and list
them by name (SSID).
D
[Easy Connect]
•
To connect without entering an SSID or
encryption key, press
X
in Step 5. Next,
press
J
and choose from the following
options:
•
After connecting, proceed to Step 8.
Option Description
[Push-button
WPS]
For routers that support push-button WPS. Press the
WPS button on the router and then press the camera
J
button to connect.
[PIN-entry
WPS]
The camera will display a PIN. Using a computer,
enter the PIN on the router. For more information, see
the documentation provided with the router.
376
FTP Servers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
6
Choose a network.
•
Highlight a network SSID and press
J
.
•
The band on which each SSID operates
is indicated by an icon.
•
Encrypted networks are indicated by a
h
icon. If the selected network is
encrypted (
h
), you will be prompted to enter the encryption key. If
the network is not encrypted, proceed to Step 8.
•
If the desired network is not displayed, press
X
to search again.
D
Hidden SSIDs
Networks with hidden SSIDs are indicated by
blank entries in the network list.
•
To connect to a network with a hidden
SSID, highlight a blank entry and press
J
.
Next, press
J
; the camera will prompt you
to provide an SSID.
•
Enter the network name and press
X
. Press
X
again; the camera will now prompt you to enter the encryption key.
377
FTP Servers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
7
Enter the encryption key.
•
Press
J
and enter the encryption key for
the wireless router.
•
For more information, see the
documentation for the wireless router.
•
Press
X
when entry is complete.
•
Press
X
again to initiate the connection.
A message will be displayed for a few
seconds when the connection is
established.
378
FTP Servers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
8
Obtain or select an IP address.
•
Highlight one of the following options
and press
J
.
•
Press
J
to proceed when the “configuration complete” message is
displayed.
Option Description
[Obtain
automatically]
Select this option if the network is configured to
supply the IP address automatically. A
“configuration complete” message will be
displayed once an IP address has been assigned.
[Enter
manually]
Enter the IP address and sub-net mask manually.
•
Press
J
; you will be prompted to enter the IP
address.
•
Rotate the main command dial to highlight
segments.
•
Press
4
or
2
to change the highlighted segment
and press
J
to save changes.
•
Next, press
X
; a “configuration complete”
message will be displayed. Press
X
again to
display the sub-net mask.
•
Press
1
or
3
to edit the sub-net mask and press
J
; a “configuration complete” message will be
displayed.
379
FTP Servers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
9
Choose the server type.
Highlight [FTP] or [SFTP] (secure FTP) and
press
J
to display a dialog where you can
enter the server address.
10
Enter the server address.
•
Press
J
to enter the server URL or IP
address.
•
Press
X
when entry is complete.
•
Press
X
again to connect to the FTP
server. You will be prompted to choose
a login method.
380
FTP Servers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
11
Log in.
Highlight one of the following options
and press
J
.
D
Firewall Settings
TCP ports 21 and 32768 through 61000 are used for [FTP], TCP ports 22
and 32768 through 61000 for [SFTP]. File transfer may be blocked if the
server firewall is not configured to allow access to these ports.
Option Description
[Anonymous
login]
Select this option if the server does not require a user
ID or password. This option can only be used with
servers that are configured for anonymous login. If
login is successful, the camera will prompt you to
choose a destination.
[Enter user ID]
Enter a user ID and password. Press
J
to log in when
entry is complete. If login is successful, the camera
will prompt you to choose a destination.
381
FTP Servers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
12
Choose a destination folder.
Highlight one of the following options
and press
J
.
13
Check the connection.
When a connection is established, the
profile name will be displayed in green in
the camera [Connect to FTP server]
menu.
A wireless connection has now been established between the
camera and the FTP server.
Pictures taken with the camera can be uploaded to the FTP server
as described in“Uploading Pictures” (
0
389).
Option Description
[Home folder]
Select this option to select the server’s home folder as
the destination for pictures uploaded from the camera.
A “setup complete” dialog will be displayed if the
operation is successful.
[Enter folder
name]
Enter the destination folder name manually. The folder
must already exist on the server. Enter the folder name
and path when prompted and press
J
to display the
“setup complete” dialog.
382
FTP Servers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
Ethernet
The camera can connect to FTP servers either directly or via existing
networks using a third-party Ethernet cable inserted in the camera’s
Ethernet connector.
❚❚
Connecting an Ethernet Cable
Connect an Ethernet cable to the camera’s Ethernet connector. Do not
use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle. Connect the
other end of the cable to the FTP server or a router.
FTP
383
FTP Servers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
1
Select [ON] for [Wired LAN] in the
network menu.
2
Select [Connect to FTP server] in the
network menu, then highlight [Network
settings] and press
2
.
3
Highlight [Create profile] and press
J
.
384
FTP Servers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
4
Highlight [Connection wizard] and
press
2
.
The connection wizard will launch.
D
Manual Configuration
Choose [Configure manually] to configure
settings manually.
5
Name the new profile.
•
To proceed to the next step without
changing the default name, press
X
.
•
Whatever name you choose will appear
in the network menu [Connect to FTP
server]> [Network settings] list.
•
To rename the profile, press
J
. For information on text entry, see
“Text Entry” (
0
64). Press
X
to proceed after entering a name.
385
FTP Servers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
6
Obtain or select an IP address.
•
Highlight one of the following options
and press
J
.
•
Press
J
to proceed when the “configuration complete” message is
displayed.
Option Description
[Obtain
automatically]
Select this option if the network is configured to
supply the IP address automatically. A
“configuration complete” message will be
displayed once an IP address has been assigned.
[Enter
manually]
Enter the IP address and sub-net mask manually.
•
Press
J
; you will be prompted to enter the IP
address.
•
Rotate the main command dial to highlight
segments.
•
Press
4
or
2
to change the highlighted segment
and press
J
to save changes.
•
Next, press
X
; a “configuration complete”
message will be displayed. Press
X
again to
display the sub-net mask.
•
Press
1
or
3
to edit the sub-net mask and press
J
; a “configuration complete” message will be
displayed.
386
FTP Servers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
7
Choose the server type.
Highlight [FTP] or [SFTP] (secure FTP) and
press
J
to display a dialog where you can
enter the server address.
8
Enter the server address.
•
Press
J
to enter the server URL or IP
address.
•
Press
X
when entry is complete.
•
Press
X
again to connect to the FTP
server. You will be prompted to choose
a login method.
387
FTP Servers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
9
Log in.
Highlight one of the following options
and press
J
.
D
Firewall Settings
TCP ports 21 and 32768 through 61000 are used for [FTP], TCP ports 22
and 32768 through 61000 for [SFTP]. File transfer may be blocked if the
server firewall is not configured to allow access to these ports.
Option Description
[Anonymous
login]
Select this option if the server does not require a user
ID or password. This option can only be used with
servers that are configured for anonymous login. If
login is successful, the camera will prompt you to
choose a destination.
[Enter user ID]
Enter a user ID and password. Press
J
to log in when
entry is complete. If login is successful, the camera
will prompt you to choose a destination.
388
FTP Servers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
10
Choose a destination folder.
Highlight one of the following options
and press
J
.
11
Check the connection.
When a connection is established, the
profile name will be displayed in green in
the camera [Connect to FTP server]
menu.
A connection has now been established between the camera and
the FTP server.
Pictures taken with the camera can be uploaded to the FTP server
as described in“Uploading Pictures” (
0
389).
Option Description
[Home folder]
Select this option to select the server’s home folder as
the destination for pictures uploaded from the camera.
A “setup complete” dialog will be displayed if the
operation is successful.
[Enter folder
name]
Enter the destination folder name manually. The folder
must already exist on the server. Enter the folder name
and path when prompted and press
J
to display the
“setup complete” dialog.
389
FTP Servers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
Uploading Pictures
Pictures can be selected for upload during playback. They can also be
uploaded automatically as they are taken.
•
Before uploading pictures, connect the
camera and FTP server via Ethernet or a
wireless network. Connect using a host
profile selected via the [Connect to FTP
server]> [Network settings] list.
•
When a connection is established, the
profile name will be displayed in green in
the camera [Connect to FTP server] menu.
D
Caution: Access Point Mode
Select a host profile and enable camera Wi-Fi before connecting.
390
FTP Servers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
❚❚
Selecting Pictures for Upload
1
Press the
K
button on the camera and select full-frame or
thumbnail playback.
2
Select a picture and press the
i
button.
3
Highlight [Select for upload (FTP)] and
press
J
.
•
A white “priority upload” icon will
appear on the picture. If the camera is
currently connected to a network,
upload will begin immediately and the
icon will turn green.
•
Otherwise, upload will begin when a connection is established.
•
Repeat Steps 2–3 to upload additional pictures.
391
FTP Servers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
D
Removing Upload Marking
•
Repeat Steps 2–3 to remove upload marking from selected pictures.
•
To remove upload marking from all pictures, select [Connect to FTP
server]> [Options] > [Deselect all?] in the network menu.
A
Filtering Pictures for Upload
The [Filtered playback] item in the playback
i
menu can be used to display
only pictures that meet chosen criteria (
0
255). The pictures can then all be
selected for upload by highlighting [Select all for upload (FTP)] in the
i
menu and pressing
J
.
392
FTP Servers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
❚❚
Uploading Photos as They Are Taken
To upload new photos as they are taken,
select [ON] for [Connect to FTP server]>
[Options]> [Auto upload] in the network
menu.
•
Upload begins only after the photo has
been recorded to the memory card. Be sure
a memory card is inserted in the camera.
•
Videos are not uploaded automatically. They must instead be
uploaded manually from the playback display.
❚❚
The Upload Icon
Upload status is indicated by the upload icon.
s
(white): Priority upload
The picture has been manually selected for
upload. Pictures marked with this icon will be
uploaded before pictures marked
W
(“upload”).
W
(white): Upload
The picture has been selected for upload but upload has not yet begun.
X
(green): Uploading
Upload in progress.
Y
(blue): Uploaded
Upload complete.
393
FTP Servers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
❚❚
The [Connect to FTP Server] Upload Status
Display
The [Connect to FTP server] display shows the following:
D
Loss of Signal
Wireless transmission may be interrupted if the signal is lost. Upload of
pictures with upload marking can be resumed by turning the camera off and
then on again once the signal has been re-established.
4 3 2
1
1
Status: The status of the
connection to the host. The
profile name is displayed in
green when a connection is
established.
While files are being
transferred, the status display
shows “Now uploading”
preceded by the name of the
file being sent. Errors and error
codes are also displayed here
(
0
399).
2
Signal strength: Ethernet
connections are shown by
d
.
When the camera is connected
to a wireless network, the icon
instead shows the wireless
signal strength.
3
Band: The band used by the
wireless network to which the
camera is connected in
infrastructure mode.
4
Pictures/time remaining: The
number of pictures remaining
and the time needed to send
them. The time remaining is an
estimate only.
394
FTP Servers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
D
Caution: During Upload
Do not remove the memory card or disconnect the Ethernet cable during
upload.
D
Caution: Uploading Protected Pictures via FTP
The copies on the FTP server will not be protected even if the originals are.
Markings can be added using ratings (
0
251).
D
Voice Memos
Voice memos will be included when the associated pictures are transmitted.
They cannot, however, be uploaded separately.
D
Interval-Timer Photography
Choose a long standby time before starting the interval timer, as upload will
be interrupted if the standby timer expires while interval-timer photography
is in progress.
D
Turning the Camera Off
The camera saves transfer marking when turned off and resumes upload
when next turned on.
395
FTP Servers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
A
Connection Status
Connection status is shown by the camera
network indicator.
Network indicator Status
I
(off) No connection.
K
(green) Waiting to connect.
H
(flashes green) Connected.
H
(flashes amber) Error.
396
FTP Servers: Connecting via Ethernet or Wireless LAN
Ending the
Connection to the FTP Server
You can end the connection by:
•
turning the camera off,
•
selecting [End current connection] for [Connect to FTP server]>
[Network settings] in the network menu, or
•
connecting to a smart device via Wi-Fi or Bluetooth.
D
Access-Point Mode
An error will occur if the FTP server’s wireless connection is disabled before
the camera’s. Disable camera’s connection first.
397
Troubleshooting Wireless LAN and Ethernet Connections
Refer to this section for information on errors involving wireless LAN
and Ethernet connections.
•
For information on the Wireless Transmitter Utility, see the utility’s
online help.
Problems and Solutions
Solutions to some common issues are listed below.
Troubleshooting Wireless LAN and
Ethernet Connections
Problem Solution
•
The camera displays
a wireless error.
•
The camera displays
a TCP/IP error.
•
The camera displays
an FTP error.
Connection settings require adjustment. Check
settings for the wireless router, FTP server, or host
computer and adjust camera settings appropriately
(
0
329, 367).
Check the error code, if any. For more information,
see “Error Codes” (
0
399).
“Connecting to
computer” does not
clear from the camera
display.
Check firewall settings (
0
355, 371).
The camera displays
the message,
“Ethernet cable is not
connected”.
Connect an Ethernet cable or select [OFF] for
[Wired LAN] (
0
346, 382, 756).
398
Troubleshooting Wireless LAN and Ethernet Connections
The camera displays a
“no memory card”
error.
The memory card is inserted incorrectly or not at all.
Check that card is inserted correctly (
0
81).
Upload is interrupted
and fails to resume.
Upload will resume if the camera is turned off and
then on again (
0
359).
The connection is
unreliable.
If the camera is connected in infrastructure mode,
check that the router is set to a channel between 1
and 8 (
0
760, 765).
Problem Solution
399
Troubleshooting Wireless LAN and Ethernet Connections
Error Codes
The following messages and error codes may be displayed if an error
occurs while the camera is connected to an FTP server via Ethernet or
wireless LAN.
●
[Wireless Error.]
●
[TCP/IP Error.]
Error code Solution
Err. 11
Confirm that the device to which you are attempting to
connect is on.
Check the SSID (
0
765).
Err. 12
Confirm that you are using the correct password for the
selected SSID.
Confirm that you are using the correct authentication
method (
0
765).
Err. 13
Confirm that the device to which you are attempting to
connect is on.
Turn the camera off and then on again.
Err. 1F Turn the camera off and then on again.
Error code Solution
Err. 21
Check that the TCP/IP address and sub-net mask are
correct (
0
765).
Err. 22
Duplicate TCP/IP address. Choose a different address
(
0
765).
400
Troubleshooting Wireless LAN and Ethernet Connections
●
[PTP/IP Error.]
●
[FTP Error.]
Error code Solution
Err. 41 Turn the camera off and then on again.
Error code Solution
Err. 31 Check that the FTP server address is correct (
0
765).
Err. 32
Check that the login name and password are correct
(
0
765).
Err. 34
Check that the destination folder name is correct
(
0
765).
Err. 35
Confirm that the destination folder is not write-
protected.
Err. 36 Check the DNS (
0
765).
Err. 37
Check firewall settings (
0
371).
Check PASV mode settings (
0
765).
Err. 3F Turn the camera off and then on again.
401
What Inter-camera Connections Can Do for You
Connecting to Other Cameras
Camera-Based Remote Photography
(Synchronized Release)
A master camera can be used to
release the shutters on up to ten
remote cameras in the same group
(
0
402).
Clock Synchronization (Synchronize Date and
Time)
Synchronize the clocks on multiple
cameras via a network (
0
421).
What Inter-camera Connections Can Do
for You
402
Synchronized Release
C
onfiguring and Using Synchronized Release
Follow the steps below to create host profiles for synchronized release.
Each camera saves the pictures it takes to its own memory card. Repeat
the process to create identical profiles for each camera.
❚❚
Wireless LAN
To create host profiles when connecting via wireless LAN:
1
Select [Connect to other cameras] in the
network menu, then highlight [Network
settings] and press
2
.
2
Highlight [Create profile] and press
J
.
Synchronized Release
403
Synchronized Release
3
Name the new profile.
•
To proceed to the next step without
changing the default name, press
X
.
•
Whatever name you choose will appear
in the network menu [Connect to other
cameras]> [Network settings] list.
•
To rename the profile, press
J
. For information on text entry, see
“Text Entry” (
0
64). Press
X
to proceed after entering a name.
404
Synchronized Release
4
Highlight [Search for Wi-Fi network]
and press
J
.
The camera will search for networks
currently active in the vicinity and list
them by name (SSID).
D
[Easy Connect]
•
To connect without entering an SSID or
encryption key, press
X
in Step 4. Next,
press
J
and choose from the following
options:
•
After connecting, proceed to Step 7.
Option Description
[Push-button
WPS]
For routers that support push-button WPS. Press the
WPS button on the router and then press the camera
J
button to connect.
[PIN-entry
WPS]
The camera will display a PIN. Using a computer,
enter the PIN on the router. For more information, see
the documentation provided with the router.
405
Synchronized Release
5
Choose a network.
•
Highlight a network SSID and press
J
.
•
The band on which each SSID operates
is indicated by an icon.
•
Encrypted networks are indicated by a
h
icon. If the selected network is
encrypted (
h
), you will be prompted to enter the encryption key. If
the network is not encrypted, proceed to Step 7.
•
If the desired network is not displayed, press
X
to search again.
D
Hidden SSIDs
Networks with hidden SSIDs are indicated by
blank entries in the network list.
•
To connect to a network with a hidden
SSID, highlight a blank entry and press
J
.
Next, press
J
; the camera will prompt you
to provide an SSID.
•
Enter the network name and press
X
. Press
X
again; the camera will now prompt you to enter the encryption key.
406
Synchronized Release
6
Enter the encryption key.
•
Press
J
and enter the encryption key for
the wireless router.
•
For more information on the wireless
router encryption key, see the
documentation for the wireless router.
•
Press
X
when entry is complete.
•
Press
X
again to initiate the connection.
A message will be displayed for a few
seconds when the connection is
established.
407
Synchronized Release
7
Obtain or select an IP address.
•
Highlight one of the following options
and press
J
.
•
Press
J
to proceed when the “configuration complete” message is
displayed.
•
The profile name is displayed when a connection is established.
Option Description
[Obtain
automatically]
Select this option if the network is configured to
supply the IP address automatically. A
“configuration complete” message will be
displayed once an IP address has been assigned.
•
It is recommended that you note the remote
camera IP address, as you will need it in
subsequent steps.
[Enter
manually]
Enter the IP address and sub-net mask manually.
•
Press
J
; you will be prompted to enter the IP
address.
•
Rotate the main command dial to highlight
segments.
•
Press
4
or
2
to change the highlighted segment
and press
J
to save changes.
•
Next, press
X
; a “configuration complete”
message will be displayed. Press
X
again to
display the sub-net mask.
•
Press
1
or
3
to edit the sub-net mask and press
J
; a “configuration complete” message will be
displayed.
408
Synchronized Release
8
Highlight [Group name], press
2
, and
enter a group name.
Enter a group name for the synchronized
cameras. Group names can be up to eight
characters long.
•
All master and remote cameras on the
network must be in the same group.
9
Highlight [Master/remote] and press
2
.
Choose a role for each camera from
“master” and “remote”.
•
[Master camera]: Pressing the shutter-
release button on the master camera
releases the shutters on the remote
cameras. Each group can have only one master. If the group has
multiple master cameras, only the first to connect to the network
will actually serve in that capacity.
•
[Remote camera]: The shutters on the remote cameras are
synchronized with the shutter on the master camera.
10
Repeat Steps 1 through 9 for the remaining cameras.
When configuring remote cameras, be sure to select [Remote
camera] in Step 9.
409
Synchronized Release
11
On the master camera, highlight
[Remote camera list] and press
2
.
Cameras assigned the remote camera role
in Step 9 are added to the master
camera’s remote camera list. The master
camera can store information for up to 10
remote cameras in slots [01] through [10].
12
Highlight the desired slot and press
2
.
Remote camera options will be displayed.
13
Highlight [Address] and press
2
.
You will be prompted to enter an IP
address.
410
Synchronized Release
14
Enter the remote camera IP address.
Enter the remote camera IP address you
noted in Step 7.
•
Rotate the main command dial to
highlight segments.
•
Press
4
or
2
to change the highlighted
segment and press
J
to proceed.
•
Press
X
to add the remote camera to the master camera remote
camera list and establish a connection.
A
Viewing Remote Camera IP Addresses
To view a remote camera’s IP address, select
[Connect to other cameras] > [Network
settings] in the camera’s network menu,
highlight a synchronized release host profile,
press
2
, and select [TCP/IP].
411
Synchronized Release
15
Add the remaining remote cameras.
•
When connecting to wireless networks, the cameras will display
the band used by the selected SSID.
•
The master camera shows the number
of cameras in the group currently
connected or not connected.
16
Take pictures.
•
Pressing the shutter-release button on the master camera releases
the shutters on the remote cameras.
•
Note that the standby timers will not expire automatically when
the cameras are in synchronized release mode.
412
Synchronized Release
❚❚
Ethernet
Follow the steps below to create host profiles for Ethernet connections.
Before proceeding, connect an Ethernet cable to the camera’s Ethernet
connector. Do not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an
angle. Connect the other end of the cable to a router.
1
Select [ON] for [Wired LAN] in the
network menu.
2
Select [Connect to other cameras] in the
network menu, then highlight [Network
settings] and press
2
.
3
Highlight [Create profile] and press
J
.
413
Synchronized Release
4
Name the new profile.
•
To display IP address options without
changing the default name, press
X
.
•
Whatever name you choose will appear
in the network menu [Connect to other
cameras]> [Network settings] list.
•
To rename the profile, press
J
. For information on text entry, see
“Text Entry” (
0
64). Press
X
to proceed after entering a name.
414
Synchronized Release
5
Obtain or select an IP address.
•
Highlight one of the following options
and press
J
.
•
Press
J
to proceed when the “configuration complete” message is
displayed.
•
The profile name is displayed when a connection is established.
Option Description
[Obtain
automatically]
Select this option if the network is configured to
supply the IP address automatically. A
“configuration complete” message will be
displayed once an IP address has been assigned.
•
It is recommended that you note the remote
camera IP address, as you will need it in
subsequent steps.
[Enter
manually]
Enter the IP address and sub-net mask manually.
•
Press
J
; you will be prompted to enter the IP
address.
•
Rotate the main command dial to highlight
segments.
•
Press
4
or
2
to change the highlighted segment
and press
J
to save changes.
•
Next, press
X
; a “configuration complete”
message will be displayed. Press
X
again to
display the sub-net mask.
•
Press
1
or
3
to edit the sub-net mask and press
J
; a “configuration complete” message will be
displayed.
415
Synchronized Release
6
Highlight [Group name], press
2
, and
enter a group name.
Enter a group name for the synchronized
cameras. Group names can be up to eight
characters long.
•
All master and remote cameras on the
network must all be in the same group.
7
Highlight [Master/remote] and press
2
.
Choose a role for each camera from
“master” and “remote”.
•
[Master camera]: Pressing the shutter-
release button on the master camera
releases the shutters on the remote
cameras. Each group can have only one master. If the group has
multiple master cameras, only the first to connect to the network
will actually serve in that capacity.
•
[Remote camera]: The shutters on the remote cameras are
synchronized with the shutter on the master camera.
8
Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for the remaining cameras.
When configuring remote cameras, be sure to select [Remote
camera] in Step 7.
416
Synchronized Release
9
On the master camera, highlight
[Remote camera list] and press
2
.
Cameras assigned the remote camera role
in Step 7 are added to the master
camera’s remote camera list. The master
camera can store information for up to 10
remote cameras in slots [01] through [10].
10
Highlight the desired slot and press
2
.
Remote camera options will be displayed.
11
Highlight [Address] and press
2
.
You will be prompted to enter an IP
address.
417
Synchronized Release
12
Enter the remote camera IP address.
Enter the IP address you noted in Step 5.
•
Rotate the main command dial to
highlight segments.
•
Press
4
or
2
to change the highlighted
segment and press
J
to proceed.
•
Press
X
to add the remote camera to the master camera remote
camera list and establish a connection.
A
Viewing Remote Camera IP Addresses
To view a remote camera’s IP address, select
[Connect to other cameras] > [Network
settings] in the camera’s network menu,
highlight a synchronized release host profile,
press
2
, and select [TCP/IP].
418
Synchronized Release
13
Add the remaining remote cameras.
The master camera shows the number of
cameras in the group currently connected
or not connected.
14
Take pictures.
•
Pressing the shutter-release button on the master camera releases
the shutters on the remote cameras.
•
Note that the standby timers will not expire automatically when
the cameras are in synchronized release mode.
419
Synchronized Release
A
Suspending Synchronized Release
To temporarily disable synchronized release without ending the camera’s
connection to the network, select [OFF] for [Connect to other cameras]>
[Synchronized release] in the network menu.
A
Viewing Remote Camera Status
To view remote camera status, highlight
[Remote camera list] on the master camera and
press
2
.
•
Remote cameras are identified by IP address.
•
Remote camera status is displayed as follows:
-[Connected]: Normal connection.
-[Busy]: The camera is being controlled from
another master camera.
-[Error]: The remote camera is off or its standby timer has expired. A third
possibility is that the group name is incorrect.
-[OFF]: [OFF] is selected for [Synchronized release] on the remote
camera or a remote camera has yet to be assigned to the slot.
•
Highlighting a remote camera with the [Connected] label and pressing
2
displays the number of pictures awaiting upload from the camera via FTP,
FTP connection status, the battery level, and the number of exposures
remaining.
•
The entries for the remote cameras previously used for synchronized
release will show the time of the most recent shot.
420
Synchronized Release
•
To edit remote camera settings from the
master camera, highlight the camera in the
remote camera list and press
2
.
- To temporarily suspend the connection to
the selected camera, select [OFF] for
[Connect to remote camera].
- To temporarily suspend synchronized
release on the selected camera, select [OFF] for [Synchronized release].
- If desired, you can then edit the camera’s IP address by highlighting
[Address] and pressing
2
. To reconnect, select [ON] for [Connect to
remote camera]. No connection will be established if no remote camera
exists at the specified address.
421
Synchronizing Camera Clocks
When the cameras are connected to the network using [Connect to
other cameras] in the network menu, the clocks on all cameras in the
current group connected can be set to the time and date reported by
the master camera. Synchronization applies to all options in the setup
menu [Time zone and date] display.
1
Connect the cameras to the network using [Connect to other
cameras] > [Network settings] in the network menu.
For more information, see “Synchronized Release” (
0
402).
2
On the master camera, select [Connect
to other cameras], then highlight
[Synchronize date and time] and press
2
.
•
Master camera clock settings will be
displayed.
•
[Synchronize date and time] is not available on the remote
cameras.
•
[Synchronize date and time] will not be available if no camera is
connected to the network.
3
Press
J
.
•
The clocks on the remote cameras will be set to the date and time
reported by the master camera.
•
A message will be displayed when the process is complete.
•
Press
J
again to return to the [Connect to other cameras]
display.
Synchronizing Camera Clocks
422
“On-Camera” Versus “Remote”
Flash Photography
You can take pictures using an optional flash unit mounted on the
camera accessory shoe or one or more remote flash units.
•
When using a flash, select [OFF] for [Silent mode] in the setup menu.
Camera-Mounted Flash Units
Take pictures using a flash unit mounted on the camera.
See the following pages for more information (
0
423).
Remote Flash Photography
Take pictures with one or more remote flash units
using wireless flash control (Advanced Wireless
Lighting, or AWL). For more information, see
“Remote Flash Photography” (
0
437).
“On-Camera” Versus “Remote”
423
Using an On-Camera Flash
1
Mount a flash unit on the camera
accessory shoe.
See the documentation supplied with
each Speedlight for information on
mounting the unit on the camera.
2
Turn on the camera and flash unit.
The flash will begin charging; the flash-ready indicator (
c
) will
appear in the shooting display when charging is complete.
3
Choose the flash control mode (
0
426) and flash mode (
0
429).
4
Adjust shutter speed and aperture.
5
Take pictures.
Using an On-Camera Flash
424
Using an On-Camera Flash
D
Shutter Speed
Shutter speed can be set as follows when an optional flash unit is used:
* Shutter speed may be set as slow as 30 s if slow sync, slow rear-curtain
sync, or slow sync with red-eye reduction is selected for flash mode.
D
Caution: Third-Party Flash Units
The camera cannot be used with flash units that would apply voltages over
250 V to the camera’s X contacts or short-circuit contacts on the accessory
shoe. Use of such flash units could not only interfere with normal operation
of the camera but also damage the flash sync circuits of the camera and/or
flash.
Shooting mode Shutter speed
P, A Set automatically by camera (
1
/
200
s–
1
/
60
s)
*
S
1
/
200
s–30 s
M
1
/
200
s–30 s, Bulb, Time
425
Using an On-Camera Flash
D
i-TTL Flash Control
When an optional flash unit that supports the Nikon Creative Lighting
System is attached and set to TTL, the camera uses monitor pre-flashes for
balanced or standard “i-TTL fill-flash” flash control. i-TTL flash control is not
available with flash units that do not support the Nikon Creative Lighting
System. The camera supports the following types of i-TTL flash control:
•
Standard i-TTL fill-flash is activated automatically when [Spot metering] is
selected.
A
The Sync Terminal
A sync cable can be connected to the sync
terminal (which features a JIS-B locking nut) as
required. Do not connect another flash unit via a
sync cable when performing rear-curtain sync
flash photography with a flash unit mounted on
the camera accessory shoe.
Flash control Description
i-TTL balanced
fill-flash
The camera uses “i-TTL balanced fill-flash” flash control
for a natural balance between the main subject and
ambient background lighting. After the shutter-release
button is pressed and immediately before the main flash,
the flash unit emits a series of monitor pre-flashes which
the camera uses to optimize flash output for a balance
between the main subject and ambient background
lighting.
Standard i-TTL
fill-flash
Flash output is adjusted to bring lighting in the frame to
a standard level; the brightness of the background is not
taken into account. Recommended for shots in which the
main subject is emphasized at the expense of
background details, or when exposure compensation is
used.
426
Flash Control Mode
When a flash unit that supports unified flash
control (an SB-5000, SB-500, SB-400, or
SB-300;
0
428) is mounted on the camera, the
flash control mode, flash level, and other flash
settings can be adjusted using the [Flash
control]> [Flash control mode] item in the
photo shooting menu. The flash control
modes available vary with the flash used. The options available in the
flash control display vary with the option selected for [Flash control
mode].
•
Settings for flash units other than the SB-5000, SB-500, SB-400, and
SB-300 can only be adjusted using flash unit controls.
•
Settings for an SB-5000 mounted on the accessory shoe can also be
adjusted using the controls on the flash unit.
Flash Control Mode
Option Description
[TTL]
•
Flash output is adjusted automatically in response to
shooting conditions.
•
Output can be adjusted using [Flash compensation
(TTL)].
427
Flash Control Mode
[Auto external
flash]
•
Light from the flash is reflected from the subject to an
auto external flash sensor and flash output adjusted
automatically.
•
Output can be adjusted using [Auto external flash
compensation].
•
Auto external flash supports “auto aperture” (
q
A) and
“non-TTL auto” (A) modes. For details, see the
documentation provided with the flash unit.
[Distance-
priority
manual]
•
Choose the distance to the subject; flash output will be
adjusted automatically.
•
The distance to the subject is selected using [Distance-
priority options]> [Distance], while flash output can
be adjusted using [Flash compensation].
[Manual]
•
Choose the flash level manually.
•
Flash output is selected using [Manual output
amount].
[Repeating
flash]
•
The flash fires repeatedly while the shutter is open,
producing a multiple-exposure effect.
•
Use [Repeating flash] > [Output] to adjust flash
output and [Times] to choose the number of times the
unit fires. [Frequency] controls how often the unit fires
per second, measured in Hz.
•
The maximum number of times the flash will fire varies
with [Output] and [Frequency]. For details, see the
documentation provided with the flash unit.
Option Description
428
Flash Control Mode
D
Unified Flash Control
Unified flash control allows the camera and flash unit to share settings.
Changes to flash settings made with either the camera or flash unit are
reflected on both devices, as are changes made using optional Camera
Control Pro 2 software. The flash unit must support unified flash control.
429
Flash Modes
To choose the flash mode, hold the
c
button and rotate the main
command dial.
•
The options available vary with the shooting mode.
Flash Modes
Option Description
Available
in
I
[Fill flash]
(front-curtain
sync)
This mode is recommended in most
situations. In modes P and A, shutter
speed will automatically be set to
values between
1
/
200
s (or
1
/
8000
s
with auto FP high-speed sync) and
1
/
60
s.
P, S, A, M
430
Flash Modes
J
[Red-eye
reduction]
Use for portraits. The flash fires
before the photograph is taken,
reducing “red-eye”.
•
A flash unit with red-eye reduction
is required.
•
The desired results may not be
achieved if the subject or camera
moves before the shutter is
released (this setting is not
recommended with moving
subjects or in other situations
requiring a quick shutter
response).
P, S, A, M
L
[Slow sync]
As for “fill flash”, except that shutter
speed slows automatically to
capture background lighting at night
or under low light.
•
Note that photos may be prone to
blurring due to camera shake at
slow shutter speeds.
•
Use of a tripod is recommended.
P, A
K
[Slow sync +
red-eye] (red-
eye reduction
with slow sync)
Use to include background lighting
in portraits. Red-eye reduction is
combined with slow shutter speeds
to capture background lighting at
night or under low light.
•
Note that photos may be prone to
blurring due to camera shake at
slow shutter speeds.
•
Use of a tripod is recommended.
P, A
Option Description
Available
in
431
Flash Modes
D
Studio Strobe Lighting
Rear-curtain sync may not correctly synchronize with studio flash systems.
M
[Rear-curtain
sync]
The flash fires just before the shutter
closes, creating the effect of a stream
of light behind moving light sources.
•
Selecting mode P or A after
choosing this option sets the flash
mode to slow sync.
•
Note that photos may be prone to
blurring due to camera shake at
slow shutter speeds.
•
Use of a tripod is recommended.
P, S, A, M
s
[Flash off] The flash does not fire. P, S, A, M
Option Description
Available
in
432
Flash Compensation
Flash compensation is used to deliberately alter flash output, for
example in order to change the brightness of the subject relative to the
background. Flash output can be increased to make the main subject
appear brighter, reduced to prevent glare, or otherwise fine-tuned to
produce the desired result.
Adjusting Flash Compensation
Hold the
c
button and rotate the sub-command dial.
•
Choose from values of from −3 to +1 EV.
•
At default settings, changes to flash output are made in increments of
1
/
3
EV. The size of the increment can be selected using Custom Setting
b2 [EV steps for exposure cntrl].
Flash Compensation
433
Flash Compensation
•
In general, choose positive values for brighter lighting, negative
values to ensure that the subject is not too brightly lit.
•
At values other than ±0.0, a
Y
icon will appear in the shooting display
and the control panel.
•
Flash compensation can be viewed in the shooting display and
control panel by pressing the
c
button.
•
Normal flash output can be restored by setting flash compensation to
±0.0. Flash compensation is not reset when the camera is turned off.
Monitor Control panel
434
FV Lock
This feature is used to lock flash output for optional CLS-compatible
flash units, letting you take multiple photos or recompose shots without
changing the flash level. Your subject need not be in the center of the
frame, giving you more freedom when composing shots.
•
Flash output is adjusted automatically for any changes in ISO
sensitivity and aperture.
1
Assign [FV lock] to a control using
Custom Setting f2 [Custom controls
(shooting)].
2
Mount a flash unit that supports FV lock on the camera
accessory shoe.
FV Lock
435
FV Lock
3
Turn the flash unit on and choose a flash control mode of TTL or
monitor pre-flash
q
A or A.
•
If you are using an SB-5000, SB-500, SB-400, or SB-300 mounted on
the camera accessory shoe, choose [TTL] or [Auto external flash]
for [Flash control]> [Flash control mode].
•
For information on other flash units, see the documentation
provided with the unit.
4
Focus.
Position the subject in the center of the frame and press the shutter-
release button halfway to focus.
436
FV Lock
5
Lock flash level.
•
After confirming that the flash-ready indicator (
c
) appears in the
shooting display, press the [FV lock] control; the flash unit will
emit a monitor pre-flash to determine the appropriate flash level.
•
Flash output will lock and an FV lock
icon (
r
) will appear in the shooting
display.
6
Recompose the shot.
7
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to
shoot.
If desired, additional pictures can be taken without releasing FV
lock. Repeat Steps 6 to 7 to take additional shots.
8
Release FV lock.
Press the [FV lock] control to release FV lock and confirm that the FV
lock icon (
r
) is no longer displayed in the shooting display.
437
What Is Remote Flash Photography?
Remote Flash Photography
Take pictures with one or more remote flash units using wireless flash
control (Advanced Wireless Lighting, or AWL). For information on using
a flash unit mounted on the camera accessory shoe, see “Flash
Photography” (
0
422).
Throughout this chapter, operations involving an accessory connected to
the camera are indicated by
C
, operations involving remote flash units by
f
. For more information on using remote flash units (
f
), see the
documentation provided with the flash unit.
What Is Remote Flash Photography?
438
What Is Remote Flash Photography?
Using Remote Flash Units
Remote flash units can be controlled via:
•
radio signals
*
(
0
439),
•
optical signals from a flash unit mounted on
the camera accessory shoe (
0
453), or
•
radio signals, with additional lighting
provided by a shoe-mounted flash unit
*
(
0
452).
* Radio flash control is available only when a WR-R11a or WR-R10 is
connected to the camera.
439
Radio AWL
Remote flash control provided via radio signals
from a WR-R11a or WR-R10 connected to the
camera is termed “radio Advanced Wireless
Lighting”, or “radio AWL”. Radio AWL is available
with SB-5000 flash units.
Establishing a Wireless Connection
Before using radio AWL, establish a wireless connection between the
WR-R11a or WR-R10 and the remote flash units.
D
The WR-R10 Wireless Remote Controller
•
A WR-A10 adapter is required when using the WR-R10.
•
Be sure to update the firmware for the optional WR-R10 wireless remote
controller to version 3.0 or later before using radio AWL. Information on
performing firmware updates is available via the Nikon website for your
country or region.
1
C
: Connect the WR-R11a/WR-R10.
For more information, see the documentation provided with the
WR-R11a/WR-R10.
Radio AWL
440
Radio AWL
2
C
: Select [Radio AWL] for [Flash
control] > [Wireless flash options] in the
photo shooting menu.
3
C
: Choose a channel for the WR-R11a/
WR-R10.
Set the WR-R11a/WR-R10 channel selector
to the desired channel.
441
Radio AWL
4
C
: Choose a link mode for the
WR-R11a/WR-R10.
Select [Wireless remote (WR) options]>
[Link mode] in the camera setup menu
and choose from the following options:
Option Description
[Pairing]
The camera connects only to devices with which it has
previously been paired.
•
As camera will not communicate with devices with
which it has not been paired, this option can be used
to prevent signal interference from other devices in
the vicinity.
•
Given that each device must be paired separately,
however, PIN is recommended when connecting to a
large number of devices.
[PIN]
Communication is shared among all devices with the
same four-digit PIN.
•
This option is a good choice for photography
featuring a large number of remote devices.
•
If there are multiple cameras present that share the
same PIN, the flash units will be under the sole
control of the camera that connects first, preventing
all other cameras from connecting (the LEDs on the
WR-R11a/WR-R10 units connected to the affected
cameras will blink).
442
Radio AWL
5
f
: Establish a wireless connection between the WR-R11a/
WR-R10 and the remote flash units.
•
Set the remote units to radio AWL remote mode.
•
Set the remote units to the channel you selected for the WR-R11a/
WR-R10 in Step 3.
•
Pair each of the remote units with the WR-R11a/WR-R10 according
to the option selected in Step 4:
-[Pairing]: Initiate pairing on the remote unit and press the
WR-R11a/WR-R10 pairing button. Pairing is complete when the
LINK lamps on the WR-R11a/WR-R10 and flash unit flash orange
and green. Once a connection is established, the LINK lamp on
the remote flash unit will light green.
-[PIN]: Use the controls on the remote flash unit to enter the PIN
you selected in the previous step. Pairing begins when the PIN is
entered. Once a connection is established, the LINK lamp on the
remote flash unit will light green.
6
f
: Repeat Step 5 for the remaining remote units.
443
Radio AWL
7
f
: Confirm that the flash-ready lights for all flash units are lit.
In radio AWL, the flash-ready indicator will light in the camera
shooting display when all flash units are ready.
D
Listing Remote Flash Units
To view the flash units currently controlled using radio AWL, select [Flash
control]> [Radio remote flash info] in the camera photo shooting menu.
•
The identifier (remote flash unit name) for each unit can be changed using
flash unit controls.
D
Reconnecting
As long as the channel, link mode, and other settings remain the same, the
WR-R11a/WR-R10 will automatically connect to previously paired flash units
when remote mode is selected on the flash unit, and Steps 3–6 can be
omitted. The flash unit LINK lamp lights green when a connection is
established.
32
1
1
Connected flash unit
2
Group
3
Flash-ready indicator
444
Radio AWL
Remote Flash Photography
Settings are adjusted using [Flash control]>
[Remote flash control] in the photo shooting
menu. Choose a remote flash control mode
and take pictures as described below.
❚❚
Group Flash
Select this item if you want to adjust settings separately for the flash
units in each group.
1
C
: Select [Group flash] for [Flash
control] > [Remote flash control].
2
C
: Highlight [Group flash options] in
the [Flash control] display and press
2
.
445
Radio AWL
3
C
: Choose a flash control mode and
flash level.
•
Choose a flash control mode and flash
level for the flash units in each group.
•
The following options are available:
4
f
: Group the remote flash units.
•
Choose a group (A–F) for each of the remote flash units.
•
The master flash can control up to 18 flash units in any
combination.
Option Description
TTL i-TTL flash control.
q
A
Auto aperture. Available only with compatible flash
units.
M Choose the flash level manually.
––
(off)
The remote units do not fire. [Comp.] cannot be
adjusted.
446
Radio AWL
5
C
/
f
: Compose the shot and arrange the flash units.
•
See the documentation provided with the flash units for more
information.
•
Test-fire the units and confirm that they are functioning normally.
To test-fire the units, use the [Test flash] item in the
i
menu,
which can be added to the menu using Custom Setting f1
[Customize
i
menu].
6
C
: Take the photograph.
A
Flash Info
Group flash options can be viewed using the
[Flash info] item in the
i
menu, which can be
added to the menu using Custom Setting f1
[Customize
i
menu].
447
Radio AWL
❚❚
Quick Wireless Control
Select this item to control the relative balance between the remote flash
units in groups A and B and adjust flash output for group C. Output for
group C is adjusted manually.
1
C
: Select [Quick wireless control] for
[Flash control] > [Remote flash control].
2
C
: Highlight [Quick wireless control
options] in the [Flash control] display
and press
2
.
448
Radio AWL
3
C
: Adjust quick wireless control settings.
•
Choose the balance between groups
A and B.
•
Adjust flash compensation for groups
A and B.
•
Adjust settings for group C:
- Select [M] to enable or [––] to disable
the units in group C.
- When [M] is selected, the units in
group C will fire at the chosen output.
449
Radio AWL
4
f
: Group the remote flash units.
•
Choose a group (A, B, or C).
•
The master flash can control up to 18 flash units in any
combination.
5
C
/
f
: Compose the shot and arrange the flash units.
•
See the documentation provided with the flash units for more
information.
•
Test-fire the units and confirm that they are functioning normally.
To test-fire the units, use the [Test flash] item in the
i
menu,
which can be added to the menu using Custom Setting f1
[Customize
i
menu].
6
C
: Take the photograph.
A
Flash Info
Quick wireless control settings can be viewed
using the [Flash info] item in the
i
menu, which
can be added to the menu using Custom Setting
f1 [Customize
i
menu].
450
Radio AWL
❚❚
Remote Repeating
The flash units fire repeatedly while the shutter is open, producing a
multiple-exposure effect.
1
C
: Select [Remote repeating] for [Flash
control] > [Remote flash control].
2
C
: Highlight [Remote repeating
options] in the [Flash control] display
and press
2
.
3
C
: Adjust remote repeating options.
•
Adjust “output”, “times”, and
“frequency”.
•
Enable or disable selected groups.
- Select [ON] to enable or [––] to disable
the selected group.
451
Radio AWL
4
f
: Group the remote flash units.
•
Choose a group (A–F) for each of the remote flash units.
•
The master flash can control up to 18 flash units in any
combination.
5
C
/
f
: Compose the shot and arrange the flash units.
•
See the documentation provided with the flash units for more
information.
•
Test-fire the units and confirm that they are functioning normally.
To test-fire the units, use the [Test flash] item in the
i
menu,
which can be added to the menu using Custom Setting f1
[Customize
i
menu].
6
C
: Take the photograph.
A
Flash Info
Remote repeating options can be viewed using
the [Flash info] item in the
i
menu, which can be
added to the menu using Custom Setting f1
[Customize
i
menu].
452
Radio AWL
Adding a Shoe-Mounted Flash Unit
Radio-controlled flash units (
0
439) can be
combined with any of the following flash units
mounted on the camera accessory shoe:
•
SB-5000: Before attaching the flash unit, set it to
radio-controlled master flash mode (a
d
icon
will appear at the top left corner of the display)
and choose group or remote-repeating flash control. Once the unit is
attached, settings can be adjusted from the camera menus or using
the controls on the SB-5000. In the case of the camera menus, use the
options listed under [Group flash options]> [Master flash] or under
[M] in the [Remote repeating options] display.
•
SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600: Configure the flash for
standalone use. Use the controls on the flash unit to adjust flash
settings.
•
SB-500, SB-400, SB-300: Mount the unit on the camera. Adjust settings
using the [Group flash options]> [Master flash] item in the camera
menus.
453
Optical AWL
Remote flash units can be controlled via optical
signals from an optional flash unit mounted on the
camera accessory shoe and functioning as a master
flash (optical AWL). For information on compatible
flash units, see “Features Available with CLS-
Compatible Flash Units” (
0
816).
•
If the flash unit in question is an SB-5000 or SB-500, settings can be
adjusted from the camera. For more information, see “Using Optical
AWL with the SB-5000 or SB-500” (
0
454). See the documentation
provided with the flash units for more information.
•
Settings for other flash units must be adjusted using flash unit
controls. For more information, see the documentation provided with
the flash unit in question.
Optical AWL
454
Optical AWL
Using Optical AWL with the SB-5000 or SB-500
Mount the flash unit on the camera accessory
shoe. Select [Optical AWL] for [Flash
control]> [Wireless flash options] in the
photo shooting menu and choose a remote
flash control mode (the SB-500 supports only
[Group flash]). Choose a remote flash control
mode and take pictures as described below.
D
The SB-5000
When an SB-5000 is mounted on the camera accessory shoe, [Flash control]
settings can also be changed using the controls on the flash unit.
❚❚
Group Flash
Select this item if you want to adjust settings separately for the flash
units in each group.
1
C
: Select [Group flash] for [Flash
control] > [Remote flash control].
2
C
: Highlight [Group flash options] in
the [Flash control] display and press
2
.
455
Optical AWL
3
C
: Adjust flash output and choose the
channel and flash control mode.
•
Choose the flash control mode and flash
level for the master flash and the remote
flash units in each group.
•
The following options are available:
•
For [Channel], choose the channel (1–4)
the master flash will use for optical
remote flash control.
•
If the remote flash units include an
SB-500, you must choose Channel [3].
4
f
: Choose a channel for the remote flash units.
Set the remote flash units to the channel selected for [Channel] in
Step 3.
Option Description
TTL i-TTL flash control.
q
A
Auto aperture. Available only with compatible flash
units.
M Choose the flash level manually.
––
(off)
The remote units do not fire. [Comp.] cannot be
adjusted.
456
Optical AWL
5
f
: Group the remote flash units.
•
Choose a group (A, B, or C).
•
If you are using an SB-500 as the master flash, choose from groups
A and B.
•
There is no limit on the number of remote flash units that may be
used. The practical maximum, however, is three per group, as the
light emitted by the remote flash units will interfere with
performance if more flash units are used.
6
C
/
f
: Compose the shot and arrange the flash units.
•
See the documentation provided with the flash units for more
information.
•
Test-fire the units and confirm that they are functioning normally.
To test-fire the units, use the [Test flash] item in the
i
menu,
which can be added to the menu using Custom Setting f1
[Customize
i
menu].
7
C
/
f
: Take the photograph after confirming that the flash-ready
lights for all flash units are lit.
A
Flash Info
Group flash options can be viewed using the
[Flash info] item in the
i
menu, which can be
added to the menu using Custom Setting f1
[Customize
i
menu].
457
Optical AWL
❚❚
Quick Wireless Control (SB-5000 Only)
Select this item to control the relative balance between the remote flash
units in groups A and B and adjust flash output for group C. Output for
group C is adjusted manually.
1
C
: Select [Quick wireless control] for
[Flash control] > [Remote flash control].
2
C
: Highlight [Quick wireless control
options] in the [Flash control] display
and press
2
.
458
Optical AWL
3
C
: Adjust quick wireless control settings.
•
Choose the balance between groups
A and B.
•
Adjust flash compensation for groups
A and B.
•
Adjust settings for group C:
- Select [M] to enable or [––] to disable
the units in group C.
- When [M] is selected, the units in
group C will fire at the chosen output.
•
Choose the channel.
-For [Channel], choose the channel (1–
4) the master flash will use for optical
remote flash control.
- If the remote flash units include an
SB-500, you must choose Channel [3].
459
Optical AWL
4
f
: Choose a channel for the remote flash units.
Set the remote flash units to the channel selected for [Channel] in
Step 3.
5
f
: Group the remote flash units.
•
Choose a group (A, B, or C).
•
There is no limit on the number of remote flash units that may be
used. The practical maximum, however, is three per group, as the
light emitted by the remote flash units will interfere with
performance if more flash units are used.
6
C
/
f
: Compose the shot and arrange the flash units.
•
See the documentation provided with the flash units for more
information.
•
Test-fire the units and confirm that they are functioning normally.
To test-fire the units, use the [Test flash] item in the
i
menu,
which can be added to the menu using Custom Setting f1
[Customize
i
menu].
7
C
/
f
: Take the photograph after confirming that the flash-ready
lights for all flash units are lit.
A
Flash Info
Quick wireless control settings can be viewed
using the [Flash info] item in the
i
menu, which
can be added to the menu using Custom Setting
f1 [Customize
i
menu].
460
Optical AWL
❚❚
Remote Repeating (SB-5000 Only)
The flash units fire repeatedly while the shutter is open, producing a
multiple-exposure effect.
1
C
: Select [Remote repeating] for [Flash
control] > [Remote flash control].
2
C
: Highlight [Remote repeating
options] in the [Flash control] display
and press
2
.
461
Optical AWL
3
C
: Adjust remote repeating options.
•
Adjust “output”, “times”, and
“frequency”.
•
Enable or disable selected groups.
- Select [ON] to enable or [––] to disable
the selected group.
•
Choose the channel.
-For [Channel], choose the channel (1–
4) the master flash will use for optical
remote flash control.
- If the remote flash units include an
SB-500, you must choose Channel [3].
462
Optical AWL
4
f
: Choose a channel for the remote flash units.
Set the remote flash units to the channel selected for [Channel] in
Step 3.
5
f
: Group the remote flash units.
•
Choose a group (A, B, or C).
•
There is no limit on the number of remote flash units that may be
used. The practical maximum, however, is three per group, as the
light emitted by the remote flash units will interfere with
performance if more flash units are used.
6
C
/
f
: Compose the shot and arrange the flash units.
•
See the documentation provided with the flash units for more
information.
•
Test-fire the units and confirm that they are functioning normally.
To test-fire the units, use the [Test flash] item in the
i
menu,
which can be added to the menu using Custom Setting f1
[Customize
i
menu].
7
C
/
f
: Take the photograph after confirming that the flash-ready
lights for all flash units are lit.
463
Optical AWL
D
Optical AWL
•
Position the sensor windows on the remote flash units to pick up the light
from the master flash. Particular care is required if the master flash is
mounted on a hand-held camera.
•
Be sure that direct light or strong reflections from the remote flash units do
not enter the camera lens (in [TTL] mode) or the photocells on the remote
flash units ([
q
A] mode). Otherwise light from the flash units may interfere
with exposure.
•
Even if [--] is selected for [Master flash]> [Mode], the master flash may
emit low-intensity timing flashes. These flashes may appear in
photographs taken at short range. This can be prevented by choosing low
ISO sensitivities or small apertures (high f-numbers).
•
After positioning the remote flash units, take a test shot and view the
results in the camera display.
A
Flash Info
Remote repeating options can be viewed using
the [Flash info] item in the
i
menu, which can be
added to the menu using Custom Setting f1
[Customize
i
menu].
464
Defaults
Menu Guide
The defaults for the photo shooting, video recording, Custom Settings,
playback, setup, and network menus are listed below.
Photo Shooting Menu Defaults
Defaults
Photo shooting menu option Default
[Shooting menu bank]A
[Extended menu banks]OFF
[Storage folder]
[Rename]NCZ_9
[Select folder by number]100
[Select folder from list]—
[File naming]DSC
[Role played by card in Slot 2] Overflow
[Image area]
[Choose image area] FX (36×24)
[DX crop alert]OFF
[Image quality] JPEG normal
[Image size] Large
[RAW recording] High efficiency
m
465
Defaults
[ISO sensitivity settings]
[ISO sensitivity] 100
[Auto ISO sensitivity control]ON
[Maximum sensitivity] 25600
[Maximum sensitivity with
c
] Same as without flash
[Minimum shutter speed]Auto
[White balance]
Auto: Keep white (reduce
warm colors)
[Fine-tune]A-B: 0, G-M: 0
[Choose color temperature] 5000 K
[Preset manual]d-1
[Set Picture Control]Auto
[Manage Picture Control]—
[Color space]sRGB
[Active D-Lighting]Off
[Long exposure NR]OFF
[High ISO NR] Normal
[Vignette control] Normal
[Diffraction compensation]ON
[Auto distortion control]ON
[Photo flicker reduction]OFF
[Metering] Matrix metering
Photo shooting menu option Default
466
Defaults
[Flash control]
[Flash control mode] TTL
[Wireless flash options]Off
[Remote flash control]Group flash
[Focus mode]Single AF
[AF-area mode]Single-point AF
[AF subject detection options]Auto
[Vibration reduction]Sport
[Auto bracketing]
[Auto bracketing set] AE & flash bracketing
[Number of shots]0
[Increment]1.0
[Multiple exposure]
[Multiple exposure mode]Off
[Number of shots]2
[Overlay mode] Average
[Save individual pictures (RAW)]ON
[Overlay shooting]ON
[Select first exposure (RAW)]—
[HDR overlay]
[HDR mode]Off
[HDR strength]Auto
[Save individual pictures (RAW)]OFF
Photo shooting menu option Default
467
Defaults
[Interval timer shooting]
[Choose start day/time]Now
[Interval] 1 min.
[Intervals×shots/interval] 0001×1
[Exposure smoothing]ON
[Interval priority]OFF
[Focus before each shot]OFF
[Options]Off
[Starting storage folder]
[New folder]
U
[Reset file numbering]
U
[Time-lapse video]
[Interval]5s
[Shooting time] 25 min.
[Exposure smoothing]ON
[Choose image area]FX
[Video file type] H.265 8-bit (MOV)
[Frame size/frame rate] 3840×2160; 30p
[Interval priority]OFF
[Focus before each shot]OFF
[Destination]Slot 1
Photo shooting menu option Default
468
Defaults
Video Recording Menu Defaults
[Focus shift shooting]
[No. of shots]100
[Focus step width]5
[Interval until next shot]0
[First-frame exposure lock]ON
[Starting storage folder]
[New folder]
U
[Reset file numbering]
U
Video recording menu option Default
[Shooting menu bank]A
[Extended menu banks]OFF
[Storage folder]
[Rename]NCZ_9
[Select folder by number] 100
[Select folder from list]—
[File naming]DSC
[Destination]Slot 1
[Video file type] H.265 8-bit (MOV)
[Frame size/frame rate] 3840×2160; 30p
[Image area]
[Choose image area]FX
[DX crop alert]OFF
Photo shooting menu option Default
469
Defaults
[ISO sensitivity settings]
[Maximum sensitivity] 25600
[Auto ISO control (mode M)]ON
[ISO sensitivity (mode M)] 100
[White balance] Same as photo settings
[Fine-tune] A-B: 0, G-M: 0
[Choose color temperature] 5000 K
[Preset manual]d-1
[Set Picture Control] Same as photo settings
[Manage Picture Control]—
[HLG quality]
[Quick sharp]0
[Contrast]0
[Saturation]0
[Hue]0
[Active D-Lighting]Off
[High ISO NR] Normal
[Vignette control] Normal
[Diffraction compensation]ON
[Auto distortion control]ON
[Video flicker reduction]Auto
[Metering] Matrix metering
[Focus mode] Full-time AF
[AF-area mode] Single-point AF
Video recording menu option Default
470
Defaults
[AF subject detection options]
[Subject detection]Auto
[AF when subject not detected]ON
[Vibration reduction] Same as photo settings
[Electronic VR]OFF
[Microphone sensitivity]Auto
[Attenuator]OFF
[Frequency response]Wide range
[Wind noise reduction]OFF
[Mic jack plug-in power]ON
[Headphone volume]15
[Timecode]
[Record timecodes]Off
[Count-up method] Record run
[Timecode origin]—
[Drop frame]ON
[External rec. cntrl (HDMI)]OFF
Video recording menu option Default
471
Defaults
Custom Settings Menu Defaults
Custom Settings menu option Default
[Custom Settings bank]A
a1 [AF-C priority selection] Release
a2 [AF-S priority selection]Focus
a3 [Focus tracking with lock-on]
[Blocked shot AF response]3
[Subject motion]Steady
a4 [Focus points used] All points
a5 [Store points by orientation]Off
a6 [AF activation] Shutter/AF-ON
a7 [Focus point persistence]Auto
a8 [Limit AF-area mode selection]
[Pinpoint AF]
M
[Single-point AF]
L
(cannot be deselected)
[Dynamic-area AF (S)]
M
[Dynamic-area AF (M)]
M
[Dynamic-area AF (L)]
M
[Wide-area AF (S)]
M
[Wide-area AF (L)]
M
[3D-tracking]
M
[Auto-area AF]
M
472
Defaults
a9 [Focus mode restrictions] No restrictions
a10 [Focus point wrap-around]OFF
a11 [Focus point display]
[Manual focus mode]ON
[Dynamic-area AF assist]ON
[AF-C in-focus display]OFF
a12 [Built-in AF-assist illuminator]ON
a13 [Focus peaking]
[Focus peaking display]OFF
[Focus peaking sensitivity] 2 (standard)
[Focus peaking highlight color]Red
a14 [Manual focus ring in AF mode]ON
b1 [ISO sensitivity step value]1/3 step
b2 [EV steps for exposure cntrl] 1/3 EV (comp. 1/3 EV)
b3 [Easy exposure compensation]Off
b4 [Matrix metering face detection]ON
b5 [Center-weighted area] Standard
b6 [Fine-tune optimal exposure]
[Matrix metering]0
[Center-weighted metering]0
[Spot metering]0
[Highlight-weighted metering]0
b7 [Keep exp. when f/ changes] Exposure maintenance off
Custom Settings menu option Default
473
Defaults
c1 [Shutter-release button AE-L]Off
c2 [Self-timer]
[Self-timer delay]10s
[Number of shots]1
[Interval between shots]0.5s
c3 [Power off delay]
[Playback]10s
[Menus]1min
[Picture review]4s
[Standby timer]30s
Custom Settings menu option Default
474
Defaults
d1 [Continuous shooting speed]
[Continuous high-speed]20fps
[Continuous low-speed]5fps
d2 [Maximum shots per burst]
∞
d3 [Limit release mode selection]
[Single frame]
L
(cannot be deselected)
[Continuous L]
M
[Continuous H]
M
[C30]
M
[C120]
M
[Self-timer]
M
d4 [Sync. release mode options]Sync
d5 [Extended shutter speeds (M)]OFF
d6 [Limit selectable image area]
[FX (36×24)]
L
(cannot be deselected)
[DX (24×16)]
M
[1:1 (24×24)]
M
[16:9 (36×20)]
M
d7 [File number sequence]On
d8 [View mode (photo Lv)] Show effects of settings
d9 [Starlight view (photo Lv)]OFF
Custom Settings menu option Default
475
Defaults
d10 [Warm display colors]
[Warm display color options]Off
[Warm color display brightness]0
d11 [LCD illumination]OFF
d12 [View all in continuous mode]ON
d13 [Release timing indicator]Type B
d14 [Image frame]ON
d15 [Grid type]3×3
d16 [Virtual horizon type]Type A
d17 [Custom monitor shooting display]
[Display 1]
L
(cannot be deselected)
[Display 2]
M
[Display 3]
M
[Display 4]
M
[Display 5]
M
d18 [Custom viewfinder shooting display]
[Display 1]
L
(cannot be deselected)
[Display 2]
M
[Display 3]
M
[Display 4]
M
Custom Settings menu option Default
476
Defaults
e1 [Flash sync speed] 1/200 s
e2 [Flash shutter speed]1/60s
e3 [Exposure comp. for flash] Entire frame
e4 [Auto
c
ISO sensitivity control] Subject and background
e5 [Modeling flash]ON
e6 [Auto bracketing (mode M)] Flash/speed
e7 [Bracketing order] MTR > under > over
e8 [Flash burst priority] Prioritize precise flash control
f1 [Customize
i
menu] Set Picture Control,
White balance,
Image quality,
Image size,
AF-area mode/subj.
detection,
Focus mode,
Metering,
Vibration reduction,
Shooting menu bank,
Custom controls (shooting),
Airplane mode,
View memory card info
Custom Settings menu option Default
477
Defaults
f2 [Custom controls (shooting)]
[Fn1 button] Shooting menu bank
[Fn2 button] Choose image area
[Fn3 button] Live view info display off
[Fn button for vertical shooting] Exposure compensation
[Protect/Fn4 button] Set Picture Control
[AF-ON button]AF-ON
[Sub-selector center] AE/AF lock
[OK button] Select center focus point
[Audio button]None
[QUAL button] Image quality/size
[Vertical multi selector center] AE/AF lock
[AF-ON button for vertical
shooting]
Same as AF-ON button
[Video record button]None
[Command dials]
[Exposure setting]
P:
3
--/
y
P*
S:
3
--/
y
Tv
A:
3
Av/
y
--
M:
3
Av/
y
Tv
[Focus/AF-area mode
selection]
3t
/
ys
[Sub-command dial zoom
role]
Exposure setting
[Lens Fn button] AE/AF lock
[Lens Fn2 button]AF-ON
[Lens control ring] (Varies with lens)
Custom Settings menu option Default
478
Defaults
f3 [Custom controls (playback)]
[Fn1 button]None
[Fn2 button]None
[Fn3 button]None
[Fn button for vertical shooting]None
[Protect/Fn4 button]Protect
[OK button]Zoom on/off
[Audio button] Voice memo
[QUAL button] Rating
[WB button] Select for upload to
computer
[Vertical shooting multi selector] Unswitch
[Main command dial]
[Frame advance] 1 frame
[Video playback] 10 frames
[Sub-command dial]
[Frame advance] 1 frame
[Video playback]10s
[Video record button]None
f4 [Control lock]
[Shutter speed lock]OFF
[Aperture lock]OFF
[Focus-point lock]OFF
Custom Settings menu option Default
479
Defaults
f5 [Reverse dial rotation]
[Exposure compensation]
U
[Shutter speed/aperture]
U
f6 [Release button to use dial]OFF
f7 [Reverse indicators]
f8 [Reverse ring for focus]OFF
f9 [Focus ring rotation range] Non-linear
f10 [Control ring response]High
f11 [Full-frame playback flicks]
[Flick up]None
[Flick down]None
[Flick advance direction]Left
V
Right
g1 [Customize
i
menu] Set Picture Control,
White balance,
Frame size/frame rate,
Microphone sensitivity,
AF-area mode/subj.
detection,
Focus mode,
Electronic VR,
Vibration reduction,
Shooting menu bank,
Custom controls,
Airplane mode,
Destination
Custom Settings menu option Default
480
Defaults
g2 [Custom controls]
[Fn1 button] Shooting menu bank
[Fn2 button] Choose image area
[Fn3 button] Live view info display off
[Fn button for vertical shooting] Exposure compensation
[Focus mode button] Focus mode/AF-area mode
[AF-ON button]AF-ON
[Protect/Fn4 button] Set Picture Control
[OK button] Select center focus point
[Sub-selector center] AE/AF lock
[QUAL button]None
[Audio button] Microphone sensitivity
[AF-ON button for vertical
shooting]
Same as AF-ON button
[Vertical multi selector center] AE/AF lock
[Command dials]
[Exposure setting]
A:
3
Av/
y
--
M:
3
Av/
y
Tv
[Focus/AF-area mode
selection]
3t
/
ys
[Sub-command dial zoom
role]
Exposure setting
[Shutter-release button]None
[Lens Fn2 button]AF-ON
[Lens Fn button] AE/AF lock
[Lens control ring] (Varies with lens)
Custom Settings menu option Default
481
Defaults
g3 [Control lock]
[Shutter speed lock]OFF
[Aperture lock]OFF
[Focus-point lock]OFF
g4 [Limit AF-area mode selection]
[Single-point AF]
L
(cannot be deselected)
[Wide-area AF (S)]
M
[Wide-area AF (L)]
M
[Subject-tracking AF]
M
[Auto-area AF]
M
g5 [Focus mode restrictions] No restrictions
g6 [AF speed]0
[When to apply]Always
g7 [AF tracking sensitivity]4
g8 [View assist]OFF
g9 [Zebra pattern]
[Pattern tone range] Zebra pattern off
[Pattern] Pattern 1
[Highlight threshold] 250
[Mid-tone range] Value: 160; range: ±10
g10 [Limit zebra pattern tone range] No restrictions
Custom Settings menu option Default
482
Defaults
g11 [Grid type]3×3
g12 [Custom monitor shooting display]
[Display 1]
L
(cannot be deselected)
[Display 2]
M
[Display 3]
M
[Display 4]
M
g13 [Custom viewfinder shooting display]
[Display 1]
L
(cannot be deselected)
[Display 2]
M
[Display 3]
M
Custom Settings menu option Default
483
Defaults
Playback Menu Defaults
Playback menu option Default
[Delete]—
[Playback folder]All
[Playback display options]
[Focus point]
U
[Exposure info]
U
[Highlights]
U
[RGB histogram]
U
[Shooting data]
U
[Overview]
U
[None (picture only)]
M
[Basic shooting data]
M
[Flash data]
M
[Picture Control/HLG data]
M
[Other shooting data]
M
[Copyright info]
M
[Location data]
M
[IPTC data]
M
[Delete pictures from both slots] Yes (confirmation required)
[Dual-format recording PB slot]Slot 1
484
Defaults
[Filtered playback criteria]
[Protect]
U
[Picture type]
U
[Rating]
U
[Select for upload to computer]
U
[Select for upload (FTP)]
U
[Voice memo]
U
[Retouched pictures]
U
[Picture review]Off
[After delete] Show next
[After burst, show] Last picture in burst
[Rotate tall]ON
[Copy image(s)]—
Playback menu option Default
485
Defaults
Setup Menu Defaults
Setup menu option Default
[Format memory card]—
[Language]
(Default varies with country
of purchase)
[Time zone and date]
[Time zone]
(Default varies with country
of purchase)
[Date and time]—
[Date format]
(Default varies with country
of purchase)
[Daylight saving time]OFF
[Monitor brightness]0
[Monitor color balance]A-B: 0, G-M: 0
[Viewfinder brightness]Auto
[Viewfinder color balance]A-B: 0, G-M: 0
[Finder display size (photo Lv)]Standard
[Limit monitor mode selection]
[Automatic display switch]
M
[Viewfinder only]
M
[Monitor only]
M
[Prioritize viewfinder]
M
[Auto rotate info display]ON
486
Defaults
[AF fine-tuning options]
[AF fine-tune]OFF
[Fine-tune and save lens]—
[Default]—
[List saved values]—
[Choose value for current lens]—
[Non-CPU lens data]
[Lens number]1
[Focal length (mm)]––
[Maximum aperture]––
[Save focus position]OFF
[Sensor shield behavior at power off] Sensor shield stays open
[Clean image sensor]
[Automatic cleaning] Clean at shutdown
[Image Dust Off ref photo]—
[Pixel mapping]—
[Image comment]
[Attach comment]Off
[Copyright information]
[Attach copyright information]OFF
Setup menu option Default
487
Defaults
[IPTC]
[Edit/save]—
[Delete]—
[Auto embed during shooting]Off
[Load/save]—
[Voice memo options]
[Voice memo control] Press and hold
[Audio output (playback)] Speaker/headphones
[Camera sounds]
[Shutter sound]ON
[Beep on/off]Off
[Volume]2
[Pitch]Low
[Silent mode]OFF
[Touch controls]
[Enable/disable touch controls]Enable
[Glove mode]OFF
[HDMI]
[Output resolution]Auto
[Output range]Auto
[Output shooting info]ON
[Mirror camera info display]ON
Setup menu option Default
488
Defaults
[USB connection priority]Upload
[Location data (built-in)]
[Record location data]OFF
[Standby timer]ON
[Set clock from satellite]OFF
[Create log]—
[Log list]—
[Position]—
[Wireless remote (WR) options]
[LED lamp]ON
[Link mode]Pairing
[Assign remote (WR) Fn button]None
[Conformity marking]—
[Battery info]—
[USB power delivery]ON
[Energy saving (photo mode)]OFF
[Slot empty release lock]Enable release
[Save/load menu settings]—
[Reset all settings]—
[Firmware version]—
Setup menu option Default
489
Defaults
Network Menu Defaults
Network menu option Default
[Airplane mode]OFF
[Wired LAN]OFF
[Connect to smart device]
[Pairing (Bluetooth)]
[Bluetooth connection]OFF
[Select pictures for upload]
[Auto select for upload]ON
[Wi-Fi connection]—
[Upload while off]ON
[Location data (smart device)]—
[Connect to computer]
[Network settings]—
[Connection type] Picture transfer
[Options]
[Auto upload]OFF
[Delete after upload]OFF
[Upload RAW + JPEG as] RAW + JPEG
[JPEG+JPEG slot selection]Slot 1
[Upload folder]—
[Deselect all?]—
490
Defaults
[Connect to FTP server]
[Network settings]—
[Options]
[Auto upload]OFF
[Delete after upload]OFF
[Upload RAW + JPEG as] RAW + JPEG
[JPEG+JPEG slot selection]Slot 1
[Overwrite if same name]OFF
[Protect if marked for upload]OFF
[Upload marking]OFF
[Upload folder]—
[Deselect all?]—
[Connect to other cameras]
[Synchronized release]ON
[Network settings]—
[Group name]—
[Master/remote] Master camera
[Remote camera list]—
[Synchronize date and time]—
[USB] MTP/PTP
[Start via LAN]OFF
[Router frequency band]2.4GHz/5GHz
[MAC address]—
Network menu option Default
491
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
To view the photo shooting menu, select the
C
tab in the camera menus.
The photo shooting menu contains the following items:
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting
Options
Item
0
[Shooting menu bank] 493
[Extended menu banks] 496
[Storage folder] 497
[File naming] 502
[Role played by card in Slot
2]
503
[Image area] 506
[Image quality] 506
[Image size] 507
[RAW recording] 507
[ISO sensitivity settings] 508
[White balance] 510
[Set Picture Control] 510
[Manage Picture Control] 510
[Color space] 511
[Active D-Lighting] 512
[Long exposure NR] 514
[High ISO NR] 515
[Vignette control] 516
[Diffraction compensation] 517
[Auto distortion control] 517
[Photo flicker reduction] 518
[Metering] 520
[Flash control] 521
[Focus mode] 525
[AF-area mode] 525
[AF subject detection
options]
525
[Vibration reduction] 526
[Auto bracketing] 527
Item
0
493
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
Photo shooting and video recording menu options are stored in one of
four banks (banks “A” through “D”) that can be selected using
[Shooting menu bank]. With the exceptions noted below, changes to
settings made while one bank is selected are not applied to the
remaining banks.
•
Changes to the following photo shooting menu settings apply to all
banks:
-[Extended menu banks]
-[White balance] presets
-[Multiple exposure]
-[Interval timer shooting]
-[Time-lapse video]
-[Focus shift shooting]
•
Changes to the following video recording menu setting also apply to
all banks:
-[Extended menu banks]
•
Shooting menu banks can also be edited via the [Shooting menu
bank] item in the video recording menu. Changes made in the photo
shooting menu apply in the video recording menu and vice versa.
Shooting Menu Bank
G
button
U
C
photo shooting menu
494
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
A
Shooting Menu Banks
The control panel shows the current menu bank (“A”,
“B”, “C”, or “D”).
Renaming Shooting Menu Banks
A descriptive caption can be added to the bank name (“A”, “B”, “C”, or
“D”) by highlighting the bank, pressing
2
, and selecting [Rename].
Captions can be up to 20 characters long.
Copying Shooting Menu Banks
To create a copy of a shooting menu bank, highlight the bank, press
2
,
select [Copy], and choose a destination for the copy.
495
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
Restoring Default Settings
You can restore default settings for a selected shooting menu bank. To
do so, highlight the bank and press
O
(
Q
); a confirmation dialog will be
displayed. Highlight [Yes] and press
J
to restore default settings for the
selected bank.
•
Shooting menu banks cannot be reset while a multiple exposure is in
progress.
•
[Storage folder] and [Manage Picture Control] are not reset.
496
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
Select [ON] to include exposure settings in the information recorded in
each of the four shooting menu banks
•
Changes to exposure settings will be stored in the bank currently
selected for [Shooting menu bank]. The settings stored in the bank
will be recalled the next time the bank is selected.
•
The additional settings stored in extended banks for use in photo
mode are:
- shooting mode,
- shutter speed (modes S and M only),
- aperture (modes A and M only), and
-flash mode.
•
The additional settings stored in extended banks for use in video
mode are:
- shooting mode,
- shutter speed (mode M only), and
- aperture (modes A and M only).
•
Selecting [OFF] restores the shooting and flash modes, shutter speed,
and aperture in effect before [ON] was selected.
•
Exposure settings can also be edited via the [Extended menu banks]
item in the video recording menu. Changes made in the photo
shooting menu apply in the video recording menu and vice versa.
Extended Menu Banks
G
button
U
C
photo shooting menu
497
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
Choose the folder in which subsequent pictures will be stored.
D
“Storage Folder”
Changes to [Storage folder] made in the photo shooting menu apply in the
video recording menu and vice versa.
Renaming Folders
The default folder name, which appears after the folder number, is
“NCZ_9”. To choose a different five-character folder name for new
folders, select [Rename].
•
Existing folders cannot be renamed.
•
If desired, the default name can be restored for subsequent folders by
pressing and holding the
O
(
Q
) button while the keyboard is
displayed.
Storage Folder
G
button
U
C
photo shooting menu
3
1
2
1
Folder
2
Folder number
3
Folder name
498
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
Select Folder by Number
The folder in which subsequent pictures will be stored can be selected
by number. If a folder with the specified number does not already exist,
a new folder will be created.
1
Choose [Select folder by number].
•
Highlight [Select folder by number]
and press
2
to display the [Select
folder by number] dialog.
•
The card on which the new folder will be
created is underlined in the card slot
display area at the top right corner of the [Select folder by
number] dialog. The card used for new folders depends on the
option currently selected for [Role played by card in Slot 2] in the
photo shooting menu.
2
Choose a folder number.
•
Press
4
or
2
to highlight digits.
•
To change the highlighted digit, press
1
or
3
.
499
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
3
Save changes and exit.
•
If a folder with the selected number already exists, a
W
,
X
, or
Y
icon will be displayed to the left of the folder number. Press
J
to
complete the operation and return to the main menu; if you chose
a folder marked
W
or
X
, it will be selected as the folder for new
pictures.
•
If you chose a folder number that does not already exist, a new
folder will be created with that number when you press
J
.
•
In either case, subsequent pictures will be stored in the chosen
folder.
•
To exit without changing the storage folder, press the
G
button.
D
Folder Icons
Folders in the [Select folder by number] dialog are shown by
W
if empty, by
Y
if full (containing either 5000 pictures or a picture numbered 9999), or by
X
if partially full. A
Y
icon indicates that no further pictures can be stored in
the folder.
500
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
Select Folder from List
To choose from a list of existing folders:
1
Choose [Select folder from list].
Highlight [Select folder from list] and
press
2
to display the [Select folder from
list] dialog.
2
Highlight a folder.
Press
1
or
3
to highlight a folder.
3
Select the highlighted folder.
•
Press
J
to select the highlighted folder and return to the main
menu.
•
Subsequent photographs will be stored in the selected folder.
501
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
D
Cautions: Folder and File Numbers
•
When the current folder number reaches 999, the camera will no longer be
able to create new folders and the shutter release will be disabled if:
- the current folder contains 5000 pictures (in addition, video recording
will be disabled if the camera calculates that the number of files needed
to record a video of the maximum length would result in the folder
containing over 5000 files), or
- the current folder contains a picture numbered 9999 (in addition, video
recording will be disabled if the camera calculates that the number of
files needed to record a video of the maximum length would result in a
file numbered over 9999).
•
If there is space on the memory card, you will nevertheless be able to
continue shooting by:
- creating a folder with a number less than 999 and selecting it as the
storage folder, or
- changing the options selected for [Frame size/frame rate] or [Video
file type] before recording videos.
D
Startup Time
Additional time may be required for camera startup if the memory card
contains a very large number of files or folders.
502
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
Pictures are saved using file names consisting of “DSC_” followed by a
four-digit number and a three-letter extension. [File naming] is used to
select three letters to replace the “DSC” portion of the file name. For
information on text entry, see “Text Entry” (
0
64).
D
File Names
•
File names take the form “DSC_nnnn.xxx”, where nnnn is a number from
0001 to 9999 and xxx is one of the following extensions, assigned
according to the options selected for image quality and file type:
- NEF: NEF (RAW) photos
- JPG: JPEG (fine, normal, or basic) photos
- MOV: MOV videos
- MP4: MP4 videos
- NDF: Dust off reference data
•
Pictures created with [Adobe RGB] selected for [Color space] in the photo
shooting menu have file names of the form “_DSCnnnn.xxx”.
•
In each pair of photographs recorded at image-quality settings of RAW +
JPEG, the NEF (RAW) and JPEG pictures have the same file names but
different extensions.
File Naming
G
button
U
C
photo shooting menu
503
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
Choose the role played by the card in Slot 2 when two memory cards
are inserted in the camera.
Role Played by Card in Slot 2
G
button
U
C
photo shooting menu
Option Description
P
[Overflow]
The card in Slot 2 is used only when the card in Slot 1
is full.
Q
[Backup]
Each picture is recorded twice, once to the card in
Slot 1 and again to the card in Slot 2.
R
[RAW Slot 1 -
JPEG Slot 2]
•
NEF (RAW) copies of photos taken at settings of
RAW + JPEG are recorded only to the card in Slot 1,
JPEG copies only to the card in Slot 2.
•
Pictures taken at other image quality settings are
recorded twice at the same setting, once to the
card in Slot 1 and again to the card in Slot 2.
O
[JPEG Slot 1 -
JPEG Slot 2]
•
Two JPEG copies are recorded, one to each
memory card.
•
The copy saved to the card in Slot 1 is recorded at
the image quality and size selected via the
T
button or photo shooting menu. The copy saved to
the card in Slot 2 is saved at an image quality of
[JPEG basic] and a size of either [Medium] or
[Small]. The size can be selected by pressing
2
when [JPEG Slot 1 - JPEG Slot 2] is highlighted.
•
At image qualities of RAW or RAW + JPEG, this
option is equivalent to [Backup].
504
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
D
Caution: [RAW Slot 1 - JPEG Slot 2]
If [ON] is selected for [Multiple exposure]> [Save individual pictures
(RAW)] in the photo shooting menu, or if [ON] is selected for [HDR
overlay]> [Save individual pictures (RAW)] in the photo shooting menu,
unprocessed copies of the individual NEF (RAW) photos that make up each
multiple exposure or HDR picture will be recorded to both memory cards
together with the JPEG composite, regardless of the option selected for
image quality.
A
[Backup], [RAW Slot 1 - JPEG Slot 2], and [JPEG Slot 1 - JPEG
Slot 2]
•
The shooting display and control panel show the number of exposures
remaining on the card with the least amount of space available.
•
The shutter release is disabled when either card is full.
A
Viewing Dual-Format Photos
•
Use the [Dual-format recording PB slot] item in the playback menu to
choose the slot from which dual-format photos are played back.
•
When viewing dual-format photos, you can view the other copy using
[Jump to copy on other card] in the
i
menu.
A
Recording Videos
The slot to which videos are recorded is selected using [Destination] in the
video recording menu.
505
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
Deleting Copies
When deleting pictures recorded using [Backup], [RAW Slot1-JPEG
Slot 2], or [JPEG Slot 1 - JPEG Slot 2], you have the choice of erasing
either both copies or only the copy on the card in the current slot.
•
Pressing
O
(
Q
) when a picture created
using either of these options is highlighted
during playback displays a confirmation
message.
•
To delete only the copy on the card in the
current slot, highlight [Selected picture]
and press
O
(
Q
) again.
•
To delete both copies, highlight [Same pictures on
1
and
2
] and
press
O
(
Q
).
•
If a voice memo is appended to the picture, a confirmation dialog will
be displayed. To delete only the voice memo, highlight [Voice memo
only] and press
O
(
Q
).
A
Delete Options
Use the [Delete pictures from both slots] item in the playback menu to
choose the options displayed when a picture is deleted.
506
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
Adjust image area settings. For more information, see “Adjusting Image
Area Settings” (
0
102), part of the section on “Image Recording Options
(Image Area, Quality, and Size)” in the “Shooting Settings” chapter.
Choose a file format for photographs. For more information, see
“Adjusting Image Quality” (
0
105), part of the section on “Image
Recording Options (Image Area, Quality, and Size)” in the “Shooting
Settings” chapter.
Image Area
G
button
U
C
photo shooting menu
Image Quality
G
button
U
C
photo shooting menu
507
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
Choose the size, in pixels, of pictures recorded with the camera. For
more information, see “Choosing an Image Size” (
0
108), part of the
section on “Image Recording Options (Image Area, Quality, and Size)” in
the “Shooting Settings” chapter.
Choose a compression type for NEF (RAW) photographs. In descending
order by the size of the files produced, the options are: [Lossless
compression], [High efficiency
m
], and [High efficiency].
•
[High efficiency
m
] produces pictures that compare favorably in
quality to those produced by [Lossless compression] and are higher
in quality than those produced by [High efficiency].
Image Size
G
button
U
C
photo shooting menu
RAW Recording
G
button
U
C
photo shooting menu
508
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
Adjust ISO sensitivity settings for photographs.
ISO Sensitivity Settings
G
button
U
C
photo shooting menu
Option Description
[ISO
sensitivity]
Choose from settings of ISO 64 to 25600; the camera also
supports settings below ISO 64 by about 0.3, 0.7, and 1 EV
(ISO 32 equivalent) and above ISO 25600 by about 0.3, 0.7,
1, and 2 EV (ISO 102400 equivalent).
[Auto ISO
sensitivity
control]
Select [ON] to enable auto ISO sensitivity control. If [OFF] is
selected, [ISO sensitivity] will remain fixed at the value
selected by the user. [Maximum sensitivity], [Maximum
sensitivity with
c
], and [Minimum shutter speed]
options are available when [ON] is selected.
[Maximum
sensitivity]
Choose an upper limit for ISO sensitivity to prevent it being
raised too high.
[Maximum
sensitivity
with
c
]
Choose the upper ISO sensitivity limit for photos taken
using an optional flash unit.
509
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
[Minimum
shutter
speed]
Choose the shutter speed below which auto ISO sensitivity
control will kick in to prevent underexposure in modes P
and A; options range from
1
/
16,000
to 30 s. If [Auto] is
selected, the camera will choose the minimum shutter
speed based on lens focal length. For example, the camera
will automatically choose faster minimum shutter speeds
to prevent blur caused by camera shake when a long lens is
attached.
•
To view auto shutter-speed selection options, highlight
[Auto] and press
2
. Auto shutter-speed selection can be
fine-tuned by choosing faster or slower minimums.
Faster settings can be used to reduce blur when
photographing fast-moving subjects.
•
Shutter speeds may drop below the selected minimum if
optimal exposure cannot be achieved at the ISO
sensitivity chosen for [Maximum sensitivity].
Option Description
510
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
Adjust white balance to match the color of the light source. For more
information, see “White Balance” (
0
158) in the “Shooting Settings”
chapter.
Choose image processing (“Picture Control”) options for new photos
according to the scene or your creative intent. For more information,
see “Picture Controls” (
0
192) in the “Shooting Settings” chapter.
Save modified Picture Controls as custom Picture Controls. For more
information, see “Custom Picture Controls” (
0
199) in the “Shooting
Settings” chapter.
White Balance
G
button
U
C
photo shooting menu
Set Picture Control
G
button
U
C
photo shooting menu
Manage Picture Control
G
button
U
C
photo shooting menu
511
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
The color space determines the gamut of colors available for color
reproduction. [sRGB] is recommended for general-purpose printing
and display. With a broader gamut of colors than [sRGB], [Adobe RGB]
is a better choice for professional publication and commercial printing.
D
Caution: Color Space
The selected color space may be overwritten when pictures are opened in
third-party software. NX Studio can open pictures in the color space selected
on the camera.
D
Adobe RGB
For accurate color reproduction, Adobe RGB pictures require applications,
displays, and printers that support color management.
Color Space
G
button
U
C
photo shooting menu
512
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
Preserve details in highlights and shadows, creating pictures with
natural contrast. Use for high-contrast scenes, for example when
photographing brightly-lit outdoor scenery through a door or window
or taking pictures of shaded subjects on a sunny day. Active D-Lighting
is most effective when used with matrix metering.
Active D-Lighting
G
button
U
C
photo shooting menu
[Off][
Y
Auto]
Option Description
Y
[Auto]
The camera automatically adjusts Active D-Lighting
in response to shooting conditions.
t
[Extra high 2]
Choose the amount of Active D-Lighting performed
from (in order from high to low) [Extra high 2], [Extra
high 1], [High], [Normal], and [Low].
s
[Extra high 1]
P
[High]
Q
[Normal]
R
[Low]
c
[Off] Active D-Lighting off.
513
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
The option currently selected is shown by an
icon in the display during shooting.
D
Cautions: Active D-Lighting
•
“Noise” in the form of randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines may
appear in photos taken with Active D-Lighting.
•
In mode M, [
Y
Auto] is equivalent to [
Q
Normal].
•
Uneven shading may be visible with some subjects.
•
This function does not apply at high ISO sensitivities (Hi 0.3–Hi 2.0),
including high sensitivities selected via auto ISO sensitivity control.
514
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
Select [ON] to reduce “noise” (bright spots or fog) in photographs taken
at shutter speeds slower than 1 s.
•
Long-exposure noise reduction is performed after the photo is taken.
During processing, the message, “[Performing noise reduction]” will
appear in the shooting display and “Job NR” will flash in the control
panel. Pictures cannot be taken until the message has cleared from
the display. The time required to process photos after shooting
roughly doubles.
D
Caution: Long-Exposure Noise Reduction
If the camera is turned off before processing is complete, the picture will be
saved but noise reduction will not be performed.
Long Exposure NR
G
button
U
C
photo shooting menu
Control panel Monitor
515
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
Photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities can be processed to reduce
“noise” (randomly-spaced bright pixels).
High ISO NR
G
button
U
C
photo shooting menu
Option Description
[High] Reduce noise in photographs taken at all ISO sensitivities.
The higher the sensitivity, the greater the effect. Choose
the amount of noise reduction performed from (in order
from high to low) [High], [Normal], and [Low].
[Normal]
[Low]
[Off]
Noise reduction is performed only as required. The
amount of noise reduction performed is always lower
than when [Low] is selected.
516
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
Vignette control reduces “vignetting”—a drop in brightness at the
edges of a photograph—by an amount that varies from lens to lens. Its
effects are most noticeable at maximum aperture.
D
Caution: Vignette Control
Depending on the scene, shooting conditions, and type of lens, JPEG
pictures may exhibit “noise” (fog) or over- or under-exposure at the edge of
the frame that introduces variations in peripheral brightness. In addition,
custom Picture Controls and preset Picture Controls that have been modified
from default settings may not produce the desired effect. Take test shots and
view the results in the monitor.
D
Vignette Control
Changes to [Vignette control] in the photo shooting menu apply in the
video recording menu and vice versa.
Vignette Control
G
button
U
C
photo shooting menu
Option Description
e
[High]
Choose the amount of vignette control performed
from (in order from high to low) [High], [Normal],
and [Low].
g
[Normal]
f
[Low]
[Off] Vignette control disabled.
517
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
Select [ON] to reduce diffraction at small apertures (high f-numbers).
D
Diffraction Compensation
Changes to [Diffraction compensation] in the photo shooting menu apply
in the video recording menu and vice versa.
Select [ON] as required to reduce barrel distortion when shooting with
wide-angle lenses and to reduce pin-cushion distortion when shooting
with long lenses. Note that [ON] may be selected automatically with
some lenses, in which case this item will be grayed out and unavailable.
D
Auto Distortion Control
Changes to [Auto distortion control] in the photo shooting menu apply in
the video recording menu and vice versa.
Diffraction Compensation
G
button
U
C
photo shooting menu
Auto Distortion Control
G
button
U
C
photo shooting menu
518
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
Selecting [ON] reduces the effects of flicker from such light sources as
fluorescent or mercury-vapor lamps.
•
Flicker can cause uneven exposure or (in photographs taken in
continuous release modes) inconsistent exposure or coloration.
•
If flicker reduction does not produce the desired results, turn the
camera off and aim it at the subject or light source before turning it on
again.
•
If [ON] is selected and flicker is detected when the shutter is released,
a green
I
will appear next to the FLICKER icon in the shooting
display.
•
If [ON] is selected, flicker reduction will behave differently during
burst photography depending on the chosen release mode
(continuous high-speed or continuous low-speed).
- Continuous high-speed: Priority is given to frame rate. The display
will briefly go dark with the first shot in each burst but not with the
subsequent shots.
- Continuous low-speed: Priority is given to flicker reduction. The
display will briefly go dark each time the shutter is released and the
frame rate may drop or become erratic.
Photo Flicker Reduction
G
button
U
C
photo shooting menu
519
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
D
“[Photo Flicker Reduction]”
•
Flicker reduction may slightly delay shutter response.
•
Flicker reduction can detect flicker at 100 and 120 Hz (associated
respectively with AC power supplies of 50 and 60 Hz). The desired results
may not be achieved if the frequency of the power supply changes during
burst photography.
•
Flicker may not be detected or the desired results may not be achieved
depending on the light source and shooting conditions, for example with
scenes that are brightly lit or feature dark backgrounds.
•
The desired results may also not be achieved with decorative lighting
displays and other non-standard lighting.
•
The actual effects of photo flicker reduction may differ from those visible in
the display.
D
Continuous High-Speed
•
When [Focus] is selected for Custom Setting a1 [AF-C priority selection],
flicker reduction for continuous high-speed release mode behaves in the
same way as it does for continuous low-speed release.
•
Flicker reduction may not produce the desired results during burst
photography if:
- the shutter speed changes (mode A or P),
- the frame advance rate slows, or
- the bursts are long.
D
[Photo Flicker Reduction]: Restrictions
[Photo flicker reduction] does not take effect under some conditions,
including during:
•
HDR overlay and
•
high-speed frame capture.
520
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
Metering determines how the camera sets exposure.
Metering
G
button
U
C
photo shooting menu
Option Description
L
[Matrix
metering]
The camera meters a wide area of the frame and
sets exposure according to tone distribution, color,
composition, and distance for results close to
those seen by the naked eye.
M
[Center-
weighted
metering]
•
The camera assigns the greatest weight to the
center of the frame. This mode can, for example,
be used with subjects that dominate the
composition.
•
Center-weighted metering is also recommended
when using filters with an exposure factor (filter
factor) over 1×.
•
The size of the area assigned the greatest weight
can be selected using Custom Setting b5
[Center-weighted area].
N
[Spot metering]
•
The camera meters a circle with a diameter of
4 mm/0.16 in. (equivalent to approximately 1.5%
of the frame). This ensures that the subject will
be correctly exposed even when the background
is much brighter or darker.
•
The metered area is centered on the current
focus point. If [Auto-area AF] is selected for AF-
area mode (
0
113), the camera will instead
meter the center focus point.
t
[Highlight-
weighted
metering]
The camera assigns the greatest weight to
highlights. Use this option to reduce loss of detail
in highlights, for example when photographing
spotlit performers on stage.
521
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
Adjust settings for wireless remote flash units
or optional flash units mounted on the
camera accessory shoe.
•
For information on adjusting settings for
optional flash units mounted on the camera
accessory shoe, see “Flash Photography”
(
0
422).
•
For information on adjusting settings for wireless remote flash units,
see “Remote Flash Photography” (
0
437).
Flash Control
G
button
U
C
photo shooting menu
522
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
Flash Control Mode
Choose a flash control mode and flash level
and adjust other settings for SB-5000, SB-500,
SB-400, or SB-300 flash units mounted on the
camera accessory shoe.
•
The options available in the flash control
display vary with the option selected for
[Flash control mode].
•
Settings for flash units other than the SB-5000, SB-500, SB-400, and
SB-300 can only be adjusted using flash unit controls.
•
Settings for an SB-5000 mounted on the accessory shoe can also be
adjusted using the controls on the flash unit.
Option Description
[TTL]
Flash output is adjusted automatically in response to
shooting conditions.
[Auto external
flash]
Light from the flash is reflected from the subject to an
auto external flash sensor and flash output adjusted
automatically.
[Distance-
priority
manual]
Choose the distance to the subject; flash output will be
adjusted automatically.
[Manual] Choose the flash level manually.
[Repeating
flash]
The flash fires repeatedly during the exposure, producing
a multiple-exposure effect.
523
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
Wireless Flash Options
Adjust settings for simultaneous wireless
control of multiple remote flash units. This
option is available only when an SB-5000 or
SB-500 flash unit or a WR-R11a or WR-R10
wireless remote controller is mounted on the
camera.
Option Description
Y
[Optical
AWL]
The remote flash units are controlled using low-
intensity flashes emitted by the master flash
(
0
453).
Z
[Radio AWL]
The remote flash units are controlled by radio
signals from a WR-R11a/WR-R10 attached to the
camera (
0
439).
[Off] Remote flash photography disabled.
524
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
Remote Flash Control
Choose the remote flash control mode. Flash options can be adjusted in
the flash control display; the options available vary with the option
selected for [Remote flash control].
Radio Remote Flash Info
View the flash units currently controlled via
radio AWL.
Option Description
[Group flash]
Choose a separate flash control mode for each group of
remote flash units (
0
444, 454).
[Quick wireless
control]
Choose the balance between groups A and B and adjust
output for group C manually (
0
447, 457).
[Remote
repeating]
The flash units fire repeatedly while the shutter is open,
producing a multiple-exposure effect (
0
450, 460).
525
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
Control how the camera focuses. For more information, see “Choosing a
Focus Mode” (
0
110), part of the section on “Focus” in the “Shooting
Settings” chapter.
Choose how the camera selects the focus point for autofocus. For more
information, see “Choosing an AF-Area Mode” (
0
113), part of the
section on “Focus” in the “Shooting Settings” chapter.
Choose the type of subject to which the camera gives priority when
focusing using autofocus. For more information, see “Choosing a
Subject Type for Autofocus” (
0
119), part of the section on “Focus” in
the “Shooting Settings” chapter.
Focus Mode
G
button
U
C
photo shooting menu
AF-Area Mode
G
button
U
C
photo shooting menu
AF Subject Detection Options
G
button
U
C
photo shooting menu
526
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
Choose whether to enable vibration reduction. The options available
vary with the lens.
D
Cautions: Using Vibration Reduction
•
Vibration reduction may be unavailable with some lenses.
•
We recommend that you wait for the image in the display to stabilize
before shooting.
•
When [Normal] is selected for lenses that support vibration reduction, the
image in the viewfinder may jiggle before the shutter is released, but this is
a natural consequence of how vibration reduction is performed and does
not indicate a malfunction. [Sport] or [Off] can be used should you find the
motion distracting.
•
[Normal] or [Sport] is recommended for panning shots. In [Normal] and
[Sport] modes, vibration reduction applies only to motion that is not part
of the pan. If the camera is panned horizontally, for example, vibration
reduction will be applied only to vertical shake.
Vibration Reduction
G
button
U
C
photo shooting menu
Option Description
C
[Normal]
Choose for enhanced vibration reduction when
photographing static subjects.
D
[Sport]
Choose when photographing athletes and other
subjects that are moving rapidly and unpredictably.
[Off] Vibration reduction is disabled.
527
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
•
[Normal] and [Sport] are also recommended if the camera is mounted on
a tripod or monopod. Note, however, that [Off] may be a better choice
with some tripods depending on shooting conditions. Settings may vary
from lens to lens; consult the lens documentation for more information.
•
If an F mount lens with a vibration reduction switch is attached via an
optional FTZ II/FTZ mount adapter, [Vibration reduction] will be grayed
out and unavailable. Use the lens switch for vibration reduction.
Bracketing automatically varies exposure, flash level, Active D-Lighting
(ADL), or white balance slightly with each shot, “bracketing” the current
value. For more information, see “Auto Bracketing” (
0
177) in the
“Shooting Settings” chapter.
Auto Bracketing
G
button
U
C
photo shooting menu
528
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
Record two to ten NEF (RAW) exposures as a single photograph.
Multiple Exposure
G
button
U
C
photo shooting menu
Option Description
[Multiple
exposure
mode]
•
[On (series)]: Take a series of multiple exposures. To
end multiple exposure photography, select [Multiple
exposure mode] again and choose [Off].
•
[On (single photo)]: End multiple exposure
photography after creating a single multiple exposure.
•
[Off]: End multiple exposure photography.
[Number of
shots]
Choose the number of exposures that will be combined
to form a single photograph.
529
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
[Overlay mode]
•
[Add]: The exposures are overlaid without
modification; gain is not adjusted.
•
[Average]: Gain is adjusted before the exposures are
overlaid. The gain for each exposure is equal to 1
divided by the total number of exposures taken. For
example, in a photo made by combining two
exposures, the gain for each exposure will be set to
1
/
2
,
while in a photo combining three exposures, gain will
be set to
1
/
3
.
•
[Lighten]: The camera compares the pixels in each
picture and uses only the brightest.
•
[Darken]: The camera compares the pixels in each
picture and uses only the darkest.
[Save
individual
pictures (RAW)]
•
[ON]: Save both the multiple exposure and the shots
that make it up; the pictures are saved in NEF (RAW)
format.
•
[OFF]: Discard the individual shots and save only the
multiple exposure.
[Overlay
shooting]
If [ON] is selected, earlier exposures will be
superimposed on the view through the lens. The earlier
exposures aid composition of the next shot.
[Select first
exposure
(RAW)]
Choose the first exposure from the NEF (RAW) pictures
on the memory card.
Option Description
530
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
Creating a Multiple Exposure
1
Highlight [Multiple exposure] in the
photo shooting menu and press
2
.
2
Choose an option for [Multiple
exposure mode].
•
Highlight [Multiple exposure mode]
and press
2
.
•
Highlight a multiple exposure mode
using
1
or
3
and press
J
.
•
If [On (series)] or [On (single photo)] is
selected, an icon will appear in the
display.
3
Choose a value for [Number of shots]
(number of exposures).
•
Highlight [Number of shots] and press
2
.
•
Choose the number of exposures using
1
or
3
and press
J
.
531
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
4
Select an [Overlay mode].
•
Highlight [Overlay mode] and press
2
.
•
Highlight an option using
1
or
3
and
press
J
.
5
Choose a setting for [Save individual
pictures (RAW)].
To save both the multiple exposure and
the shots that make it up, select [ON]; the
individual shots are saved in NEF (RAW)
format. To save only the multiple
exposure, select [OFF].
532
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
6
Choose an option for [Overlay
shooting].
Select [ON] to superimpose earlier
exposures on the view through the lens.
You can use the earlier exposures as a
guide when composing subsequent
shots.
7
Choose an option for [Select first
exposure (RAW)].
•
To choose the first exposure from
existing NEF (RAW) photos, highlight
[Select first exposure (RAW)] and press
2
.
•
Highlight the desired picture using the multi selector.
•
To view the highlighted picture full screen, press and hold the
X
button.
•
After highlighting the desired picture, press
J
.
533
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
8
Start shooting.
•
Take the selected number of shots. If
you used [Select first exposure (RAW)]
to select an existing NEF (RAW) picture
as the first exposure in Step 7, shooting
will start from the second exposure.
•
Once you have taken the selected number of shots, the pictures
will be overlaid to create a multiple exposure. Multiple exposures
are recorded in JPEG format regardless of the option selected for
image quality.
•
If [On (series)] is selected for [Multiple exposure mode], you can
continue to take additional multiple exposures until [Off] is
selected.
•
If [On (single photo)] is selected, the
camera will exit multiple exposure
mode once the number of shots
selected in Step 3 has been taken.
534
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
❚❚
The
i
Menu
Pictures can be viewed by pressing the
K
button while a multiple
exposure is in progress. The most recent shot in the current multiple
exposure is indicated by a
$
icon; pressing the
i
button when this icon
is present displays the multiple exposure
i
menu.
•
Highlight items and press
J
to select.
•
You also have the option of using touch controls after pressing the
i
button.
Option Description
[View progress]
View a preview created from the exposures recorded
to the current point.
[Retake last
exposure]
Retake the most recent exposure.
[Save and exit]
Create a multiple exposure from the exposures
taken to current point.
[Discard and exit]
Exit without recording a multiple exposure.
•
If [ON] is selected for [Save individual pictures
(RAW)], the individual exposures will be saved
separately.
535
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
D
Cautions: Multiple Exposure
•
If you use the menus or view pictures in the display while shooting a
multiple exposure, remember that shooting will end and the multiple
exposure will be recorded if no operations are performed for about 40
seconds (or in the case of menus, about 90 seconds). The time available to
record the next exposure can be extended by choosing longer times for
Custom Setting c3 [Power off delay]> [Playback] or [Menus].
•
Multiple exposures may be affected by “noise” in the form of randomly-
spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines.
•
In continuous shooting modes, the camera records all exposures in a single
burst. If [On (single photo)] is selected, multiple exposure shooting will
end after the first multiple exposure is recorded. If [On (series)] is selected,
an additional multiple exposure will be recorded each time the shutter-
release button is pressed.
•
In self-timer mode, the interval between each shot in the exposure is
selected using Custom Setting c2 [Self-timer]> [Interval between shots].
Regardless of the value selected for the c2 [Number of shots] option,
shooting will however end after the number of shots selected for the
multiple exposure.
•
Multiple exposures may end if settings are changed while shooting is in
progress.
•
Shooting settings and photo info for multiple exposure photographs are
those for the first exposure.
•
Do not remove or replace the memory card while a multiple exposure is in
progress.
•
Memory cards cannot be formatted while a multiple exposure is in
progress. Some menu items will be grayed out and unavailable.
536
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
D
Multiple Exposure: Restrictions
Multiple exposure cannot be combined with some camera features,
including:
•
video recording,
•
high-speed frame capture,
•
bracketing,
•
HDR overlay,
•
interval-timer photography,
•
time-lapse video recording, and
•
focus shift.
❚❚
Ending Multiple Exposures
To end a multiple exposure before the
specified number of exposures have been
taken, select [Off] for multiple exposure
mode. A multiple exposure will be created
from the exposures that have been recorded
to that point (if [Average] is selected for
[Overlay mode], gain will be adjusted to
reflect the number of exposures actually recorded).
The multiple exposure will also end if:
•
the standby timer expires after the first exposure has been taken, or
•
you press the
K
button followed by the
i
button and select either
[Save and exit] or [Discard and exit]
537
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
Used with high contrast subjects, High Dynamic Range (HDR) preserves
details in highlights and shadows by combining two shots taken at
different exposures. Use with high-contrast scenes and other subjects to
preserve a wide range of details, from highlights to shadows.
HDR Overlay
G
button
U
C
photo shooting menu
Option Description
[HDR mode]
•
[On (series)]: Take a series of HDR photographs. To end
HDR photography, select [HDR mode] again and
choose [Off].
•
[On (single photo)]: End HDR photography after
recording a single HDR photograph.
•
[Off]: End HDR photography.
[HDR strength]
Adjust HDR strength. If [Auto] is selected, the camera will
automatically adjust HDR strength to suit the scene.
[Save
individual
pictures
(RAW)]
Choose [ON] to save each of the individual shots used to
create the HDR picture; the shots are saved in NEF (RAW)
format.
538
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
Taking HDR Photographs
We recommend that you use the matrix metering option when
shooting with HDR.
1
Highlight [HDR overlay] in the photo
shooting menu and press
2
.
2
Select an [HDR mode].
•
Highlight [HDR mode] and press
2
.
•
Highlight one of the following options
using
1
or
3
and press
J
.
Option Description
0
[On (series)]
Take a series of HDR photographs. HDR
shooting will continue until you select [Off] for
[HDR mode].
[On (single photo)]
Normal shooting will resume after you have
taken a single HDR photograph.
[Off]
Proceed without taking additional HDR
photographs.
539
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
•
If [On (series)] or [On (single photo)] is
selected, an icon will appear in the
display.
3
Choose an [HDR strength].
•
Highlight [HDR strength] and press
2
.
•
Highlight an option using
1
or
3
and
press
J
.
•
If [Auto] is selected, the camera will
automatically adjust HDR strength to
suit the scene.
540
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
4
Choose a setting for [Save individual
pictures (RAW)].
Choose [ON] to save each of the
individual shots used to create the HDR
picture; the shots are saved in NEF (RAW)
format.
5
Frame the photograph, focus, and shoot.
•
The camera takes two exposures when the shutter-release button
is pressed all the way down.
•
“Busy” will flash in the control panel while the
pictures are combined. No photographs can be
taken until recording is complete.
•
If [On (series)] is selected for [HDR mode], you
can continue to take HDR photographs until
[Off] is selected.
•
If [On (single photo)] is selected, HDR will turn off automatically
after a single shot.
•
HDR photographs are recorded in JPEG format regardless of the
option selected for image quality.
541
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
D
Cautions: HDR Photography
•
The edges of the picture will be cropped out.
•
The desired results may not be achieved if the camera or subject moves
during shooting. Use of a tripod is recommended.
•
Depending on the scene, you may notice shadows around bright objects
or halos around dark objects. In other cases, the effect produced by HDR
may not be particularly noticeable.
•
Uneven shading may be visible with some subjects.
•
When spot or center-weighted metering is selected, an [HDR strength]
setting of [Auto] is equivalent to [Normal].
•
Optional flash units will not fire.
•
In continuous release modes, only one photograph will be taken each time
the shutter-release button is pressed all the way down.
•
Shutter speeds of “Bulb” and “Time” are not available.
D
HDR: Restrictions
HDR cannot be combined with some camera features, including:
•
photo flicker reduction,
•
high-speed frame capture,
•
bracketing,
•
multiple exposures,
•
interval-timer photography,
•
time-lapse video recording, and
•
focus shift.
542
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
Take photographs at the selected interval until the specified number of
shots has been recorded. When using the interval timer, select a release
mode other than self-timer or high-speed frame capture.
Interval Timer Shooting
G
button
U
C
photo shooting menu
Option Description
[Start]
Start interval timer shooting. Shooting will begin either
after about 3 s ([Now] selected for [Choose start day/
time]) or at a selected date and time ([Choose day/
time]). Shooting will continue at the selected interval
until all shots have been taken.
[Choose start
day/time]
Choose a start option. Select [Now] to start shooting
immediately, [Choose day/time] to start shooting at a
chosen date and time.
[Interval]
Specify the interval between shots in hours, minutes,
and seconds.
[Intervals×shots/
interval]
Choose the number of intervals and the number of
shots per interval.
[Exposure
smoothing]
Selecting [ON] allows the camera to adjust exposure to
match the previous shot.
•
Large changes in subject brightness during shooting
may result in apparent variations in exposure. This
can be addressed by shortening the interval between
shots.
•
Exposure smoothing will not take effect in mode M if
[OFF] is selected for [ISO sensitivity settings]>
[Auto ISO sensitivity control] in the photo shooting
menu.
543
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
[Interval priority]
•
[ON]: Enable interval priority to ensure that frames
shot in modes P and A are taken at the chosen
interval.
- Flash photography is disabled.
- Release priority is enabled regardless of the options
selected for Custom Settings a1 [AF-C priority
selection] and a2 [AF-S priority selection].
-If [ON] is selected for [ISO sensitivity settings]>
[Auto ISO sensitivity control] and the time chosen
for [Minimum shutter speed] is longer than the
interval, the time selected for the interval will take
priority over the selected shutter speed.
•
[OFF]: Disable interval priority to ensure that photos
are correctly exposed.
[Focus before
each shot]
If [ON] is selected, the camera will focus between shots.
Select [OFF] to focus at a fixed distance.
Option Description
544
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
[Options]
Combine interval-timer photography with other
options.
•
[AE bracketing]: Perform exposure bracketing
during interval-timer photography.
•
[Time-lapse video]: Use the photos taken during
interval-timer photography to create a time-lapse
video with an aspect ratio of 16:9.
- The camera saves both the photos and the time-
lapse video.
- Selecting [1:1 (24×24)] for [Image area] > [Choose
image area] in the photo shooting menu disables
the shutter release.
- Videos created using [Time-lapse video] are
recorded in the [sRGB] color space, regardless of the
option selected for [Color space] in the photo
shooting menu.
•
[Off]: Do not perform additional operations during
interval-timer photography.
[Starting storage
folder]
Highlight options and press
J
or
2
to select (
M
) or
deselect (
U
).
•
[New folder]: A new folder is created for each new
sequence.
•
[Reset file numbering]: File numbering is reset to
0001 whenever a new folder is created.
Option Description
545
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
Interval-Timer Photography
D
Before Shooting
•
Take a test shot at current settings.
•
Before proceeding, select [Time zone and date] in the setup menu and
make sure that the camera clock is set to the correct time and date.
•
To ensure that shooting is not interrupted, use a fully-charged battery, the
supplied charging AC adapter, or an optional AC adapter and power
connector.
1
Highlight [Interval timer shooting] in
the photo shooting menu and press
2
.
546
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
2
Adjust interval timer settings.
•
Choose the start day and time.
- To start shooting immediately, select [Now].
- To start shooting at a chosen date and time, select [Choose day/
time]. Choose the date and time and press
J
.
•
Choose the interval between shots.
Highlight [Choose start
day/time] and press
2
.
Highlight an option and
press
J
.
Highlight [Interval] and
press
2
.
Choose an interval (in
hours, minutes, and
seconds) and press
J
.
547
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
•
Choose the number of shots per interval.
- In single frame release mode, the photographs for each interval
will be taken at the rate for continuous high-speed release mode.
•
Enable or disable exposure smoothing.
- Selecting [ON] allows the camera to adjust exposure to match
the previous shot.
Highlight
[Intervals×shots/
interval] and press
2
.
Choose the number of
intervals and the number
of shots per interval and
press
J
.
Highlight [Exposure
smoothing] and press
2
to select [ON] or [OFF].
548
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
•
Choose an interval priority option.
•
Choose whether the camera focuses between shots.
-If [ON] is selected for [Focus before each shot], the camera will
focus before each shot according to the option currently
selected for focus mode.
Highlight [Interval
priority] and press
2
to
select [ON] or [OFF].
Highlight [Focus before
each shot] and press
2
to select [ON] or [OFF].
549
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
•
Choose additional options.
-If you selected [AE bracketing], choose values for [Number of
shots] and [Increment]; if you selected [Time-lapse video],
choose settings for [Video file type], [Frame size/frame rate],
and [Destination].
•
Choose starting folder options.
Highlight [Options] and
press
2
.
Highlight [AE
bracketing] or [Time-
lapse video] and press
J
.
Highlight [Starting
storage folder] and
press
2
.
After highlighting the
desired options and
pressing
J
to turn them
on (
M
) or off (
U
), press
4
.
550
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
3
Highlight [Start] and press
J
.
•
If [Now] was selected for [Choose start
day/time] in Step 2, shooting will start
after about 3 s.
•
Otherwise shooting will start at the time
selected for [Choose start day/time]>
[Choose day/time].
•
The display turns off during shooting.
•
Shooting will continue at the selected interval until all shots have
been taken.
D
During Shooting
•
A
7
icon is displayed in the control panel during
interval timer photography. If [Time-lapse video] is
selected for [Options], a
8
icon will also be displayed.
•
If the display is turned on by pressing the
shutter-release button halfway, the message
[Interval timer shooting] will be displayed
and the
7
icon will flash. If [Time-lapse video]
is selected for [Options], a
8
icon will also be
displayed.
551
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
❚❚
Pausing Interval-Timer Photography
Interval-timer photography can be paused between intervals by
pressing
J
or by selecting [Interval timer shooting] in the photo
shooting menu, highlighting [Pause], and pressing
J
. Note that the
menus may not be displayed when the
G
button is pressed if the time
selected for [Interval] is very short.
•
If [Time-lapse video] is selected for [Options], pressing
J
between
intervals will end interval-timer photography.
❚❚
Resuming Interval-Timer Photography
Interval timer shooting can be resumed as described below.
•
To resume shooting immediately:
•
To resume shooting at a specified time:
Highlight [Restart]
and press
J
.
Highlight [Restart
option] and press
2
,
then highlight
[Choose day/time]
and press
2
.
Choose a starting
date and time and
press
J
.
Highlight [Restart]
and press
J
.
552
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
❚❚
Ending Interval-Timer Photography
To end interval-timer photography before all the photos are taken,
select [Interval timer shooting] in the photo shooting menu, highlight
[Off], and press
J
. Note that the menus may not be displayed when the
G
button is pressed if the time selected for [Interval] is very short. In
this case you will need to press
J
to pause interval-timer photography
and then select [Interval timer shooting] in the photo shooting menu,
highlight [Off], and press
J
.
553
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
D
Cautions: Interval-Timer Photography
•
Choose an interval longer than the time needed to take the selected
number of shots at the predicted shutter speed. Note that during actual
interval-timer photography, the camera must not only take shots at the
selected interval but must also have sufficient time to complete the
exposures and perform such tasks as processing the photographs. If the
interval is too short to take the selected number of photos, the camera may
skip to the next interval without shooting.
•
If the interval is too short, the total number of shots taken may be less than
that selected for [Intervals×shots/interval].
•
If you are using a flash, choose an interval longer than the time needed for
the flash to charge. If the interval is too short, the flash may fire at less than
the power needed for full exposure.
•
If shooting cannot proceed at current settings—for example, if shutter
speed is set to “Bulb” or “Time”, the [Interval] is [00:00'00"], or the start
time is in less than a minute—a warning will be displayed.
•
If [Time-lapse video] is selected for [Options], the standby timer will not
expire during interval-timer photography, regardless of the option
selected for Custom Setting c3 [Power off delay]> [Standby timer].
•
If [Time-lapse video] is selected for [Options] at a frame size 7680 × 4320,
interval-timer photography will not start if:
-[DX (24×16)] or [1:1 (24×24)] is selected for [Image area] > [Choose
image area] in the photo shooting menu, or
- a DX lens is attached.
554
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
•
If the memory card is full, the interval timer will remain active but no
pictures will be taken. Insert another memory card and resume shooting
(
0
551).
•
Depending on memory card performance and shooting conditions,
shooting may end before the selected number of shots have been taken or
the selected number of intervals is complete.
•
Interval timer shooting will pause if:
- the camera is turned off and then on again (when the camera is off,
batteries and memory cards can be replaced without ending interval-
timer photography), or
- self-timer or high-speed frame capture is selected for release mode.
•
Changing camera settings while the interval timer is active may cause
shooting to end.
D
Release Mode
Regardless of the release mode selected, the camera will take the specified
number of shots at each interval.
D
Adjusting Settings Between Shots
Pictures can be viewed and shooting and menu settings adjusted between
shots. Note, however, that the display will turn off and shooting will resume a
few seconds before the next shot is taken.
555
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
D
Interval-Timer Photography: Restrictions
Interval-timer photography cannot be combined with some camera features,
including:
•
video recording,
•
long time-exposures (“Bulb” or “Time”),
•
the self-timer,
•
high-speed frame capture,
•
bracketing,
•
multiple exposures,
•
HDR overlay, and
•
focus shift.
D
Interval Timer Settings
Turning the camera off or selecting a new release mode does not affect
interval-timer photography settings.
D
Shooting Menu Banks
You cannot change or reset shooting menu banks while interval-timer
photography is in progress.
556
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
The camera automatically takes photos at selected intervals to create a
time-lapse video.
Time-Lapse Video
G
button
U
C
photo shooting menu
Option Description
[Start]
Start time-lapse recording. Shooting starts after about 3 s
and continues at the interval selected for [Interval] for
the time selected for [Shooting time].
[Interval]
Choose the interval between shots, in minutes and
seconds.
[Shooting time]
Choose how long the camera will continue to take
pictures, in hours and minutes.
[Exposure
smoothing]
Selecting [ON] smooths abrupt changes in exposure.
•
Large changes in subject brightness during shooting
may result in apparent variations in exposure. This can
be addressed by shortening the interval between
shots.
•
Exposure smoothing will not take effect in mode M if
[OFF] is selected for [ISO sensitivity settings]> [Auto
ISO sensitivity control] in the photo shooting menu.
[Choose image
area]
Choose the image area for time-lapse videos from [FX]
and [DX].
[Video file type] Choose the video file type for the final video.
557
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
[Frame size/
frame rate]
Choose the frame size and rate for the final video. The
options available vary with the setting chosen for [Video
file type].
[Interval
priority]
•
[ON]: Enable interval priority to ensure that frames shot
in modes P and A are taken at the chosen interval.
- Release priority is enabled regardless of the options
selected for Custom Settings a1 [AF-C priority
selection] and a2 [AF-S priority selection].
-If [ON] is selected for [ISO sensitivity settings]>
[Auto ISO sensitivity control] and the time chosen
for [Minimum shutter speed] is longer than the
interval, the time selected for the interval will take
priority over the selected shutter speed.
•
[OFF]: Disable interval priority to ensure that photos
are correctly exposed.
[Focus before
each shot]
If [ON] is selected, the camera will focus between shots.
[Destination]
Choose the slot used to record time-lapse videos when
two memory cards are inserted.
Option Description
558
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
Recording Time-Lapse Videos
D
Before Shooting
•
Time-lapse videos are shot using the video crop.
•
Take test shots and check the results in the monitor.
•
Before proceeding, select [Time zone and date] in the setup menu and
make sure that the camera clock is set to the correct time and date.
•
To ensure that shooting is not interrupted, use a fully-charged battery, the
supplied charging AC adapter, or an optional AC adapter and power
connector.
1
Highlight [Time-lapse video] in the
photo shooting menu and press
2
.
559
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
2
Adjust time-lapse video settings.
•
Choose the interval between shots.
- Choose an interval longer than the slowest anticipated shutter
speed.
•
Choose the total shooting time.
- The maximum shooting time is 23 hours and 59 minutes.
Highlight [Interval] and
press
2
.
Choose an interval (in
minutes and seconds)
and press
J
.
Highlight [Shooting
time] and press
2
.
Choose a shooting time
(in hours and minutes)
and press
J
.
560
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
•
Enable or disable exposure smoothing.
- Selecting [ON] smooths abrupt changes in exposure.
•
Choose the image area.
•
Choose a video file type.
Highlight [Exposure
smoothing] and press
2
to select [ON] or [OFF].
Highlight [Choose
image area] and press
2
.
Highlight an option and
press
J
.
Highlight [Video file
type] and press
2
.
Highlight an option and
press
J
.
561
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
•
Choose the frame size and rate.
•
Choose an interval priority option.
Highlight [Frame size/
frame rate] and press
2
.
Highlight an option and
press
J
.
Highlight [Interval
priority] and press
2
to
select [ON] or [OFF].
562
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
•
Choose whether the camera focuses between shots.
-If [ON] is selected for [Focus before each shot], the camera will
focus before each shot according to the option currently
selected for focus mode.
•
Choose a destination.
Highlight [Focus before
each shot] and press
2
to select [ON] or [OFF].
Highlight [Destination]
and press
2
.
Highlight the slot that
will be used to record
time-lapse videos when
two memory cards are
inserted and press
J
.
563
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
3
Highlight [Start] and press
J
.
•
Shooting starts after about 3 s.
•
The display turns off during shooting.
•
The camera takes pictures at interval
selected for [Interval] for the time
selected for [Shooting time] in Step 2.
D
During Shooting
•
A
8
icon is displayed in the control panel during
shooting.
•
If the display is turned on by pressing the
shutter-release button halfway, the message
[Interval timer shooting] will be displayed
and the
8
icon will flash.
564
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
❚❚
Ending Shooting
To end shooting before all the photos are taken, press
J
or select
[Time-lapse video] in the photo shooting menu, highlight [Off], and
press
J
. Note that the menus may not be displayed when the
G
button is pressed if the time selected for [Interval] is very short.
•
A video will be created from the frames shot to the point where
shooting ended and normal photography will resume.
565
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
D
Calculating the Length of the Final Video
•
The total number of frames in the final video can be calculated by dividing
the shooting time selected in Step 2 by the interval, rounding up, and
adding 1.
•
The length of the final video can then be calculated by dividing the
number of shots by the frame rate selected for [Frame size/frame rate]
(for example, a 48-frame video recorded with [1920×1080; 24p] selected
for [Frame size/frame rate] will be about two seconds long).
D
Picture Review
The
K
button cannot be used to view pictures while shooting is in progress.
The current frame will however be displayed for a few seconds after each
shot if [On] or [On (monitor only)] is selected for [Picture review] in the
playback menu. Note that other playback operations cannot be performed
while the frame is displayed. The current frame may not be displayed if the
interval is very short.
1
2
3
1
Frame size/frame rate
2
Length recorded/maximum
length
3
Memory card indicator
566
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
D
Cautions: Time-Lapse Videos
•
Sound is not recorded with time-lapse videos.
•
The shutter speed and the time needed to record the picture to the
memory card may vary from shot to shot. As a result, camera may be
unable to take shots at the selected interval.
•
Shooting will not begin if a time-lapse video cannot be recorded at current
settings, for example if:
- the value selected for [Interval] is longer than that selected for
[Shooting time],
-[00:00'00"] is selected for [Interval] or [Shooting time], or
- the memory card is full.
•
When 7680 × 4320 is selected for [Frame size/frame rate], shooting will
not start if a DX lens is attached or [DX] selected for [Choose image area].
•
The
K
button cannot be used to view pictures while time-lapse recording
is in progress.
•
For consistent coloration, choose a white balance setting other than
4
[Auto] or
D
[Natural light auto] when recording time-lapse videos.
•
Regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting c3 [Power off
delay]> [Standby timer], the standby timer will not expire while
recording is in progress.
•
Shooting may end if camera controls are used, settings are changed, or an
HDMI cable is connected. A video will be created from the frames shot to
the point where shooting ended.
•
The following end shooting without a beep sounding or a video being
recorded:
- Disconnecting the power source
- Ejecting the memory card
567
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
D
Adjusting Settings Between Shots
Shooting and menu settings can be adjusted between shots. Note, however,
that the monitor will turn off approximately 2 s before the next shot is taken.
D
Time-Lapse Videos: Restrictions
Time-lapse video recording cannot be combined with some camera features,
including:
•
video recording,
•
long time-exposures (“Bulb” or “Time”),
•
the self-timer,
•
high-speed frame capture,
•
bracketing,
•
multiple exposures,
•
HDR overlay,
•
interval-timer photography, and
•
focus shift.
568
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
Focus shift automatically varies focus over a series of shots. Use it to
take photos that will later be combined using focus stacking to create a
single picture with increased depth of field. Before using focus shift,
choose a focus mode of AF-S or AF-C and a release mode other than
self-timer or high-speed frame capture.
Focus Shift Shooting
G
button
U
C
photo shooting menu
Option Description
[Start]
Start shooting. The camera will take the selected number
of shots, changing the focus distance by the selected
amount with each shot.
[No. of shots] Choose the number of shots (maximum 300).
[Focus step
width]
Focus shift varies the focus distance over a series of
photographs. Choose the amount the focus distance
changes with each shot.
[Interval until
next shot]
Choose the interval between shots, in seconds.
•
Select [00] to take photos at up to about 5 fps.
•
To ensure correct exposure when using a flash, choose
an interval long enough for the flash to charge.
[First-frame
exposure lock]
•
[ON]: The camera locks exposure for all shots at the
setting for the first frame.
•
[OFF]: The camera adjusts exposure before each shot.
[Starting
storage folder]
Highlight options and press
J
or
2
to select (
M
) or
deselect (
U
).
•
[New folder]: A new folder is created for each new
sequence.
•
[Reset file numbering]: File numbering is reset to 0001
whenever a new folder is created.
569
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
Focus Shift Photography
D
Before Shooting
•
Take a test shot at current settings.
•
To ensure that shooting is not interrupted, use a fully-charged battery, the
supplied charging AC adapter, or an optional AC adapter and power
connector.
1
Focus.
•
During focus shift, the camera takes a series of shots starting from
a selected focus position and continuing toward infinity. Given
that shooting ends when infinity is reached, the starting focus
position should be slightly in front of (i.e., closer to the camera
than) the closest point on the subject.
•
Do not move the camera after focusing.
2
Highlight [Focus shift shooting] in the
photo shooting menu and press
2
.
570
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
3
Adjust focus shift settings.
•
Choose the number of shots.
- The maximum number of shots is 300.
- We recommend taking more shots than you think you’ll need.
You can winnow them down during focus stacking.
- More than 100 shots may be required for photographs of insects
or other small objects. On the other hand, only a few may be
needed to photograph a landscape from front to back with a
wide-angle lens.
Highlight [No. of shots]
and press
2
.
Choose the number of
shots and press
J
.
571
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
•
Choose the amount the focus distance changes with each
shot.
-Press
4
to reduce the focus step width,
2
to increase.
- Note that high settings increase the risk that some areas will be
out of focus when the shots are stacked. A value of 5 or less is
recommended.
- Try experimenting with different settings before shooting.
•
Choose the interval until next shot.
- Choose the interval between shots, in seconds.
- Select [00] to take photos at up to about 5 fps.
- To ensure correct exposure when using a flash, choose an
interval long enough for the flash to charge. A setting of [00] is
recommended when shooting without a flash.
Highlight [Focus step
width] and press
2
.
Choose a focus step
width and press
J
.
Highlight [Interval until
next shot] and press
2
.
Choose the interval
between shots and press
J
.
572
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
•
Enable or disable first-frame exposure lock.
-[OFF] is recommended if lighting and other conditions will not
change during shooting, [ON] when photographing landscapes
and the like under variable lighting.
- Selecting [ON] locks exposure at the value for the first shot,
ensuring that all photos have the same exposure. Large changes
in subject brightness during shooting may however result in
apparent variations in exposure. This can be addressed by
selecting [OFF].
•
Choose starting folder options.
Highlight [First-frame
exposure lock] and
press
2
to select [ON] or
[OFF].
Highlight [Starting
storage folder] and
press
2
.
After highlighting the
desired options and
pressing
J
to turn them
on (
M
) or off (
U
), press
4
.
573
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
4
Highlight [Start] and press
J
.
•
Shooting starts after about 3 s.
•
The display turns off during shooting.
•
The camera takes photographs at the
selected interval, starting at the focus
distance selected at the start of shooting
and progressing out toward infinity by the selected focus step
distance with each shot.
•
Shooting ends when the selected number of shots has been taken
or focus reaches infinity.
574
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
❚❚
Ending Focus Shift Photography
To end shooting before all shots have been taken, either:
•
select [Focus shift shooting] in the photo shooting menu, highlight
[Off], and press
J
, or
•
press the shutter-release button halfway or press the
J
button
between shots.
D
During Shooting
A
9
icon is displayed in the control panel during shooting.
D
Cautions: Focus Shift Photography
•
The shutter speed and the time needed to record the picture may vary
from shot to shot. As a result, the camera may be unable to take shots at
the selected interval.
•
Shooting ends when focus reaches infinity, and consequently depending
on the focus position at the start of shooting, shooting may end before the
selected number of shots has been taken.
•
Regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting c3 [Power off
delay]> [Standby timer], the standby timer will not expire while shooting
is in progress.
•
If you are using a flash, choose an interval longer than the time needed for
the flash to charge. If the interval is too short, the flash may fire at less than
the power needed for full exposure.
•
If shooting cannot proceed at current settings, for example because
shutter speed is set to “Bulb” or “Time”, a warning will be displayed.
•
Changing camera settings while focus shift photography is in progress may
cause shooting to end.
575
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
D
Focus Shift Photography: Restrictions
Focus-shift photography cannot be combined with some camera features,
including:
•
video recording,
•
long time-exposures (“Bulb” or “Time”),
•
the self-timer,
•
high-speed frame capture,
•
bracketing,
•
multiple exposures,
•
HDR overlay,
•
interval-timer photography, and
•
time-lapse video recording.
A
Aperture
Given that pictures shot at very small apertures (high f-numbers) may lack
definition, we recommend that you choose apertures wider (f-numbers
lower) than f/8–f/11.
A
Close-ups
Because focus depth is reduced at short focus distances, we recommend
choosing smaller focus steps and increasing the number of shots when
photographing subjects close to the camera.
576
1
The Video Recording Menu: Video Recording Options
To view the video recording menu, select the
1
tab in the camera menus.
The video recording menu contains the following items:
1
The Video Recording Menu: Video
Recording Options
Item
0
[Shooting menu bank] 577
[Extended menu banks] 577
[Storage folder] 577
[File naming] 578
[Destination] 578
[Video file type] 578
[Frame size/frame rate] 579
[Image area] 579
[ISO sensitivity settings] 580
[White balance] 581
[Set Picture Control] 581
[Manage Picture Control] 581
[HLG quality] 582
[Active D-Lighting] 583
[High ISO NR] 583
[Vignette control] 584
[Diffraction compensation] 584
[Auto distortion control] 584
[Video flicker reduction] 585
[Metering] 586
[Focus mode] 586
[AF-area mode] 586
[AF subject detection
options]
587
[Vibration reduction] 587
[Electronic VR] 587
[Microphone sensitivity] 588
[Attenuator] 589
[Frequency response] 589
[Wind noise reduction] 589
[Mic jack plug-in power] 590
[Headphone volume] 590
[Timecode] 591
[External rec. cntrl (HDMI)] 592
Item
0
577
1
The Video Recording Menu: Video Recording Options
D
See Also
“Video Recording Menu Defaults” (
0
468).
Select a shooting menu bank (“A” through “D”). More information is
available in the section devoted to the [Shooting menu bank] item in
the photo shooting menu (
0
493).
Select [ON] to include exposure settings in the information recorded in
each of the four shooting menu banks. More information is available in
the section devoted to the [Extended menu banks] item in the photo
shooting menu (
0
496).
Choose the folder in which subsequent pictures will be stored. More
information is available in the section devoted to the [Storage folder]
item in the photo shooting menu (
0
497).
D
“Storage Folder”
Changes to [Storage folder] in the photo shooting menu apply in the video
recording menu and vice versa.
Shooting Menu Bank
G
button
U
1
video recording menu
Extended Menu Banks
G
button
U
1
video recording menu
Storage Folder
G
button
U
1
video recording menu
578
1
The Video Recording Menu: Video Recording Options
Choose the three-letter prefix used in naming the files in which videos
are stored; the default prefix is “DSC” (
0
502).
Choose the slot to which videos are recorded when two memory cards
are inserted.
•
The menu shows the time available on each card.
•
Recording ends automatically when no time remains on the current
card.
Choose the video file type. For more information, see the section on
“Video File Types” (
0
214) in the “Video Recording” chapter.
File Naming
G
button
U
1
video recording menu
Destination
G
button
U
1
video recording menu
Video File Type
G
button
U
1
video recording menu
579
1
The Video Recording Menu: Video Recording Options
Choose the video frame size (in pixels) and frame rate. For more
information, see the section on “Video Frame Size and Rate Options”
(
0
216) in the “Video Recording” chapter.
Choose a video crop. For more information, see the section on “Video
Image Area Options” (
0
218) in the “Video Recording” chapter.
Frame Size/Frame Rate
G
button
U
1
video recording menu
Image Area
G
button
U
1
video recording menu
580
1
The Video Recording Menu: Video Recording Options
Adjust the following ISO sensitivity settings
for use in video mode.
D
Cautions: Auto ISO Sensitivity Control
•
At high ISO sensitivities, “noise” (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or
lines) may increase.
•
At high ISO sensitivities, the camera may have difficulty focusing.
•
The foregoing can be prevented by choosing a lower value for [ISO
sensitivity settings]> [Maximum sensitivity].
ISO Sensitivity Settings
G
button
U
1
video recording menu
Option Description
[Maximum
sensitivity]
•
Choose the upper limit for auto ISO sensitivity control
from values between ISO 200 and Hi 2.0.
•
The selected value serves as the upper limit for ISO
sensitivity in modes P, S, and A and when [ON] is
selected for [Auto ISO control (mode M)] in mode M.
[Auto ISO
control (mode
M)]
•
[ON]: Enable auto ISO sensitivity control in mode M.
•
[OFF]: Use the value selected for [ISO sensitivity (mode
M)].
•
Regardless of the option selected, auto ISO sensitivity
control is used in modes other than M.
[ISO
sensitivity
(mode M)]
Choose the ISO sensitivity for mode M from values
between ISO 64 and Hi 2.0.
581
1
The Video Recording Menu: Video Recording Options
Choose the white balance for videos. Select [Same as photo settings]
to use the option currently selected for photos (
0
158).
Choose a Picture Control for videos. Select [Same as photo settings] to
use the option currently selected for photos (
0
192).
Save modified Picture Controls as custom Picture Controls (
0
199).
White Balance
G
button
U
1
video recording menu
Set Picture Control
G
button
U
1
video recording menu
Manage Picture Control
G
button
U
1
video recording menu
582
1
The Video Recording Menu: Video Recording Options
Adjust HLG video image processing options for use when [HLG] is
chosen as the tone mode for [Video file type]> [H.265 10-bit (MOV)]
in the video recording menu.
HLG Quality
G
button
U
1
video recording menu
Option Description
[Quick sharp]
Use [Quick sharp] to quickly adjust levels for balanced
[Sharpening], [Mid-range sharpening], and [Clarity].
These parameters can also be adjusted individually.
[Sharpening] Control the sharpness of details and outlines.
[Mid-range
sharpening]
Adjust the sharpness of patterns and lines in the range
between [Sharpening] and [Clarity].
[Clarity]
Adjust overall sharpness and the sharpness of thicker
outlines without affecting brightness or dynamic range.
[Contrast] Adjust contrast.
[Saturation] Control the vividness of colors.
[Hue] Adjust hue.
583
1
The Video Recording Menu: Video Recording Options
Preserve details in highlights and shadows, creating videos with natural
contrast.
Reduce “noise” (randomly-spaced bright pixels) in videos recorded at
high ISO sensitivities (
0
515).
Active D-Lighting
G
button
U
1
video recording menu
Option Description
Z
[Extra high]
Choose the amount of Active D-Lighting performed
from (in order from high to low) [Extra high], [High],
[Normal], and [Low].
P
[High]
Q
[Normal]
R
[Low]
[Off] Active D-Lighting off.
High ISO NR
G
button
U
1
video recording menu
584
1
The Video Recording Menu: Video Recording Options
Reduce vignetting in videos (
0
516).
D
Vignette Control
Changes to [Vignette control] in the photo shooting menu apply in the
video recording menu and vice versa.
Choose whether to reduce diffraction in videos (
0
517).
D
Diffraction Compensation
Changes to [Diffraction compensation] in the photo shooting menu apply
in the video recording menu and vice versa.
Choose whether to reduce barrel and pin-cushion distortion in videos
(
0
517).
D
Auto Distortion Control
Changes to [Auto distortion control] in the photo shooting menu apply in
the video recording menu and vice versa.
Vignette Control
G
button
U
1
video recording menu
Diffraction Compensation
G
button
U
1
video recording menu
Auto Distortion Control
G
button
U
1
video recording menu
585
1
The Video Recording Menu: Video Recording Options
Reduce flicker and banding when shooting under fluorescent or
mercury-vapor lighting during video recording. Choose [Auto] to allow
the camera to automatically choose the correct frequency. If [Auto] fails
to produce the desired results, select [50 Hz] or [60 Hz] according to the
frequency of the local power supply. Choose [50 Hz] for areas with a
50 Hz power supply, [60 Hz] for areas with a 60 Hz power supply.
D
Cautions: [Video Flicker Reduction]
•
If [Auto] fails to produce the desired results and you are unsure as to the
frequency of the local power supply, test both the 50 and 60 Hz options
and choose the one that produces the best results.
•
Flicker reduction may not produce the desired results if the subject is very
bright. If this is the case, try choosing a smaller aperture (higher f-number).
•
Flicker reduction may fail to produce the desired results in modes other
than M. If this is the case, select mode M and choose a shutter speed
adapted to the frequency of the local power supply:
- 50 Hz:
1
/
100
s,
1
/
50
s,
1
/
25
s
- 60 Hz:
1
/
125
s,
1
/
60
s,
1
/
30
s
Video Flicker Reduction
G
button
U
1
video recording menu
586
1
The Video Recording Menu: Video Recording Options
Choose how the camera meters exposure in video mode. [Spot
metering] is not available in the video recording menu (
0
520).
Choose a focus mode for video recording (
0
110).
Choose an AF-area mode for video recording (
0
113).
Metering
G
button
U
1
video recording menu
Focus Mode
G
button
U
1
video recording menu
AF-Area Mode
G
button
U
1
video recording menu
587
1
The Video Recording Menu: Video Recording Options
Subject Detection
Choose the type of subject to which the camera gives priority when
focusing in video mode (
0
119).
AF When Subject Not Detected
Choose whether the camera focuses if unable to detect a subject of the
type selected for [Subject detection] when [Full-time AF] is selected
for focus mode.
•
If [ON] is selected, the camera will initiate autofocus whether or not a
subject of the selected type is detected.
•
Select [OFF] to disable autofocus when no subject of the selected type
is detected.
Adjust vibration reduction settings for video mode. Select [Same as
photo settings] to use the option currently selected for photos (
0
526).
Choose whether to enable electronic vibration reduction in video
mode. Electronic vibration reduction is fixed at [OFF] at a frame size of
7680 × 4320 and at frame rates of 120p or 100p.
AF Subject Detection Options
G
button
U
1
video recording menu
Vibration Reduction
G
button
U
1
video recording menu
Electronic VR
G
button
U
1
video recording menu
588
1
The Video Recording Menu: Video Recording Options
Turn built-in or external microphones on or off or adjust microphone
sensitivity.
•
If the sound level is displayed in red, the
volume is too high. Reduce microphone
sensitivity.
D
Videos Without Sound
Videos recorded with [Microphone off] selected
for [Microphone sensitivity] are indicated by a
2
icon.
Microphone Sensitivity
G
button
U
1
video recording menu
Option Description
[Auto] Microphone sensitivity is adjusted automatically.
[Manual]
Adjust microphone sensitivity
manually. Choose from values
of from [1] to [20]. The higher
the value, the higher the
sensitivity; the lower the value,
the lower the sensitivity.
[Microphone
off]
Turn sound recording off.
589
1
The Video Recording Menu: Video Recording Options
Select [ON] to reduce microphone gain and prevent audio distortion
when recording videos in loud environments.
Choose the range of frequencies to which built-in and external
microphones respond.
Select [ON] to enable the low-cut filter, reducing noise produced by
wind blowing over the built-in microphone. Note that other sounds
may also be affected.
Selecting [ON] for [Wind noise reduction] has no effect on optional
stereo microphones. Wind-noise reduction for optional stereo
microphones that support this feature can be enabled or disabled using
microphone controls.
Attenuator
G
button
U
1
video recording menu
Frequency Response
G
button
U
1
video recording menu
Option Description
S
[Wide range]
Record a wide range of frequencies. Choose for
everything from music to the bustling hum of a city
street.
T
[Vocal range] Choose for human voices.
Wind Noise Reduction
G
button
U
1
video recording menu
590
1
The Video Recording Menu: Video Recording Options
The camera does not provide power to external microphones when
[OFF] is selected.
•
To prevent noise from interference generated by the power supply,
we recommend turning plug-in power [OFF] when using
microphones that do not require plug-in power.
•
For information on whether your microphone requires plug-in power,
consult the manufacturer.
Press
1
or
3
to adjust headphone volume.
Mic Jack Plug-in Power
G
button
U
1
video recording menu
Headphone Volume
G
button
U
1
video recording menu
591
1
The Video Recording Menu: Video Recording Options
Choose whether to record time codes giving the hour, minute, second,
and frame number for each frame when shooting videos. Time codes
are available only with videos recorded in MOV format.
Timecode
G
button
U
1
video recording menu
Option Description
[Record
timecodes]
•
[On]: Record time codes. The time code appears in the
shooting display.
•
[On (with HDMI output)]: Time codes will be included
with footage saved to external recorders connected to
the camera via an HDMI cable. The camera supports
Atomos SHOGUN, NINJA, and SUMO-series Monitor
recorders.
•
[Off]: Time codes are not recorded.
[Count-up
method]
•
[Record run]: Time codes are incremented only while
recording is in progress.
•
[Free run]: Time codes are incremented continuously.
Time codes continue to be incremented while the
camera is off.
592
1
The Video Recording Menu: Video Recording Options
D
Caution: HDMI Devices
Selecting [On (with HDMI output)] for [Record timecodes] may disrupt
footage output to HDMI devices.
Selecting [ON] allows camera controls to be used to start and stop
recording on the external recorder. For more information, see the
section on “Recorders” (
0
302) in the “Connecting to HDMI TVs and
Recorders” chapter.
[Timecode
origin]
•
[Reset]: Reset the time code to 00:00:00.00.
•
[Enter manually]: Enter the hour, minute, second, and
frame number manually.
•
[Current time]: Set the time code to the current time as
reported by the camera clock. Before proceeding, select
[Time zone and date] in the setup menu and make sure
that the camera clock is set to the correct time and date.
[Drop frame]
Select [ON] to compensate for discrepancies between the
frame count and the actual recording time at frame rates
of 30 and 60 fps.
External Rec. Cntrl (HDMI)
G
button
U
1
video recording menu
Option Description
593
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
To view Custom Settings, select the
A
tab in
the camera menus.
Custom Settings are used to customize camera settings to suit
individual preferences. The Custom Settings menu is divided into two
levels.
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning
Camera Settings
594
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
The following Custom Settings are available:
1
Item
0
[Custom Settings bank] 597
a [Focus]
a1 [AF-C priority selection] 598
a2 [AF-S priority selection] 599
a3
[Focus tracking with
lock-on]
600
a4 [Focus points used] 601
a5
[Store points by
orientation]
602
a6 [AF activation] 604
a7
[Focus point
persistence]
605
a8
[Limit AF-area mode
selection]
606
a9
[Focus mode
restrictions]
606
a10
[Focus point wrap-
around]
606
a11 [Focus point display] 607
a12
[Built-in AF-assist
illuminator]
609
a13 [Focus peaking] 610
a14
[Manual focus ring in
AF mode]
2
611
b [Metering/exposure]
b1
[ISO sensitivity step
value]
612
b2
[EV steps for exposure
cntrl]
612
b3
[Easy exposure
compensation]
613
b4
[Matrix metering face
detection]
613
b5 [Center-weighted area] 614
b6
[Fine-tune optimal
exposure]
615
b7
[Keep exp. when f/
changes]
616
c [Timers/AE lock]
c1
[Shutter-release button
AE-L]
617
c2 [Self-timer] 617
c3 [Power off delay] 618
Item
0
595
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
d [Shooting/display]
d1
[Continuous shooting
speed]
619
d2
[Maximum shots per
burst]
619
d3
[Limit release mode
selection]
620
d4
[Sync. release mode
options]
620
d5
[Extended shutter
speeds (M)]
621
d6
[Limit selectable image
area]
621
d7 [File number sequence] 622
d8 [View mode (photo Lv)] 624
d9
[Starlight view (photo
Lv)]
626
d10 [Warm display colors] 626
d11 [LCD illumination] 627
d12
[View all in continuous
mode]
629
d13
[Release timing
indicator]
629
d14 [Image frame] 630
d15 [Grid type] 630
d16 [Virtual horizon type] 631
d17
[Custom monitor
shooting display]
634
d18
[Custom viewfinder
shooting display]
636
Item
0
e [Bracketing/flash]
e1 [Flash sync speed] 637
e2 [Flash shutter speed] 639
e3
[Exposure comp. for
flash]
639
e4
[Auto
c
ISO sensitivity
control]
640
e5 [Modeling flash] 640
e6
[Auto bracketing
(mode M)]
641
e7 [Bracketing order] 642
e8 [Flash burst priority] 643
Item
0
596
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
1 Items modified from default values are indicated by asterisks (“
U
“).
2 Available with compatible lenses only.
D
See Also
“Custom Settings Menu Defaults” (
0
471)
f [Controls]
f1 [Customize
i
menu] 644
f2
[Custom controls
(shooting)]
647
f3
[Custom controls
(playback)]
659
f4 [Control lock] 665
f5 [Reverse dial rotation] 666
f6
[Release button to use
dial]
666
f7 [Reverse indicators] 667
f8 [Reverse ring for focus] 667
f9
[Focus ring rotation
range]
668
f10 [Control ring response] 669
f11
[Full-frame playback
flicks]
670
Item
0
g [Video]
g1 [Customize
i
menu] 672
g2 [Custom controls] 674
g3 [Control lock] 682
g4
[Limit AF-area mode
selection]
683
g5
[Focus mode
restrictions]
683
g6 [AF speed] 684
g7 [AF tracking sensitivity] 685
g8 [View assist] 685
g9 [Zebra pattern] 686
g10
[Limit zebra pattern
tone range]
688
g11 [Grid type] 688
g12
[Custom monitor
shooting display]
689
g13
[Custom viewfinder
shooting display]
691
Item
0
597
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Custom Settings are stored in one of four banks (banks “A” through “D”)
that can be selected using [Custom Settings bank]. Changes to
settings made while one bank is selected are not applied to the
remaining banks.
Renaming Custom Settings Banks
A descriptive caption can be added to the bank name (“A”, “B”, “C”, or
“D”) by highlighting the bank, pressing
2
, and selecting [Rename].
Captions can be up to 20 characters long.
Copying Custom Settings Banks
To create a copy of a custom settings bank, highlight the bank, press
2
,
select [Copy], and choose a destination for the copy.
Restoring Default Settings
You can restore default settings for a selected Custom Settings bank. To
do so, highlight the bank and press
O
(
Q
); a confirmation dialog will be
displayed. Highlight [Yes] and press
J
to restore default settings for the
selected bank.
Custom Settings Bank
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
598
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Choose whether photos can be taken before the camera focuses when
AF-C is selected.
a: Focus
a1: AF-C Priority Selection
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
Option Description
G
[Release]
Photos can be taken whenever the shutter-release
button is pressed (release priority).
B
[Focus +
release]
Priority is normally given to release, but if the
subject is dark or low contrast and the camera is in
continuous-release mode, priority will be given to
focus for the first shot in each series. For the
remaining shots, priority will be given to release
regardless of focus. This helps ensure that the first
shot in each series is in focus.
F
[Focus]
Photos can be taken only when the camera is in
focus (focus priority).
599
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Choose whether photos can be taken before the camera focuses when
AF-S is selected.
a2: AF-S Priority Selection
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
Option Description
G
[Release]
Photos can be taken whenever the shutter-release
button is pressed (release priority).
F
[Focus]
Photos can be taken only when the camera is in
focus (focus priority).
600
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Choose how quickly focus responds if
something passes between the subject and
the camera when AF-C is selected for the
focus mode.
Blocked Shot AF Response
•
Choose [5] (Delayed) to help maintain focus
on your original subject.
•
Choose [1] (Quick) to make it easier to shift focus to objects crossing
your field of view.
•
Regardless of the option selected, blocked shot AF response functions
in mode [3] when [3D-tracking] is selected for AF-area mode.
•
If [Auto-area AF] is selected for AF-area mode, blocked shot AF
response will function in mode [3] when [2] or [1] is selected.
Subject Motion
a3: Focus Tracking with Lock-On
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
Option Description
[Steady]
Choose for smooth focus when photographing subjects that
approach the camera at a steady pace.
[Erratic]
Choose for improved response when photographing subjects
prone to sudden starts and stops.
601
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Choose the number of focus points available for manual focus-point
selection when an option other than [Auto-area AF] is selected for AF-
area mode.
a4: Focus Points Used
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
Option Description
4
[All points]
Every focus point available in the current AF-area
mode can be selected. The number of points
available varies with the AF-area mode.
5
[Alternating
points]
The number of available focus points is reduced to
one quarter of the number available when [All
points] is selected. Use for quick focus-point
selection. The number of points available for
[Pinpoint AF] is not affected.
602
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Choose whether separate focus points can be selected for “wide”
(landscape) orientation, for “tall” (portrait) orientation with the camera
rotated 90° clockwise, and for “tall” orientation with the camera rotated
90° counterclockwise.
•
Select [Off] to use the same focus point regardless of camera
orientation.
a5: Store Points by Orientation
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
Camera rotated
90°counter-clockwise
Landscape (wide)
orientation
Camera rotated
90°clockwise
603
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
•
Select [Focus point] to enable separate focus-point selection. To
enable separate selection of both the focus point and AF-area mode,
choose [Focus point and AF-area mode].
Camera rotated
90°counter-clockwise
Landscape (wide)
orientation
Camera rotated
90°clockwise
604
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Choose whether the shutter-release button can be used to focus.
•
Highlighting [AF-ON only] and pressing
2
displays [Out-of-focus
release] options.
a6: AF Activation
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
Option Description
[Shutter/
AF-ON]
The camera focuses when the shutter-release button is pressed
halfway.
[AF-ON
only]
The camera does not focus when the shutter-release button is
pressed halfway.
Option Description
[Enable]
Photos can be taken whenever the shutter-release button is
pressed (release priority).
[Disable]
•
Photos can be taken only when the camera is in focus (focus
priority).
•
Focus using the AF-ON button or other controls to which AF-
ON has been assigned.
605
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Choose whether the focus point selected by the camera continues in
use after you change AF-area modes using a control to which [AF-area
mode] or [AF-area mode + AF-ON] has been assigned via Custom
Setting f2 [Custom controls (shooting)]. This only applies if you
change AF-area modes while focusing with the shutter-release button
pressed halfway.
•
Focus-point persistence applies if while the control is pressed, you
switch from an AF-area mode such as [Auto-area AF] in which the
focus point is chosen automatically to a mode in which the focus point
is selected manually.
a7: Focus Point Persistence
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
Option Description
[Auto]
The focus point last chosen by the camera before you
switched AF-area modes remains in effect.
[Off] The focus point last chosen by the user is restored.
606
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Choose the AF-area modes that can be selected by pressing the focus-
mode button and rotating the sub-command dial.
•
Highlight options and press
J
or
2
to
select (
M
) or deselect (
U
). Modes marked
with a check (
M
) are available for selection
via the sub-command dial.
•
To complete the operation, press
G
.
Limit focus-mode selection to a single focus mode. If an option other
than [No restrictions] is selected, rotating the main command dial
while holding the focus-mode button will not change the focus mode.
Choose whether focus-point selection “wraps around” from one edge of
the display to another. If [ON] is selected, focus-point selection will
“wrap around” from top to bottom, bottom to top, right to left, and left
to right, so that, for example, pressing
2
when a focus point at the right
edge of the display is highlighted selects the corresponding point at the
left edge.
a8: Limit AF-Area Mode Selection
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
a9: Focus Mode Restrictions
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
a10: Focus Point Wrap-Around
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
607
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Choose from the focus point display options below.
Manual Focus Mode
Dynamic-Area AF Assist
Choose whether both the selected focus point and the surrounding
focus points are displayed in dynamic-area AF mode.
a11: Focus Point Display
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
Option Description
[ON] The focus point is displayed at all times in manual focus mode.
[OFF] The focus point is displayed only during focus point selection.
Option Description
[ON]
Display both the selected focus point and surrounding focus
points.
[OFF] Display only the selected focus point.
[ON] ([Dynamic-area AF
(M)])
[OFF]
608
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
AF-C In-Focus Display
Choose whether the focus point changes color when the subject is in
focus in focus mode AF-C.
Option Description
[ON]
The focus point is displayed in green when the camera judges
that the subject is in focus.
[OFF]
The active focus point is displayed in red or yellow at all times,
whether or not the camera is in focus.
609
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Choose whether the built-in AF-assist illuminator lights to assist the
focus operation in photo mode when lighting is poor.
D
The AF-Assist Illuminator
•
The AF-assist illuminator has a range of about 1–3 m (3 ft 4 in.–9 ft 10 in.).
•
Remove lens hoods when using the illuminator.
•
Do not obstruct the AF-assist illuminator while it is lit.
a12: Built-in AF-Assist Illuminator
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
Option Description
[ON]
In photo mode, the illuminator will light as required when AF-
S is selected for focus mode.
[OFF]
The illuminator does not light to assist the focus operation.
The camera may not be able to focus when lighting is poor.
610
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
When focus peaking is enabled in manual focus mode, objects that are
in focus are indicated by colored outlines in the display. You can choose
the color.
Focus Peaking Display
Select [ON] to enable focus peaking.
Focus Peaking Sensitivity
Choose focus peaking sensitivity from [3 (high sensitivity)], [2
(standard)], and [1 (low sensitivity)]. The higher the value, the greater
the depth that will be shown as being in focus.
Focus Peaking Highlight Color
Choose the highlight color.
a13: Focus Peaking
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
611
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
This item is available with compatible lenses only. It controls whether
the lens focus ring can be used for manual focus in autofocus mode.
a14: Manual Focus Ring in AF Mode
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
Option Description
[ON]
Autofocus can be over-ridden by rotating the lens focus ring
(autofocus with manual override). The focus ring can be used
for manual focus while the shutter-release button is pressed
halfway. To refocus using autofocus, lift your finger from the
shutter-release button and then press it halfway again.
[OFF]
The lens focus ring cannot be used for manual focus in
autofocus mode.
612
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Choose whether changes to ISO sensitivity are made in increments of
1
/
3
or 1 EV. If the value currently selected for ISO sensitivity is not
available at the chosen setting, ISO sensitivity will be set to the nearest
available value.
Select the increments used for adjustments to shutter speed, aperture,
bracketing, and exposure and flash compensation.
•
If [1EV (comp. 1/3EV)] is selected, changes to shutter speed,
aperture, and bracketing will be made in increments of 1 EV and
changes to exposure and flash compensation in increments of
1
/
3
EV.
b: Metering/Exposure
b1: ISO sensitivity Step Value
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
b2: EV Steps for Exposure Cntrl
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
613
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Choose whether the
E
button is needed for exposure compensation.
•
This option takes effect in modes P, S, and A. Easy exposure
compensation is not available in mode M.
•
The command dial used varies with the mode.
Choose whether exposure is adjusted for the faces of human portrait
subjects detected by the camera when [Matrix metering] is selected.
b3: Easy Exposure Compensation
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
Option Description
[On (Auto
reset)]
Exposure compensation can be adjusted using only a
command dial. The setting selected with the command dial
is reset when the camera turns off or the standby timer
expires.
[On]
Exposure compensation can be adjusted using only a
command dial. Exposure compensation is not reset when
the camera turns off or the standby timer expires.
[Off]
Exposure compensation is set by pressing the
E
button and
rotating a command dial.
b4: Matrix Metering Face Detection
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
Option Description
[ON] The camera adjusts exposure for faces.
[OFF]
Exposure is not adjusted according to whether faces have
been detected.
614
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
When [Center-weighted metering] is selected, the camera assigns the
greatest weight to an area in the center of the shooting display when
setting exposure.
b5: Center-Weighted Area
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
Option Description
R
[Small]
The camera assigns the greatest weight to an
area equivalent to a circle 8 mm in diameter.
S
[Standard]
The camera assigns the greatest weight to an
area equivalent to a circle 12 mm in diameter.
T
[Average]
Weighting is based on the average of the entire
frame.
615
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Use this option to fine-tune the exposure
value selected by the camera; exposure can
be fine-tuned separately for each metering
method. Exposure can be adjusted up for
brighter exposures or down for darker
exposures in the range +1 to –1 EV in steps of
1
/
6
EV. The default is zero.
D
Fine-Tuning Exposure
•
Custom Setting b6 [Fine-tune optimal exposure] fine-tunes exposure
separately for each Custom Settings bank. Be aware of different fine-tuning
values for Custom Setting b6 when switching banks.
•
Regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting b6 [Fine-tune
optimal exposure], the exposure compensation icon (
E
) will not be
displayed. The only way to determine how much exposure has been
altered is to view the amount in the fine-tuning menu for Custom Setting
b6.
•
The values selected are not affected by two-button resets.
b6: Fine-Tune Optimal Exposure
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
616
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
When [OFF] is selected for [ISO sensitivity settings]> [Auto ISO
sensitivity control] in the photo shooting menu in mode M, actions
such as switching to a lens with a different aperture range may cause
unintended changes to aperture. If an option other than [Exposure
maintenance off] is selected for [Keep exp. when f/ changes], the
camera will adjust shutter speed or ISO sensitivity to maintain exposure
at its current value.
•
Other cases in which settings may be automatically adjusted to
maintain exposure include when:
- lenses with different maximum apertures at minimum and maximum
zoom are zoomed in or out, or
- the focus distance changes while a micro lens is attached.
•
The setting adjusted to maintain exposure when aperture changes
can be chosen from [Shutter speed] and [ISO sensitivity]. Select
[Exposure maintenance off] to disable this feature.
•
Depending on the lens, the camera may be unable to maintain current
exposure at some settings.
•
Exposure maintenance is not available during video recording.
b7: Keep Exp. When f/ Changes
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
617
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Choose whether exposure locks when the shutter-release button is
pressed.
Choose the length of the shutter release delay, the number of shots
taken, and the interval between shots in self-timer mode.
c: Timers/AE Lock
c1: Shutter-Release Button AE-L
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
Option Description
O
[On (half press)]
Pressing the shutter-release button halfway
locks exposure.
P
[On (burst mode)]
Exposure only locks while the shutter-release
button is pressed all the way down.
[Off]
Pressing the shutter-release button does not
lock exposure.
c2: Self-Timer
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
Option Description
[Self-timer
delay]
Choose the length of the shutter-release delay.
[Number of
shots]
Press
1
and
3
to choose the number of shots taken
each time the shutter-release button is pressed; choose
from values of from 1 to 9.
[Interval
between shots]
Choose the interval between shots when [Number of
shots] is more than 1.
618
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Choose how long the monitor or viewfinder remains on when no
operations are performed.
•
Different settings can be chosen for [Playback], [Menus], [Picture
review], and [Standby timer].
•
[Standby timer] determines how long the control panel and the
monitor or viewfinder display remain on after the shutter-release
button is pressed halfway. The monitor and viewfinder dim a few
seconds before the standby timer expires. If [10 s] is selected, the
timer will be extended to 20 seconds while the
i
menu is displayed.
•
Longer power-off delays reduce battery endurance.
c3: Power Off Delay
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
619
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Choose the frame advance rate for continuous high-speed and
continuous low-speed modes.
The maximum number of shots that can be taken in a single burst in
continuous release modes can be set to “
∞
” (no limit) or to any value
between 1 and 200.
•
Note that regardless of the option selected, there is no limit to the
number of photos that can be taken in a single burst when a shutter
speed of 1 s or slower is selected in mode S or M.
D
The Memory Buffer
Custom Setting d2 [Maximum shots per burst] is used to select the number
of shots that can be taken in a single burst. The number of shots that can be
taken before the memory buffer fills and shooting slows varies with image
quality and other settings. When the buffer is full, the camera will display
“r000” and the frame advance rate will drop.
d: Shooting/Display
d1: Continuous Shooting Speed
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
Option Description
[Continuous
high-speed]
Choose the frame rate for continuous high-speed release
mode from options ranging from [20 fps] to [10 fps].
[Continuous
low-speed]
Choose the frame rate for continuous low-speed release
mode from options ranging from [10 fps] to [1fps].
•
The actual frame rate when [8fps] is selected is 7.5 fps.
d2: Maximum Shots per Burst
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
620
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Choose the release modes that can be accessed by pressing the
c
button and rotating the main command dial when the release mode
dial is rotated to
c
.
•
Highlight options and press
J
or
2
to
select (
M
) or deselect (
U
). Modes marked
with a check (
M
) are available for selection
via the main command dial.
•
To complete the operation, press
G
.
Choose whether the shutters on the remote cameras are synchronized
with the shutter on the master camera when using an optional wireless
remote controller or the [Connect to other cameras] item in the
network menu.
•
For information on synchronized release using [Connect to other
cameras] in the network menu, see the section on “Synchronized
Release” (
0
402) in the “Connecting to Other Cameras” chapter.
d3: Limit Release Mode Selection
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
d4: Sync. Release Mode Options
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
621
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Extend the range of shutter speeds available in mode M; the slowest
shutter speed available when [ON] is selected is 900 s (15 minutes).
Extended shutter speeds can be used for pictures of the night sky and
other long exposures.
•
At speeds slower than 1 s, the shutter speed displayed by the camera
may differ from the actual exposure time. The actual exposure times at
shutter speeds of 15 and 30 seconds, for example, are respectively 16
and 32 seconds. The exposure time will again match the selected
shutter speed at speeds of 60 seconds and slower.
Choose the options that can be accessed by rotating a command dial in
the
i
menu or while pressing a control to which image area has been
assigned.
•
Highlight options and press
J
or
2
to
select (
M
) or deselect (
U
). Modes marked
with a check (
M
) are available for selection
via the command dials.
•
To complete the operation, press
G
.
d5: Extended Shutter Speeds (M)
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
d6: Limit Selectable Image Area
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
622
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Choose a file numbering option.
d7: File Number Sequence
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
Option Description
[On]
When a new folder is created or a new memory card is
inserted in the camera, file numbering will continue from the
last number used. This simplifies file management by
minimizing the occurrence of duplicate file names when
multiple cards are used.
[Off]
When a new folder is created or a new memory card is
inserted, file numbering restarts from 0001. If the current
folder already contains pictures, file numbering will instead
continue from the highest file number in the current folder.
If you select [Off] after selecting [On], the camera will store
the current file number. File numbering will resume from the
previously-stored value the next time [On] is selected.
[Reset]
Reset the file numbering for [On]. If the current folder is
empty, file numbering will restart from 0001 with the next
picture taken. If the current folder contains pictures, the next
picture taken will be assigned a file number by adding one to
the highest file number in the current folder.
623
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
D
File Number Sequence
•
If a picture is taken when the current folder contains a picture numbered
9999, a new folder will be created and file numbering will restart from
0001.
•
When the current folder number reaches 999, the camera will no longer be
able to create new folders and the shutter release will be disabled if:
- the current folder contains 5000 pictures (in addition, video recording
will be disabled if the camera calculates that the number of files needed
to record a video of the maximum length would result in the folder
containing over 5000 files), or
- the current folder contains a picture numbered 9999 (in addition, video
recording will be disabled if the camera calculates that the number of
files needed to record a video of the maximum length would result in a
file numbered over 9999).
To resume shooting, choose [Reset] for Custom Setting d7 [File number
sequence] and then either format the current memory card or insert a new
memory card.
D
Folder Numbering
•
If a picture is taken when the current folder contains 5000 pictures or a
picture numbered 9999, a new folder will be created and selected as the
current folder.
•
The new folder is assigned a number one higher than current folder
number. If a folder with that number already exists, the new folder will be
assigned the lowest available folder number.
624
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Choose whether the camera adjusts the preview in the viewfinder or
monitor to reflect how shooting settings will affect the hue and
brightness of the final picture. Regardless of the option selected, the
effects of camera settings are always visible in video mode.
d8: View Mode (Photo Lv)
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
Option Description
V
[Show
effects of
settings]
The effects of changes to settings such as white
balance, Picture Controls, and exposure compensation
are visible in the shooting display.
•
V
will appear in the shooting display.
625
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
W
[Adjust for
ease of
viewing]
The effects of changes to settings such as white
balance, Picture Controls, and exposure compensation
are not visible in the shooting display. Pressing
2
when [Adjust for ease of viewing] is highlighted
displays [Auto] and [Custom] options.
•
[Auto]: Color, brightness, and other settings are
adjusted for ease of viewing during prolonged
periods of use.
•
[Custom]: Press
2
to make individual adjustments
to [White balance], [Set Picture Control], and
[Brighten shadows].
-[White balance]: Choose from [Preview current
setting], [Auto], and [Choose color temperature].
Select [Choose color temperature] to choose the
color temperature for the shooting display.
-[Set Picture Control]: Choose from [Preview
current setting] and [Adjust for ease of viewing].
-[Brighten shadows]: Choose whether or by how
much the camera brightens shadows (dark areas)
in the display; the available options are [Off], [+1],
[+2], and [+3]. The higher the value, the greater the
effect.
•
W
will appear in the shooting display.
Option Description
626
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Select [ON] to brighten the display for ease of viewing in dark
environments (starlight view). Note that the display may become
slightly jerky when starlight view is in effect.
Use warmer colors with reduced brightness in the shooting, menu, and/
or playback displays. This makes the displays easier to view with vision
adapted to dark environments during astronomical photography and
the like.
d9: Starlight View (Photo Lv)
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
d10: Warm Display Colors
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
Option Description
[Warm
display
color
options]
Choose from the following options.
•
[Mode 1]: Use warmer colors in the shooting, menu, and
playback displays.
•
[Mode 2]: Use warmer colors in the menu display. Warmer
colors are also used for the icons and other information in
the shooting and playback displays, but not for the view
through the lens or the content of pictures themselves.
•
[Off]: Warm colors are not used.
[Warm color
display
brightness]
Press
1
or
3
to adjust warm color display brightness.
Choose higher values for increased brightness, lower values
for reduced brightness.
627
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Choose when the control panel and button backlights light.
•
If [OFF] is selected, the backlights will light when the power switch is
rotated to
D
. The backlights turn off when the shutter-release button
is pressed.
•
If [ON] is selected, the backlights will light while the standby timer is
active. Note that this increases the drain on the battery. The backlights
will turn off while the shutter-release button is pressed, but will turn
on again when the button is released.
d11: LCD Illumination
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
628
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
A
Button Backlights
The following are equipped with backlights:
2 5 6 7 98
4 151413 12 11 10
31
1
c
button
2
BKT button
3
c
button
4
I
button
5
g
(Fn4) button
6
O
(
Q
) button
7
X
button
8
i
button
9
G
button
10
K
button
11
W
(
Q
) button
12
i
button for vertical shooting
13
U
button
14
T
button
15
b
button
629
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
If [OFF] is selected, the display will go blank during burst photography.
Choose how the display responds when the shutter is released.
•
Note that regardless of the option selected, release timing indicators
are not displayed during high-speed frame capture.
•
Similarly, note that regardless of the option selected, release timing
indicators are not displayed at slow shutter speeds.
d12: View All in Continuous Mode
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
d13: Release Timing Indicator
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
Option Description
[Type A] The display goes dark when the shutter is released.
[Type B]
Borders appear at the top, bottom, and sides of the frame
when the shutter is released.
[Type C]
Borders appear at the sides of the frame when the shutter is
released.
[Off]
A release timing indicator is not displayed when the shutter
is released.
630
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Select [OFF] to hide the white border around the shooting displays in
the monitor and viewfinder.
Choose a framing grid for the shooting display. The selected grid can be
displayed by placing a check (
M
) next to
b
in the list for Custom Setting
d17 [Custom monitor shooting display] (
0
634) or d18 [Custom
viewfinder shooting display] (
0
636).
d14: Image Frame
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
d15: Grid Type
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
631
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Choose a virtual horizon for the shooting display. The selected virtual
horizon can be displayed by placing a check (
M
) next to
D
in the list for
Custom Setting d17 [Custom monitor shooting display] (
0
634) or
d18 [Custom viewfinder shooting display] (
0
636).
•
[Type A]: A large indicator showing roll and
pitch fills the display.
•
[Type B]: A roll indicator appears at the
bottom of the display and a pitch indicator
at its right edge.
* The indicators are displayed in green when the camera is level.
d16: Virtual Horizon Type
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
632
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Roll
Option
Camera rotated clockwise
Camera rotated
counterclockwise
[Type A]
[Type B]
633
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Pitch
D
The Virtual Horizon Display
Note that the display may not be accurate when the camera is tilted at a
sharp angle forward or back. The camera will not display pitch and roll
indicators when held at angles at which tilt cannot be measured.
Option
Camera tilted forward Camera tilted back
[Type A]
[Type B]
634
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Choose the monitor displays accessible by pressing the DISP button
during shooting.
•
Highlight items ([Display 2] through
[Display 5]) and press
J
to select (
M
) or
deselect (
U
). Only displays marked with a
check (
M
) can be accessed by pressing the
DISP button during shooting. [Display 1]
cannot be deselected.
d17: Custom Monitor Shooting Display
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
635
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
•
To choose indicators that appear in displays
[Display 1] through [Display 4], highlight
the corresponding option and press
2
. You
can then highlight items and press
J
to
select (
M
) or deselect (
U
).
•
[Display 5] consists solely of the information display and cannot be
customized.
•
To complete the operation, press
G
.
Option Description
A
[Basic
shooting
info]
View the shooting mode, shutter speed, aperture,
and other basic shooting info.
B
[Detailed
shooting
info]
View the focus mode, AF-area mode, white
balance, and other detailed shooting info.
C
[Touch
controls]
View options that can be accessed via touch
controls, including touch AF and the
i
menu.
D
[Virtual
horizon]
Enable the virtual horizon. The display type can
be selected using Custom Setting d16 [Virtual
horizon type].
E
[Histogram] Enable the RGB histogram.
b
[Framing
grid]
Enable the framing grid. The display type can be
selected using Custom Setting d15 [Grid type].
F
[Center
indicator]
Display crosshairs at the center of the frame.
636
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Choose the viewfinder displays accessible by pressing the DISP button
during shooting.
•
Highlight items ([Display 2] through [Display 4]) and press
J
to
select (
M
) or deselect (
U
). Only displays marked with a check (
M
) can
be accessed by pressing the DISP button during shooting. [Display 1]
cannot be deselected.
•
To choose indicators that appear in displays [Display 1] through
[Display 4], highlight the corresponding option and press
2
. You can
then highlight items and press
J
to select (
M
) or deselect (
U
). Apart
from [Touch controls], the options are the same as those for Custom
Setting d17 [Custom monitor shooting display] (
0
634).
•
To complete the operation, press
G
.
d18: Custom Viewfinder Shooting Display
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
637
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Choose the flash sync speed.
e: Bracketing/Flash
e1: Flash Sync Speed
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
Option Description
[1/250 s
(Auto FP)]
Flash sync speed is set to
1
/
250
or
1
/
200
s. With compatible
flash units, auto FP high-speed sync will automatically be
enabled at shutter speeds faster than
1
/
250
or
1
/
200
s.
•
In modes P and A, auto FP high-speed sync will be
activated if the actual shutter speed is faster than
1
/
250
or
1
/
200
s. If the flash supports auto FP high-speed sync, the
camera can select shutter speeds as fast as
1
/
8000
s.
•
In modes S and M, the user can select shutter speeds as
fast as
1
/
8000
s when using flash units that support auto FP
high-speed sync.
[1/200 s
(Auto FP)]
[1/200 s]
Flash sync speed set to selected value, which can be from
1
/
200
to
1
/
60
s.
[1/160 s]
[1/125 s]
[1/100 s]
[1/80 s]
[1/60 s]
638
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
D
Auto FP High-Speed Sync
Depending on the shutter speed, horizontal lines may appear in pictures
taken using auto FP high-speed sync when [1/250 s (Auto FP)] or [1/200 s
(Auto FP)] is selected. This effect can be mitigated by:
•
choosing a slower shutter speed or
•
adjusting flash output.
A
Auto FP High-Speed Sync
Auto FP high-speed sync allows the flash to be used at shutter speeds as fast
as
1
/
8000
s. When [1/250 s (Auto FP)] or [1/200 s (Auto FP)] is selected, the
camera automatically enables auto FP high-speed sync at shutter speeds
faster than the flash sync speed. This makes it possible to choose the
maximum aperture for reduced depth of field even when the subject is
backlit in bright sunlight.
639
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Choose the slowest shutter speed available with a flash in mode P or A.
Regardless of the setting chosen for Custom Setting e2 [Flash shutter
speed], shutter speeds can be as slow as 30 s in modes S and M or at
flash settings of slow sync, slow rear-curtain sync, or red-eye reduction
with slow sync.
Choose how the camera adjusts flash level when exposure
compensation is used.
e2: Flash Shutter Speed
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
e3: Exposure Comp. for Flash
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
Option Description
YE
[Entire frame]
The camera adjusts both the flash level and
exposure. This changes the exposure for the entire
frame.
E
[Background
only]
Exposure compensation is adjusted for the
background only.
640
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Choose how the camera adjusts flash level when auto ISO sensitivity
control is enabled.
If [ON] is selected when the camera is used with an optional flash unit
that supports the Nikon Creative Lighting system, pressing a control to
which [Preview] has been assigned using Custom Setting f2 [Custom
controls (shooting)] will emit a modeling flash.
e4: Auto
c
ISO Sensitivity Control
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
Option Description
e
[Subject and
background]
The camera takes both the main subject and
background lighting into account when adjusting
ISO sensitivity.
f
[Subject only]
ISO sensitivity is adjusted only to ensure that the
main subject is correctly exposed.
e5: Modeling Flash
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
641
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
The settings affected when bracketing is enabled in mode M and [OFF]
is selected for [ISO sensitivity settings] > [Auto ISO sensitivity
control] in the photo shooting menu are determined by the options
selected for [Auto bracketing]> [Auto bracketing set] in the photo
shooting menu and the option chosen for Custom Setting e6 [Auto
bracketing (mode M)].
•
When [ON] is selected for [ISO sensitivity settings] > [Auto ISO
sensitivity control] in the photo shooting menu, the camera will vary
flash level and/or ISO sensitivity as per [Flash/ISO sensitivity],
regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting e6 [Auto
bracketing (mode M)].
D
Flash Bracketing
Flash bracketing is performed only with i-TTL or
q
A (auto aperture) flash
control.
e6: Auto Bracketing (Mode M)
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
Custom Setting e6
[Auto bracketing (mode
M)]
Photo shooting menu
[Auto bracketing] > [Auto bracketing set]
AE & flash bracketing AE bracketing
F
[Flash/speed]
Shutter speed and
flash level
Shutter speed
G
[Flash/speed/
aperture]
Shutter speed,
aperture, and flash
level
Shutter speed and
aperture
H
[Flash/aperture]
Aperture and flash
level
Aperture
9
[Flash/ISO
sensitivity]
ISO sensitivity and
flash level
ISO sensitivity
I
[Flash only] Flash level —
642
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Choose the order in which the shots in the bracketing program are
taken.
•
Custom Setting e7 [Bracketing order] has no effect on the order of
the shots taken when [ADL bracketing] is selected for [Auto
bracketing]> [Auto bracketing set] in the photo shooting menu.
e7: Bracketing Order
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
Option Description
H
[MTR > under > over]
The unmodified shot is taken first, followed
by the shot with the lowest value, followed
by the shot with the highest value.
I
[Under > MTR > over]
Shooting proceeds in order from the lowest
to the highest value.
643
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Choose whether optional flash units emit monitor pre-flashes before
each shot during burst photography in high- or low-speed continuous
release mode.
e8: Flash Burst Priority
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
Option Description
c
[Prioritize
frame
advance rate]
The flash unit emits a monitor pre-flash before the
first shot in each sequence and locks output at the
metered value for the remaining shots. The frame
advance rate drops less than when [Prioritize
precise flash control] is selected.
•
An FV lock icon (
r
) will appear in the shooting
display during burst photography.
q
[Prioritize
precise flash
control]
The flash unit emits a monitor pre-flash before each
shot and adjusts flash output as required. The
frame advance rate may drop in some
circumstances.
644
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Choose the items listed in the
i
menu displayed when the
i
button is
pressed in photo mode.
•
Highlight a position in the
i
menu, press
J
, and select the desired
item.
•
The following items can be assigned to the
i
menu.
f: Controls
f1: Customize
i
Menu
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
Option
0
n
[Shooting menu
bank]
493
j
[Select custom
settings bank]
597
J
[Choose image area] 102
8
[Image quality] 105
o
[Image size] 108
N
[View memory card
info]
645
E
[Exposure
compensation]
143
9
[ISO sensitivity
settings]
154
m
[White balance] 158
h
[Set Picture Control] 192
p
[Color space] 511
y
[Active D-Lighting] 512
q
[Long exposure NR] 514
r
[High ISO NR] 515
w
[Metering] 520
c
[Flash mode] 429
Y
[Flash compensation] 432
q
[Wireless options/
flash mode]
437
m
[Group flash options]
444,
454
r
[Test flash]
439,
453
s
[Flash info] 444
t
[Radio remote flash
info]
439
Option
0
645
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
View Memory Card Info
View the slot currently selected as the destination for new pictures and
the options used to record pictures when two memory cards are
inserted. This option can be used to view but not to change the option
selected.
•
The options used to record pictures when two memory cards are
inserted can be selected using [Role played by card in Slot 2] in the
photo shooting menu.
s
[Focus mode] 110
t
[AF-area mode/subj.
detection]
113
u
[Vibration reduction] 526
t
[Auto bracketing] 527
$
[Multiple exposure] 528
2
[HDR overlay] 537
7
[Interval timer
shooting]
542
8
[Time-lapse video] 556
9
[Focus shift shooting] 568
F
[Focus tracking with
lock-on]
600
Option
0
L
[Silent mode] 735
w
[Custom controls
(shooting)]
647
y
[View mode (photo
Lv)]
624
z
[Split-screen display
zoom]
646
W
[Focus peaking] 610
3
[Monitor/viewfinder
brightness]
709,
711
u
[Airplane mode] 756
v
[Warm display colors] 626
Option
0
646
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Split-Screen Display Zoom
If [Split-screen display zoom] is assigned to
the
i
menu, you can select [Split-screen
display zoom] to simultaneously zoom in on
two areas that are aligned horizontally but
are in different parts of the frame (split-screen
display zoom). The locations of the areas are
indicated by the two frames (
r
) in the
navigation window in the bottom right
corner of the display.
•
Zooming in simultaneously on two widely-
separated but horizontally-aligned areas of
the frame makes it easier to level pictures of
buildings or other wide objects.
•
Use the
X
and
W
(
Q
) buttons to zoom in and out.
•
Press
4
or
2
to scroll the selected area left or right. Use the
J
button
to switch between the two areas.
•
Press
1
or
3
to scroll both areas up or down simultaneously.
•
To focus on the subject at the center of the selected area, press the
shutter-release button halfway.
•
To exit split-screen display zoom, press the
i
button.
647
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Choose the operations performed in photo mode using camera or lens
controls, including the camera buttons and sub-selector and the lens
control ring.
•
Choose the roles played by the controls
below. Highlight the desired control and
press
J
.
f2: Custom Controls (Shooting)
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
Option
w
[Fn1 button]
y
[Fn2 button]
1
[Fn3 button]
n
[Fn button for vertical
shooting]
b
[Protect/Fn4 button]
V
[AF-ON button]
8
[Sub-selector center]
p
[OK button]
W
[Audio button]
B
[QUAL button]
F
[Vertical multi selector
center]
j
[AF-ON button for vertical
shooting]
z
[Video record button]
y
[Command dials]
S
[Lens Fn button]
3
[Lens Fn2 button]
l
[Lens control ring]
Option
648
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
•
The roles that can be assigned are listed below. The roles available
vary with the control.
Role Description
A
[Preset focus
point]
Pressing the control selects a preset focus point.
•
To choose the point, highlight it, hold the
control, and press the focus-mode button until
the focus point flashes.
•
Separate focus points can be selected for “wide”
(landscape) orientation and for each of the two
“tall” (portrait) orientations if an option other
than [Off] is selected for Custom Setting a5
[Store points by orientation].
•
The behavior of the selected control can be
chosen by pressing
2
when [Preset focus
point] is highlighted.
-[Press to recall focus point]: Pressing the
control recalls the preset focus point.
-[Hold to recall focus point]: The preset focus
point is selected while the control is pressed.
Releasing the control restores the focus point
selected before the control was pressed.
649
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
d
[AF-area mode]
Holding the control selects a preset AF-area mode.
The AF-area mode previously in effect is restored
when the control is released.
•
To choose the AF-area mode, press
2
when
[AF-area mode] is highlighted.
5
[AF-area
mode + AF-ON]
Holding the control selects a preset AF-area mode
and initiates autofocus. The AF-area mode
previously in effect is restored when the control is
released.
•
To choose the AF-area mode, press
2
when
[AF-area mode + AF-ON] is highlighted.
A
[AF-ON]
Pressing the control initiates autofocus,
duplicating the function of the AF-ON button.
F
[AF lock only] Focus locks while the control is pressed.
E
[AE lock (Hold)]
Exposure locks when the control is pressed.
Exposure lock does not end when the shutter is
released. Exposure remains locked until the
control is pressed a second time or the standby
timer expires.
N
[AWB lock
(hold)]
If [Auto] or [Natural light auto] is selected for
white balance, white balance will lock when the
control is pressed (white-balance lock). White-
balance lock does not end when the shutter is
released. The lock will however be released when
the control is pressed a second time or the
standby timer expires.
Role Description
650
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
O
[AE/AWB lock
(hold)]
Exposure locks when the control is pressed. White
balance will also lock provided [Auto] or [Natural
light auto] is selected for white balance. Exposure
and white-balance lock do not end when the
shutter is released. The lock will however be
released when the control is pressed a second
time or the standby timer expires.
D
[AE lock (Reset
on release)]
Exposure locks when the control is pressed.
Exposure remains locked until the control is
pressed a second time, the shutter is released, or
the standby timer expires.
C
[AE lock only] Exposure locks while the control is pressed.
B
[AE/AF lock]
Focus and exposure lock while the control is
pressed.
r
[FV lock]
Press the control to lock flash value for optional
flash units; press again to cancel FV lock.
h
[
c
Disable/
enable]
If the flash is currently enabled, it will be disabled
while the control is pressed. If the flash is currently
off, front-curtain sync will be selected while the
control is pressed.
q
[Preview]
While the control is pressed, the shooting display
will show how color, exposure, and depth of field
are affected by current photo settings.
Role Description
651
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
o
[Recall
shooting
functions]
Hold the control to recall previously-selected
settings.
•
To choose the settings recalled, press
2
when
[Recall shooting functions] is highlighted.
- Highlight items using
1
or
3
and press
J
to
select (
M
) or deselect (
U
). Only items marked
with a check (
M
) will be recalled while the
button is pressed.
- Highlight items using
1
or
3
and press
2
to
view options. Press
J
to save changes and exit.
- To store current camera settings for later recall
using this option, select [Save current
settings].
•
Settings such as shutter speed and aperture can
be changed by holding the control and rotating
a command dial.
-In mode P, you can adjust flexible program
settings.
- If an option other than [Off] is selected for
Custom Setting b3 [Easy exposure
compensation], exposure compensation can
be adjusted by rotating a command dial.
Role Description
652
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
1
[Bracketing
burst]
•
If the control is pressed when an option other
than [WB bracketing] is selected for [Auto
bracketing]> [Auto bracketing set] in the
photo shooting menu in continuous release
mode, the camera will take all the shots in the
current bracketing program and repeat the
bracketing burst while the shutter-release
button is pressed. In single-frame release mode,
shooting will end after the first bracketing burst.
•
If [WB bracketing] is selected for [Auto
bracketing set], the camera will take pictures
while the shutter-release button is pressed and
apply white balance bracketing to each shot.
Role Description
653
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
c
[Sync. release
selection]
When [Synchronized release] is selected for
[Connect to other cameras] in the network
menu, or when a wireless remote controller is
used for synchronized release, the chosen control
can be used to toggle between remote release
and master or synchronized release. The options
available depend on the setting chosen for
Custom Setting d4 [Sync. release mode options].
•
The following options are available when [Sync]
is selected for [Sync. release mode options]:
-[Master release only] (
c
): Keep the control
pressed to take pictures with the master
camera only.
-[Remote release only] (
d
): Keep the control
pressed to take pictures only with the remote
cameras.
•
The following options are available when [No
sync] is selected for [Sync. release mode
options]:
-[Synchronized release] (
6
): Keep the
control pressed to synchronize the releases on
the master and remote cameras.
-[Remote release only] (
d
): Keep the control
pressed to take pictures only with the remote
cameras.
Role Description
654
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
4
[+RAW]
•
If a JPEG option is currently selected for image
quality, “RAW” will appear in the shooting
display and an NEF (RAW) copy will be recorded
with the next picture taken after the control is
pressed. The original image quality setting will
be restored when you remove your finger from
the shutter-release button or press the control
again, canceling [+RAW].
•
NEF (RAW) copies are recorded at the settings
currently selected for [RAW recording] in the
photo shooting menu.
L
[Silent mode]
Press the control to enable silent mode. Press
again to disable.
b
[Live view info
display off]
Press the control to hide icons and other
information in the shooting display. Press again to
view.
b
[Framing grid]
Press the control to display a framing grid. To hide
the grid, press the control again. The display type
can be selected using Custom Setting d15 [Grid
type].
K
[Select center
focus point]
Pressing the control selects the center focus point.
p
[Zoom on/off]
Press the control to zoom the display in on the
area around the current focus point. Press again to
cancel zoom.
Role Description
655
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
D
[Virtual
horizon]
Press the control to enable the virtual horizon
display. Press again to hide the display. The
display type can be selected using Custom Setting
d16 [Virtual horizon type].
k
[Starlight view
(photo Lv)]
Press the control to toggle starlight view on. Press
again to end starlight view.
W
[Focus peaking
display]
Press the control once to enable focus peaking
when MF is selected for focus mode. Press again
to end focus peaking.
O
[MY MENU] Press the control to display “MY MENU”.
3
[Access top
item in MY
MENU]
Press the control to jump to the top item in “MY
MENU”. Select this option for quick access to a
frequently-used menu item.
K
[Playback] Press the control to start playback.
l
[Filtered
playback]
Press the control to view only pictures that meet
the criteria selected for [Filtered playback
criteria] in the playback menu.
e
[Same as AF-ON
button]
The control performs the role currently selected
for the AF-ON button.
n
[Shooting
menu bank]
Press the control and rotate a command dial to
choose a shooting menu bank.
J
[Choose image
area]
Press the control and rotate a command dial to
choose the image area.
8
[Image quality/
size]
Press the control and rotate the main command
dial to choose an image quality option and the
sub-command dial to select image size.
Role Description
656
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
h
[Set Picture
Control]
Press the control and rotate a command dial to
choose a Picture Control.
y
[Active
D-Lighting]
Press the control and rotate a command dial to
adjust Active D-Lighting.
w
[Metering]
Press the control and rotate a command dial to
choose a metering option.
z
[Focus mode/
AF-area mode]
Hold the control and rotate the main command
dial to choose the focus mode, the sub-command
dial to choose the AF-area mode.
t
[Auto
bracketing]
Press the control and rotate the main command
dial to choose the number of shots and the sub-
command dial to select the bracketing increment
or Active D-Lighting amount.
$
[Multiple
exposure]
Press the control and rotate the main command
dial to choose the mode and the sub-command
dial to choose the number of shots.
2
[HDR overlay]
Press the control and rotate the main command
dial to choose the mode and the sub-command
dial to adjust HDR strength.
a
[Control lock]
•
Press the control and rotate the main command
dial to lock shutter speed (modes S and M). To
lock aperture (modes A and M), press the
control and rotate the sub-command dial.
•
To lock focus-point selection, hold the control
and press
1
,
3
,
4
, or
2
.
Role Description
657
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
v
[1 step spd/
aperture]
Make adjustments to shutter speed and aperture
in increments of 1 EV, regardless of the option
selected for Custom Setting b2 [EV steps for
exposure cntrl].
•
In modes S and M, shutter speed can be
adjusted in increments of 1 EV by holding the
control and rotating the main command dial.
•
In modes A and M, aperture can be adjusted in
increments of 1 EV by holding the control and
rotating the sub-command dial.
w
[Choose non-
CPU lens
number]
Press the control and rotate a command dial to
choose a lens number saved using the [Non-CPU
lens data] item in the setup menu.
v
[Shooting
mode]
Press the control and rotate the main command
dial to choose a shooting mode.
X
[Focus (M/A)]
Autofocus can be over-ridden by rotating the lens
control ring (autofocus with manual override). The
control ring can be used for manual focus while
the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. To
refocus using autofocus, lift your finger from the
shutter-release button and then press it halfway
again.
q
[Aperture] Rotate the lens control ring to adjust aperture.
Role Description
658
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Command Dials
The following roles can be assigned to the command dials. To view
options, highlight items and press
2
.
E
[Exposure
compensation]
•
Assigning this function to the Fn button for
vertical shooting allows exposure compensation
to be adjusted by holding the button and
rotating a command dial.
•
Assigning this function to the lens control ring
allows exposure compensation to be adjusted
by rotating the ring.
9
[ISO sensitivity]
Rotate the lens control ring to adjust ISO
sensitivity.
[None] The control has no effect.
Role Description
[Exposure setting]
Reverse the roles of the main and sub-command
dials in selected modes. Press
4
or
2
to highlight
a mode and
1
or
3
to switch roles.
[Focus/AF-area mode
selection]
Switch the roles played by rotating the main and
sub-command dials while the focus-mode button
is pressed.
[Sub-command dial
zoom role]
Choose the role played by the sub-command dial
in the zoom display.
•
Choose [Exposure setting] to change the role
played by the sub-command dial in each mode.
•
Choose [Zoom] to use the sub-command dial to
zoom in or out.
Role Description
659
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Choose the operations performed during playback using the cameras
controls listed below.
•
Choose the roles played by the controls
below. Highlight the desired control and
press
J
.
f3: Custom Controls (Playback)
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
Option
w
[Fn1 button]
y
[Fn2 button]
1
[Fn3 button]
k
[Fn button for vertical
shooting]
a
[Protect/Fn4 button]
p
[OK button]
W
[Audio button]
B
[QUAL button]
m
[WB button]
R
[Vertical shooting multi
selector]
y
[Main command dial]
3
[Sub-command dial]
z
[Video record button]
Option
660
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
•
The roles that can be assigned to these controls are listed below. The
roles available vary with the control.
Role Description
g
[Protect]
Press the control to toggle protection for the
current picture on or off.
p
[Zoom on/off]
Press the control to zoom the display in on the
area around the current focus point (the zoom
ratio is selected in advance). Press again to cancel
zoom.
•
To choose the zoom ratio, highlight [Zoom on/
off] and press
2
.
•
Zoom on/off is available in both full-frame and
thumbnail playback.
l
[Filtered
playback]
Press the control to view only pictures that meet
the criteria selected for [Filtered playback
criteria] in the playback menu.
b
[Voice memo] Use the control for voice memo operations.
661
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
K
[Select for
upload to
computer]
Press the control to upload the current picture to a
computer or FTP server with which the camera is
currently connected.
•
To view upload options, highlight [Select for
upload to computer] or [Select for upload
(FTP)] and press
2
. Highlight options and press
J
to select (
M
) or deselect (
U
).
-[Priority upload]: If this option is selected (
M
),
pressing the control to mark a picture for
upload will move it to the front of the upload
queue.
-[Protect]: If this option is selected (
M
),
pressing the control to mark a picture for
upload will simultaneously protect it.
-[Rating]: If this option is selected (
M
), pressing
the control to mark a picture for upload will
simultaneously assign it a preset rating. Press
2
to choose the rating.
N
[Select for
upload (FTP)]
c
[Rating]
To rate the current picture in playback mode,
press the control and rotate the main command
dial.
•
To display rating options, highlight [Rating] and
press
2
. If an option other than [None] is
selected, the chosen rating can be assigned to
pictures simply by pressing the selected control.
Pressing the control again selects a “no star”
rating.
Role Description
662
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
n
[Thumbnail on/
off]
Press the control to toggle between full-frame and
4-, 9-, or 72-frame thumbnail playback.
o
[View
histograms]
A histogram is displayed while the control is
pressed. The histogram display is available in both
full-frame and thumbnail playback.
u
[Choose slot
and folder]
Press the control to display the [Choose slot and
folder] dialog, where you can then choose a slot
and folder for playback.
[
C
/
D
switched]
Press the multi selector for vertical shooting up or
down to view other pictures, left or right to page
through photo information.
[
C
/
D
unswitched]
Press the multi selector for vertical shooting up or
down to page through photo information, left or
right to view other pictures.
[None] The control has no effect.
Role Description
663
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Command Dials
The following roles can be assigned to the command dials. To view
options, highlight items and press
2
.
❚❚
Frame Advance
Choose the number of frames that can be skipped by rotating the
command dials during full-frame playback.
Option Description
[1 frame] Skip forward or back 1 frame at a time.
[10 frames] Skip forward or back 10 frames at a time.
[50 frames] Skip forward or back 50 frames at a time.
c
[Rating]
Skip to the next or previous picture with the selected
rating.
P
[Protect] Skip to the next or previous protected picture.
C
[Photos only] Skip to the next or previous photo.
1
[Videos only] Skip to the next or previous video.
u
[Folder] Rotate the dial to select a folder.
7
[Page] View the next or previous page of thumbnails.
664
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
❚❚
Video Playback
Choose the roles played by the command dials during video playback.
Option Description
[1 frame] Advance or rewind a frame at a time.
[5 frames] Advance or rewind 5 frames at a time.
[10 frames] Advance or rewind 10 frames at a time.
[2s] Skip forward or back 2 s at a time.
[5s] Skip forward or back 5 s at a time.
[10 s] Skip forward or back 10 s at a time.
[First/last frame] Skip to the first or last frame.
665
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Lock exposure settings or focus-point selection.
f4: Control Lock
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
Option Description
[Shutter speed lock]
Select [ON] to lock shutter speed at its current value
in modes S and M.
•
O
icons appear in the shooting display and control
panel when shutter-speed lock is in effect.
[Aperture lock]
Select [ON] to lock aperture at its current value in
modes A and M.
•
O
icons appear in the shooting display and control
panel when aperture lock is in effect.
[Focus-point lock]
Select [ON] to lock focus-point selection on the
currently-selected focus point.
•
Focus point lock does not apply when [Auto-area
AF] is selected for AF-area mode.
•
When [3D-tracking] is selected, the focus point
will track subject motion while the shutter-release
button is pressed halfway.
666
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Reverse the direction of rotation of the command dials for selected
operations.
•
Highlight [Exposure compensation] or [Shutter speed/aperture]
and press
2
to select (
M
) or deselect (
U
).
•
Press
G
to save changes and exit.
•
The changes also apply to the command dial for vertical shooting.
Selecting [ON] allows adjustments that are normally made by holding a
button and rotating a command dial to be made by rotating the
command dial after the button is released. This ends when the button is
pressed again, the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, or the
standby timer expires.
•
[Release button to use dial] applies to the
E
,
S
(
Q
), BKT,
c
,
I
,
c
,
g
(Fn4),
T
,
U
, and focus-mode buttons.
•
[Release button to use dial] also applies to controls to which certain
roles have been assigned using Custom Setting f2 [Custom controls
(shooting)] or g2 [Custom controls].
f5: Reverse Dial Rotation
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
f6: Release Button to Use Dial
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
667
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Choose whether the exposure indicator is displayed with negative
values on the left and positive values on the right, or with positive
values on the left and negative values on the right.
Select [ON] to reverse the direction of rotation for the focus or control
rings on Z mount lenses during manual focus.
•
This option does not support:
- certain Z mount lenses that can only be focused manually, or
- F mount lenses connected via an FTZ II/FTZ mount adapter.
f7: Reverse Indicators
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
Option Description
V
The indicator is displayed with positive
values on the left and negative values on
the right.
W
The indicator is displayed with negative
values on the left and positive values on
the right.
f8: Reverse Ring for Focus
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
668
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Choose how far the focus or control rings on Z mount lenses must be
rotated to go all the way from the minimum focus distance to infinity.
•
If the lens does not support rotation range selection, [Focus ring
rotation range] will be fixed at [Non-linear].
f9: Focus Ring Rotation Range
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
Option Description
[Non-linear]
The focus distance changes by a large amount when the
ring is rotated rapidly and by a small amount when the ring
is rotated slowly, without regard to how far the ring is
rotated.
[90°]
Choose how far the ring must be rotated to go all the way
from the minimum focus distance to infinity. To take focus
from the minimum distance to infinity when, for example,
[90°] is selected, the ring need only be rotated 90°. Larger
values permit finer adjustments.
[120°]
[150°]
[180°]
[210°]
[240°]
[270°]
[300°]
[330°]
[360°]
[540°]
[720°]
[Max.]
Taking focus from the minimum focus distance to infinity
requires rotating the ring the maximum distance
permitted at current lens settings.
669
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Choose how responsive the lens control ring is when assigned the
[Aperture], [Power aperture], [Exposure compensation], or [ISO
sensitivity] using Custom Setting f2 [Custom controls (shooting)] or
g2 [Custom controls].
f10: Control Ring Response
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
670
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Choose the role assigned to the flick up and down or flick left and right
gestures during full-frame playback.
Flick Up/Flick Down
Choose the operation performed by flicking up or down.
•
Pictures selected by flicking up or down when [Rating], [Select for
upload to computer], [Select for upload (FTP)], or [Protect] is
selected are indicated by icons (
0
231). The marking can be removed
by flicking again in the same direction.
f11: Full-Frame Playback Flicks
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
Option Description
c
[Rating]
Assign the current picture a pre-selected rating. The
rating can be chosen by pressing
2
.
K
[Select for
upload to
computer]
Mark the current picture for priority upload to a
computer.
N
[Select for
upload (FTP)]
Mark the current picture for priority upload to an FTP
server.
g
[Protect] Protect the current picture.
W
[Voice memo]
Flick to start recording a voice memo. If a memo
already exists for the current picture, flicking instead
begins playback of the existing memo. Press
J
to
end recording or playback.
[None] Flicking up or down has no effect.
671
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Flick Advance Direction
Choose the gesture used for frame advance.
Option Description
S
[Left
←
Right]
Flick from right to left to view the next picture.
T
[Left
→
Right]
Flick from left to right to view the next picture.
672
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Choose the items listed in the
i
menu displayed when the
i
button is
pressed in video mode.
•
Highlight a position in the
i
menu, press
J
, and select the desired
item.
•
The following items can be assigned to the
i
menu.
g: Video
g1: Customize
i
Menu
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
Option
0
n
[Shooting menu
bank]
493
j
[Select custom
settings bank]
597
J
[Choose image area] 218
G
[Frame size/frame
rate]
216
N
[Destination] 578
E
[Exposure
compensation]
143
9
[ISO sensitivity
settings]
154
m
[White balance] 158
h
[Set Picture Control] 192
6
[HLG quality] 582
y
[Active D-Lighting] 512
w
[Metering] 520
s
[Focus mode] 110
7
[AF-area mode/subj.
detection]
113
u
[Vibration reduction] 587
4
[Electronic VR] 587
H
[Microphone
sensitivity]
588
5
[Attenuator] 589
6
[Frequency response] 589
7
[Wind noise
reduction]
589
8
[Headphone volume] 590
L
[Silent mode] 735
w
[Custom controls] 674
W
[Focus peaking] 610
Option
0
673
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Multi-Selector Power Aperture
Choose whether the multi selector can be used for power aperture.
When [Enable] is selected, holding
1
widens the aperture. Holding
3
narrows the aperture.
Multi Selector Exposure Comp.
Choose whether the multi selector can be used to adjust exposure
compensation. Selecting [Enable] allows exposure compensation to be
set by pressing
1
or
3
.
9
[Zebra pattern] 686
3
[Monitor/viewfinder
brightness]
709,
711
u
[Airplane mode] 756
8
[Multi-selector power
aperture]
673
Option
0
9
[Multi selector
exposure comp.]
673
v
[Warm display colors] 626
Option
0
674
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Choose the operations performed in video mode using camera or lens
controls, including the camera buttons and sub-selector and the lens
control ring.
•
Choose the roles played by the controls
below. Highlight the desired control and
press
J
.
g2: Custom Controls
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
Option
w
[Fn1 button]
y
[Fn2 button]
1
[Fn3 button]
k
[Fn button for vertical
shooting]
u
[Focus mode button]
V
[AF-ON button]
b
[Protect/Fn4 button]
p
[OK button]
8
[Sub-selector center]
A
[QUAL button]
X
[Audio button]
j
[AF-ON button for vertical
shooting]
F
[Vertical multi selector
center]
y
[Command dials]
G
[Shutter-release button]
3
[Lens Fn2 button]
S
[Lens Fn button]
l
[Lens control ring]
Option
675
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
•
The roles that can be assigned are listed below. The roles available
vary with the control.
Role Description
L
[Silent mode]
Press the control to enable silent mode. Press
again to disable.
b
[Live view info
display off]
Press the control to hide icons and other
information in the shooting display. Press again to
view.
b
[Framing grid]
Press the control to display a framing grid. To hide
the grid, press the control again. The display type
can be selected using Custom Setting d15 [Grid
type].
A
[AF-ON]
Pressing the control initiates autofocus,
duplicating the function of the AF-ON button.
F
[AF lock only] Focus locks while the control is pressed.
E
[AE lock (Hold)]
Exposure locks when the control is pressed.
Exposure lock does not end when recording
begins. Exposure remains locked until the control
is pressed a second time or the standby timer
expires.
676
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
N
[AWB lock
(hold)]
If [Auto] or [Natural light auto] is selected for
white balance, white balance will lock when the
control is pressed (white-balance lock). White-
balance lock does not end when recording begins.
The lock will however be released when the
control is pressed a second time or the standby
timer expires.
O
[AE/AWB lock
(hold)]
Exposure locks when the control is pressed. White
balance will also lock provided [Auto] or [Natural
light auto] is selected for white balance. Exposure
and white-balance lock do not end when
recording begins. The lock will however be
released when the control is pressed a second
time or the standby timer expires.
C
[AE lock only] Exposure locks while the control is pressed.
B
[AE/AF lock]
Focus and exposure lock while the control is
pressed.
p
[Zoom on/off]
Press the control to zoom the display in on the
area around the current focus point. Press again to
cancel zoom.
D
[Virtual
horizon]
Press the control to enable the virtual horizon
display. Press again to hide the display. The
display type can be selected using Custom Setting
d16 [Virtual horizon type].
Role Description
677
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
W
[Focus peaking
display]
Press the control once to enable focus peaking
when MF is selected for focus mode. Press again
to end focus peaking.
O
[MY MENU] Press the control to display “MY MENU”.
3
[Access top
item in MY
MENU]
Press the control to jump to the top item in “MY
MENU”. Select this option for quick access to a
frequently-used menu item.
K
[Playback] Press the control to start playback.
l
[Filtered
playback]
Press the control to view only pictures that meet
the criteria selected for [Filtered playback
criteria] in the playback menu.
t
[Power
aperture
(open)]
Aperture widens while the Fn1 button is pressed.
Use in combination with Custom Setting g2
[Custom controls]> [Fn2 button]> [Power
aperture (close)] for button-controlled aperture
adjustment.
q
[Power
aperture
(close)]
Aperture narrows while the Fn2 button is pressed.
Use in combination with Custom Setting g2
[Custom controls]> [Fn1 button]> [Power
aperture (open)] for button-controlled aperture
adjustment.
i
[Exposure
compensation
+]
Exposure compensation increases while the Fn1
button is pressed. Use in combination with
Custom Setting g2 [Custom controls]> [Fn2
button]> [Exposure compensation −] for
button-controlled exposure compensation.
h
[Exposure
compensation
−]
Exposure compensation decreases while the Fn2
button is pressed. Use in combination with
Custom Setting g2 [Custom controls]> [Fn1
button]> [Exposure compensation +] for
button-controlled exposure compensation.
Role Description
678
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
9
[Pattern tone
range]
Press the control to cycle through zebra pattern
tone range options.
A
[Preset focus
point]
Pressing the control selects a preset focus point.
•
To choose the point, highlight it, hold the
control, and press the focus-mode button until
the focus point flashes.
•
The behavior of the selected control can be
chosen by pressing
2
when [Preset focus
point] is highlighted.
-[Press to recall focus point]: Pressing the
control recalls the preset focus point.
-[Hold to recall focus point]: The preset focus
point is selected while the control is pressed.
Releasing the control restores the focus point
selected before the control was pressed.
Role Description
679
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
K
[Select center
focus point]
Pressing the control selects the center focus point.
e
[Same as AF-ON
button]
The control performs the role currently selected
for the AF-ON button.
1
[Record videos]
Press the control to start recording. Press again to
end recording.
v
[Shooting
mode]
Press the control and rotate the main command
dial to choose a shooting mode.
n
[Shooting
menu bank]
Press the control and rotate a command dial to
choose a shooting menu bank.
J
[Choose image
area]
Press the control and rotate a command dial to
choose the image area for videos. Note that the
image area cannot be changed while recording is
in progress.
h
[Set Picture
Control]
Press the control and rotate a command dial to
choose a Picture Control.
y
[Active
D-Lighting]
Press the control and rotate a command dial to
adjust Active D-Lighting for videos.
w
[Metering]
Press the control and rotate a command dial to
choose a metering option for use during video
recording.
z
[Focus mode/
AF-area mode]
Hold the control and rotate the main command
dial to choose the focus mode, the sub-command
dial to choose the AF-area mode.
Role Description
680
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
a
[Control lock]
•
Press the control and rotate the main command
dial to lock shutter speed (modes S and M). To
lock aperture (modes A and M), press the
control and rotate the sub-command dial.
•
To lock focus-point selection, hold the control
and press
1
,
3
,
4
, or
2
.
H
[Microphone
sensitivity]
Press the control and rotate a command dial to
adjust microphone sensitivity.
X
[Focus (M/A)]
The lens control ring can be used for manual focus
regardless of the option selected for focus mode.
To refocus using autofocus, press the shutter-
release button halfway or press a control to which
AF-ON has been assigned.
q
[Power
aperture]
Rotate the lens control ring to adjust aperture.
E
[Exposure
compensation]
•
Assigning this function to the Fn button for
vertical shooting allows exposure compensation
to be adjusted by holding the button and
rotating a command dial.
•
Assigning this function to the lens control ring
allows exposure compensation to be adjusted
by rotating the ring.
9
[ISO sensitivity]
Rotate the lens control ring to adjust ISO
sensitivity.
[None] The control has no effect.
Role Description
681
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
D
Power Aperture
•
Power aperture is available only in modes A and M.
•
A
6
icon in the shooting display indicates that power aperture cannot be
used.
•
The display may flicker while aperture is adjusted.
Command Dials
The following roles can be assigned to the command dials. To view
options, highlight items and press
2
.
Role Description
[Exposure setting]
Reverse the roles of the main and sub-command
dials in selected modes. Press
4
or
2
to highlight
a mode and
1
or
3
to switch roles.
[Focus/AF-area mode
selection]
Switch the roles played by rotating the main and
sub-command dials while the focus-mode button
is pressed.
[Sub-command dial
zoom role]
Choose the role played by the sub-command dial
in the zoom display.
•
Choose [Exposure setting] to change the role
played by the sub-command dial in each mode.
•
Choose [Zoom] to use the sub-command dial to
zoom in or out.
682
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Lock exposure settings or focus-point selection.
g3: Control Lock
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
Option Description
[Shutter speed lock]
Select [ON] to lock shutter speed at its current value
in mode M.
•
O
icons appear in the shooting display and control
panel when shutter-speed lock is in effect.
[Aperture lock]
Select [ON] to lock aperture at its current value in
modes A and M.
•
O
icons appear in the shooting display and control
panel when aperture lock is in effect.
[Focus-point lock]
Select [ON] to lock focus-point selection on the
currently-selected focus point.
•
Focus point lock does not apply when [Auto-area
AF] is selected for AF-area mode.
•
When [Subject-tracking AF] is selected, the focus
point will track subject motion while the shutter-
release button is pressed halfway.
683
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Choose the AF-area modes that can be selected by pressing the focus-
mode button and rotating the sub-command dial.
•
Highlight options and press
J
or
2
to
select (
M
) or deselect (
U
). Modes marked
with a check (
M
) are available for selection
via the sub-command dial.
•
To complete the operation, press
G
.
Limit focus-mode selection to a single focus mode. If an option other
than [No restrictions] is selected, rotating the main command dial
while holding the focus-mode button will not change the focus mode.
g4: Limit AF-Area Mode Selection
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
g5: Focus Mode Restrictions
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
684
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Choose the focus speed for video mode.
Use [When to apply] to choose when the selected option applies.
D
Lens Sounds
The sound produced by the lens during focus operations increases with AF
speed. The effect is particularly noticeable at a setting of [+5], so choose
lower values if you find the noise distracting.
g6: AF Speed
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
Option Description
D
[Always]
The camera focuses at the selected speed at all
times in video mode.
E
[Only while
recording]
Focus is adjusted at the selected speed only while
video recording is in progress. At other times, the
camera focuses as quickly as possible.
685
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
The AF tracking sensitivity for video mode can
be set to values of from 1 to 7.
•
Choose [7] (Low) to help maintain focus on
your original subject.
•
If the subject leaves the selected focus area
when [1] (High) is selected, the camera will
respond by quickly shifting focus to a new subject in the same area.
Choose [ON] for a live preview of video footage recorded with [HLG] or
[N-Log] selected for video tone mode, but note that the colors in the
preview are simplified for enhanced contrast.
•
Colors in the actual recorded footage are unaffected.
•
Contrast is also enhanced when HLG or N-Log footage is viewed on
the camera.
g7: AF Tracking Sensitivity
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
g8: View Assist
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
686
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Choose whether a zebra pattern is used to indicate selected tone ranges
in video mode.
Pattern Tone Range
Choose the tone range shown by the zebra pattern from [Highlights] or
[Mid-tones], or select [Zebra pattern off] to turn the zebra pattern off.
Highlights and mid-tones can be defined using [Highlight threshold]
and [Mid-tone range], respectively.
Pattern
To enable the zebra display, select [Pattern 1] or [Pattern 2].
Highlight Threshold
Choose the brightness needed to trigger the zebra display when
[Highlights] is selected for [Pattern tone range].
•
Choose from values of from 120 to 255. The lower the value, the
greater the range of brightnesses that will be shown as highlights.
•
If 255 is selected, the display will show only areas that are potentially
overexposed.
g9: Zebra Pattern
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
Pattern 1 Pattern 2
687
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Mid-tone Range
Choose the brightness needed to trigger the
zebra display when [Mid-tones] is selected
for [Pattern tone range].
•
The mid-tone range is defined as a
brightness [Value] and [Range] of
brightnesses centered around the selected
value.
•
Press
4
or
2
to highlight items and press
1
or
3
to change.
D
Zebra Pattern
If both the zebra display and focus peaking are enabled in manual focus
mode, only focus peaking will take effect. To view the zebra display in
manual focus mode, select [OFF] for Custom Setting a13 [Focus peaking]>
[Focus peaking display].
688
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Choose the tone range shown by a zebra pattern when a control
previously assigned [Pattern tone range] is pressed. If [Highlights] or
[Mid-tones] is selected, pressing the control will display a zebra pattern
only over areas in the selected tone range; pressing the button a second
time hides the zebra pattern.
Choose a framing grid for video mode. The selected grid can be
displayed by placing a check (
M
) next to
b
in the list for Custom Setting
g12 [Custom monitor shooting display] (
0
689) or g13 [Custom
viewfinder shooting display] (
0
691).
g10: Limit Zebra Pattern Tone Range
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
g11: Grid Type
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
689
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Choose the monitor displays accessible by pressing the DISP button in
video mode.
•
Highlight items ([Display 2] through
[Display 4]) and press
J
to select (
M
) or
deselect (
U
). Only displays marked with a
check (
M
) can be accessed by pressing the
DISP button during shooting. [Display 1]
cannot be deselected.
g12: Custom Monitor Shooting Display
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
690
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
•
To choose indicators that appear in displays
[Display 1] through [Display 4], highlight
the corresponding option and press
2
. You
can then highlight items and press
J
to
select (
M
) or deselect (
U
).
•
To complete the operation, press
G
.
Option Description
A
[Basic
shooting
info]
View the shooting mode, shutter speed, aperture,
and other basic shooting info.
B
[Detailed
shooting
info]
View the focus mode, AF-area mode, white
balance, and other detailed shooting info.
C
[Touch
controls]
View options that can be accessed via touch
controls, including touch AF and the
i
menu.
D
[Virtual
horizon]
Enable the virtual horizon. The display type can
be selected using Custom Setting d16 [Virtual
horizon type].
E
[Histogram] Enable the RGB histogram.
b
[Framing
grid]
Enable the framing grid. The display type can be
selected using Custom Setting g11 [Grid type].
F
[Center
indicator]
Display crosshairs at the center of the frame.
691
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Choose the viewfinder displays accessible by pressing the DISP button
in video mode.
•
Highlight items ([Display 2] or [Display 3]) and press
J
to select (
M
)
or deselect (
U
). Only displays marked with a check (
M
) can be
accessed by pressing the DISP button during shooting. [Display 1]
cannot be deselected.
•
To choose indicators that appear in displays [Display 1] through
[Display 3], highlight the corresponding option and press
2
. You can
then highlight items and press
J
to select (
M
) or deselect (
U
). Apart
from [Touch controls], the options are the same as those for Custom
Setting g12 [Custom monitor shooting display] (
0
689).
•
To complete the operation, press
G
.
g13: Custom Viewfinder Shooting Display
G
button
U
A
Custom Settings menu
692
D
The Playback Menu: Managing Pictures
To display the playback menu, select the
D
(playback menu) tab in the camera menus.
The playback menu contains the following items:
D
See Also
“Playback Menu Defaults” (
0
483).
D
The Playback Menu: Managing
Pictures
Item
0
[Delete] 693
[Playback folder] 694
[Playback display options] 694
[Delete pictures from both
slots]
695
[Dual-format recording PB
slot]
695
[Filtered playback criteria] 696
[Picture review] 696
[After delete] 697
[After burst, show] 698
[Rotate tall] 698
[Copy image(s)] 699
Item
0
693
D
The Playback Menu: Managing Pictures
Delete multiple pictures. For more information, see “Deleting Multiple
Pictures” (
0
260).
Delete
G
button
U
D
playback menu
Option Description
Q
[Selected pictures] Delete selected pictures.
d
[Candidates for
deletion]
Delete pictures rated
d
(candidate for
deletion).
i
[Pictures shot on
selected dates]
Delete all pictures taken on selected dates.
R
[All pictures]
Delete all pictures in the folder currently
selected for [Playback folder] in the playback
menu.
•
If two memory cards are inserted, you can
select the card from which pictures will be
deleted.
694
D
The Playback Menu: Managing Pictures
Choose a folder for playback.
Choose whether the focus points used when the photograph was taken
are displayed during full-frame playback. You can also choose the types
of photo information that can be viewed during full-frame playback.
•
Highlight options and press
2
to select (
M
) or deselect (
U
).
•
To complete the operation, press
G
.
Playback Folder
G
button
U
D
playback menu
Option Description
(Folder name)
Pictures in all folders with the selected name will
be visible during playback. Folders can be
renamed using the [Storage folder]> [Rename]
option in the photo shooting menu.
[All]
Pictures in all folders will be visible during
playback.
[Current]
Only pictures in the current folder will be visible
during playback.
Playback Display Options
G
button
U
D
playback menu
695
D
The Playback Menu: Managing Pictures
Choose whether deleting a copy of a picture
recorded to both memory cards with either
[Backup] or a dual-format option ([RAW
Slot 1 - JPEG Slot 2] or [JPEG Slot 1 - JPEG
Slot 2]) selected for [Role played by card in
Slot 2] in the photo shooting menu also
deletes the remaining copy.
Choose the slot from which dual-format pictures recorded with [RAW
Slot 1 - JPEG Slot 2] or [JPEG Slot 1 - JPEG Slot 2] selected for [Role
played by card in Slot 2] in the photo shooting menu are played back.
Delete Pictures from Both Slots
G
button
U
D
playback menu
Option Description
[Yes
(confirmation
required)]
Before deleting one copy, you will be prompted to
choose whether to delete the other. To choose the
option highlighted by default, press
2
.
[Yes]
[Same pictures on
1
and
2
] is always selected;
selecting [Yes] in the confirmation dialog deletes both
copies.
[Off]
The confirmation dialog displayed is the same as that for
pictures for which no second copy exists. Deleting the
current picture does not delete the copy.
Dual-Format Recording PB Slot
G
button
U
D
playback menu
696
D
The Playback Menu: Managing Pictures
Choose the criteria used to choose the pictures displayed during filtered
playback (
0
255).
Choose whether pictures are automatically displayed immediately after
shooting.
Filtered Playback Criteria
G
button
U
D
playback menu
Picture Review
G
button
U
D
playback menu
Option Description
[On]
Pictures appear in the currently-selected display
(monitor or viewfinder) as they are taken.
[On (monitor only)]
Pictures are displayed after shooting only when the
monitor is used to frame shots. Pictures are not
displayed in the viewfinder when [Viewfinder only]
is selected for monitor mode.
[Off]
Pictures can only be viewed by pressing the
K
button.
697
D
The Playback Menu: Managing Pictures
Choose the picture displayed after an image is deleted.
After Delete
G
button
U
D
playback menu
Option Description
S
[Show next]
•
The following picture is displayed.
•
If the deleted picture was the last picture, the
preceding picture will be displayed.
T
[Show
previous]
•
The preceding picture is displayed.
•
If the deleted picture was the first picture, the next
picture will be displayed.
U
[Continue as
before]
•
If you were scrolling through pictures in the order
recorded, the following picture will be displayed as
described for [Show next].
•
If you were scrolling through pictures in reverse
order, the preceding picture will be displayed as
described for [Show previous].
698
D
The Playback Menu: Managing Pictures
Choose whether the photo displayed immediately after a burst of shots
is taken in continuous mode is the first or last shot in the burst.
•
This option takes effect only when [Off] is selected for [Picture
review] in the playback menu.
When [ON] is selected, “tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures will be
automatically rotated for display during playback.
D
Caution: Rotate Tall
Pictures are not rotated automatically during picture review even when [ON]
is selected for [Rotate tall].
After Burst, Show
G
button
U
D
playback menu
DSC_0001.jpg DSC_0002.jpg DSC_0003.jpg DSC_0004.jpg DSC_0014.jpg DSC_0015.jpg
1
23
1
Most recent shots (burst)
2
Displayed if [First picture in
burst] is selected
3
Displayed if [Last picture in
burst] is selected
Rotate Tall
G
button
U
D
playback menu
699
D
The Playback Menu: Managing Pictures
Copy pictures from one memory card to another when two memory
cards are inserted.
Copying Pictures
1
Choose [Select source].
Highlight [Select source] and press
2
to
display the [Select source] dialog.
2
Select the card containing the pictures
to be copied.
Highlight the slot for the card containing
the pictures to be copied and press
J
to
select the highlighted slot and return to
the [Copy image(s)] menu.
Copy Image(s)
G
button
U
D
playback menu
Option Description
[Select source] Choose the card from which pictures will be copied.
[Select picture(s)] Select pictures to be copied.
[Select destination
folder]
Select the destination folder on the remaining card
(the card not selected for [Select source]).
[Copy picture(s)?] Copy the pictures.
700
D
The Playback Menu: Managing Pictures
3
Choose [Select picture(s)].
Highlight [Select picture(s)] and press
2
to view the [Select picture(s)] display.
4
Select the source folder.
•
Highlight the folder containing the
pictures to be copied and press
2
to
display the [Images selected by
default] menu.
•
To copy all pictures from the card in the
selected slot, highlight [All pictures in slot], press
J
, and proceed
to Step 10.
701
D
The Playback Menu: Managing Pictures
5
Make the initial selection.
Choose the pictures that will be selected
by default.
Option Description
[Deselect all]
None of the pictures in the chosen folder will be
selected by default.
•
Choose this option when you want to select
pictures individually.
[Select all
pictures]
All of the pictures in the chosen folder will be selected
by default.
•
Choose this option if you want to copy all or most of
the pictures in the folder.
[Select
protected
pictures]
Only the protected pictures in the folder will be
selected by default.
702
D
The Playback Menu: Managing Pictures
6
Select additional pictures.
•
Highlight pictures and press the
W
(
Q
)
button to select; selected pictures are
marked with a check ( ). To remove
the check ( ) and deselect the current
picture, press the
W
(
Q
) button again.
•
To view the highlighted picture full screen, press and hold the
X
button.
•
After confirming that all the pictures you want to copy have
marks, press
J
to return to the [Copy image(s)] menu.
7
Choose [Select destination folder].
Highlight [Select destination folder] and
press
2
to display [Select destination
folder] options.
703
D
The Playback Menu: Managing Pictures
8
Choose a destination folder.
Highlight one of the following options
and press
2
.
Option Description
[Select folder
by number]
Enter the number of the
destination folder (
0
498).
If a folder with the
selected number does not
already exist, a new folder
will be created.
[Select folder
from list]
Choose the destination
folder from a list of
existing folders.
704
D
The Playback Menu: Managing Pictures
9
Select the folder.
After entering a folder number or highlighting the folder name,
press
J
to select the folder and return to the [Copy image(s)]
menu.
10
Choose [Copy picture(s)?].
Highlight [Copy picture(s)?] and press
J
to display a confirmation dialog.
11
Choose [Yes].
•
The camera will display the message
“[Copy?]” together with the number of
pictures that will be copied.
•
Highlight [Yes] and press
J
to copy the
selected pictures.
•
Press
J
again to exit when copying is complete.
705
D
The Playback Menu: Managing Pictures
D
Cautions: Copying Pictures
•
Pictures will not be copied if there is
insufficient space on the destination card.
•
If the destination folder contains a file with the
same name as one of the pictures to be copied,
a confirmation dialog will be displayed. Select
[Replace existing picture] or [Replace all] to
replace the existing file or files. Protected files
in the destination folder will not be replaced. Select [Skip] to continue
without replacing existing files. Select [Cancel] to exit without copying any
further pictures.
•
Ratings and protection are copied with the pictures.
•
To prevent loss of power while copying is in progress, be sure the battery is
fully charged or connect the supplied charging AC adapter or an optional
AC adapter and power connector before copying videos.
706
B
The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
To view the setup menu, select the
B
tab in
the camera menus.
The setup menu contains the following items:
B
The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
Item
0
[Format memory card] 708
[Language] 708
[Time zone and date] 709
[Monitor brightness] 709
[Monitor color balance] 710
[Viewfinder brightness] 711
[Viewfinder color balance] 712
[Finder display size (photo
Lv)]
712
[Limit monitor mode
selection]
713
[Auto rotate info display] 713
[AF fine-tuning options] 714
[Non-CPU lens data] 718
[Save focus position] 718
[Sensor shield behavior at
power off]
719
[Clean image sensor] 719
[Image Dust Off ref photo] 720
[Pixel mapping] 723
[Image comment] 724
[Copyright information] 725
[IPTC] 726
[Voice memo options] 732
[Camera sounds] 733
[Silent mode] 735
[Touch controls] 736
[HDMI] 736
[USB connection priority] 737
Item
0
707
B
The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
D
See Also
“Setup Menu Defaults” (
0
485)
[Location data (built-in)] 737
[Wireless remote (WR)
options]
738
[Assign remote (WR) Fn
button]
741
[Conformity marking] 741
[Battery info] 742
[USB power delivery] 744
Item
0
[Energy saving (photo
mode)]
746
[Slot empty release lock] 747
[Save/load menu settings] 748
[Reset all settings] 754
[Firmware version] 754
Item
0
708
B
The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
Format memory cards. To begin formatting,
choose a memory card slot and select [Yes].
Note that formatting permanently deletes all
pictures and other data on the card. Before
formatting, be sure to make backup copies as
required.
D
Caution: During Formatting
Do not turn the camera off or remove memory cards until the message
[Formatting memory card] clears from the display.
A
The Format Buttons
Keeping both format (
O
/
Q
and
S
/
Q
) buttons pressed for over two
seconds displays a dialog prompting you to select a card for formatting.
Choose a language for camera menus and messages. The languages
available vary with the country or region in which the camera was
originally purchased.
Format Memory Card
G
button
U
B
setup menu
Language
G
button
U
B
setup menu
709
B
The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
Change time zones and set the camera clock. We recommend that the
camera clock be adjusted regularly.
A flashing
t
icon in the shooting display indicates that the clock has
not been set.
Press
1
or
3
to adjust monitor brightness. Choose higher values for
increased brightness, lower values for reduced brightness.
•
[Monitor brightness] can only be adjusted when the monitor is the
active display. It cannot be adjusted when [Viewfinder only] is
selected for monitor mode or when your eye is to the viewfinder.
•
Higher values increase the drain on the battery.
Time Zone and Date
G
button
U
B
setup menu
Option Description
[Time zone]
Choose a time zone. The time selected for [Date and
time] is automatically adjusted for the new time zone.
[Date and
time]
Set the camera clock to the current time in the selected
[Time zone].
[Date format]
Choose the order in which the day, month, and year are
displayed.
[Daylight
saving time]
Turn daylight saving time [ON] or [OFF]. Selecting [ON]
automatically advances the clock one hour. The default
setting is [OFF].
Monitor Brightness
G
button
U
B
setup menu
710
B
The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
Adjust monitor color balance to your taste.
•
[Monitor color balance] can only be adjusted when the monitor is
the active display. It cannot be adjusted when [Viewfinder only] is
selected for monitor mode or when your eye is to the viewfinder.
•
Color balance is adjusted using the multi
selector. Press
1
,
3
,
4
, or
2
to adjust color
balance as shown below. Press
J
to save
changes.
•
Monitor color balance applies only to menus, playback, and the
shooting display; photos and videos taken with the camera are not
affected.
Monitor Color Balance
G
button
U
B
setup menu
1
Increase green
2
Increase amber
3
Increase magenta
4
Increase blue
711
B
The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
•
The reference image is either the last picture taken or, in playback
mode, the picture last displayed. If the memory card contains no
pictures, an empty frame will be displayed instead.
•
To choose a different picture, press the
W
(
Q
) button. Highlight the desired picture and
press
J
to select it as the reference image.
•
To view the highlighted picture full frame,
press and hold
X
.
•
Adjust viewfinder brightness. [Viewfinder brightness] can only be
adjusted when the viewfinder is the active display. It cannot be
adjusted when the monitor is on or when [Monitor only] is selected
for monitor mode.
•
Higher values increase the drain on the battery.
Viewfinder Brightness
G
button
U
B
setup menu
Option Description
[Auto]
Viewfinder brightness is adjusted automatically in
response to lighting conditions.
[Manual]
Press
1
or
3
to adjust brightness manually. Choose
higher values for increased brightness, lower values for
reduced brightness.
712
B
The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
Adjust viewfinder color balance to your taste. [Viewfinder color
balance] can only be adjusted when the viewfinder is the active display.
It cannot be adjusted when the monitor is on or when [Monitor only] is
selected for monitor mode. Otherwise the procedure is the same as for
[Monitor color balance] (
0
710).
Choose a magnification for the viewfinder display from [Standard] and
[Small]. Selecting [Small] makes it easier to see the entire subject.
Viewfinder Color Balance
G
button
U
B
setup menu
Finder Display Size (Photo Lv)
G
button
U
B
setup menu
713
B
The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
Choose the monitor modes that can be selected using the
M
button.
•
Highlight options and press
J
or
2
to select (
M
) or deselect (
U
).
Options marked with a check (
M
) are available for selection.
•
To complete the operation, press
G
.
When [ON] is selected, the indicators in the shooting display will
automatically be rotated to match camera orientation.
Limit Monitor Mode Selection
G
button
U
B
setup menu
Auto Rotate Info Display
G
button
U
B
setup menu
714
B
The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
Fine-tune focus for the current lens.
•
Use only as required.
•
We recommend that you perform fine-tuning at a focus distance you
use frequently. If you perform focus-tuning at a short focus distance,
for example, you may find it less effective at longer distances.
AF Fine-Tuning Options
G
button
U
B
setup menu
Option Description
[AF fine-tune] Select [ON] to turn fine-tuning on.
[Fine-tune and
save lens]
Fine-tune focus for the current lens. Press
1
or
3
to
highlight items and press
4
or
2
to choose from values
between +20 and −20.
•
The larger the fine-tuning value, the farther the focal
point is from the lens; the smaller the value, the closer
the focal point.
•
The display shows the current and previous values.
•
The camera can store values for up to 40 lens types.
•
If a value already exists for the current lens, you can
choose whether to add a new value or overwrite the
existing value.
[Default]
Choose the fine-tuning values for lenses for which no
values have previously been saved using [Fine-tune and
save lens]. Press
4
or
2
to choose from values between
+20 and −20.
715
B
The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
D
Deleting Saved Values
To delete values saved using [Fine-tune and save lens], highlight the
desired lens in the [List saved values] list and press
O
(
Q
).
[List saved
values]
List values saved using [Fine-
tune and save lens].
Highlighting a lens in the list
and pressing
2
displays a
[Choose lens number] dialog.
•
The [Choose lens number]
dialog is used to enter the
lens identifier.
•
In the case of Z mount lenses and some F mount lenses,
the lens serial number is entered automatically.
[Choose value
for current
lens]
Choose from multiple fine-tuning values saved for lenses
of the same type.
Option Description
716
B
The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
Creating and Saving Fine-Tuning Values
1
Attach the lens to the camera.
2
Select [AF fine-tuning options] in the setup menu, then highlight
[Fine-tune and save lens] and press
2
.
An AF fine-tuning dialog will be displayed.
3
Press
4
or
2
to fine-tune autofocus.
•
Choose from values between +20 and −20.
•
The current value is shown by
g
, the previously-selected value by
j
.
•
If a zoom lens is attached, you can choose separate fine-tuning
values for maximum angle (WIDE) and maximum zoom (TELE). Use
1
and
3
to choose between the two.
•
The larger the fine-tuning value, the farther the focal point is from
the lens; the smaller the value, the closer the focal point.
4
Press
J
to save the new value.
717
B
The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
Choosing a Default Fine-Tuning Value
1
Select [AF fine-tuning options] in the setup menu, then highlight
[Default] and press
2
.
2
Press
4
or
2
to fine-tune autofocus.
•
Choose from values between +20 and −20.
•
The current value is shown by
g
, the previously-selected value by
j
.
•
The larger the fine-tuning value, the farther the focal point is from
the lens; the smaller the value, the closer the focal point.
3
Press
J
to save the new value.
718
B
The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
Record data for non-CPU lenses attached using an optional mount
adapter. Recording the focal length and maximum aperture of non-CPU
lenses allows them to be used with some camera features normally
reserved for CPU lenses, such as on-board vibration reduction.
When [ON] is selected, the camera will save the current focus position
when turned off and restore it when next turned on. Note that this
increases camera startup times.
•
Note that even when [ON] is selected, if the temperature, zoom
position, or other conditions change while the camera is off, focus
may resume from a different position when the camera is turned on.
•
Similarly, note that even when [OFF] is selected, focus may resume
from the previously-selected position depending on the state of the
camera and lens.
Non-CPU Lens Data
G
button
U
B
setup menu
Option Description
[Lens number] Choose a lens identifier.
[Focal length
(mm)]
Enter the focal length.
[Maximum
aperture]
Enter the maximum aperture.
Save Focus Position
G
button
U
B
setup menu
719
B
The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
If [Sensor shield closes] is selected, the shield
in front of the image sensor will close when
the camera is turned off. This prevents dust or
other foreign matter collecting on the image
sensor when lenses are exchanged. It may
also, however, increase camera startup times.
D
Cautions: The Sensor Shield
•
The shield can be damaged by touching it when it is closed.
•
When exchanging lenses with the shield closed, be sure to insert the lens
perpendicular to the mount. If inserted at an angle, lenses could contact
the sensor shield and damage the shield or the image sensor.
Dirt or dust entering the camera when lenses are exchanged or the
body cap is removed may adhere to the image sensor and affect your
photographs. The “clean image sensor” option vibrates the sensor to
remove dust.
Sensor Shield Behavior at Power Off
G
button
U
B
setup menu
Clean Image Sensor
G
button
U
B
setup menu
Option Description
[Start] Perform image sensor cleaning immediately.
[Automatic
cleaning]
•
[Clean at shutdown]: The image sensor is
automatically cleaned during shutdown each time
the camera is turned off.
•
[Cleaning off]: Automatic image sensor cleaning off.
720
B
The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
Acquire reference data for the Image Dust Off option in NX Studio.
Image Dust Off processes NEF (RAW) pictures to mitigate effects caused
by dust adhering in front of the camera image sensor. For more
information, refer to NX Studio’s online help.
Acquiring Image Dust Off Reference Data
1
Choose a start option.
•
Highlight [Start] and press
J
to
immediately display the [Image Dust
Off ref photo] dialog.
•
Highlight [Clean sensor and then start]
and press
J
to clean the image sensor
before starting. The [Image Dust Off ref
photo] dialog will be displayed when
image sensor cleaning is complete.
•
To exit without acquiring Image Dust Off
reference data, press
G
.
Image Dust Off Ref Photo
G
button
U
B
setup menu
721
B
The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
2
With the lens about ten centimeters (four inches) from a well-lit,
featureless white object, frame the object so that it fills the
display and then press the shutter-release button halfway.
•
In autofocus mode, focus will automatically be set to infinity.
•
In manual focus mode, set focus to infinity manually.
3
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to
acquire Image Dust Off reference data.
•
The monitor turns off when the shutter-release button is pressed.
•
If the reference object is too bright or
too dark, the camera may be unable to
acquire Image Dust Off reference data,
in which case a message will appear and
the camera will return to the display
shown in Step 1. Choose another
reference object and press the shutter-
release button again.
722
B
The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
D
Caution: Image Sensor Cleaning
Dust off reference data recorded before image sensor cleaning is performed
cannot be used with photographs taken after image sensor cleaning is
performed. Select [Clean sensor and then start] only if the Image Dust Off
reference data will not be used with existing photographs.
D
Cautions: Acquiring Image Dust Off Reference Data
•
An FX-format lens with a focal length of at least 50 mm is recommended.
•
When using a zoom lens, zoom all the way in.
•
The same reference data can be used for photographs taken with different
lenses or at different apertures.
•
Reference images cannot be viewed using computer imaging software.
•
A grid pattern is displayed when reference
images are viewed on the camera.
723
B
The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
Pixel mapping checks and optimizes the camera image sensor. If you
notice unexpected bright spots appearing in pictures taken with the
camera, perform pixel mapping as described below.
•
Pixel mapping is available only when a Z mount lens or an optional
FTZ II/FTZ mount adapter is attached.
•
To prevent unexpected loss of power, use a fully-charged battery, the
supplied charging AC adapter, or an optional AC adapter and power
connector.
•
To start pixel mapping, select [Start]. A message is displayed while the
operation is in progress.
D
Cautions: Pixel Mapping
•
Do not attempt to operate the camera while pixel mapping is in progress.
Do not turn the camera off or remove or disconnect the power source.
•
Pixel mapping may not be available if the camera’s internal temperature is
elevated.
Pixel Mapping
G
button
U
B
setup menu
724
B
The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
Add a comment to new photographs as they are taken. Comments can
be viewed in the NX Studio [Info] tab.
Input Comment
Input a comment of up to 36 characters. Highlight [Input comment]
and press
2
to display a text-entry dialog. For information on text entry,
see “Text Entry” (
0
64).
Attach Comment
Comments will be attached to pictures taken
while [Attach comment] is [ON].
D
Photo Info
•
Comments can be viewed on the [Other shooting data] page in the photo
information display.
•
To display the [Other shooting data] page, select (
M
) both [Shooting
data] and [Other shooting data] for [Playback display options] in the
playback menu.
Image Comment
G
button
U
B
setup menu
725
B
The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
Add copyright information to new photographs as they are taken.
Copyright information can be viewed in the NX Studio [Info] tab.
Artist/Copyright
Enter the names of the photographer (maximum 36 characters) and
copyright holder (maximum 54 characters). Highlight [Artist] or
[Copyright] and press
2
to display a text-entry dialog. For information
on text entry, see “Text Entry” (
0
64).
Attach Copyright Information
Copyright information will be attached to
pictures taken while [Attach copyright
information] is [ON].
Copyright Information
G
button
U
B
setup menu
726
B
The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
D
Cautions: Copyright Information
•
To prevent unauthorized use of the artist or copyright holder names, make
sure that [OFF] is selected for [Attach copyright information] before
lending or transferring the camera to another person. You will also need to
make sure that the artist and copyright fields are blank.
•
Nikon does not accept liability for any damages or disputes arising from
the use of the [Copyright information] option.
D
Viewing Copyright Information
•
Copyright information can be viewed on the [Copyright info] page in the
photo information display.
•
To display the [Copyright info] page, select (
M
) both [Shooting data] and
[Copyright info] for [Playback display options] in the playback menu.
IPTC presets can be created or edited on the
camera and embedded in new photographs
as described below.
•
You can also load IPTC presets created on a
computer.
•
To create IPTC presets and save them to
memory cards for later import, use IPTC Preset Manager (
0
731).
IPTC
G
button
U
B
setup menu
727
B
The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
Creating, Renaming, Editing, and
Copying
Presets
Highlight [Edit/save] and press
2
to display the [Select preset to edit
or save] list of existing presets.
•
To edit or rename a preset, highlight it and press
2
. To create a new
preset, highlight “Unused” and press
2
.
-[Rename]: Rename the preset.
-[Edit IPTC information]: Display the selected preset (
0
730).
Selected fields can be edited as desired.
•
To copy a preset, highlight it and press
X
. Highlight the destination,
press
J
, and name the copy.
Deleting Presets
To delete presets, highlight [Delete] and press
2
.
728
B
The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
Embedding Presets
Highlighting [Auto embed during shooting]
and pressing
2
displays a list of presets.
Highlight a preset and press
J
; the selected
preset will be embedded in all subsequent
photographs. To disable embedding, select
[Off].
D
Viewing IPTC Data
•
Embedded presets can be viewed on the [IPTC data] page in the photo
information display.
•
To display the [IPTC data] page, select (
M
) both [Shooting data] and
[IPTC data] for [Playback display options] in the playback menu.
Copying Presets to a Memory Card
To copy IPTC presets from the camera to a memory card, select [Load/
save]> [Slot 1] or [Slot 2], then highlight [Copy to card] and press
2
.
Select the desired preset and destination (1–99) and press
J
to copy
the preset to the card.
729
B
The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
Copying Presets to the Camera
The camera can store up to ten presets; to
copy IPTC presets from a memory card to a
selected destination on the camera, select
[Load/save]> [Slot 1] or [Slot 2], then
highlight [Copy to camera] and press
2
.
•
Highlight a preset and press
J
to proceed
to the [Select destination] list. To preview
the highlighted preset, press
W
(
Q
) instead of pressing
J
. After
previewing the preset, press
J
to proceed to the [Select destination]
list.
•
Highlight a destination and press
J
to display a dialog where you can
name the preset. Name the preset as desired and press
J
to copy the
preset to the camera.
•
In addition to the ten presets mentioned above, the camera can store
up to three XMP/IPTC presets created on a computer and saved in
XMP format. XMP/IPTC presets are not displayed during playback. Nor
can they be copied from the camera to a memory card.
730
B
The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
D
Cautions: IPTC Information
•
The camera supports standard roman alphanumeric characters only. Other
characters will not display correctly except on a computer.
•
Preset names (
0
727) may be up to 18 characters long. If a preset with a
longer name is created using a computer, all characters after the
eighteenth will be deleted.
•
The number of characters that may appear in each field is given below. Any
characters over the limit will be deleted.
Field Max. length
Caption 2000
Event ID 64
Headline 256
Object name 256
City 256
State 256
Country 256
Category 3
Supp. Cat.
(supplemental
categories)
256
Byline 256
Byline title 256
Writer/editor 256
Credit 256
Source 256
Field Max. length
731
B
The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
D
IPTC
IPTC is a standard established by the International Press
Telecommunications Council (IPTC) with the intent of clarifying and
simplifying the information required when photographs are shared with a
variety of publications.
D
IPTC Preset Manager
IPTC presets can be created on a computer and saved to memory cards using
IPTC Preset Manager software. IPTC Preset Manager can be downloaded free
of charge from the URL below. Instructions on use are available via online
help.
https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/
732
B
The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
Adjust settings for voice memos (
0
295).
Voice Memo Control
Choose how the
b
button behaves when used to record voice memos.
Audio Output (Playback)
Choose the device used for voice memo playback.
Voice Memo Options
G
button
U
B
setup menu
Option Description
3
[Press and
hold]
Voice memos up to 60 seconds long can be
recorded while
b
button is pressed.
4
[Press to start/
stop]
Recording begins when
b
button is pressed and
ends after about 60 seconds or when the control is
pressed a second time.
Option Description
5
[Speaker/
headphones]
Voice memos are played
back over headphones
(if connected) or the
camera’s built-in
speaker.
•
Press
1
or
3
to
choose a volume
between [1] and [15].
•
Press
J
to save changes and exit.
7
[HDMI]
Voice memos are output to the HDMI terminal at a
fixed volume.
6
[Off]
Voice memos cannot be played even using the
b
button.
2
icons are displayed when photographs
for which memo exist are viewed in the monitor.
733
B
The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
Shutter Sound
Choose whether the camera makes a sound when the shutter is
released. Selecting [OFF] disables the shutter-release sound.
Beep On/Off
Turn the beep speaker on or off.
•
If [On] is selected for [Beep on/off], beeps sound when:
- the self-timer counts down,
- interval-timer photography, time-lapse video recording, or focus
shift ends,
- the camera focuses in photo mode (note that this does not apply if
AF-C is selected for focus mode or if [Release] is selected for Custom
Setting a2 [AF-S priority selection]), or
-touch controls are used.
•
Select [Off (touch controls only)] to disable the beep for touch
controls while enabling it for other purposes.
Volume
Adjust beep volume and the volume of the shutter-release sound.
Camera Sounds
G
button
U
B
setup menu
734
B
The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
Pitch
Choose the pitch of the beep from [High] and [Low]. The pitch of the
shutter sound cannot be changed.
D
Silent Mode
Selecting [ON] for [Silent mode] in the setup menu disables the shutter-
release sound and beep speaker.
D
Caution: Camera Sounds
Overlapping beeps and/or shutter sounds may play as a single sound.
735
B
The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
Select [ON] to override the options selected for [Camera sounds] in the
setup menu and mute the electronic shutter and beep speaker during
photography.
•
Selecting [ON] also suppresses other camera sounds. It does not,
however, completely silence the camera. Camera sounds may still be
audible, for example during autofocus or aperture adjustment, in the
latter case most noticeably at apertures smaller (i.e., at f-numbers
higher) than f/5.6.
•
The frame advance rate may drop in some circumstances.
•
Long-exposure noise reduction is disabled.
•
Silent mode mutes the electronic shutter and beep speaker and
dampens other camera sounds, but does not absolve photographers
of the need to respect their subjects’ privacy and image rights.
A
The Standby Timer
Even when [ON] is selected for [Silent mode], a sound will be produced
when the standby timer is activated or expires. To mute the standby timer,
select [No limit] for Custom Setting c3 [Power off delay] > [Standby timer].
Silent Mode
G
button
U
B
setup menu
736
B
The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
Adjust settings for monitor touch controls.
Enable/Disable Touch Controls
Enable or disable touch controls. Select [Playback only] to enable
touch controls in playback mode only.
Glove Mode
Selecting [ON] raises the sensitivity of the touch screen, making it easier
to use while wearing gloves.
Adjust settings for connection to HDMI devices (
0
302).
Touch Controls
G
button
U
B
setup menu
HDMI
G
button
U
B
setup menu
737
B
The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
Choose the function assigned priority when the camera is connected to
a computer via USB.
Adjust settings for use with the camera’s built-in GNSS receiver. For
more information, see “Location Data” (
0
204).
USB Connection Priority
G
button
U
B
setup menu
Option Description
[Upload]
The monitor remains blank while the camera is
connected to a computer. The monitor turns on when
the shutter-release button is pressed halfway but
upload speeds may drop.
[Shooting]
The monitor remains on while the camera is connected
to a computer. Upload speeds may drop.
Location Data (Built-In)
G
button
U
B
setup menu
738
B
The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
Adjust status LED and link mode settings for optional WR-R11a and
WR-R10 wireless remote controllers. You can also choose a link mode for
connection to optional radio-controlled flash units that support
Advanced Wireless Lighting.
D
WR-R10 Wireless Remote Controllers
•
A WR-A10 adapter is required when using the WR-R10.
•
Be sure the firmware for the WR-R10 has been updated to the latest version
(version 3.0 or later). For information on firmware updates, see the Nikon
website for your area.
LED Lamp
Enable or disable the status LEDs on the WR-R11a or WR-R10 wireless
remote controller mounted on the camera. For more information, see
the documentation supplied with the wireless remote controller.
Wireless Remote (WR) Options
G
button
U
B
setup menu
739
B
The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
Link Mode
Choose a link mode for WR-R11a or WR-R10 wireless remote controllers
mounted on other cameras or radio-controlled flash units that support
Advanced Wireless Lighting. Be sure that the same mode is selected for
the other devices.
Option Description
[Pairing]
The camera connects only to devices with which it has
previously been paired. Press the pairing button on the
wireless remote controller connected to the camera to
pair it with other devices.
•
As camera will not communicate with devices with
which it has not been paired, this option can be used
to prevent signal interference from other devices in
the vicinity.
•
Given that each device must be paired separately,
however, PIN is recommended when connecting to a
large number of devices.
740
B
The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
•
Regardless of the option selected for [Link mode], signals from paired
wireless remote controllers will always be received by the WR-R11a or
WR-R10. Users of the WR-1 wireless remote controller will need to
select pairing as the WR-1 link mode.
[PIN]
Communication is shared
among all devices with the
same four-digit PIN. Enter a
four-digit PIN of your
choosing. Press
4
or
2
to
highlight digits and press
1
or
3
to change. Press
J
to
enter and display the selected PIN.
•
This option is a good choice for photography
featuring a large number of remote devices.
•
If there are multiple cameras present that share the
same PIN, the flash units will be under the sole control
of the camera that connects first, preventing all other
cameras from connecting (the LEDs on the wireless
remote controllers connected to the affected cameras
will blink).
Option Description
741
B
The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
Choose the role played by the Fn button on optional wireless remote
controllers equipped with an Fn button. See Custom Setting f2 [Custom
controls (shooting)] for more information.
View some of the standards with which the camera complies.
Assign Remote (WR) Fn Button
G
button
U
B
setup menu
Option
A
[AF-ON]
F
[AF lock only]
D
[AE lock (Reset on release)]
C
[AE lock only]
B
[AE/AF lock]
r
[FV lock]
h
[
c
Disable/enable]
q
[Preview]
o
[Recall shooting functions]
4
[+RAW]
[None]
Option
Conformity Marking
G
button
U
B
setup menu
742
B
The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
View information on the battery currently
inserted in the camera.
Battery Info
G
button
U
B
setup menu
Option Description
[Charge] The current battery level, expressed as a percentage.
[No. of shots]
The number of pictures taken since the battery was last
charged.
[Calibration]
An indicator of whether the battery requires calibration.
Calibration ensures the accuracy of the battery level
display; after the battery has been charged a certain
number of times, [
j
] will be displayed.
•
We recommend that you calibrate the battery when
[
j
] is displayed (
0
850).
•
A [––] indicates that calibration not required.
[Battery age]
A five-level display showing battery age.
•
A value of “0” (
k
) indicates that battery performance is
unimpaired.
•
A value of “4” (
l
) indicates that the battery has reached
the end of its charging life. Replace the battery.
743
B
The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
D
Number of Shots
[No. of shots] shows the number of times the shutter has been released.
Note that the camera may sometimes release the shutter without recording
a photograph, for example when measuring preset manual white balance.
D
Charging Batteries at Low Temperatures
Batteries in general exhibit a drop in capacity at low ambient temperatures.
Even fresh batteries charged at temperatures under about 5 °C (41 °F) may
show a temporary increase from “0” to “1” in the value shown for [Battery
age], but the display will return to normal once the battery has been
recharged at a temperature of about 20 °C (68 °F) or higher.
744
B
The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
Choose whether the supplied charging AC adapter or computers
connected via USB can be used to power the camera (USB power
delivery). USB power delivery allows the camera to be used while
limiting the drain on the battery.
•
Power will only be supplied to the camera when the battery is
inserted.
•
A USB power delivery icon appears in the
shooting display and the control panel
when the camera is powered by an external
source.
USB Power Delivery
G
button
U
B
setup menu
Option Description
[ON]
The camera draws power from connected devices while on.
Connected devices will also supply power when the camera
is off if Bluetooth upload is in progress or the memory card
access lamp is lit.
[OFF]
The camera does not draw power from connected devices at
any time.
745
B
The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
D
Computer USB Power Delivery
•
Before using a computer to supply power to the camera, check that the
computer is equipped with a Type C USB connector. Use a UC-E25 USB
cable (available separately) to connect the camera to the computer.
•
Depending on the model and product specifications, some computers will
not supply current to power the camera.
A
“Power Delivery” Versus “Charging”
The supply of power for camera operations is referred to as “power delivery”,
while the term “charging” is used when power is supplied only to charge the
camera battery. The conditions under which the power supplied by external
devices is used to power the camera or charge the battery are shown below.
1 Includes instances in which the power switch is in the “OFF” position but
Bluetooth upload is in progress or the memory card access lamp is lit.
2 EN-EL18d, EN-EL18c, and EN-EL18b batteries inserted in the camera will
charge when the camera is connected to the supplied charging AC
adapter or via USB to a computer. Note, however, that batteries with a “4”
(
l
) showing for [Battery info] > [Battery age] in the setup menu
cannot be charged.
Option selected for
[USB power delivery]
Power switch
External power
source used for
[ON]
On (standby timer active)
1
Power delivery
On (standby timer off) Charging
2
Off Charging
2
[OFF]
On (standby timer active)
1
—
On (standby timer off) Charging
2
Off Charging
2
746
B
The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
In photo mode, the shooting display will dim to save power
approximately 15 seconds before the standby timer expires.
D
Energy Saving (Photo Mode)
Note that even when [ON] is selected, energy saving will not function:
•
if [No limit] is selected for Custom Setting c3 [Power off delay]>
[Standby timer] or if the delay selected is less than 30 seconds,
•
during zoom,
•
while the camera is connected to another device via HDMI,
•
while the camera is connected to and exchanging data with a computer via
USB, or
•
while the camera is connected to an AC adapter.
Energy Saving (Photo Mode)
G
button
U
B
setup menu
Option Description
[ON] Enable energy saving. The display refresh rate may drop.
[OFF]
Disable energy saving. Note selecting [OFF] does not stop
the shooting display dimming a few seconds before the
standby timer expires.
747
B
The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
Choose whether the shutter can be released when no memory card is
inserted in the camera.
Slot Empty Release Lock
G
button
U
B
setup menu
Option Description
a
[Release
locked]
The shutter cannot be released when no memory
card is inserted.
b
[Enable
release]
The shutter can be released with no memory card
inserted. No pictures will be recorded; during
playback, the camera displays [Demo].
748
B
The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
Save current camera menu settings to a memory card. You can also load
saved settings, allowing menu settings to be shared among cameras of
the same model.
•
If two memory cards are inserted, the settings will be saved to the card
in Slot 1.
Save/Load Menu Settings
G
button
U
B
setup menu
749
B
The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
•
The following settings are saved:
Settings that can be saved and loaded
PHOTO SHOOTING
MENU
[Shooting menu bank]
[Extended menu banks]
[File naming]
[Role played by card in Slot 2]
[Image area]
[Image quality]
[Image size]
[RAW recording]
[ISO sensitivity settings]
[White balance]
[Set Picture Control] (Custom Picture Controls are
saved as [Auto])
[Color space]
[Active D-Lighting]
[Long exposure NR]
[High ISO NR]
[Vignette control]
[Diffraction compensation]
[Auto distortion control]
[Photo flicker reduction]
[Metering]
[Flash control]
[Focus mode]
[AF-area mode]
[AF subject detection options]
[Vibration reduction] (the options available vary
with the lens)
[Auto bracketing]
750
B
The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
VIDEO RECORDING
MENU
[Shooting menu bank]
[Extended menu banks]
[File naming]
[Destination]
[Video file type]
[Frame size/frame rate]
[Image area]
[ISO sensitivity settings]
[White balance]
[Set Picture Control] (Custom Picture Controls are
saved as [Auto])
[HLG quality]
[Active D-Lighting]
[High ISO NR]
[Vignette control]
[Diffraction compensation]
[Auto distortion control]
[Video flicker reduction]
[Metering]
[Focus mode]
[AF-area mode]
[AF subject detection options]
Settings that can be saved and loaded
751
B
The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
VIDEO RECORDING
MENU
[Vibration reduction] (the options available vary
with the lens)
[Electronic VR]
[Microphone sensitivity]
[Attenuator]
[Frequency response]
[Wind noise reduction]
[Mic jack plug-in power]
[Headphone volume]
[Timecode] (excepting [Timecode origin])
[External rec. cntrl (HDMI)]
CUSTOM SETTINGS
MENU
All items
PLAYBACK MENU
[Playback display options]
[Dual-format recording PB slot]
[Picture review]
[After delete]
[After burst, show]
[Rotate tall]
Settings that can be saved and loaded
752
B
The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
SETUP MENU
[Language]
[Time zone and date] (excepting [Date and time])
[Finder display size (photo Lv)]
[Limit monitor mode selection]
[Auto rotate info display]
[Non-CPU lens data]
[Save focus position]
[Sensor shield behavior at power off]
[Clean image sensor]
[Image comment]
[Copyright information]
[IPTC]
[Voice memo options]
[Camera sounds]
[Silent mode]
[Touch controls]
[HDMI]
[USB connection priority]
[Location data (built-in)] (excepting [Position])
[Wireless remote (WR) options]
[Assign remote (WR) Fn button]
[USB power delivery]
[Energy saving (photo mode)]
[Slot empty release lock]
Settings that can be saved and loaded
753
B
The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
Save Menu Settings
Save settings to a memory card. If the card is full, an error will be
displayed and settings will not be saved. Saved settings can only be
used with other cameras of the same model.
Load Menu Settings
Load saved settings from a memory card. Note that [Load menu
settings] is available only when a memory card containing saved
settings is inserted.
D
Caution: Saved Settings
Settings are saved to files named “NCSET***”, where “***” is an identifier that
varies from camera to camera. The camera will not be able to load settings if
the file name is changed.
MY MENU
The current contents of “My Menu”
[Choose tab]
RECENT SETTINGS
The current contents of the recent settings menu (up
to 20 items)
[Choose tab]
Settings that can be saved and loaded
754
B
The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
Reset all settings except [Language] and [Time zone and date] to their
default values. Copyright information and other user-generated entries
are also reset. Once reset, settings cannot be restored.
We recommend that you save settings using the [Save/load menu
settings] item in the setup menu before performing a reset.
View the current camera firmware version. Firmware updates can be
performed if the memory card contains a new version of the camera
firmware.
A
Firmware Updates
Updates can be performed using a computer or smart device.
•
Computer: Check the Nikon Download Center for new versions of the
camera firmware. For more information, see the firmware download page.
•
Smart device: If the smart device has been paired with the camera using
the SnapBridge app, the app will automatically notify you when updates
become available, and you can then download the update to the camera
memory card via the smart device. For more information, see the
SnapBridge app’s online help. SnapBridge may not display the notification
at the same time that updates are made available on the Nikon Download
Center.
Reset All Settings
G
button
U
B
setup menu
Firmware Version
G
button
U
B
setup menu
755
F
The Network Menu: Network Connections
To view the network menu, select the
F
tab
in the camera menus.
The network menu contains the following items:
D
See Also
“Network Menu Defaults” (
0
489)
F
The Network Menu: Network
Connections
Item
0
[Airplane mode] 756
[Wired LAN] 756
[Connect to smart device] 757
[Connect to computer] 760
[Connect to FTP server] 765
[Connect to other cameras] 770
[USB] 773
[Start via LAN] 773
[Router frequency band] 774
[MAC address] 774
Item
0
756
F
The Network Menu: Network Connections
Select [ON] to disable the camera’s built-in Bluetooth and Wi-Fi
functions.
Select [ON] to connect to Ethernet networks. Connect an Ethernet cable
to the camera.
Airplane Mode
G
button
U
F
network menu
Wired LAN
G
button
U
F
network menu
757
F
The Network Menu: Network Connections
Connect to smartphones or tablets (smart
devices) via Bluetooth or Wi-Fi.
Pairing (Bluetooth)
Pair with or connect to smart devices using Bluetooth.
Connect to Smart Device
G
button
U
F
network menu
Option Description
[Start pairing] Pair the camera with a smart device (
0
313).
[Paired devices]
List paired smart devices. To connect, select a device
from the list.
[Bluetooth
connection]
Select [ON] to enable Bluetooth.
758
F
The Network Menu: Network Connections
Select Pictures for Upload
Select pictures for upload to a smart device. You can also opt to upload
pictures as they are taken.
Wi-Fi connection
Connect to smart devices via Wi-Fi.
❚❚
Establish Wi-Fi Connection
Initiate a Wi-Fi connection to a smart device.
•
The camera SSID and password will be displayed. To connect, select
the camera SSID on the smart device and enter the password (
0
317).
•
Once a connection is established, this option will change to [Close
Wi-Fi connection].
•
Use [Close Wi-Fi connection] to end the connection when desired.
Option Description
[Auto select for
upload]
Select [ON] to mark pictures for upload as they are
taken. Photos are uploaded in JPEG format at a size
of 2 megapixels, even if other upload size and
format options are selected with the camera.
[Manually select for
upload]
Upload selected pictures. Transfer marking appears
on the selected pictures.
[Deselect all] Remove transfer marking from all pictures.
759
F
The Network Menu: Network Connections
❚❚
Wi-Fi Connection Settings
Access the following Wi-Fi settings:
Upload While Off
If [ON] is selected, upload of pictures to smart devices connected via
Bluetooth will continue even when the camera is off.
Location Data (Smart Device)
Display latitude, longitude, altitude, and UTC (Universal Coordinated
Time) data downloaded from a smart device. Note that the camera may
be unable to download or display location data from smart devices
depending on the version of the device operating system and/or
SnapBridge app used.
Option Description
[SSID] Choose the camera SSID.
[Authentication/
encryption]
Choose [OPEN], [WPA2-PSK], [WPA3-SAE], or
[WPA2-PSK/WPA3-SAE].
[Password] Choose the camera password.
[Channel]
Choose a channel.
•
Select [Auto] to have the camera choose the
channel automatically.
•
Select [Manual] to choose the channel manually.
[Current settings] View current Wi-Fi settings.
[Reset connection
settings]
Select [Yes] to reset Wi-Fi settings to default values.
760
F
The Network Menu: Network Connections
Connect to computers via Ethernet or wireless
LAN.
Network Settings
Add camera network profiles. This item can also be used to choose from
existing network profiles.
❚❚
Create Profile
Create new network profiles (
0
329, 346).
•
If more than one profile already exists, you can press
J
to choose a
profile and connect to the selected network.
•
To edit an existing profile, highlight it and press
2
.
Connect to Computer
G
button
U
F
network menu
Option Description
[General]
•
[Profile name]: Rename the profile. The default profile
name is the same as the network SSID.
•
[Password protection]: Select [On] to require that a
password be entered before the profile can be changed.
To change the password, highlight [On] and press
2
.
761
F
The Network Menu: Network Connections
[Wireless]
Display connection settings for connection to wireless
networks.
•
Infrastructure mode: Adjust settings for connection to a
network via a router.
-[SSID]: Enter the network SSID.
-[Channel]: Selected automatically.
-[Authentication/encryption]: Select the type of
encryption used on the wireless network.
-[Password]: Enter the network password.
•
Access-point mode: Adjust settings for direct wireless
connection to the camera.
-[SSID]: Choose the camera SSID.
-[Channel]: Choose [Auto] or [Manual].
-[Authentication/encryption]: Select the type of
encryption used on the wireless network.
-[Password]: If an option other than [OPEN] is selected
for [Authentication/encryption], this item can be used
to change the camera password.
[TCP/IP]
Adjust TCP/IP settings for infrastructure connections. An IP
address is required.
•
If [ON] is selected for [Obtain automatically], the IP
address and sub-net mask for infrastructure mode
connections will be acquired via a DHCP server or
automatic IP addressing.
•
Select [OFF] to enter the IP address ([Address]) and sub-
net mask ([Mask]) manually.
Option Description
762
F
The Network Menu: Network Connections
❚❚
Copy to/from Card
Share network profiles.
•
If two memory cards are inserted, the profiles will be copied to and
from the card in Slot 1.
❚❚
End Current Connection
End the connection to the current network.
Connection Type
Choose an operating mode for use when the camera is connected to a
network.
Option Description
[Copy
profile from
card]
Copy profiles from the root directory of the memory card
to the camera profile list.
[Copy
profile to
card]
Copy profiles from the camera to the memory card.
Highlight a profile and press
J
to copy it to the memory
card.
•
Password-protected profiles cannot be copied.
Option Description
[Picture transfer]
Upload photos to a computer as they are taken or
upload existing pictures from the camera memory
card.
[Camera control]
Use Camera Control Pro 2 software (available
separately) to control the camera and take pictures
remotely from a computer.
763
F
The Network Menu: Network Connections
Options
Adjust upload settings.
❚❚
Auto Upload
Select [ON] to mark new photos for upload as they are taken.
•
Upload begins only after the photo has been recorded to the memory
card. Be sure a memory card is inserted in the camera.
•
Videos will not be uploaded automatically when recording is
complete. They must instead be uploaded from the playback display
(
0
253).
❚❚
Delete After Upload
Select [ON] to delete photographs from the camera memory card
automatically once upload is complete.
•
Files marked for transfer before you selected [ON] are not deleted.
•
Deletion may be suspended during some camera operations.
❚❚
Upload RAW + JPEG As
When uploading RAW + JPEG pictures, choose whether to upload both
the NEF (RAW) and JPEG files or only the JPEG copy.
•
When [RAW Slot 1 - JPEG Slot 2] is selected for [Role played by card
in Slot 2] in the photo shooting menu, the option chosen for [Upload
RAW + JPEG as] applies only to photos uploaded automatically by
selecting [ON] for [Auto upload].
764
F
The Network Menu: Network Connections
❚❚
JPEG + JPEG Slot Selection
Choose a source slot for auto upload when taking pictures with [JPEG
Slot 1 - JPEG Slot 2] selected for [Role played by card in Slot 2] in the
photo shooting menu.
❚❚
Upload Folder
Mark all photos in a selected folder for upload. Marking will be applied
to all photos, regardless of whether they have been uploaded
previously.
Videos will not be marked for upload. They must instead be uploaded
from the playback display.
❚❚
Deselect All?
Remove upload marking from all pictures. Upload of pictures with an
“uploading” icon will immediately be terminated.
765
F
The Network Menu: Network Connections
Connect to FTP servers via Ethernet or wireless LAN.
Network Settings
Add camera network profiles. This item can also be used to choose from
existing network profiles.
❚❚
Create Profile
Create new network profiles (
0
367, 382).
•
If more than one profile already exists, you can press
J
to choose a
profile and connect to the selected network.
•
To edit an existing profile, highlight it and press
2
.
Connect to FTP Server
G
button
U
F
network menu
Option Description
[General]
•
[Profile name]: Rename the profile. The default profile
name is the same as the network SSID.
•
[Password protection]: Select [On] to require that a
password be entered before the profile can be changed.
To change the password, highlight [On] and press
2
.
766
F
The Network Menu: Network Connections
[Wireless]
Display connection settings for connection to wireless
networks.
•
Infrastructure mode: Adjust settings for connection to a
network via a router.
-[SSID]: Enter the network SSID.
-[Channel]: Selected automatically.
-[Authentication/encryption]: Select the type of
encryption used on the wireless network.
-[Password]: Enter the network password.
•
Access-point mode: Adjust settings for direct wireless
connection to the camera.
-[SSID]: Choose the camera SSID.
-[Channel]: Choose [Auto] or [Manual].
-[Authentication/encryption]: Select the type of
encryption used on the wireless network.
-[Password]: If an option other than [OPEN] is selected
for [Authentication/encryption], this item can be used
to change the camera password.
[TCP/IP]
Adjust TCP/IP settings for infrastructure connections. An IP
address is required.
•
[Obtain automatically]: If [ON] is selected, the IP
address and sub-net mask for infrastructure mode
connections will be acquired via a DHCP server or
automatic IP addressing. Select [OFF] to enter the IP
address ([Address]) and sub-net mask ([Mask]) manually.
•
[Gateway]: Enter the network’s default gateway address,
if required.
•
[Domain Name Server (DNS)]: If a DNS is present on the
same network as the FTP server, enter its address.
Option Description
767
F
The Network Menu: Network Connections
❚❚
Copy to/from Card
Share network profiles.
•
If two memory cards are inserted, the profiles will be copied to and
from the card in Slot 1.
❚❚
End Current Connection
End the connection to the current network.
[FTP]
•
[Server type]: Choose the FTP server type and enter the
URL or IP address, destination folder, and port number.
An IP address is required.
•
[PASV mode]: Select [ON] to enable PASV mode.
•
[Anonymous login]: Select [ON] for anonymous login.
This option can only be used with servers that are
configured for anonymous login. Select [OFF] to supply a
user ID and password.
•
[Proxy server]: Enable this option as required.
Option Description
[Copy
profile from
card]
Copy profiles from the root directory of the memory card
to the camera profile list.
[Copy
profile to
card]
Copy profiles from the camera to the memory card.
Highlight a profile and press
J
to copy it to the memory
card.
•
Password-protected profiles cannot be copied.
Option Description
768
F
The Network Menu: Network Connections
Options
Adjust upload settings.
❚❚
Auto Upload
Select [ON] to mark new photos for upload as they are taken.
•
Upload begins only after the photo has been recorded to the memory
card. Be sure a memory card is inserted in the camera.
•
Videos will not be uploaded automatically when recording is
complete. They must instead be uploaded from the playback display
(
0
253).
❚❚
Delete After Upload
Select [ON] to delete photographs from the camera memory card
automatically once upload is complete.
•
Files marked for transfer before you selected [ON] are not deleted.
•
Deletion may be suspended during some camera operations.
❚❚
Upload RAW + JPEG As
When uploading RAW + JPEG pictures, choose whether to upload both
the NEF (RAW) and JPEG files or only the JPEG copy.
•
When [RAW Slot 1 - JPEG Slot 2] is selected for [Role played by card
in Slot 2] in the photo shooting menu, the option chosen for [Upload
RAW + JPEG as] applies only to photos uploaded automatically by
selecting [ON] for [Auto upload].
769
F
The Network Menu: Network Connections
❚❚
JPEG + JPEG Slot Selection
Choose a source slot for auto upload when taking pictures with [JPEG
Slot 1 - JPEG Slot 2] selected for [Role played by card in Slot 2] in the
photo shooting menu.
❚❚
Overwrite If Same Name
Choose [ON] to overwrite files with duplicate names during upload.
Choose [OFF] to add numbers to the names of newly uploaded files as
necessary to prevent existing files being overwritten.
❚❚
Protect If Marked for Upload
Select [ON] to automatically protect files marked for upload. Protection
is removed as the files are uploaded.
❚❚
Upload Marking
Select [ON] to add a timestamp to the pictures on the camera memory
card giving the time of upload.
The timestamp can be viewed using NX Studio. For more information,
see NX Studio’s online help.
❚❚
Upload Folder
Mark all photos in a selected folder for upload. Marking will be applied
to all photos, regardless of whether they have been uploaded
previously.
Videos will not be marked for upload. They must instead be uploaded
from the playback display.
❚❚
Deselect All?
Remove upload marking from all pictures. Upload of pictures with an
“uploading” icon will immediately be terminated.
770
F
The Network Menu: Network Connections
Connect to other cameras for shutter or clock synchronization.
Synchronized Release
Select [ON] to synchronize the shutter release with those of cameras on
the same network.
Network Settings
Add camera network profiles. This item can also be used to choose from
existing network profiles.
❚❚
Create Profile
Create new network profiles (
0
402).
•
If more than one profile already exists, you can press
J
to choose a
profile and connect to the selected network.
•
To edit an existing profile, highlight it and press
2
.
Connect to Other Cameras
G
button
U
F
network menu
Option Description
[General]
•
[Profile name]: Rename the profile. The default profile
name is the same as the network SSID.
•
[Password protection]: Select [On] to require that a
password be entered before the profile can be changed.
To change the password, highlight [On] and press
2
.
771
F
The Network Menu: Network Connections
❚❚
Copy to/from Card
Share network profiles.
•
If two memory cards are inserted, the profiles will be copied to and
from the card in Slot 1.
❚❚
End Current Connection
End the connection to the current network.
[TCP/IP]
Adjust TCP/IP settings for infrastructure connections. An IP
address is required.
•
If [ON] is selected for [Obtain automatically], the IP
address and sub-net mask for infrastructure mode
connections will be acquired via a DHCP server or
automatic IP addressing.
•
Select [OFF] to enter the IP address ([Address]) and sub-
net mask ([Mask]) manually.
Option Description
[Copy
profile from
card]
Copy profiles from the root directory of the memory card
to the camera profile list.
[Copy
profile to
card]
Copy profiles from the camera to the memory card.
Highlight a profile and press
J
to copy it to the memory
card.
•
Password-protected profiles cannot be copied.
Option Description
772
F
The Network Menu: Network Connections
Group Name
Choose a group for synchronized release. Shutter release is
synchronized across the cameras on the network that are in the same
group.
Master/Remote
Choose a role for each camera from “master” and “remote”. Pressing the
shutter-release button on the master camera releases the shutters on all
remote cameras that are both on the same network and in the same
group.
Remote Camera List
The master camera lists the remote cameras connected.
Synchronize Date and Time
Set the clocks on the remote cameras to the date and time reported by
the master camera (
0
421).
773
F
The Network Menu: Network Connections
Choose the host device type for USB connections.
•
Select [MTP/PTP] when connecting to computers or Android devices.
•
Select [iPhone] only when connecting to iPhones via a third-party
USB-C to Lightning cable in order to use NX MobileAir (for information
on compatible USB-C to Lightning cables, see the online help for
NX MobileAir).
D
“[iPhone]”
Selecting [iPhone] disables the camera’s built-in network features. Select
[MTP/PTP] except when using NX MobileAir.
If [ON] is selected, the standby timer can be activated by signals from a
computer connected via Ethernet.
USB
G
button
U
F
network menu
Start via LAN
G
button
U
F
network menu
774
F
The Network Menu: Network Connections
Choose the band for the selected SSID when
connecting to a wireless network in
infrastructure mode. Select [2.4 GHz/5 GHz]
to connect to networks operating on either
band.
•
When the camera searches for networks
active in the vicinity, it will list only those
operating on the chosen band or bands.
•
The band is listed to the left of the network SSID.
•
If you select [2.4 GHz/5 GHz] when connecting via wireless routers
that operate on both bands, the list will include the SSIDs in the band
or bands detected by the camera.
View the MAC address.
Router Frequency Band
G
button
U
F
network menu
MAC Address
G
button
U
F
network menu
775
O
My Menu/
m
Recent Settings
To view [MY MENU], select the
O
tab in the
camera menus.
O
My Menu: Creating a Custom Menu
My Menu can be used to create and edit a customized list of up to
20 items from the photo shooting, video recording, Custom Settings,
playback, setup, and network menus. Items can be added, deleted, and
reordered as described below.
❚❚
Adding Items to My Menu
1
Select [Add items] in [
O
MY MENU].
Highlight [Add items] and press
2
.
O
My Menu/
m
Recent Settings
776
O
My Menu/
m
Recent Settings
2
Select a menu.
Highlight the name of the menu
containing the item you wish to add and
press
2
.
3
Select an item.
Highlight the desired menu item and
press
J
.
4
Position the new item.
Press
1
or
3
to position the new item
and press
J
to add it to My Menu.
5
Add more items.
•
The items currently displayed in My
Menu are indicated by a check mark (
L
).
•
Items indicated by a
V
icon cannot be
selected.
•
Repeat Steps 1–4 to select additional
items.
777
O
My Menu/
m
Recent Settings
❚❚
Removing Items from My Menu
1
Select [Remove items] in [
O
MY MENU].
Highlight [Remove items] and press
2
.
2
Select items.
•
Highlight items and press
J
or
2
to
select (
M
) or deselect.
•
Continue until all the items you wish to
remove are selected (
L
).
3
Remove the selected items.
Press
O
(
Q
); a confirmation dialog will be
displayed. Press
J
to remove the selected
items.
D
Removing Items While in My Menu
Items can also be removed by highlighting them in [
O
MY MENU] and
pressing the
O
(
Q
) button; a confirmation dialog will be displayed. Press
O
(
Q
) again to remove the selected item.
778
O
My Menu/
m
Recent Settings
❚❚
Reordering Items in My Menu
1
Select [Rank items] in [
O
MY MENU].
Highlight [Rank items] and press
2
.
2
Select an item.
Highlight the item you wish to move and
press
J
.
3
Position the item.
•
Press
1
or
3
to move the item up or
down in My Menu and press
J
.
•
Repeat Steps 2–3 to reposition
additional items.
4
Exit to [
O
MY MENU].
Press the
G
button to return to [
O
MY
MENU].
779
O
My Menu/
m
Recent Settings
❚❚
Displaying [RECENT SETTINGS]
1
Select [Choose tab] in [
O
MY MENU].
Highlight [Choose tab] and press
2
.
2
Select [
m
RECENT SETTINGS].
•
Highlight [
m
RECENT SETTINGS] in the
[Choose tab] menu and press
J
.
•
The name of the menu will change from
[MY MENU] to [RECENT SETTINGS].
780
O
My Menu/
m
Recent Settings
m
Recent Settings: Accessing Recently-Used
Settings
❚❚
How Items Are Added to [RECENT SETTINGS]
Menu items are added to the top of the
[RECENT SETTINGS] menu as they are used.
The twenty most recently-used settings are
listed.
D
Removing Items from the Recent Settings Menu
To remove an item from the [RECENT SETTINGS] menu, highlight it and
press the
O
(
Q
) button; a confirmation dialog will be displayed. Press
O
(
Q
)
again to remove the selected item.
D
Displaying My Menu
Selecting [RECENT SETTINGS] > [Choose tab] menu displays the items
shown in Step 2 of “Displaying [RECENT SETTINGS]” (
0
779). Highlight
[
O
MY MENU] and press
J
to view My Menu.
781
Before Contacting Customer Support
Troubleshooting
You may be able to resolve any issues with the camera by following the
steps below. Check this list before consulting your retailer or Nikon-
authorized service representative.
Before Contacting Customer Support
STEP
1
Check the list of common problems.
Common problems and solutions are listed in the following
sections:
•
“Problems and Solutions” (
0
783)
•
“Alerts and Error Messages” (
0
794)
STEP
2
Turn the camera off and remove the battery, then wait
about a minute, re-insert the battery and turn the camera
on.
D
The camera may continue to write data to the memory card
after shooting. Wait at least a minute before removing the
battery.
STEP
3
Search Nikon websites.
•
For support information and answers to frequently asked
questions, visit the website for your country or region (
0
33).
•
To download the latest firmware for your camera, visit:
https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/
STEP
4
Consult a Nikon-authorized service representative.
782
Before Contacting Customer Support
D
Restoring Default Settings
•
Depending on current settings, some menu items and other features may
be unavailable. To access menu items that are grayed out or features that
are otherwise unavailable, try restoring default settings using the [Reset all
settings] item in the setup menu.
•
Note, however, that wireless network profiles, copyright information, and
other user-generated entries will also be reset. Once reset, settings cannot
be restored.
783
Problems and Solutions
Solutions to some common issues are listed below.
Battery/Display
Problems and Solutions
●
The camera is on but does not respond:
•
Wait for recording and other operations to end.
•
If the problem persists, turn the camera off.
•
If the camera does not turn off, remove and reinsert the battery.
•
If you are using an AC adapter, disconnect and reconnect the AC
adapter.
- Any data currently being recorded will be lost.
- Data that have already been recorded are not affected by removing
or disconnecting the power source.
●
The viewfinder or monitor does not turn on:
•
Have you changed the monitor mode? Choose a different monitor
mode using the
M
button.
•
Have you limited the choice of monitor modes available using the
[Limit monitor mode selection] item in the setup menu? Adjust
settings as required.
•
Dust, lint, or other foreign matter on the eye sensor may prevent it
functioning normally. Clean the eye sensor with a blower.
●
The viewfinder is out of focus:
•
Rotate the diopter adjustment control to adjust viewfinder focus.
•
If adjusting viewfinder focus does not correct the problem, set the
focus mode to AF-S and the AF-area mode to single-point AF. Next,
select the center focus point, choose a high-contrast subject, and focus
using autofocus. With the camera in focus, use the diopter adjustment
control to bring the subject into clear focus in the viewfinder.
784
Problems and Solutions
Shooting
●
The display in the control panel, viewfinder, or monitor turns off
without warning:
Choose longer delays for Custom Setting c3 [Power off delay].
●
The control panel is unresponsive and dim:
Control panel response times and brightness vary with temperature.
●
The viewfinder is unresponsive:
The display refresh rate may drop about 20 seconds before the standby
timer turns off. The length of time before the standby timer expires
automatically can be selected using Custom Setting c3 [Power off
delay] > [Standby timer].
●
The camera takes time to turn on:
More time will be needed to find files if the memory card contains large
numbers of files or folders.
●
The shutter cannot be released:
•
Is a memory card inserted, and if so, does it have space available?
•
If you selected mode S after selecting a shutter speed of “Bulb” or
“Time” in mode M, choose a different shutter speed.
•
Is [Release locked] selected for [Slot empty release lock] in the setup
menu?
●
Burst shooting is unavailable:
Burst shooting cannot be used in conjunction with HDR.
785
Problems and Solutions
●
Photos are out of focus:
•
Is the camera in manual focus mode? To enable autofocus, select AF-S,
AF-C, or AF-F for focus mode.
•
The camera may be unable to focus if:
- the subject contains lines parallel to the long edge of the frame,
- the subject lacks contrast,
- the subject in the focus point contains areas of sharply contrasting
brightness,
- the focus point includes night-time spot lighting or a neon sign or
other light source that changes in brightness,
- flicker or banding appears under fluorescent, mercury-vapor,
sodium-vapor, or similar lighting,
- a cross (star) filter or other special filter is used,
- the subject appears smaller than the focus point, or
- the subject is dominated by regular geometric patterns (e.g., blinds
or a row of windows in a skyscraper).
•
In focus mode AF-C, the focus point may flash while the shutter-
release button is pressed halfway or the AF-ON button is pressed,
indicating that the camera is no longer able to focus. The focus
operation can be resumed by releasing and then pressing the button
again.
●
The beep does not sound:
•
Is [ON] selected for [Silent mode] in the setup menu?
•
A beep does not sound when the camera focuses with AF-C selected
for focus mode.
•
Select an option other than [Off] for [Camera sounds]> [Beep on/off]
in the setup menu.
•
The beep does not sound in video mode.
786
Problems and Solutions
●
The full range of shutter speeds is not available:
Using a flash restricts the range of shutter speeds available. Flash sync
speed can be set to values of
1
/
200
–
1
/
60
s using Custom Setting e1 [Flash
sync speed]. When using flash units that support auto FP high-speed
sync, choose [1/250 s (Auto FP)] or [1/200 s (Auto FP)] for shutter
speeds as fast as
1
/
8000
s.
●
Focus does not lock when the shutter-release button is pressed
halfway:
When AF-C is selected for focus mode, focus can be locked by pressing
the center of the sub-selector.
●
Focus-point selection is not available:
Focus-point selection is not available when [Auto-area AF] is selected
for AF-area mode.
●
Focus-mode selection is not available.
Select [No restrictions] for Custom Settings a9 and g5 [Focus mode
restrictions].
●
The camera is slow to record photos:
Is [ON] selected for [Long exposure NR] in the photo shooting menu?
●
Photographs and videos do not appear to have the same exposure
as the preview shown in the display:
•
The effects of changes to settings that affect exposure and color are
not visible in the display when [Adjust for ease of viewing] is selected
for Custom Setting d8 [View mode (photo Lv)]. Note that even when
[Show effects of settings] is selected for Custom Setting d8, display
brightness will be adjusted for ease of viewing (per [Adjust for ease of
viewing]) in mode M when a flash unit is attached.
•
Note that changes to [Monitor brightness] and [Viewfinder
brightness] have no effect on pictures recorded with the camera.
787
Problems and Solutions
●
Flicker or banding appears in video mode:
Select [Video flicker reduction] in the video recording menu and
choose an option that matches the frequency of the local AC power
supply.
●
Bright regions or bands appear:
Bright regions or bands may occur if the subject is lit by a flashing sign,
flash, or other light source with brief duration.
●
Smudges appear in photographs:
•
Are there smudges on the front or rear (mount-side) lens elements?
•
Is there foreign matter on the image sensor? Perform image sensor
cleaning.
●
Pictures are affected by noticeable ghosting or flare:
You may notice ghosting or flare in shots that include the sun or other
bright light sources. These effects can be mitigated by attaching a lens
hood or by composing shots with bright light sources well out of the
frame. You can also try such techniques as removing lens filters or
choosing a different shutter speed.
●
Bokeh is irregular:
With fast shutter speeds and/or fast lenses, you may notice irregularities
in how bokeh is shaped. The effect can be mitigated by choosing slower
shutter speeds and/or higher f-numbers.
●
Shooting ends unexpectedly or does not start:
•
Shooting may end automatically to prevent the camera overheating,
for example if:
- the ambient temperature is high,
- the camera has been used for extended periods to record videos, or
- the camera has been used in continuous release modes for extended
periods.
•
If pictures cannot be taken because the camera is running hot, turn the
camera off and wait for it to cool before trying to take pictures again.
Note that the camera may feel warm to the touch, but this does not
indicate a malfunction.
788
Problems and Solutions
●
Image artifacts appear in the display during shooting:
•
To reduce noise, adjust settings such as ISO sensitivity, shutter speed,
or Active D-Lighting.
•
At high ISO sensitivities, noise may become more noticeable in long
exposures or in pictures recorded when the camera temperature is
elevated.
•
Randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or bright spots may arise as a
result of increases in the temperature of the camera’s internal circuits.
Turn the camera off when it is not in use.
•
Randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, lines or unexpected colors may
appear if you press the
X
button to zoom in on the view through the
lens during shooting.
•
Note that the distribution of noise in the display may differ from that in
the final picture.
•
This issue can sometimes be addressed by checking and optimizing
the image sensor. Perform pixel mapping using [Pixel mapping] in the
setup menu.
●
The camera cannot measure a value for preset manual white
balance:
The subject is too dark or too bright.
●
Certain pictures cannot be selected as sources for preset manual
white balance:
Pictures created with cameras of other types cannot serve as sources for
preset manual white balance.
●
White balance (WB) bracketing is unavailable:
•
White balance bracketing is not available when an NEF (RAW) or RAW +
JPEG option is selected for image quality.
•
White balance bracketing cannot be used in multiple exposure and
HDR overlay modes.
789
Problems and Solutions
●
The effects of [Set Picture Control] differ from picture to picture:
[Auto] is selected for [Set Picture Control] or as the basis for a custom
Picture Control created using [Manage Picture Control], or [A] (auto) is
selected for [Quick sharp], [Contrast], or [Saturation]. For consistent
results over a series of photographs, choose a setting other than [A]
(auto).
●
The option selected for metering cannot be changed:
The option selected for metering cannot be changed during exposure
lock.
●
Exposure compensation is not available:
Changes to exposure compensation in mode M apply only to the
exposure indicator and have no effect on shutter speed or aperture.
●
Uneven shading appears in long exposures:
Uneven shading may appear in long exposures shot at shutter speeds of
“Bulb” or “Time”. The effect can be mitigated by selecting [ON] for [Long
exposure NR] in the photo shooting menu.
●
The AF-assist illuminator does not light:
•
Is [OFF] selected for Custom Setting a12 [Built-in AF-assist
illuminator]?
•
The illuminator does not light in video mode.
•
The illuminator does not light when AF-C or MF is selected for focus
mode.
●
Sound is not recorded with videos:
•
Is [Microphone off] selected for [Microphone sensitivity] in the video
recording menu?
•
Was the video recorded with [Microphone sensitivity]> [Manual]
chosen in the video recording menu and a low sensitivity selected?
790
Problems and Solutions
Playback
●
NEF (RAW) pictures are not visible during playback:
The camera displays only the JPEG copies of pictures taken with [RAW +
JPEG fine
m
], [RAW + JPEG fine], [RAW + JPEG normal
m
], [RAW + JPEG
normal], [RAW + JPEG basic
m
], or [RAW + JPEG basic] selected for
[Image quality].
●
Pictures taken with other cameras are not displayed:
Pictures recorded with other types of camera may not display correctly.
●
Not all photos are visible during playback:
Select [All] for [Playback folder] in the playback menu.
●
“Tall” (portrait) orientation photos are displayed in “wide”
(landscape) orientation:
•
Is [OFF] selected for [Rotate tall] in the playback menu?
•
Auto picture rotation is not available during picture review.
•
Camera orientation may not be correctly recorded in photos taken
with the camera pointing up or down.
●
Pictures cannot be deleted:
Are the pictures protected?
●
Pictures cannot be retouched:
•
The pictures cannot be further edited with this camera.
•
There is insufficient space on the memory card to record the retouched
copy.
●
The camera displays the message, “[Folder contains no pictures.]”:
Select [All] for [Playback folder] in the playback menu.
●
NEF (RAW) pictures cannot be printed:
•
Print JPEG copies of the pictures created using a tool such as the [RAW
processing (current picture)] or [RAW processing (multiple
pictures)] items in the playback
i
menu.
•
Copy the pictures to a computer and print them using NX Studio or
other software that supports the NEF (RAW) format.
791
Problems and Solutions
●
Pictures are not displayed on HDMI devices:
Confirm that an HDMI cable is correctly connected.
●
Output to HDMI devices does not function as expected:
•
Confirm that an HDMI cable is correctly connected.
•
Is [ON] selected for [External rec. cntrl (HDMI)] in the video recording
menu?
•
Pictures may display correctly if default settings are restored using the
[Reset all settings] item in the setup menu.
●
The Image Dust Off option in NX Studio does not have desired
effect:
Image sensor cleaning changes the position of dust on the image sensor
and will not have the desired effect if:
•
Image Dust Off reference data recorded after image sensor cleaning is
performed are used with photographs taken before image sensor
cleaning is performed, or
•
Image Dust Off reference data recorded before image sensor cleaning
is performed are used with photographs taken after image sensor
cleaning is performed.
●
The effects of [Set Picture Control], [Active D-Lighting], or [Vignette
control] are not visible:
In the case of NEF (RAW) pictures, the effects can only be viewed using
Nikon software. View NEF (RAW) pictures using NX Studio.
●
Pictures cannot be copied to a computer:
Depending on the operating system, you may be unable to upload
pictures when the camera is connected to a computer. Copy pictures
from the memory card to a computer using a card reader or other device.
792
Problems and Solutions
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi (Wireless Networks)
●
Smart devices do not display the camera SSID (network name):
•
Navigate to the network menu and confirm both that [OFF] is selected
for [Airplane mode] and that [ON] is selected for [Connect to smart
device]> [Pairing (Bluetooth)]> [Bluetooth connection].
•
Confirm that [Connect to smart device]> [Wi-Fi connection] is
enabled in the network menu.
•
Try disabling and re-enabling wireless network features on the smart
device.
●
The camera cannot connect to printers and other wireless devices:
The camera cannot establish wireless connections with devices other
than smartphones, tablets, and computers.
●
Pictures cannot be uploaded to smart devices via auto upload:
•
If [Foreground] is selected for [Auto link] > [Link mode] in the
SnapBridge tab, pictures will not be uploaded to the smart device
automatically while the SnapBridge app is running in the background.
Pictures will only be uploaded when the SnapBridge app is displayed
(running in the foreground) on the smart device.
•
Check that the camera is paired with the smart device.
•
Check that the camera and smart device are configured for connection
via Bluetooth.
●
The camera cannot download location data from the smart device:
•
The camera may be unable to download or display location data from
smart devices depending on the version of the operating system and/
or SnapBridge app used.
•
If [Foreground] is selected for [Auto link] > [Link mode] in the
SnapBridge tab, location data will not be downloaded to the
camera. Instead, they will be embedded in photographs after they are
uploaded to the smart device.
793
Problems and Solutions
Miscellaneous
●
The date of recording is not correct:
Is the camera clock set correctly? The clock is less accurate than most
watches and household clocks; check it regularly against more accurate
timepieces and reset as necessary.
●
Menu items cannot be selected:
Some items are not available at certain combinations of settings.
794
Alerts and Error Messages
This section lists the alerts and error messages that appear in the control
panel and camera display.
Alerts
The following alerts appear in the control panel and camera display:
Alerts and Error Messages
Alert
Problem/solution
Camera
display
Control
panel
H
Low battery.
Ready spare battery.
l
Lens is not correctly attached.
•
Ensure that the lens is correctly attached.
•
Ensure that retractable lenses are extended.
•
This indicator is also displayed when a non-CPU
lens is attached via a mount adapter, but in this
case no action need be taken.
Bulb
(flashes)
“Bulb” selected in mode S.
•
Change shutter speed.
•
Select mode M.
Time
(flashes)
“Time” selected in mode S.
•
Change shutter speed.
•
Select mode M.
Busy
(flashes)
Processing in progress.
Wait until processing is complete.
795
Alerts and Error Messages
(Exposure indicators
and shutter speed or
aperture display
flash)
Subject too bright; limits of camera exposure
metering system exceeded.
•
Lower ISO sensitivity.
•
Mode P: Use third-party ND (neutral density) filter
(filter can also be used if alert is still displayed after
following settings are adjusted in mode S or A).
•
Mode S: Choose faster shutter speed.
•
Mode A: Choose smaller aperture (higher
f-number).
Subject too dark; limits of camera exposure
metering system exceeded.
•
Increase ISO sensitivity.
•
Mode P: Use optional flash unit (flash can also be
used if alert is still displayed after following
settings are adjusted in mode S or A).
•
Mode S: Choose slower shutter speed.
•
Mode A: Choose wider aperture (lower f-number).
c
(flashes)
—
Flash has fired at full power.
Photo may be underexposed. Check distance to
subject and settings such as aperture, flash range,
and ISO sensitivity.
Alert
Problem/solution
Camera
display
Control
panel
796
Alerts and Error Messages
Full
(flashes)
Memory insufficient to record further photos.
•
Delete pictures from memory card until there is
room for additional pictures to be recorded. Copy
pictures you wish to keep to computer or other
device before proceeding.
•
Insert new memory card.
Camera has run out of file numbers.
•
Delete pictures from memory card until there is
room for additional pictures to be recorded. Copy
pictures you wish to keep to computer or other
device before proceeding.
•
Insert new memory card.
Err
(flashes)
Camera malfunction.
Press shutter-release button again. If error persists or
appears frequently, consult Nikon-authorized
service representative.
Alert
Problem/solution
Camera
display
Control
panel
797
Alerts and Error Messages
Error Messages
The following error messages may appear in the camera display:
Message
Problem/solution
Camera display
Control
panel
Shutter release
disabled.
Recharge
battery.
—
Battery exhausted.
•
Replace with spare battery.
•
Charge battery.
This battery is
unable to pro-
vide data to the
camera and
cannot be used.
For safety,
choose a battery
designated for
use in this
camera.
—
Battery info not available.
•
Battery cannot be used. Contact Nikon-
authorized service representative.
•
Battery level is extremely low; charge
battery.
—
Battery cannot supply data to camera.
Replace third-party batteries with genuine
Nikon batteries.
No memory
card.
[–E–]
The memory card is inserted incorrectly or
not at all.
Check that card is inserted correctly.
798
Alerts and Error Messages
Cannot access
this memory
card. Insert
another card.
Card, Err
(flashes)
Error accessing memory card.
•
Check that camera supports memory card.
•
Insert new memory card.
•
If error persists after card has been
repeatedly ejected and reinserted, card may
be damaged. Contact retailer or Nikon-
authorized service representative.
Unable to create new folder.
Insert new memory card.
This card is not
formatted.
Format the card.
For
(flashes)
Memory card is not correctly formatted.
•
Format memory card.
•
Replace with correctly-formatted memory
card.
FTZ mount
adapter
firmware version
not supported.
Upgrade FTZ
firmware.
—
Mount adapter firmware out of date.
Update to the latest version of the mount
adapter firmware. For more information, visit
the Nikon website for your country or region.
Message
Problem/solution
Camera display
Control
panel
799
Alerts and Error Messages
Recording
interrupted.
Please wait.
—
Memory card does not support required
video write speed.
Use card that supports required write speed
or change option selected for [Frame size/
frame rate] in video recording menu.
The camera is
too hot. It
cannot be used
until it cools.
Please wait.
Camera will turn
itself off.
—
Camera’s internal temperature is elevated.
Suspend shooting until camera has cooled.
High battery temperature.
Remove battery and wait for it to cool.
Folder contains
no pictures.
—
Folder contains no pictures.
Insert memory card that contains pictures.
No pictures in folder selected for playback.
Use [Playback folder] item in playback menu
to select folder that contains pictures.
Message
Problem/solution
Camera display
Control
panel
800
Alerts and Error Messages
Cannot display
this file.
—
File has been modified using computer
application or does not conform to DCF file
standard.
Do not overwrite pictures using computer
applications.
File is corrupt.
Do not overwrite pictures using computer
applications.
Cannot select
this file.
—
Selected picture cannot be retouched.
Retouch options are available only with
pictures taken with or previously retouched
on camera.
This video
cannot be
edited.
—
Selected video cannot be edited.
•
Videos created with other devices cannot be
edited.
•
Videos under two seconds long cannot be
edited.
This file cannot
be saved to the
destination
memory card.
See the camera
manual for
details.
—
Files 4 GB or larger can only be saved to
memory cards formatted for exFAT. They
will not be saved to cards in other formats
such as FAT32.
Use a memory card with a capacity over 64 GB
formatted in the camera or keep file size to
under 4 GB.
Message
Problem/solution
Camera display
Control
panel
801
Compatible Lenses and Accessories
Technical Notes
The camera can be used with all Z mount lenses.
Be sure to update to the latest versions of the camera and lens firmware.
With earlier versions, some functions may not be available or the
camera may fail to correctly detect the lens. The latest firmware is
available from the Nikon Download Center.
A
Compatible F Mount Lenses
F mount lenses can be mounted on Z mount cameras using an FTZ II/FTZ
mount adapter.
•
Some features may not be available depending on the lens used.
Information on the F mount lenses that can be used with Z mount cameras
and on any restrictions that may apply can be found in Compatible F Mount
Lenses, available from the Nikon Download Center:
https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/
Compatible Lenses and Accessories
Confirm that the lens name includes “NIKKOR Z”.
802
Camera Displays
The displays show information on current settings. Other icons or
warnings may occasionally be displayed, for example when settings are
changed.
The Monitor
❚❚
Photo Mode
Camera Displays
41
40
42
43
46
47
48
45
44
22
39
35 1312815614279101114161718
24
25
23
19
20
21
323436 2838 303137 26273335 29
1
Shooting mode (
0
132)
2
Flexible program indicator
(
0
133)
3
AF-area brackets (
0
113)
4
Temperature warning
5
Release mode (
0
145)
6
Interval timer indicator (
0
542)
t
icon (
0
87)
“No memory card” indicator
(
0
81, 804)
Memory card high-temperature
warning (
0
82)
803
Camera Displays
7
Focus mode (
0
110)
8
Time-lapse video recording
indicator (
0
556)
9
AF-area mode (
0
113)
10
Subject detection (
0
119)
11
Flash mode (
0
429)
12
Track log indicator (
0
204)
13
Satellite signal indicator
(
0
205)
14
White balance (
0
158)
15
Image quality (
0
105)
16
Active D-Lighting (
0
512)
17
Image size (
0
108)
18
Picture Control (
0
192)
19
Image area (
0
102)
20
Exposure and flash bracketing
indicator (
0
178)
WB bracketing indicator
(
0
183)
ADL bracketing indicator
(
0
187)
HDR indicator (
0
538)
Multiple exposure indicator
(
0
530)
21
Number of shots in exposure
and flash bracketing sequence
(
0
178)
Number of shots in WB
bracketing sequence (
0
183)
Number of shots in ADL
bracketing sequence (
0
187)
HDR strength (
0
538)
Number of shots in multiple
exposure (
0
530)
22
Exposure indicator
Exposure (
0
136)
Exposure compensation
(
0
143)
Auto bracketing (
0
177)
23
i
icon (
0
65)
24
Battery indicator (
0
80)
25
USB power delivery (
0
744)
26
Flash-ready indicator (
0
423)
27
Number of exposures
remaining (
0
81, 887)
Camera control mode (
0
854)
28
Wi-Fi connection indicator
(
0
317, 329, 367)
Bluetooth connection indicator
(
0
757)
Airplane mode (
0
756)
804
Camera Displays
D
Temperature Warnings
•
If the camera temperature becomes elevated, a temperature warning and
count-down timer will be displayed. When the timer reaches zero, the
shooting display will turn off.
•
The timer turns red when the thirty second mark is reached. In some cases,
the timer may be displayed immediately after the camera is turned on.
D
Memory Card High-Temperature Warning
A high-temperature warning appears in the shooting display when the
temperature of the memory card rises. Do not attempt to remove the
memory card; instead, wait for the camera to cool and the warning to clear
from the display.
D
No Memory Card Inserted
If no memory card is inserted, a “no memory card” indicator will appear in
the shooting display and [–E–] will appear in both the control panel and the
shooting display.
29
ISO sensitivity (
0
154)
30
ISO sensitivity indicator (
0
154)
Auto ISO sensitivity indicator
(
0
156)
31
Exposure compensation
indicator (
0
143)
32
Flash compensation indicator
(
0
432)
33
Aperture (
0
134, 135)
34
Aperture lock icon (
0
665)
35
Shutter speed (
0
133, 135)
36
Shutter speed lock icon (
0
665)
37
Focus indicator (
0
129)
38
Metering (
0
520)
39
Autoexposure (AE) lock (
0
141)
40
Auto white-balance (AWB) lock
(
0
647)
41
Touch shooting (
0
53, 124)
42
Vibration reduction indicator
(
0
526)
43
Silent mode (
0
735)
44
FV lock indicator (
0
434)
45
Focus point (
0
123)
46
Flicker detection (
0
518)
47
Teleconverter indicator
48
View mode (
0
624)
806
Camera Displays
321
4
5
6
8
9
7
10
11
12
1
Wi-Fi connection indicator
(
0
317, 329, 367)
Bluetooth connection indicator
(
0
757)
2
Satellite signal indicator
(
0
205)
3
Track log indicator (
0
204)
4
Exposure and flash bracketing
indicator (
0
178)
WB bracketing indicator
(
0
183)
ADL bracketing indicator
(
0
187)
HDR indicator (
0
538)
Multiple exposure indicator
(
0
530)
5
Number of exposures
remaining (
0
81, 887)
Camera control mode (
0
854)
6
i
icon (
0
65)
7
ISO sensitivity (
0
154)
8
ISO sensitivity indicator (
0
154)
Auto ISO sensitivity indicator
(
0
156)
9
FV lock indicator (
0
434)
10
Autoexposure (AE) lock (
0
141)
11
Flash compensation indicator
(
0
432)
12
Exposure compensation
indicator (
0
143)
Exposure compensation value
(
0
143)
807
Camera Displays
2134
567
14
15
13
19 8
12
18 9
16
20
11
17 10
1
t
icon (
0
87)
2
Interval timer indicator (
0
542)
Time-lapse video indicator
(
0
556)
3
Flash control mode (
0
426)
Silent mode (
0
735)
4
Long-exposure noise reduction
indicator (
0
514)
5
“Beep” indicator (
0
733)
6
Battery indicator (
0
80)
7
USB power delivery (
0
744)
8
Image size (
0
108)
9
AF-area mode/subject
detection (
0
113)
10
Focus mode (
0
110)
11
View memory card info (
0
645)
12
Airplane mode (
0
756)
13
Custom controls (shooting)
(
0
647)
14
Shooting menu bank (
0
493)
15
Vibration reduction indicator
(
0
526)
16
Metering (
0
520)
17
Picture Control (
0
192)
18
White balance (
0
158)
19
Image quality (
0
105)
20
Temperature warning
808
Camera Displays
❚❚
Video Mode
12
13
14
12 3 564
8
9
7
1011
1
Recording indicator (
0
93)
“No video” indicator (
0
94)
2
External recording control
(
0
302)
3
Video recording time (
0
93)
Timecode (
0
591)
4
Frame size and rate (
0
216)
5
Destination (
0
578)
6
Time remaining (
0
93)
7
Picture Control (
0
192)
Tone mode (
0
215)
8
Image area (
0
218)
9
Video file type (
0
214)
10
Sound level (
0
588)
11
Microphone sensitivity (
0
588)
12
Electronic VR indicator (
0
587)
13
Headphone volume (
0
590)
14
Zebra pattern (
0
686)
809
Camera Displays
The Viewfinder
❚❚
Photo Mode
39
40
41
38
42
43
44
45
46
12 1331 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
21
20
19
18
17
15
16
14
28
2733 31
34
35
36 32 30 24 22
23
37 2529 26
1
Teleconverter indicator
2
View mode (
0
624)
3
Release mode (
0
145)
4
Focus mode (
0
110)
5
AF-area mode (
0
113)
6
Subject detection (
0
119)
7
Flash mode (
0
429)
8
White balance (
0
158)
9
Active D-Lighting (
0
512)
10
Picture Control (
0
192)
11
Image quality (
0
105)
12
Image size (
0
108)
13
Image area (
0
102)
810
Camera Displays
14
AF-area brackets (
0
113)
15
Focus point (
0
123)
16
Exposure and flash bracketing
indicator (
0
178)
WB bracketing indicator
(
0
183)
ADL bracketing indicator
(
0
187)
HDR indicator (
0
538)
Multiple exposure indicator
(
0
530)
17
Number of shots in exposure
and flash bracketing sequence
(
0
178)
Number of shots in WB
bracketing sequence (
0
183)
Number of shots in ADL
bracketing sequence (
0
187)
HDR strength (
0
538)
Number of shots in multiple
exposure (
0
530)
18
Flash compensation indicator
(
0
432)
19
Track log indicator (
0
204)
20
Satellite signal indicator
(
0
205)
21
Wi-Fi connection indicator
(
0
317, 329, 367)
Bluetooth connection indicator
(
0
757)
Airplane mode (
0
756)
22
USB power delivery (
0
744)
23
Battery indicator (
0
80)
24
Flash-ready indicator (
0
423)
25
Number of exposures
remaining (
0
81, 887)
Camera control mode (
0
854)
26
ISO sensitivity (
0
154)
27
ISO sensitivity indicator (
0
154)
Auto ISO sensitivity indicator
(
0
156)
28
Exposure compensation
indicator (
0
143)
29
Exposure indicator
Exposure (
0
136)
Exposure compensation
(
0
143)
Auto bracketing (
0
177)
30
Aperture (
0
134, 135)
31
Aperture lock icon (
0
665)
32
Shutter speed (
0
133, 135)
33
Shutter speed lock icon (
0
665)
34
Flexible program indicator
(
0
133)
35
Shooting mode (
0
132)
36
Focus indicator (
0
129)
37
Metering (
0
520)
811
Camera Displays
38
Silent mode (
0
735)
39
Vibration reduction indicator
(
0
526)
40
Autoexposure (AE) lock (
0
141)
41
Auto white-balance (AWB) lock
(
0
647)
42
FV lock indicator (
0
434)
43
Time-lapse video indicator
(
0
556)
44
Interval timer indicator (
0
542)
t
icon (
0
87)
“No memory card” indicator
(
0
81, 804)
Memory card high-temperature
warning (
0
82)
45
Temperature warning
46
Flicker detection (
0
518)
812
Camera Displays
❚❚
Video Mode
10
11
12
14
13
435612
7
8
9
1
Headphone volume (
0
590)
2
Zebra pattern (
0
686)
3
Picture Control (
0
192)
Tone mode (
0
215)
4
Frame size and rate (
0
216)
5
Image area (
0
218)
6
Video file type (
0
214)
7
Time remaining (
0
93)
8
Destination (
0
578)
9
Video recording time (
0
93)
Timecode (
0
591)
10
Electronic VR indicator (
0
587)
11
Microphone sensitivity (
0
588)
12
Sound level (
0
588)
13
External recording control
(
0
302)
14
Recording indicator (
0
93)
“No video” indicator (
0
94)
813
Camera Displays
The Control Panel
❚❚
Photo Mode
45123 768
18
19
20
21
13
10
9
11
12
1617 1415
1
Shooting mode (
0
132)
2
Flexible program indicator
(
0
133)
3
Shutter speed lock icon (
0
665)
4
Shutter speed (
0
133, 135)
Exposure compensation value
(
0
143)
Flash compensation value
(
0
432)
Number of shots in exposure
and flash bracketing sequence
(
0
178)
Number of shots in WB
bracketing sequence (
0
183)
Intervals remaining in interval
timer sequence (
0
545)
Shots remaining in focus shift
sequence (
0
569)
Track log indicator (
0
204)
5
Exposure compensation
indicator (
0
143)
6
Exposure and flash bracketing
indicator (
0
178)
WB bracketing indicator
(
0
183)
ADL bracketing indicator
(
0
187)
HDR indicator (
0
538)
Multiple exposure indicator
(
0
530)
814
Camera Displays
7
Aperture lock icon (
0
665)
8
Aperture (
0
134, 135)
Exposure and flash bracketing
increment (
0
178)
WB bracketing increment
(
0
183)
Number of shots in ADL
bracketing sequence (
0
187)
Interval-timer frame count
(
0
545)
Focus-shift frame count (
0
569)
Satellite signal indicator
(
0
205)
Wi-Fi connection indicator
(
0
317, 329, 367)
Bluetooth indicator (
0
757)
Computer connection (
0
854)
9
Battery indicator (
0
80)
10
USB power delivery (
0
744)
11
Exposure indicator
Exposure (
0
136)
Exposure compensation
(
0
143)
Exposure and flash
bracketing (
0
178)
WB bracketing (
0
183)
ADL bracketing (
0
187)
12
ISO sensitivity (
0
154)
13
Number of exposures
remaining (
0
81, 887)
Preset manual white balance
measurement mode (
0
170)
Camera control mode (
0
854)
14
ISO sensitivity indicator (
0
154)
Auto ISO sensitivity indicator
(
0
156)
15
Release mode (
0
145)
Buffer capacity (
0
145)
Buffer capacity (high-speed
frame capture;
0
149)
Interval timer indicator (
0
545)
Time-lapse video indicator
(
0
558)
Focus shift indicator (
0
569)
16
Memory card indicator (Slot 2;
0
503)
17
Memory card indicator (Slot 1;
0
503)
18
AF-area mode (
0
113)
19
Focus mode (
0
110)
20
Shooting menu bank (
0
493)
21
Flash compensation indicator
(
0
432)
816
Compatible Flash Units
The Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS)
Nikon’s advanced Creative Lighting System (CLS) supports a variety of
features thanks to improved communication between the camera and
compatible flash units.
Features Available with CLS-Compatible Flash
Units
Compatible Flash Units
Flash unit
0
SB-5000 817
SB-910/SB-900/SB-800 819
SB-700 821
SB-600 823
SB-500 825
SB-R200 827
SB-400 829
SB-300 831
SU-800 833
Flash unit
0
817
Compatible Flash Units
❚❚
The SB-5000
Supported features
Single flash
i-TTL
i-TTL balanced fill-flash
4
1
Standard i-TTL fill-flash
4
2
q
A Auto aperture
4
A Non-TTL auto —
GN Distance-priority manual
4
M Manual
4
RPT Repeating flash
4
Optical Advanced Wireless Lighting
Master
Remote flash control
4
i-TTL i-TTL
4
[A : B] Quick wireless flash control
4
q
A Auto aperture
4
A Non-TTL auto —
M Manual
4
RPT Repeating flash
4
Remote
i-TTL i-TTL
4
[A : B] Quick wireless flash control
4
q
A/A Auto aperture/non-TTL auto
4
3
M Manual
4
RPT Repeating flash
4
818
Compatible Flash Units
1 Not available with spot metering.
2 Can also be selected via the flash unit.
3 Choice of
q
A and A depends on the option selected with the master
flash.
4 Supports the same features as remote flash units with optical AWL.
5 Available only in i-TTL,
q
A, A, GN, and M flash-control modes.
6 Available only in i-TTL flash control mode or when the flash is configured
to emit monitor preflashes in
q
A or A flash control mode.
Radio-controlled Advanced Wireless Lighting
4
4
Color Information Communication (flash)
4
Color Information Communication (LED light) —
Auto FP high-speed sync
4
5
FV lock
4
6
Red-eye reduction
4
Camera modeling illumination
4
Unified flash control
4
Camera flash unit firmware update
4
Supported features
819
Compatible Flash Units
❚❚
The SB-910, SB-900, and SB-800
Supported features
Single flash
i-TTL
i-TTL balanced fill-flash
4
1
Standard i-TTL fill-flash
4
2
q
A Auto aperture
4
3
A Non-TTL auto
4
3
GN Distance-priority manual
4
M Manual
4
RPT Repeating flash
4
Optical Advanced Wireless Lighting
Master
Remote flash control
4
i-TTL i-TTL
4
[A : B] Quick wireless flash control —
q
A Auto aperture
4
A Non-TTL auto —
M Manual
4
RPT Repeating flash
4
Remote
i-TTL i-TTL
4
[A : B] Quick wireless flash control
4
q
A/A Auto aperture/non-TTL auto
4
4
M Manual
4
RPT Repeating flash
4
820
Compatible Flash Units
1 Not available with spot metering.
2 Can also be selected via the flash unit.
3
q
A/A mode selection is performed on the flash unit using custom
settings.
4 Choice of
q
A and A depends on the option selected with the master
flash.
5 Available only in i-TTL,
q
A, A, GN, and M flash-control modes.
6 Available only in i-TTL flash control mode or when the flash is configured
to emit monitor preflashes in
q
A or A flash control mode.
7 Firmware updates for the SB-910 and SB-900 can be performed from the
camera.
Radio-controlled Advanced Wireless Lighting —
Color Information Communication (flash)
4
Color Information Communication (LED light) —
Auto FP high-speed sync
4
5
FV lock
4
6
Red-eye reduction
4
Camera modeling illumination
4
Unified flash control —
Camera flash unit firmware update
4
7
Supported features
821
Compatible Flash Units
❚❚
The SB-700
Supported features
Single flash
i-TTL
i-TTL balanced fill-flash
4
1
Standard i-TTL fill-flash
4
q
A Auto aperture —
A Non-TTL auto —
GN Distance-priority manual
4
M Manual
4
RPT Repeating flash —
Optical Advanced Wireless Lighting
Master
Remote flash control
4
i-TTL i-TTL
4
[A : B] Quick wireless flash control
4
q
A Auto aperture —
A Non-TTL auto —
M Manual
4
RPT Repeating flash —
Remote
i-TTL i-TTL
4
[A : B] Quick wireless flash control
4
q
A/A Auto aperture/non-TTL auto —
M Manual
4
RPT Repeating flash
4
822
Compatible Flash Units
1 Not available with spot metering.
2 Available only in i-TTL, GN, and M flash-control modes.
3 Available only in i-TTL flash-control mode.
Radio-controlled Advanced Wireless Lighting —
Color Information Communication (flash)
4
Color Information Communication (LED light) —
Auto FP high-speed sync
4
2
FV lock
4
3
Red-eye reduction
4
Camera modeling illumination
4
Unified flash control —
Camera flash unit firmware update
4
Supported features
823
Compatible Flash Units
❚❚
The SB-600
Supported features
Single flash
i-TTL
i-TTL balanced fill-flash
4
1
Standard i-TTL fill-flash
4
2
q
A Auto aperture —
A Non-TTL auto —
GN Distance-priority manual —
M Manual
4
RPT Repeating flash —
Optical Advanced Wireless Lighting
Master
Remote flash control —
i-TTL i-TTL —
[A : B] Quick wireless flash control —
q
A Auto aperture —
A Non-TTL auto —
M Manual —
RPT Repeating flash —
Remote
i-TTL i-TTL
4
[A : B] Quick wireless flash control
4
q
A/A Auto aperture/non-TTL auto —
M Manual
4
RPT Repeating flash
4
824
Compatible Flash Units
1 Not available with spot metering.
2 Can also be selected via the flash unit.
3 Available only in i-TTL and M flash-control modes.
4 Available only in i-TTL flash-control mode.
Radio-controlled Advanced Wireless Lighting —
Color Information Communication (flash)
4
Color Information Communication (LED light) —
Auto FP high-speed sync
4
3
FV lock
4
4
Red-eye reduction
4
Camera modeling illumination
4
Unified flash control —
Camera flash unit firmware update —
Supported features
825
Compatible Flash Units
❚❚
The SB-500
Supported features
Single flash
i-TTL
i-TTL balanced fill-flash
4
1
Standard i-TTL fill-flash
4
q
A Auto aperture —
A Non-TTL auto —
GN Distance-priority manual —
M Manual
4
2
RPT Repeating flash —
Optical Advanced Wireless Lighting
Master
Remote flash control
4
2
i-TTL i-TTL
4
2
[A : B] Quick wireless flash control —
q
A Auto aperture —
A Non-TTL auto —
M Manual
4
2
RPT Repeating flash —
Remote
i-TTL i-TTL
4
[A : B] Quick wireless flash control
4
q
A/A Auto aperture/non-TTL auto —
M Manual
4
RPT Repeating flash
4
826
Compatible Flash Units
1 Not available with spot metering.
2 Can be selected using the [Flash control] item in the camera menus.
3 Available only in i-TTL and M flash-control modes.
4 Available only in i-TTL flash-control mode.
Radio-controlled Advanced Wireless Lighting —
Color Information Communication (flash)
4
Color Information Communication (LED light)
4
Auto FP high-speed sync
4
3
FV lock
4
4
Red-eye reduction
4
Camera modeling illumination
4
Unified flash control
4
Camera flash unit firmware update
4
Supported features
827
Compatible Flash Units
❚❚
The SB-R200
Supported features
Single flash
i-TTL
i-TTL balanced fill-flash —
Standard i-TTL fill-flash —
q
A Auto aperture —
A Non-TTL auto —
GN Distance-priority manual —
M Manual —
RPT Repeating flash —
Optical Advanced Wireless Lighting
Master
Remote flash control —
i-TTL i-TTL —
[A : B] Quick wireless flash control —
q
A Auto aperture —
A Non-TTL auto —
M Manual —
RPT Repeating flash —
Remote
i-TTL i-TTL
4
[A : B] Quick wireless flash control
4
q
A/A Auto aperture/non-TTL auto —
M Manual
4
RPT Repeating flash —
828
Compatible Flash Units
1 Available only in i-TTL and M flash-control modes.
2 Available only in i-TTL flash-control mode.
Radio-controlled Advanced Wireless Lighting —
Color Information Communication (flash) —
Color Information Communication (LED light) —
Auto FP high-speed sync
4
1
FV lock
4
2
Red-eye reduction —
Camera modeling illumination
4
Unified flash control —
Camera flash unit firmware update —
Supported features
829
Compatible Flash Units
❚❚
The SB-400
Supported features
Single flash
i-TTL
i-TTL balanced fill-flash
4
1
Standard i-TTL fill-flash
4
q
A Auto aperture —
A Non-TTL auto —
GN Distance-priority manual —
M Manual
4
2
RPT Repeating flash —
Optical Advanced Wireless Lighting
Master
Remote flash control —
i-TTL i-TTL —
[A : B] Quick wireless flash control —
q
A Auto aperture —
A Non-TTL auto —
M Manual —
RPT Repeating flash —
Remote
i-TTL i-TTL —
[A : B] Quick wireless flash control —
q
A/A Auto aperture/non-TTL auto —
M Manual —
RPT Repeating flash —
830
Compatible Flash Units
1 Not available with spot metering.
2 Can be selected using the [Flash control] item in the camera menus.
3 Available only in i-TTL flash-control mode.
Radio-controlled Advanced Wireless Lighting —
Color Information Communication (flash)
4
Color Information Communication (LED light) —
Auto FP high-speed sync —
FV lock
4
3
Red-eye reduction
4
Camera modeling illumination —
Unified flash control
4
Camera flash unit firmware update —
Supported features
831
Compatible Flash Units
❚❚
The SB-300
Supported features
Single flash
i-TTL
i-TTL balanced fill-flash
4
1
Standard i-TTL fill-flash
4
q
A Auto aperture —
A Non-TTL auto —
GN Distance-priority manual —
M Manual
4
2
RPT Repeating flash —
Optical Advanced Wireless Lighting
Master
Remote flash control —
i-TTL i-TTL —
[A : B] Quick wireless flash control —
q
A Auto aperture —
A Non-TTL auto —
M Manual —
RPT Repeating flash —
Remote
i-TTL i-TTL —
[A : B] Quick wireless flash control —
q
A/A Auto aperture/non-TTL auto —
M Manual —
RPT Repeating flash —
832
Compatible Flash Units
1 Not available with spot metering.
2 Can be selected using the [Flash control] item in the camera menus.
3 Available only in i-TTL flash-control mode.
Radio-controlled Advanced Wireless Lighting —
Color Information Communication (flash)
4
Color Information Communication (LED light) —
Auto FP high-speed sync —
FV lock
4
3
Red-eye reduction —
Camera modeling illumination —
Unified flash control
4
Camera flash unit firmware update
4
Supported features
833
Compatible Flash Units
❚❚
The SU-800 Wireless Speedlight Commander
When mounted on a CLS-compatible camera, the SU-800 can be used as
a commander for SB-5000, SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600,
SB-500, or SB-R200 flash units. Group flash control is supported for up to
three groups. The SU-800 itself is not equipped with a flash.
Supported features
Single flash
i-TTL
i-TTL balanced fill-flash —
Standard i-TTL fill-flash —
q
A Auto aperture —
A Non-TTL auto —
GN Distance-priority manual —
M Manual —
RPT Repeating flash —
Optical Advanced Wireless Lighting
Master
Remote flash control
4
i-TTL i-TTL —
[A : B] Quick wireless flash control
4
1
q
A Auto aperture —
A Non-TTL auto —
M Manual —
RPT Repeating flash —
Remote
i-TTL i-TTL —
[A : B] Quick wireless flash control —
q
A/A Auto aperture/non-TTL auto —
M Manual —
RPT Repeating flash —
834
Compatible Flash Units
1 Available during close-up photography only.
2 Not available when RPT is selected as the flash control mode for the
remote flash unit.
3 Available only when i-TTL is selected as the flash control mode for the
remote flash unit or when the flash is configured to emit monitor
preflashes in mode
q
A.
Radio-controlled Advanced Wireless Lighting —
Color Information Communication (flash) —
Color Information Communication (LED light) —
Auto FP high-speed sync
4
2
FV lock
4
3
Red-eye reduction —
Camera modeling illumination
4
Unified flash control —
Camera flash unit firmware update —
Supported features
835
Compatible Flash Units
Notes on Optional Flash Units
Be sure also to consult documentation for the optional flash unit before
use.
•
If the unit supports CLS, refer to the section on CLS-compatible digital
SLR cameras. This camera is not included in the “digital SLR” category
in the documentation for the SB-80DX, SB-28DX, and SB-50DX.
•
If the flash-ready indicator (
c
) flashes for about three seconds after a
photograph is taken in i-TTL or non-TTL auto mode, the flash has fired
at full power and the photograph may be underexposed (CLS-
compatible flash units only).
•
i-TTL flash control can be used at ISO sensitivities between 64 and
12800 equivalent.
•
At ISO sensitivities over 12800, the desired results may not be
achieved at some ranges or aperture settings.
•
In mode P, the maximum aperture (minimum f-number) is limited
according to ISO sensitivity, as shown below:
* If the maximum aperture of the lens is smaller than given above, the
maximum value for aperture will be the maximum aperture of the lens.
Maximum aperture (f-number) at ISO equivalent of:
100 200 400 800 1600 3200 6400 12800
4 5 5.67.1 8 101113
836
Compatible Flash Units
•
The SB-5000, SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, SB-500, and
SB-400 provide red-eye reduction in red-eye reduction and slow-sync
with red-eye reduction flash modes.
•
“Noise” in the form of lines may appear in flash photographs taken
with an SD-9 or SD-8A high-performance battery pack attached
directly to the camera. Reduce ISO sensitivity or increase the distance
between the camera and the battery pack.
•
The camera provides AF-assist illumination as required. AF-assist
illuminators on optional flash units will not light.
•
When an SC-series 17, 28, or 29 sync cable is used for off-camera flash
photography, correct exposure may not be achieved in i-TTL mode.
We recommend that you select standard i-TTL fill-flash. Take a test
shot and view the results in the camera display.
•
In i-TTL, do not use any form of flash panel (diffusion panel) other than
the flash unit’s built-in flash panel or supplied bounce adapter. Using
other panels may produce incorrect exposure.
837
Compatible Flash Units
D
Flash Photography
Flash photography cannot be combined with some camera features,
including:
•
silent mode,
•
video recording,
•
high-speed frame capture, and
•
HDR overlay.
D
Using FV Lock with Optional Flash Units
•
FV lock is available with optional flash units in TTL and (where supported)
monitor pre-flash
q
A and monitor pre-flash A flash control modes (see the
documentation provided with the flash unit for more information).
•
Note that when Advanced Wireless Lighting is used to control remote flash
units, you will need to set the flash control mode for the master or at least
one remote group to TTL,
q
A, or A.
D
Other Flash Units
The following flash units can be used in non-TTL auto (A) and manual modes.
The options available do not vary with the lens used.
1 Available when the camera is used to select the flash mode.
2 Mounting an SB-27 on the camera automatically sets the flash mode to
TTL, but setting the flash mode to TTL disables the shutter release. Set
the SB-27 to A.
Flash unit Supported features
SB-80DX, SB-28DX, SB-28, SB-26,
SB-25, SB-24
Non-TTL auto, manual, repeating
flash, rear-curtain sync
1
SB-50DX, SB-23, SB-29, SB-21B,
SB-29S
Manual, rear-curtain sync
1
SB-30, SB-27
2
, SB-22S, SB-22, SB-20,
SB-16B, SB-15
Non-TTL auto, manual, rear-curtain
sync
1
838
Compatible Flash Units
D
Metering Areas for FV Lock
The areas metered when FV lock is used with optional flash units are as
follows:
•
Stand-Alone
•
Remote
D
Flash Compensation for Optional Flash Units
In i-TTL and auto aperture (
q
A) flash control modes, the flash compensation
selected with the optional flash unit or with [Flash control] in the camera
photo shooting menu is added to the flash compensation selected with the
[Flash compensation] item in the photo shooting menu.
Flash control mode Metered area
i-TTL 6-mm circle in center of frame
Auto aperture (
q
A) Area metered by flash exposure meter
Flash control mode Metered area
i-TTL Entire frame
Auto aperture (
q
A)
Area metered by flash exposure meter
Non-TTL auto (A)
839
Compatible Flash Units
A
Modeling Illumination
•
Pressing the control to which [Preview] has been assigned using Custom
Setting f2 [Custom controls (shooting)] causes CLS-compatible flash units
to emit a modeling flash.
•
This feature can be used with Advanced Wireless Lighting to preview the
total lighting effect achieved with multiple flash units.
•
The effects of shadows cast by the flash are best observed directly rather
than in the shooting display.
•
Modeling illumination can be turned off by selecting [OFF] for Custom
Setting e5 [Modeling flash].
A
Studio Strobe Lighting
To adjust the color and brightness of the view through the lens so that shots
are easier to frame, select [Adjust for ease of viewing] for Custom Setting
d8 [View mode (photo Lv)].
840
Compatible Accessories
A variety of accessories are available for your Nikon camera.
D
Compatible Accessories
•
Availability may vary with country or region.
•
See our website or brochures for the latest information.
●
Power Sources
•
EN-EL18d Rechargeable Li-ion Battery: EN-EL18d batteries can be used
with Nikon Z 9 digital cameras.
- EN-EL18c, EN-EL18b, EN-EL18a, and EN-EL18 batteries can also be used.
Note, however, that fewer pictures can be taken on a single charge than
with the EN-EL18d (
0
889).
•
MH-33 Battery Charger: The MH-33 can be used to recharge EN-EL18d
batteries. Batteries can be charged while the charger is connected to a
power source via the EH-7P charging AC adapter.
•
EH-7P Charging AC Adapter: The EH-7P can be used to charge batteries
inserted in the camera.
- The battery will not charge while the camera is on.
- Charging AC adapters cannot be used to charge EN-EL18a or EN-EL18
batteries.
- The charging AC adapter can be used to power the camera; to do so,
select [ON] for [USB power delivery] in the setup menu. For more
information, see “USB Power Delivery” (
0
744).
Compatible Accessories
841
Compatible Accessories
•
EP-6a Power Connector, EH-6d AC Adapter: Use AC adapters to power
the camera for extended periods.
- The EP-6a is needed to connect the EH-6d to the camera. See “Attaching a
Power Connector and AC Adapter” (
0
852) for details.
- EH-6c, EH-6b, EH-6a, and EH-6 AC adapters can be used in place of the
EH-6d.
●
Filters
•
Neutral Color (NC) filters can be used to protect the lens.
•
Filters may cause ghosting when the subject is framed against a bright
light, or when a bright light source is in the frame. Filters can be removed if
ghosting occurs.
•
Matrix metering may not produce the desired results with filters with
exposure factors (filter factors) over 1× (Y44, Y48, Y52, O56, R60, X0, X1,
C-PL, ND2S, ND4, ND4S, ND8, ND8S, ND400, A2, A12, B2, B8, B12); we
suggest that [Center-weighted metering] be selected instead. See the
documentation provided with the filter for details.
•
Filters intended for special-effects photography may interfere with
autofocus or the in-focus indicator (
I
).
842
Compatible Accessories
●
Remote Terminal Accessories
The camera is equipped with a ten-pin remote terminal for remote control
and automatic photography.
Be sure to replace the terminal cap when the terminal is not in use. Dust or
other foreign matter accumulating in the terminal contacts could cause the
camera to malfunction.
•
MC-22/MC-22A Remote Cords (length approximately 1 m/3.3 ft):
Remote shutter releases with blue, yellow, and black terminals for
connection to remote shutter-triggering devices, allowing control via
sound or electronic signals.
•
MC-30/MC-30A Remote Cords (length approximately 80 cm/2.7 ft):
Remote shutter releases; can be used to reduce camera shake.
•
MC-36/MC-36A Remote Cords (length approximately 85 cm/2.8 ft):
Remote shutter releases with timers for interval-timer photography.
•
MC-21/MC-21A Extension Cords (length approximately 3 m/9.9 ft): Can
be connected to ML-3 or MC-series 20, 22, 22A, 23, 23A, 25, 25A, 30, 30A,
36, or 36A, but note that two or more extension cords cannot be
connected together.
•
MC-23/MC-23A Connecting Cords (length approximately 40 cm/1.4 ft):
Use an MC-23 or 23A to connect two cameras via their ten-pin terminals for
simultaneous operation.
•
MC-25/MC-25A Adapter Cords (length approximately 20 cm/7.9 in.):
Ten-pin to two-pin adapter cords for connection to devices with two-pin
terminals, including the MW-2 radio control set, MT-2 intervalometer, and
ML-2 modulite remote control set.
•
WR-A10 WR Adapter: An adapter used to connect WR-R10 wireless
remote controllers to cameras with ten-pin remote terminals.
•
ML-3 Modulite Remote Control Set: Allows infrared remote control at
ranges of up to 8 m (26.2 ft).
843
Compatible Accessories
●
USB Cables
•
UC-E24 USB Cable: A USB cable with a type C connector for connection to
the camera and a type A connector for connection to the USB device.
•
UC-E25 USB Cable: A USB cable with two type C connectors.
●
Accessory Shoe Covers
BS-1 Accessory Shoe Cover: A cover protecting the accessory shoe when no
flash unit is attached.
●
Body Caps
BF-N1 Body Cap: The body cap prevents dust entering the camera when no
lens is in place.
●
Viewfinder Eyepiece Accessories
DK-33 Rubber Eyecup: A rubber eyecup that comes fitted to the camera. It
can be removed by holding the eyepiece release (
q
) and rotating the eyecup
in the direction shown (
w
).
To re-attach the eyecup, align the mark on the rear of the eyecup (
r
) with
the mark on the camera body (
e
) and rotate the eyecup as shown until it
clicks into place (
t
).
844
Compatible Accessories
●
Flash Units
•
SB-5000, SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, SB-500, SB-400,
SB-300, and SB-R200 Speedlights: These units can be mounted on the
camera for flash photography. Some also support wireless remote control
for off-camera flash photography with multiple flash units.
- See the documentation supplied with each Speedlight for information on
mounting the unit on the camera.
- For more information on flash photography, see “Flash Photography”
(
0
422), “Remote Flash Photography” (
0
437), and “Compatible Flash
Units” (
0
816).
•
SU-800 Wireless Speedlight Commander: A wireless commander for use
with SB-5000, SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, SB-500, and SB-R200
flash units. Flash units can be divided into up to three groups for remote
flash control. The SU-800 itself is not equipped with a flash.
●
Mount Adapters
FTZ II/FTZ Mount Adapter: An adapter that allows NIKKOR F mount lenses
to be used with digital cameras that support interchangeable Z mount
lenses.
•
For information on attaching, removing, maintaining, and using mount
adapters, refer to the product documentation.
* Update to the latest version of the mount adapter firmware if so
prompted after attaching the adapter. Information on performing
firmware updates is available via the Nikon website for your country or
region.
•
Users of the FTZ should note that the lack of space between adapter and
grip can make the grip difficult to use.
845
Compatible Accessories
●
Microphones
•
ME-1 Stereo Microphone: Connect the ME-1 to the camera microphone
jack to record stereo sound. Using an external microphone also reduces
the chance of picking up equipment noise, such as the sounds produced
during video recording when focus is achieved using autofocus.
•
ME-W1 Wireless Microphone: A wireless Bluetooth microphone. Use the
ME-W1 for off-camera recording.
●
Wireless Remote Controllers
•
WR-R11a, WR-R10, and WR-T10 Wireless Remote Controllers
- When a WR-R11a is connected to the ten-pin remote terminal, or when a
WR-R10 is connected to the ten-pin remote terminal using a WR-A10
adapter, the camera can be controlled remotely using a WR-T10 wireless
remote controller.
- WR-R11a and WR-R10 wireless remote controllers can also be used to
control radio-controlled flash units.
•
WR-1 Wireless Remote Controller: WR-1 units are used with WR-R11a/
WR-R10 or WR-T10 wireless remote controllers or with other WR-1 remote
controllers, with the WR-1 units functioning as either transmitters or
receivers. When a WR-R11a/WR-R10 or a WR-1 configured as a receiver is
connected to the camera ten-pin remote terminal, a second WR-1
configured as a transmitter can be used to take pictures and adjust camera
settings remotely. Update the WR-1 firmware to the latest version (version
1.0.4 or later).
* When using a wireless remote controller with the WR-R10, be sure the
firmware for the WR-R10 has been updated to the latest version (version
3.0 or later). For information on firmware updates, see the Nikon website
for your area. Consult a Nikon-authorized service representative when
updating the firmware for the WR-R10 from versions prior to version 2.0
to version 3.0 or later.
846
Compatible Accessories
D
Charging Batteries
Compatible batteries can be charged using the devices below.
D
Attaching and Removing the Accessory Shoe Cover
The BS-1 accessory shoe cover slides into the shoe as shown. To remove the
cover, hold the camera firmly, press the cover down with a thumb and slide it
in the direction shown.
Battery
Battery charger
Charging AC
adapter
MH-33 MH-26a
EN-EL18d
4
—
4
EN-EL18c
444
EN-EL18b
444
EN-EL18a —
4
—
EN-EL18 —
4
—
847
Compatible Accessories
D
The HDMI/USB Cable Clip
To prevent accidental disconnection, attach the supplied clip to HDMI or USB
cables as shown (note that the clip may not fit all cables).
•
The illustrations show the USB cable. Pass HDMI cables through the other
channel.
•
Keep the monitor in the storage position when using the cable clip.
USB cable HDMI cable and USB cable
used simultaneously
848
Compatible Accessories
D
The Memory Card Slot Cover
The camera features a removable memory card slot cover.
•
After opening the memory card slot cover, slide the memory card slot
cover release latch in the direction shown until it latches (
q
) and then
rotate the cover clockwise to remove it from the camera (
w
).
•
To re-attach the cover, insert the top hinge into the top socket on the
camera body (
q
) and insert the end of the sprung hinge into the bottom
socket (
w
). Keeping the bottom hinge aligned with the bottom socket,
slide the memory card slot cover release latch down until it clicks into place
in its original position (
e
).
849
Compatible Accessories
•
Be careful not to slide the memory card
slot cover release latch back down after
removing the memory card slot cover.
The cover cannot be re-attached with
the latch lowered.
•
The inner cover may move when the memory card slot cover release latch
is lowered. The memory card slot cover cannot be reattached when the
inner cover is out of position. Slide the memory card slot cover latch down
(
q
) and restore the inner and outer covers to their original positions (
w
).
2
1
1
Inner cover
2
Outer cover
850
Compatible Accessories
Calibrating Batteries
The MH-33 battery charger can detect whether batteries require
calibration and calibrate them as necessary to ensure the accuracy of
the battery level display.
Calibration status and progress are shown by lamps on the battery
charger:
If the calibration lamp flashes when a battery is inserted, the battery
needs to be calibrated.
CHARGE %
CALIBRATION
6h
4h
2h
100
80
50
1
2
3
1
Charge lamps
2
Calibration lamp
3
Calibration button
851
Compatible Accessories
To begin calibration, press the calibration button for about a second.
The charge lamps and calibration lamp light red while calibration is in
progress. The display can be read as follows:
Although calibration is recommended for accurate measurement of
battery charge state, calibration need not be performed when the
calibration lamp flashes. Once begun, calibration can be interrupted as
desired.
•
If the calibration button is not pressed while the calibration lamp is
flashing, normal charging will begin after about ten seconds.
•
To interrupt calibration, press the calibration button again. Calibration
will end and charging will begin.
When calibration is complete, the charge lamps and calibration lamp
will turn off and charging will begin immediately.
Approximate time needed to recalibrate battery
Under
2hours
2–4 hours 4–6 hours
Over
6hours
Charge
lamps
2h
I
(off)
K
(on)
K
(on)
K
(on)
4h
I
(off)
I
(off)
K
(on)
K
(on)
6h
I
(off)
I
(off)
I
(off)
K
(on)
Calibration lamp
K
(on)
K
(on)
K
(on)
K
(on)
852
Compatible Accessories
Attaching a Power Connector and AC Adapter
Turn the camera off before attaching an optional power connector and
AC adapter.
1
Remove the BL-7 battery chamber
cover.
Lift the battery chamber cover latch, turn
it to the open (
A
) position (
q
), and
remove the BL-7 battery chamber cover
(
w
).
2
Connect the EH-6d AC adapter to the EP-6a power connector.
•
Pass the DC cable over the power
connector cable guide (
q
) and slide it
down until it is at the bottom of the slot.
•
Insert the DC plug into the DC IN
connector (
w
).
853
Compatible Accessories
3
Insert the power connector.
Fully insert the power connector into the
battery chamber as shown.
4
Latch the power connector.
•
Rotate the latch to the closed position (
q
) and fold it down as
shown (
w
).
•
To prevent the power connector being dislodged during
operation, be sure that it is securely latched.
•
The battery level is not displayed in the control panel while the
camera is powered by the AC adapter and power connector.
854
Software
The following Nikon software can be used with the camera. For more
information, visit the Nikon website for your country or region.
●
Computer Software
Nikon computer software is available from the Nikon Download Center.
Check the version and system requirements and be sure to download the
latest version.
https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/
•
Camera Control Pro 2 (available for purchase): Control the camera
remotely from a computer to record photos and videos and save them
directly to the computer hard disk.
•
NX Tether: Use for tethered photography when the camera is connected
to a computer. Exposure, white balance, and other camera settings can be
adjusted remotely using controls in the computer display.
•
NX Studio
*
: View and edit photos and videos shot with Nikon digital
cameras. NX Studio can be used to fine-tune files in Nikon’s unique NEF/
NRW (RAW) format and convert them to JPEG or TIFF (NEF/RAW
processing). It supports not only NEF/NRW (RAW) pictures but also JPEG
and TIFF photos shot with Nikon digital cameras for such tasks as editing
tone curves and enhancing brightness and contrast.
* Existing users should be sure to download the latest version, as earlier
versions may be unable to download pictures from the camera or open
NEF (RAW) pictures.
•
Wireless Transmitter Utility: The Wireless Transmitter Utility is required if
the camera is to be connected to a network. Pair the camera with the
computer and download pictures over a wireless or Ethernet network.
Software
855
Software
•
Webcam Utility: The Webcam Utility lets you use your camera as a
webcam when it is connected to the computer via USB. The camera will
appear as “Webcam Utility” in web conferencing apps. Selecting “Webcam
Utility” converts the camera into a webcam. For information on compatible
cameras, system requirements, and using the Webcam Utility, as well as on
the precautions to be observed during use, see the Webcam Utility page in
the Nikon Download Center.
●
Smartphone (Tablet) Apps
Smartphone (tablet) apps are available from the Apple App Store® and
Google Play™. For the latest information on our apps, visit the Nikon website.
•
SnapBridge: Download photos and videos from the camera to your smart
device via a wireless connection.
•
NX MobileAir (offers in-app purchases): Import pictures from a camera
connected to your smart device via USB and upload them wirelessly to an
FTP server.
* Supported features and operating systems vary by country and region.
856
Caring for the Camera
Long-Term Storage
When the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the
battery. Before removing the battery, confirm that the camera is off.
Do not store the camera in locations that:
•
are poorly ventilated or subject to humidities of over 60%,
•
are next to equipment that produces strong electromagnetic fields,
such as televisions or radios, or
•
are exposed to temperatures above 50 °C (122 °F) or below −20 °C
(−4 °F).
Caring for the Camera
857
Caring for the Camera
Cleaning
The procedure varies with the part that requires cleaning. The
procedures are detailed below.
•
Do not use alcohol, thinner, or other volatile chemicals.
❚❚
Camera Body
Use a blower to remove dust and lint, then wipe gently with a soft, dry
cloth. After using the camera at the beach or seaside, wipe off sand or
salt with a cloth lightly dampened in distilled water and dry the camera
thoroughly.
Important: Dust or other foreign matter inside the camera may cause
product malfunction. Damage due to the presence of foreign matter inside
the camera is not covered under warranty.
❚❚
Lens and Viewfinder
These glass elements are easily damaged: remove dust and lint with a
blower. If using an aerosol blower, keep the can vertical to prevent the
discharge of liquid that could damage glass elements. To remove
fingerprints and other stains, apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a
soft cloth and clean with care.
❚❚
The Monitor
Remove dust and lint with a blower. When removing smudges,
fingerprints, and other oily stains, wipe the surface lightly with a soft
cloth or chamois leather. Do not apply pressure, as this could result in
damage or malfunction.
858
Caring for the Camera
Image Sensor Cleaning
Dirt or dust entering the camera when lenses are exchanged or the
body cap is removed may adhere to the surface of the image sensor and
affect your photographs. The “clean image sensor” option vibrates the
sensor to remove dust.
The image sensor can be cleaned at any time from the menus, or
cleaning can be performed automatically when the camera is turned off.
If image sensor cleaning fails to resolve the problem, contact a Nikon-
authorized service representative.
❚❚
Using the Menus
•
For maximum effect, hold the camera in
normal orientation (base down).
•
Select [Clean image sensor] in the setup
menu, then highlight [Start] and press
J
to
begin cleaning.
•
Camera controls cannot be used while
cleaning is in progress. Do not remove or
disconnect the power source.
•
The setup menu will be displayed when cleaning is complete.
859
Caring for the Camera
❚❚
Cleaning the Image Sensor at Shutdown
1
Select [Automatic cleaning] for [Clean
image sensor].
Pressing
2
when [Automatic cleaning] is
highlighted displays [Automatic
cleaning] options.
2
Highlight an option.
Press
J
to select the highlighted option.
D
Cautions: Image Sensor Cleaning
•
Using camera controls interrupts any image sensor cleaning begun in
response to the operation of the power switch.
•
If image sensor cleaning is performed several times in succession, image
sensor cleaning may be temporarily disabled to protect the camera’s
internal circuitry. Cleaning can be performed again after a short wait.
Option Description
6
[Clean at
shutdown]
The image sensor is automatically cleaned during
shutdown each time the camera is turned off.
[Cleaning off] Automatic image sensor cleaning off.
860
Caring for the Camera
Manual Cleaning
If foreign matter cannot be removed from the image sensor using
image sensor cleaning, the sensor can be cleaned manually as
described below. Note, however, that the sensor is extremely delicate
and easily damaged; we recommend that manual cleaning be
performed only by a Nikon-authorized service representative.
•
Select [Sensor shield stays open] for [Sensor shield behavior at
power off] in the setup menu.
1
Turn the camera off and remove the lens.
2
Holding the camera so that light can
enter, examine the image sensor for
dust or lint.
If no foreign objects are present, proceed
to Step 4.
3
Remove any dust and lint from the
sensor with a blower.
•
Do not use a blower-brush. The bristles
could damage the sensor.
•
Dirt that cannot be removed with a
blower can only be removed by Nikon-
authorized service personnel. Under no
circumstances should you touch or wipe the sensor.
4
Replace the lens or supplied body cap.
861
Caring for the Camera
D
Foreign Matter on the Image Sensor
Foreign matter entering the camera when lenses or body caps are removed
or exchanged (or in rare circumstances lubricant or fine particles from the
camera itself) may adhere to the image sensor, where it may appear in
photographs taken under certain conditions. To prevent entry of foreign
matter when attaching the body cap or exchanging lenses, avoid dusty
environments and be sure to remove all dust and other foreign matter that
may be adhering to the camera mount, lens mount, or body cap. To protect
the camera when no lens is in place, be sure to replace the supplied body
cap. Should you encounter foreign matter that cannot be removed using the
image sensor cleaning option (
0
858), clean the image sensor as described
in “Manual Cleaning” (
0
860), or have the sensor cleaned by authorized
Nikon service personnel. Photographs affected by the presence of foreign
matter on the sensor can be retouched using the clean image options
available in some imaging applications.
D
Servicing the Camera and Accessories
The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing; Nikon
recommends that the camera be inspected once every one to two years, and
that it be serviced once every three to five years (note that fees apply to
these services).
•
Frequent inspection and servicing are particularly recommended if the
camera is used professionally.
•
Any accessories regularly used with the camera, such as lenses or optional
flash units, should be included when the camera is inspected or serviced.
862
Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions
Cautions: Using the Camera
●
Do Not Drop
Do not drop the camera or lens or subject them to blows. The product may
malfunction if subjected to strong shocks or vibration.
●
Keep Dry
Keep the camera dry. Rusting of the internal mechanism caused by water
inside the camera can not only be expensive to repair but can in fact cause
irreparable damage.
●
Avoid Sudden Changes in Temperature
Taking the camera from a warm to a cold environment or vice versa may
cause damaging condensation inside and outside the camera. Place the
camera in a sealed bag or plastic case before taking it across a temperature
boundary. The camera can be taken from the bag or case once it has had
time to adjust to the new temperature.
●
Keep Away from Strong Magnetic Fields
Static charges or the magnetic fields produced by equipment such as radio
transmitters could interfere with the monitor, corrupt data stored on the
memory card, or affect the product’s internal circuitry.
●
Do Not Leave the Lens Pointed at the Sun
Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun or other strong light source for
extended periods. Intense light may damage the image sensor or cause
fading or “burn in”. Photographs taken with the camera may exhibit a white
blur effect.
Caring for the Camera and Battery:
Cautions
863
Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions
●
Lasers and Other Bright Light Sources
Do not direct lasers or other extremely bright light sources toward the lens,
as this could damage the camera’s image sensor.
●
Cleaning
When cleaning the camera body, use a blower to gently remove dust and
lint, then wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth. After using the camera at the
beach or seaside, wipe off any sand or salt using a cloth lightly dampened in
fresh water and then dry the camera thoroughly. In rare instances, static
electricity may cause the LCD displays to light up or go dark; this does not
indicate a malfunction. The display will soon return to normal.
●
Cleaning the Lens and Viewfinder
These glass elements are easily damaged: remove dust and lint with a
blower. If using an aerosol blower, keep the can vertical to prevent the
discharge of liquid that could damage glass elements. To remove
fingerprints and other stains from the lens, apply a small amount of lens
cleaner to a soft cloth and wipe the lens carefully.
●
Do Not Touch the Image Sensor
Under no circumstances should you exert
pressure on the image sensor, poke it with
cleaning tools, or subject it to powerful air
currents from a blower. These actions could
scratch or otherwise damage the sensor.
●
Cleaning the Image Sensor
For information on cleaning the image sensor, see “Image Sensor Cleaning”
(
0
858) and “Manual Cleaning” (
0
860).
864
Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions
●
Do Not Touch the Sensor Shield
If [Sensor shield closes] is selected for [Sensor
shield behavior at power off] in the setup
menu, the sensor shield in front of the image
sensor will close when the camera turns off.
Never pierce or apply pressure to the sensor
shield. Failure to observe this precaution could
scratch or otherwise damage the shield.
●
The Lens Contacts
Keep the lens contacts clean. Avoid touching them with your fingers.
●
Store in a Well-Ventilated Area
To prevent mold or mildew, store the camera in a dry, well-ventilated area.
Do not store the camera with naphtha or camphor moth balls, next to
equipment that produces strong electromagnetic fields, or where it will be
exposed to extremely high temperatures, for example near a heater or in an
enclosed vehicle on a hot day. Failure to observe these precautions could
result in product malfunction.
●
Long-Term Storage
To prevent damage caused for example by leaking battery fluid, remove the
battery if the product will not be used for an extended period. Store the
camera in a plastic bag containing a desiccant. Do not, however, store the
leather camera case in a plastic bag, as this may cause the material to
deteriorate. Store the battery in a cool, dry place. Note that desiccant
gradually loses its capacity to absorb moisture and should be replaced at
regular intervals. To prevent mold or mildew, take the camera out of storage
at least once a month, insert the battery, and release the shutter a few times.
865
Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions
●
Turn the Product Off Before Removing or Disconnecting the Power
Source
Removing or disconnecting the power source while the camera is on could
damage the product. Particular care should be taken not to remove or
disconnect the power source while pictures are being recorded or deleted.
●
Monitor/Viewfinder
•
The monitors (including viewfinder) are constructed with extremely high
precision; at least 99.99% of pixels are effective, with no more than 0.01%
being missing or defective. Hence while these displays may contain pixels
that are always lit (white, red, blue, or green) or always off (black), this is not
a malfunction. Pictures recorded with the device are unaffected. Your
understanding is requested.
•
Pictures in the monitor may be difficult to see in a bright light.
•
Do not apply pressure to the monitor. The monitor could malfunction or
suffer damage. Dust or lint on the monitor can be removed with a blower.
Stains can be removed by wiping the monitor lightly with a soft cloth or
chamois leather. Should the monitor break, care should be taken to avoid
injury from broken glass. Be careful that liquid crystal from the monitor
does not touch the skin or enter the eyes or mouth.
•
Should you experience any of the following symptoms while framing shots
in the viewfinder, discontinue use until your condition improves:
- nausea, eye pain, eye fatigue,
- dizziness, headache, stiffness in your neck or shoulders,
- queasiness or loss of hand-eye coordination, or
- motion sickness.
•
The display may rapidly flicker on and off during burst photography.
Watching the flickering display could cause you to feel unwell. Discontinue
use until your condition improves.
●
Bright Lights and Back-Lit Subjects
Noise in the form of lines may in rare cases appear in pictures that include
bright lights or back-lit subjects.
866
Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions
Cautions: Using Batteries
●
Precautions for Use
•
If improperly handled, batteries may rupture or leak, causing the product
to corrode. Observe the following precautions when handling batteries:
- Turn the product off before replacing the battery.
- Batteries may be hot after extended use.
- Keep the battery terminals clean.
- Use only batteries approved for use in this equipment.
- Do not short or disassemble batteries or expose them to flame or
excessive heat.
- Replace the terminal cover when the battery is not inserted in the camera
or charger.
•
If the battery is hot, for example immediately after use, wait for it to cool
before charging. Attempting to charge the battery while its internal
temperature is elevated will impair battery performance, and the battery
may not charge or charge only partially.
•
If the battery will not be used for some time, remove it from the camera
and store it in a cool, dry location with an ambient temperature of 15 °C to
25 °C (59 °F to 77 °F). Avoid hot or extremely cold locations.
•
Batteries should be charged within six months of use. During long periods
of disuse, charge the battery once every six months before returning it to a
cool location for storage.
•
Remove the battery from the camera or charger when not in use. The
camera and charger draw minute amounts of charge even when off and
could draw the battery down to the point that it will no longer function.
867
Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions
•
Do not use the battery at ambient temperatures below −10 °C (14 °F) or
above 40 °C (104 °F). Failure to observe this precaution could damage the
battery or impair its performance. Charge the battery indoors at ambient
temperatures of 5 °C–35 °C (41 °F–95 °F). The battery will not charge if its
temperature is below 0 °C (32 °F) or above 60 °C (140 °F).
•
Capacity may be reduced and charging times increase at battery
temperatures from 0 °C (32 °F) to 15 °C (59 °F) and from 45 °C (113 °F) to
60 °C (140 °F).
•
Batteries in general exhibit a drop in capacity at low ambient temperatures.
Even fresh batteries charged at temperatures under about 5 °C (41 °F) may
show a temporary increase from “0” to “1” in the setup menu [Battery info]
age display, but the display will return to normal once the battery has been
recharged at a temperature of about 20 °C (68 °F) or higher.
•
Battery capacity drops at low temperatures. The change in capacity with
temperature is reflected in the camera battery-level display. As a result, the
battery display may show a drop in capacity as the temperature drops,
even if the battery is fully charged.
•
Batteries may be hot after use. Observe due caution when removing
batteries from the camera.
●
Charge Batteries Before Use
Charge the battery before use. The supplied battery is not fully charged at
shipment.
●
Ready Spare Batteries
Before taking photographs, ready a spare battery and keep it fully charged.
Depending on your location, it may be difficult to purchase replacement
batteries on short notice.
868
Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions
●
Have Fully-Charged Spare Batteries Ready on Cold Days
Partially-charged batteries may not function on cold days. In cold weather,
charge one battery before use and keep another in a warm place, ready to be
exchanged as necessary. Once warmed, cold batteries may recover some of
their charge.
●
Battery Level
•
Turning the camera on or off repeatedly when the battery is fully
discharged will shorten battery life. Batteries that have been fully
discharged must be charged before use.
•
A marked drop in the time a fully charged battery retains its charge when
used at room temperature indicates that it requires replacement. Purchase
a new rechargeable battery.
●
Do Not Attempt to Charge Fully-Charged Batteries
Continuing to charge the battery after it is fully charged can impair battery
performance.
●
Recycling Used Batteries
Recycle rechargeable batteries in accord with local regulations, being sure to
first insulate the terminals with tape.
869
Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions
Cautions: Using the Charger
•
Do not move the charger or touch the battery during charging; failure to
observe this precaution could in very rare instances result in the charger
showing that charging is complete when the battery is only partially
charged. Remove and reinsert the battery to begin charging again.
•
Do not short the charger terminals. Failure to observe this precaution
could result in overheating and damage to the charger.
•
Unplug the charger or disconnect the charging AC adapter when the
charger is not in use.
•
Use the MH-33 with compatible batteries only.
•
Do not use chargers with damage that leaves the interior exposed or that
produce unusual sounds when used.
•
The symbols on this product represent the following:
p
DC
Cautions: Using the Charging AC Adapter
•
Latch the battery chamber cover before charging the battery via the
charging AC adapter.
•
Do not move the camera or touch the battery during charging; failure to
observe this precaution could in very rare instances result in the camera
showing that charging is complete when the battery is only partially
charged. Disconnect and reconnect the adapter to begin charging again.
•
Do not short the adapter terminals. Failure to observe this precaution
could result in overheating and damage to the charger.
•
Unplug the adapter when it is not in use.
•
Do not use adapters with damage that leaves the interior exposed or that
produce unusual sounds when used.
•
The symbols on this product represent the following:
m
AC,
p
DC,
q
Class II equipment (the construction of the product is
double-insulated)
870
Specifications
Nikon
Z 9 Digital Camera
Specifications
Type
Type Digital camera with support for interchangeable lenses
Lens mount Nikon Z mount
Lens
Compatible
lenses
•
Z mount NIKKOR lenses
•
F mount NIKKOR lenses (mount adapter required;
restrictions may apply)
Effective pixels
Effective
pixels
45.7 million
Image sensor
Type 35.9 × 23.9 mm CMOS sensor (Nikon FX format)
Total pixels 52.37 million
Dust-
reduction
system
Image sensor cleaning, Image Dust Off reference data
(requires NX Studio)
871
Specifications
Storage
Image size
(pixels)
•
[FX (36 × 24)] selected for image area:
- 8256 × 5504 (Large: 45.4 M)
- 6192 × 4128 (Medium: 25.6 M)
- 4128 × 2752 (Small: 11.4 M)
•
[DX (24 × 16)] selected for image area:
- 5392 × 3592 (Large: 19.4 M)
- 4032 × 2688 (Medium: 10.8 M)
- 2688 × 1792 (Small: 4.8 M)
•
[1:1 (24 × 24)] selected for image area:
- 5504 × 5504 (Large: 30.3 M)
- 4128 × 4128 (Medium: 17.0 M)
- 2752 × 2752 (Small: 7.6 M)
•
[16:9 (36 × 20)] selected for image area:
- 8256 × 4640 (Large: 38.3 M)
- 6192 × 3480 (Medium: 21.5 M)
- 4128 × 2320 (Small: 9.6 M)
File format
(image
quality)
•
NEF (RAW): 14 bit; choose from lossless compression,
high efficiency
m
, and high efficiency options
•
JPEG: JPEG-Baseline compliant with fine (approx. 1:4),
normal (approx. 1:8), or basic (approx. 1:16)
compression; size-priority and optimal-quality
compression available
•
NEF (RAW)+JPEG: Single photograph recorded in both
NEF (RAW) and JPEG formats
872
Specifications
Picture
Control
System
Auto, Standard, Neutral, Vivid, Monochrome, Portrait,
Landscape, Flat, Creative Picture Controls (Dream,
Morning, Pop, Sunday, Somber, Dramatic, Silence,
Bleached, Melancholic, Pure, Denim, Toy, Sepia, Blue, Red,
Pink, Charcoal, Graphite, Binary, Carbon); selected Picture
Control can be modified; storage for custom Picture
Controls
Media CFexpress (Type B) and XQD memory cards
Dual card slots
The card in Slot 2 can be used for overflow or backup
storage, for separate storage of NEF (RAW) and JPEG
pictures, or for storage of duplicate JPEG pictures at
different sizes and image qualities; pictures can be copied
between cards.
File system DCF 2.0, Exif 2.32
Viewfinder
Viewfinder
1.27-cm/0.5-in. approx. 3690k-dot (Quad VGA) OLED
electronic viewfinder with color balance and auto and
16-level manual brightness controls
Frame
coverage
Approx. 100% horizontal and 100% vertical
Magnification Approx. 0.8× (50 mm lens at innity, −1.0 m
−1
)
Eyepoint
23 mm (−1.0 m
−1
; from rearmost surface of viewfinder
eyepiece lens)
Diopter
adjustment
−4 – +3 m
−1
Eye sensor
Automatically switches between monitor and viewfinder
displays
Monitor
Monitor
8-cm/3.2-in., approx. 2100k-dot vertically and horizontally
tilting TFT touch-sensitive LCD with 170° viewing angle,
approximately 100% frame coverage, and color balance
and 11-level manual brightness controls
Storage
873
Specifications
Shutter
Type Electronic shutter with shutter sound and sensor shield
Speed
1
/
32000
–30 s (choose from step sizes of
1
/
3
,
1
/
2
, and 1 EV,
extendable to 900 s in mode M), bulb, time
Flash sync
speed
Flash synchronizes with shutter at speeds of
1
/
250
or
1
/
200
s
or slower (but note that the guide number drops at
speeds of
1
/
200
to
1
/
250
s); sync speeds as fast as
1
/
8000
s are
supported with auto FP high-speed sync
Release
Release mode
Single frame, continuous low-speed, continuous high-
speed, high-speed frame capture, self-timer
Approximate
frame advance
rate
•
Continuous low-speed: Approx. 1–10 fps
•
Continuous high-speed: Approx. 10–20 fps
•
High-speed frame capture (C30): Approx. 30 fps
•
High-speed frame capture (C120): Approx. 120 fps
* Maximum frame advance rate as measured by in-house
tests.
Self-timer
2 s, 5 s, 10 s, 20 s; 1–9 exposures at intervals of 0.5, 1, 2, or
3s
Exposure
Metering
system
TTL metering using camera image sensor
Metering mode
•
Matrix metering
•
Center-weighted metering: Weight of 75% given to
12 or 8 mm circle in center of frame or weighting can
be based on average of entire frame
•
Spot metering: Meters circle with a diameter of
approximately 4 mm centered on selected focus point
•
Highlight-weighted metering
874
Specifications
Range
−3–+17 EV
* Figures are for ISO 100 and f/2.0 lens at 20 °C/68 °F
Mode
P: programmed auto with flexible program, S: shutter-
priority auto, A: aperture-priority auto, M: manual
Exposure
compensation
−5–+5 EV (choose from step sizes of
1
/
3
and
1
/
2
EV)
Exposure lock Luminosity locked at detected value
ISO sensitivity
(Recommended
Exposure
Index)
ISO 64–25600 (choose from step sizes of
1
/
3
and 1 EV);
can also be set to approx. 0.3, 0.7, or 1 EV (ISO 32
equivalent) below ISO 64 or to approx. 0.3, 0.7, 1, or 2 EV
(ISO 102400 equivalent) above ISO 25600; auto ISO
sensitivity control available
Active
D-Lighting
Auto, Extra high 2, Extra high 1, High, Normal, Low, and
Off
Multiple
exposure
Add, average, lighten, darken
Other options HDR overlay, photo mode flicker reduction
Autofocus
Type Hybrid phase-detection/contrast AF with AF assist
Detection
range
−6.5–+19 EV (−8.5–+19 EV with starlight view)
* Measured in photo mode at ISO 100 and a
temperature of 20 °C/68 °F using single-servo AF
(AF-S) and a lens with a maximum aperture of f/1.2
Lens servo
•
Autofocus (AF): Single-servo AF (AF-S); continuous-
servo AF (AF-C); full-time AF (AF-F; available only in
video mode); predictive focus tracking
•
Manual focus (M): Electronic rangefinder can be used
Focus points
493 focus points
* Number of focus points available in photo mode with
single-point AF selected for AF-area mode and FX
selected for image area
Exposure
875
Specifications
AF-area mode
Pinpoint (available in photo mode only), single-point,
dynamic-area (S, M, and L; available in photo mode only),
wide-area (S and L), and auto-area AF; 3D-tracking
(available in photo mode only); subject-tracking AF
(available in video mode only)
Focus lock
Focus can be locked by pressing shutter-release button
halfway (single-servo AF/AF-S) or by pressing the center
of the sub-selector
Vibration reduction (VR)
Camera on-
board VR
5-axis image sensor shift
Lens on-board
VR
Lens shift (available with VR lenses)
Flash
Flash control
TTL: i-TTL flash control; i-TTL balanced fill-flash is used
with matrix, center-weighted, and highlight-weighted
metering, standard i-TTL fill-flash with spot metering
Flash mode
Front-curtain sync, slow sync, rear-curtain sync, red-eye
reduction, red-eye reduction with slow sync, off
Flash
compensation
−3–+1 EV (choose from step sizes of
1
/
3
and
1
/
2
EV)
Flash-ready
indicator
Lights when optional flash unit is fully charged; flashes as
underexposure warning after flash is fired at full output
Accessory
shoe
ISO 518 hot-shoe with sync and data contacts and safety
lock
Autofocus
876
Specifications
Nikon Creative
Lighting
System (CLS)
i-TTL flash control, radio-controlled Advanced Wireless
Lighting, optical Advanced Wireless Lighting, modeling
illumination, FV lock, Color Information Communication,
auto FP high-speed sync, unified flash control
Sync terminal ISO 519 sync terminal with locking thread
White balance
White balance
Auto (3 types), natural light auto, direct sunlight, cloudy,
shade, incandescent, fluorescent (3 types), flash, choose
color temperature (2500–10,000 K), preset manual (up to
6 values can be stored), all with fine-tuning
Bracketing
Bracketing Exposure and/or flash, white balance, and ADL
Video
Metering
system
TTL metering using camera image sensor
Metering mode Matrix, center-weighted, or highlight-weighted
Frame size
(pixels) and
frame rate
•
7680 × 4320 (8K UHD): 30p (progressive)/25p/24p
•
3840 × 2160 (4K UHD): 120p/100p/60p/50p/30p/25p/
24p
•
1920 × 1080: 120p/100p/60p/50p/30p/25p/24p
* Actual frame rates for 120p, 100p, 60p, 50p, 30p, 25p,
and 24p are 119.88, 100, 59.94, 50, 29.97, 25, and
23.976 fps respectively
Flash
877
Specifications
File format MOV, MP4
Video
compression
Apple ProRes 422 HQ (10 bit), H.265/HEVC (8 bit/10 bit),
H.264/AVC (8 bit)
Audio
recording
format
Linear PCM (for videos recorded in MOV format) or AAC
(for videos recorded in MP4 format)
Audio
recording
device
Built-in stereo or external microphone with attenuator
option; sensitivity adjustable
Exposure
compensation
−3 – +3 EV (choose from step sizes of
1
/
3
and
1
/
2
EV)
ISO sensitivity
(Recommended
Exposure
Index)
•
Mode M: Manual selection (ISO 64–25600; choose from
step sizes of
1
/
3
and 1 EV); with additional options
available equivalent to approximately 0.3, 0.7, 1, or 2 EV
(ISO 102400 equivalent) above ISO 25600; auto ISO
sensitivity control (ISO 64–Hi 2.0) available with
selectable upper limit
•
Modes P, S, A: Auto ISO sensitivity control (ISO 64–
Hi 2.0) with selectable upper limit
Active
D-Lighting
Extra high, High, Normal, Low, and Off
Other options
Time-lapse video recording, electronic vibration
reduction, time codes, N-Log and HDR (HLG) video
Playback
Playback
Full-frame and thumbnail (up to 4, 9, or 72 pictures)
playback with playback zoom, playback zoom cropping,
video playback, histogram display, highlights, photo
information, location data display, auto picture rotation,
picture rating, voice memo input and playback, and IPTC
information embedding and display
Video
878
Specifications
Interface
USB
Type C USB connector (SuperSpeed USB); connection to
built-in USB port is recommended
HDMI output Type A HDMI connector
Audio input
Stereo mini-pin jack (3.5 mm diameter; plug-in power
supported)
Audio output Stereo mini-pin jack (3.5 mm diameter)
Ten-pin
remote
terminal
Built-in (can be used with MC-30A/MC-36A remote cords
and other optional accessories)
Ethernet
RJ-45 connector
•
Standards: IEEE 802.3ab (1000BASE-T), IEEE 802.3u
(100BASE-TX), IEEE 802.3 (10BASE-T)
•
Data rates
*
: 1000/100/10 Mbps with auto detect
•
Port: 1000BASE-T/100BASE-TX/10BASE-T (AUTO-MDIX)
* Maximum logical data rates according to IEEE standard;
actual rates may differ.
879
Specifications
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Wi-Fi
•
Standards:
- IEEE 802.11b/g/n (Africa, Asia, and Oceania)
- IEEE 802.11b/g/n/a/ac (Europe, U.S.A., Canada, Mexico)
- IEEE 802.11b/g/n/a (other countries in the Americas)
•
Operating frequency:
- 2412–2462 MHz (channel 11; Africa, Asia, and Oceania)
- 2412–2462 MHz (channel 11) and 5180–5825 MHz
(U.S.A., Canada, Mexico)
- 2412–2462 MHz (channel 11) and 5180–5805 MHz
(other countries in the Americas)
- 2412–2462 MHz (channel 11) and 5745–5805 MHz
(Georgia)
- 2412–2462 MHz (channel 11) and 5180–5320 MHz
(other European countries)
•
Maximum output power (EIRP):
- 2.4 GHz band: 8.4 dBm
- 5 GHz band: 6.0 dBm (Georgia)
- 5 GHz band: 9.0 dBm (other countries)
•
Authentication: Open system, WPA2-PSK, WPA3-SAE
Bluetooth
•
Communication protocols: Bluetooth Specification
version 5.0
•
Operating frequency:
- Bluetooth: 2402–2480 MHz
- Bluetooth Low Energy: 2402–2480 MHz
•
Maximum output power (EIRP):
- Bluetooth: 2.9 dBm
- Bluetooth Low Energy: 1.4 dBm
Range (line of
sight)
Approximately 10 m (32 ft)
*
* Without interference. Range may vary with signal
strength and presence or absence of obstacles.
880
Specifications
Location Data
Supported GNS
systems
GPS (USA), GLONASS (Russia), QZSS (Japan)
Data acquired
Latitude, longitude, altitude, UTC (Universal
Coordinated Time)
Clock
synchronization
Camera clock can be set to time acquired via GNSS
Track logs NMEA-compliant
Log interval 15 s, 30 s, 1 min., 2 min., 5 min.
Maximum log
recording time
6, 12, or 24 hours
Log deletion Supported
Power source
Battery
One EN-EL18d rechargeable Li-ion battery *
* EN-EL18c, EN-EL18b, EN-EL18a, and EN-EL18 batteries
can also be used. Note, however, that fewer pictures
can be taken on a single charge than with the
EN-EL18d. The EH-7P charging AC adapter can be
used to charge EN-EL18d, EN-EL18c, and EN-EL18b
batteries only.
Charging AC
adapter
EH-7P charging AC adapter
AC adapter
EH-6d; requires EP-6a power connector (available
separately)
Tripod socket
Tripod socket 0.635 cm (
1
/
4
in., ISO 1222)
881
Specifications
•
Unless otherwise stated, all measurements are performed in conformity
with Camera and Imaging Products Association (CIPA) standards or
guidelines.
•
All figures are for a camera with a fully-charged battery.
•
The sample images displayed on the camera and the images and
illustrations in this document are for expository purposes only.
•
Nikon reserves the right to change the appearance and specifications of
the hardware and software described in this document at any time and
without prior notice. Nikon will not be held liable for damages that may
result from any mistakes that this document may contain.
Dimensions/weight
Dimensions
(W × H × D)
Approx. 149 × 149.5 × 90.5 mm/5.9 × 5.9 × 3.6 in.
Weight
Approx. 1340 g (2 lb. 15.3 oz.) with battery and memory
card but without body cap and accessory shoe cover;
approx. 1160 g/2 lb. 9 oz. (camera body only)
Operating environment
Temperature −10 °C–40 °C (+14 °F–104 °F)
Humidity 85% or less (no condensation)
882
Specifications
❚❚
MH-33 Battery Charger
The symbols on this product represent the following:
p
DC
Rated input DC 5 V/9 V, 3 A/3 A
Charging
output
DC 12.6 V, 1.6 A
Supported
batteries
EN-EL18d, EN-EL18c, and EN-EL18b rechargeable Li-ion
batteries
Charging time
Approx. 4 hours (approx. 3 hours with EN-EL18c/
EN-EL18b batteries)
* Time required to charge battery at an ambient
temperature of 25 °C (77 °F) when no charge remains
Operating
temperature
0 °C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F)
Dimensions
(W × H × D)
Approx. 87 × 25 × 86.5 mm /3.5 × 1 × 3.5 in., excluding
projections
Weight Approx. 101 g/3.6 oz
883
Specifications
❚❚
EH-7P Charging AC Adapter
The EH-7P comes with a plug adapter attached in countries or regions where
required; the shape of the plug adapter varies with the country of sale. Do
not attempt to remove the plug adapter, as this could damage the product.
The symbols on this product represent the following:
m
AC,
p
DC,
q
Class II equipment (the construction of the product is
double-insulated)
Rated input AC 100–240 V, 50/60 Hz, MAX 0.5 A
Rated output DC 5.0 V/3.0 A, 15.0 W
Supported
batteries
EN-EL18d, EN-EL18c, and EN-EL18b rechargeable Li-ion
batteries
Operating
temperature
0 °C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F)
Average active
efficiency
81.80%
Efficiency at low
load (10%)
72.50%
No-load power
consumption
0.075 W
Dimensions
(W × H × D)
Approx. 65.5 × 26.5 × 58.5 mm/2.6 × 1.1 × 2.4 in.,
excluding plug adapter
Weight Approx. 135 g (4.8 oz), excluding plug adapter
884
Specifications
A
Notice for Customers in Europe
Distributor (Importer for EU Countries)
Nikon Europe B.V.
Tripolis 100, Burgerweeshuispad 101, 1076 ER Amsterdam, The
Netherlands
+31-20-7099-000
Commercial registration number: 34036589
Importer UK: Nikon UK, Branch of Nikon Europe BV' with Chamber of
Commerce: BR022801
The Crescent, Surbiton, Surrey, United Kingdom, KT6 4BN
❚❚
EN-EL18d Rechargeable Li-ion Battery
Type Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
Rated capacity 10.8 V, 3300 mAh
Operating
temperature
−10 °C–40 °C (+14 °F–104 °F) with Z 9
Dimensions
(W × H × D)
Approx. 56.5 × 27 × 82.5 mm (2.3 × 1.1 × 3.3 in.)
Weight Approx. 175 g (6.2 oz), excluding terminal cover
885
Specifications
D
Caution: Disposing of Data Storage Devices
Please note that deleting pictures or formatting memory cards or other data
storage devices does not completely erase the original image data. Deleted
files can sometimes be recovered from discarded storage devices using
commercially available software, potentially resulting in the malicious use of
personal image data. Ensuring the privacy of such data is the user’s
responsibility.
Before discarding a data storage device or transferring ownership to another
person, erase all data using commercial deletion software, or format the
device and then completely refill it with pictures containing no private
information (for example, pictures of empty sky). Care should be taken to
avoid injury when physically destroying data storage devices.
Before discarding the camera or transferring ownership to another person,
you should also use the [Reset all settings] item in the camera setup menu
to delete network settings and other personal information.
D
Supported Standards
•
DCF Version 2.0: The Design Rule for Camera File System (DCF) is a
standard widely used in the digital camera industry to ensure compatibility
among different makes of camera.
•
Exif Version 2.32: The camera supports Exif (Exchangeable Image File
Format for Digital Still Cameras) version 2.32, a standard introduced with
the goal of improving the interoperability of printers and digital cameras,
making it easier to produce high-quality prints. Information stored with
photographs is used for optimal color reproduction when the images are
output on Exif-compliant printers. See the printer documentation for
details.
•
HDMI: High-Definition Multimedia Interface is a standard for multimedia
interfaces used in consumer electronics and AV devices. This standard
ensures that audiovisual data and control signals can be transmitted to
HDMI-compliant devices via a single cable connection.
886
Approved Memory Cards
•
The camera can be used with CFexpress (Type B) and XQD memory
cards.
•
CFexpress or XQD cards with a maximum data transfer rate of at least
250 MB/s are recommended for high-speed frame capture.
•
CFexpress or XQD cards with a maximum data transfer rate of at least
45 MB/s (300×) are recommended for video recording and playback.
CFexpress or XQD cards with a maximum data transfer rate of at least
250 MB/s are recommended for recording and playback of videos with
a high frame size or rate. Slower speeds may result in recording or
playback being interrupted.
•
When choosing cards for use in card readers, be sure they are
compatible with the device.
•
Contact the manufacturer for information on features, operation, and
limitations on use.
Approved Memory Cards
887
Memory Card Capacity
The following table shows buffer capacity and the approximate number
of pictures that can be stored on a 325 GB
1
card at different image
qualities (
0
105) and sizes (
0
108) when [FX (36 × 24)] is selected for
[Choose image area]. Actual capacity varies with shooting conditions
and the type of card.
Memory Card Capacity
Image quality
Image
size
File size
Number of
exposures
remaining
2
Buffer
capacity
2, 3
NEF (RAW), lossless
compression
—
Approx.
55.1 MB
3600 frames 79 frames
NEF (RAW), high
efficiency
m
—
Approx.
33.0 MB
8500 frames 685 frames
NEF (RAW), high
efficiency
—
Approx.
22.0 MB
12,100 frames
Over
1000 frames
JPEG fine
4
Large
Approx.
24.1 MB
10,400 frames
Over
1000 frames
Medium
Approx.
14.3 MB
17,700 frames
Small
Approx.
7.0 MB
35,400 frames
JPEG normal
4
Large
Approx.
12.2 MB
20,600 frames
Over
1000 frames
Medium
Approx.
7.2 MB
34,400 frames
Small
Approx.
3.6 MB
68,800 frames
888
Memory Card Capacity
1 Figures are for a ProGrade Digital COBALT 1700R 325GB memory card (as
of September 2021) with a NIKKOR Z 50mm f/1.8S lens mounted on the
camera.
2 Number of pictures that can be saved to memory card or stored in
memory buffer varies with scene recorded.
3 Maximum number of exposures that can be stored in memory buffer at
ISO 100. May drop in some situations, including when:
•
an optimal-compression ([
m
]) JPEG option is selected for [Image
quality] or
•
[ON] is selected for [Auto distortion control].
4 Figures assume a size-priority option (an option not marked with [
m
]) is
selected for [Image quality]. Selecting an optimal-compression ([
m
])
option increases file size; the number of images and buffer capacity drop
accordingly.
JPEG basic
4
Large
Approx.
5.3 MB
39,900 frames
Over
1000 frames
Medium
Approx.
3.4 MB
65,200 frames
Small
Approx.
1.9 MB
123,000 frames
Image quality
Image
size
File size
Number of
exposures
remaining
2
Buffer
capacity
2, 3
889
Battery Endurance
The video footage or number of shots that can be recorded with a fully-
charged EN-EL18d rechargeable Li-ion battery
1
is given below
2
. Actual
endurance varies with such factors as the condition of the battery, the
interval between shots, and the options selected in the camera menus.
Photo Mode (Single Frame): Number of Shots
3
•
[Viewfinder only] selected for monitor mode with:
-[ON] selected for [Energy saving (photo mode)] in the setup menu:
Approx. 740 shots
-[OFF] selected for [Energy saving (photo mode)] in the setup
menu: Approx. 700 shots
•
[Monitor only] selected for monitor mode with:
-[ON] selected for [Energy saving (photo mode)] in the setup menu:
Approx. 770 shots
-[OFF] selected for [Energy saving (photo mode)] in the setup
menu: Approx. 740 shots
Photo Mode (Burst Photography): Number of Shots
4
Approx. 5310 shots
Video Mode: Length of Footage
5
•
[Viewfinder only] selected for monitor mode: Approx. 170 minutes
•
[Monitor only] selected for monitor mode: Approx. 170 minutes
Battery Endurance
890
Battery Endurance
Actions such as the following can reduce battery endurance:
•
keeping the shutter-release button pressed halfway,
•
repeated autofocus operations,
•
taking NEF (RAW) photographs,
•
slow shutter speeds,
•
using camera Wi-Fi (wireless LAN) and Bluetooth features,
•
using the built-in GNSS receiver,
•
using the camera with optional accessories connected,
•
repeatedly zooming in and out, and
•
taking pictures at low ambient temperatures.
891
Battery Endurance
To ensure that you get the most from rechargeable Nikon EN-EL18d
batteries:
•
Keep the battery contacts clean. Soiled contacts can reduce battery
performance.
•
Use batteries immediately after charging. Batteries will lose their
charge if left unused.
1 EN-EL18c, EN-EL18b, EN-EL18a, and EN-EL18 batteries can also be used.
Note, however, that fewer pictures can be taken on a single charge than
with the EN-EL18d.
2 Measured at 23 °C/73.4 °F (±2 °C/3.6 °F) with a SONY CEB-G128 memory
card.
3 Camera and Imaging Products Association (CIPA) standard. One
photograph taken at default settings once every 30s. Measured with a
NIKKOR Z 24–70mm f/4 S lens.
4 In-house measurements. Image quality set to JPEG normal, image size to
“Large”, shutter speed to
1
/
250
s, shutter-release button pressed halfway
for 3s and focus cycled from infinity to minimum range three times
before a burst of six shots, after which the viewfinder is turned on for 5 s
and then turned off and the standby timer allowed to expire. This process
is then repeated. Measured with a NIKKOR Z 70–200mm f/2.8 VR S lens.
[Viewfinder only] was selected for monitor mode.
5 Actual battery endurance as measured under conditions specified by
CIPA. Measured with a NIKKOR Z 24–70mm f/4 S lens. Measurement
performed at default settings.
•
Each shot can be up to 125 minutes in length.
•
If camera temperature rises, recording may end before maximum
length or size is reached.
892
Trademarks and Licenses
•
CFexpress is a trademark of the CompactFlash Association in the
United States and other countries.
•
NVM Express is a trademark of NVM Express Inc. in the United States
and other countries.
•
XQD is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
•
Windows is either a registered trademark or a trademark of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
•
Apple®, App Store®, the Apple logos, iPhone®, iPad®, Mac, and macOS
are trademarks of Apple Inc. registered in the U.S. and/or other
countries.
•
Android, Google Play and the Google Play logo are trademarks of
Google LLC. The Android robot is reproduced or modified from work
created and shared by Google and used according to terms described
in the Creative Commons 3.0 Attribution License.
•
IOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco Systems, Inc., in
the United States and/or other countries and is used under license.
•
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC.
Trademarks and Licenses
893
Trademarks and Licenses
•
The Bluetooth® word mark and logo are registered trademarks owned
by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use of such marks by Nikon is under
license.
•
Wi-Fi and the Wi-Fi logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of
the Wi-Fi Alliance.
•
Powered by intoPIX technology.
•
All other trade names mentioned in this document or the other
documentation provided with your Nikon product are trademarks or
registered trademarks of their respective holders.
•
Use of the Made for Apple badge means that an accessory has been
designed to connect specifically to the Apple products identified in
the badge, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple
performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of
this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards.
Please note that the use of this accessory with an Apple product may
affect wireless performance.
•
This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for
use in the OpenSSL Toolkit.
894
Trademarks and Licenses
D
FreeType License (FreeType2)
Portions of this software are copyright © 2012 The FreeType Project
(https://www.freetype.org
). All rights reserved.
D
MIT License (HarfBuzz)
Portions of this software are copyright © 2018 The HarfBuzz Project
(https://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Software/HarfBuzz
). All rights reserved.
D
Unicode® Character Database License (Unicode® Character
Database)
The software for this product uses the Unicode® Character Database License
open-source software. The terms of the software license are as follows:
COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE
Copyright © 1991–2020 Unicode, Inc. All rights reserved.
Distributed under the Terms of Use in
https://www.unicode.org/copyright.html
.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy
of the Unicode data files and any associated documentation (the "Data Files")
or Unicode software and any associated documentation (the "Software") to
deal in the Data Files or Software without restriction, including without
limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, and/or
sell copies of the Data Files or Software, and to permit persons to whom the
Data Files or Software are furnished to do so, provided that either
(i) this copyright and permission notice appear with all copies of the Data
Files or Software, or
(ii) this copyright and permission notice appear in associated
Documentation.
895
Trademarks and Licenses
THE DATA FILES AND SOFTWARE ARE PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN
NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS
NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING
FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR
IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE DATA FILES OR
SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not
be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other
dealings in these Data Files or Software without prior written authorization
of the copyright holder.
D
AVC Patent Portfolio License
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE
PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN
COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO
THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL
ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC
VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE
https://www.mpegla.com
896
Trademarks and Licenses
D
BSD License (NVM Express Driver)
The license for the open-source software included in the camera’s NVM
Express driver is as follows:
https://imaging.nikon.com/support/pdf/LicenseNVMe.pdf
D
Other Open-Source Software
Additional open-source licenses can be found at the URL below:
https://imaging.nikon.com/oss/en/index.htm
897
Cautions: Location Data (GPS/GLONASS)
●
Location Data and Track Logs
•
If [ON] is selected for [Location data (built-in)]> [Record location data]
in the setup menu or log tracking is in progress, the camera will continue to
acquire log and/or location even while off.
•
Personal information may be inferred from the location data stored in track
logs or embedded in photos and videos. Exercise caution when sharing
photos, videos, or track logs or when posting them to the Internet or other
locations where they can be viewed by third parties. Be sure to also read
“Caution: Disposing of Data Storage Devices” (
0
885).
●
Navigation
This product is a camera. It is not intended for use as a navigation or
surveying device.
•
The location reported by the camera is an approximation only. It is not to
be used for surveying or for navigation when travelling by air or car, on
foot, or by other means.
●
Overseas Use
•
Before travelling, check with your travel agent or the embassy or tourism
board of the countries you will be visiting for information on restrictions
that may apply to the use of cameras that support the recording of location
data. China, for example, prohibits unauthorized recording of location
data. Select [OFF] for [Record location data].
•
As of October, 2021, the location data function may not perform as
expected in China and in the vicinity of the Chinese border.
Cautions: Location Data (GPS/
GLONASS)
898
Notices
●
Notices for Customers in the U.S.A.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Radio Frequency
Interference Statement
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits
for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits
are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference
in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:
•
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
•
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
•
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
•
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Notices
The Battery Charger
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS—SAVE THESE
INSTRUCTIONS
DANGER—TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK, CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS
899
Notices
CAUTIONS
Modifications
The FCC requires the user to be
notified that any changes or
modifications made to this device
that are not expressly approved by Nikon Corporation may void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Interface Cables
Use the interface cables sold or provided by Nikon for your equipment. Using
other interface cables may exceed the limits of Class B Part 15 of the FCC
rules.
Nikon Inc., 1300 Walt Whitman Road, Melville, New York 11747-3064,
U.S.A.Tel.: 631-547-4200
●
Notice for Customers in Canada
CAN ICES-3 B / NMB-3 B
Z 9
900
Notices
●
Notices for Customers in Europe
This symbol indicates that electrical and electronic equipment is
to be collected separately.
The following apply only to users in European countries:
•
This product is designated for separate collection at an
appropriate collection point. Do not dispose of as household
waste.
•
Separate collection and recycling helps conserve natural resources and
prevent negative consequences for human health and the environment
that might result from incorrect disposal.
•
For more information, contact the retailer or the local authorities in charge
of waste management.
This symbol on the battery indicates that the battery is to be
collected separately.
The following apply only to users in European countries:
•
All batteries, whether marked with this symbol or not, are
designated for separate collection at an appropriate collection
point. Do not dispose of as household waste.
•
For more information, contact the retailer or the local authorities in charge
of waste management.
CAUTION: RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT
TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.
901
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN)
This product is controlled by the United States Export Administration
Regulations (EAR). The permission of the United States government is
not required for export to countries other than the following, which as
of this writing are subject to embargo or special controls: Cuba, Iran,
North Korea, Sudan, and Syria (list subject to change).
The use of wireless devices may be prohibited in some countries or
regions. Contact a Nikon-authorized service representative before using
the wireless features of this product outside the country of purchase.
The Bluetooth transmitter in this device operates in the 2.4 GHz band.
●
Notice for Customers in the U.S.A. and Canada
This device complies with part 15 of FCC Rules and Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada’s licence-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING
The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications
made to this device that are not expressly approved by Nikon Corporation
may void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN)
902
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN)
Compliance with FCC requirement 15.407(c)
Data transmission is always initiated by software, which is the passed down
through the MAC, through the digital and analog baseband, and finally to
the RF chip. Several special packets are initiated by the MAC. These are the
only ways the digital baseband portion will turn on the RF transmitter, which
it then turns off at the end of the packet. Therefore, the transmitter will be on
only while one of the aforementioned packets is being transmitted. In other
words, this device automatically discontinue transmission in case of either
absence of information to transmit or operational failure.
Frequency Tolerance: ±20 ppm
FCC Radio Frequency Interference Statement
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits
for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits
are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference
in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:
•
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
•
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
•
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
•
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Co-location
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any
other antenna or transmitter.
Nikon Inc., 1300 Walt Whitman Road, Melville, New York 11747-3064, U.S.A.
Tel.: 631-547-4200
903
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN)
FCC/ISED RF Exposure Statement
The available scientific evidence does not show that any health problems are
associated with using low power wireless devices. There is no proof,
however, that these low power wireless devices are absolutely safe. Low
power Wireless devices emit low levels of radio frequency energy (RF) in the
microwave range while being used. Whereas high levels of RF can produce
health effects (by heating tissue), exposure of low-level RF that does not
produce heating effects causes no known adverse health effects. Many
studies of low-level RF exposures have not found any biological effects.
Some studies have suggested that some biological effects might occur, but
such findings have not been confirmed by additional research. This product
has been tested and found to comply with FCC/ISED radiation exposure
limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio
frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines and RSS-102 of the ISED radio frequency
(RF) Exposure rules. Please refer to the SAR test report that was uploaded to
FCC website.
Compliance with RSS-247 Issue 2 §6.4
Data transmission is always initiated by software, which is the passed down
through the MAC, through the digital and analog baseband, and finally to
the RF chip. Several special packets are initiated by the MAC. These are the
only ways the digital baseband portion will turn on the RF transmitter, which
it then turns off at the end of the packet. Therefore, the transmitter will be on
only while one of the aforementioned packets is being transmitted. In other
words, this device automatically discontinue transmission in case of either
absence of information to transmit or operational failure.
●
Notice for Customers in Canada
For indoor use only (5150-5350MHz).
904
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN)
●
Notice for Customers in Europe and in Countries Complying with the
Radio Equipment Directive
Hereby, Nikon Corporation declares that the radio equipment
type Z 9 is in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU.
The full texts of the EU declarations of conformity are available at
the following internet addresses:
https://imaging.nikon.com/support/pdf/DoC_
N2014.pdf
Wi-Fi
•
Operating frequency:
- 2412–2462 MHz (channel 11; Africa, Asia, and Oceania)
- 2412–2462 MHz (channel 11) and 5180–5825 MHz (U.S.A., Canada,
Mexico)
- 2412–2462 MHz (channel 11) and 5180–5805 MHz (other countries in the
Americas)
- 2412–2462 MHz (channel 11) and 5745–5805 MHz (Georgia)
- 2412–2462 MHz (channel 11) and 5180–5320 MHz (other European
countries)
•
Maximum output power (EIRP):
- 2.4 GHz band: 8.4 dBm
- 5 GHz band: 6.0 dBm (Georgia)
- 5 GHz band: 9.0 dBm (other countries)
Bluetooth
•
Operating frequency:
- Bluetooth: 2402–2480 MHz
- Bluetooth Low Energy: 2402–2480 MHz
•
Maximum output power (EIRP):
- Bluetooth: 2.9 dBm
- Bluetooth Low Energy: 1.4 dBm
905
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN)
●
Notice for Customers in Singapore
This device complies with radio-frequency regulations. The content of
certification labels not affixed to the device is given below.
●
Notice for Customers in Nigeria
●
Security
Although one of the benefits of this product is that it allows others to freely
connect for the wireless exchange of data anywhere within its range, the
following may occur if security is not enabled:
•
Data theft: Malicious third-parties may intercept wireless transmissions to
steal user IDs, passwords, and other personal information.
•
Unauthorized access: Unauthorized users may gain access to the network
and alter data or perform other malicious actions. Note that due to the
design of wireless networks, specialized attacks may allow unauthorized
access even when security is enabled.
•
Unsecured networks: Connecting to open networks may result in
unauthorized access. Use secure networks only.
A
Conformity Marking
The standards with which the camera complies can be viewed using the
[Conformity marking] option in the setup menu.
Trade Name:
Model: Z 9
Complies with
IMDA Standards
DA103423
Connection and use of this communications
equipment is permitted by the Nigerian
Communications Commission
906
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN)
A
Certificates
907
Index
Index
Symbols
P (Programmed auto)
.........................
133
S (Shutter-priority auto)
....................
133
A (Aperture-priority auto)
................
134
M (Manual)
....................................................
135
U
(Single frame)
......................................
145
V
(Continuous low-speed)
........
145
W
(Continuous high-speed)
.....
145
E
(Self-timer)
.................................
146
,
152
c
(Quick release-mode selection)
...
146
,
148
3
(Pinpoint AF)
.......................................
114
d
(Single-point AF)
............................
114
d
(Dynamic-area AF (S))
................
115
e
(Dynamic-area AF (M))
..............
115
f
(Dynamic-area AF (L))
................
115
f
(Wide-area AF (S))
.........................
116
g
(Wide-area AF (L))
.........................
116
u
(3D-tracking)
......................................
116
n
(Subject-tracking AF)
................
117
h
(Auto-area AF)
..................................
117
L
(Matrix metering)
............................
520
M
(Center-weighted metering)
.
520
N
(Spot metering)
.................................
520
t
(Highlight-weighted metering)
..
520
i
button
.............................................................
65
i
menu
................................................................
65
O
(
Q
) button
............................................
101
c
button
......................................................
148
c
button
.........................................................
429
E
button
........................................................
143
b
button
.........................................................
295
g
(Fn4) button
...........................
192
,
249
d
(help)
...............................................................
63
Numerics
1:1 (24×24) (Image area)
..................
103
16:9 (36×20) (Image area)
...............
103
3D-tracking
..................................................
116
A
AC adapter
....................................................
852
Access-point mode
...................
329
,
367
Active D-Lighting
.......................
512
,
583
ADL bracketing (Auto bracketing
set)
..................................................................
187
AE & flash bracketing (Auto
bracketing set)
.....................................
178
AE bracketing (Auto bracketing set)
178
AE-L icon
...........................................................
141
AF activation
...............................................
604
AF fine-tuning options
......................
714
AF speed
.........................................................
684
AF subject detection options
.....
119
,
587
AF tracking sensitivity
........................
685
AF-area mode
............................................
113
AF-C
........................................................................
111
AF-C priority selection
.......................
598
AF-F
........................................................................
111
AF-ON button
................................................
128
AF-S
........................................................................
111
AF-S priority selection
........................
599
After burst, show
....................................
698
After delete
..................................................
697
Airplane mode
..........................................
756
All pictures
....................................................
263
Aperture
.............................................
134
,
135
Aperture-priority auto
.......................
134
908
Index
Assign remote (WR) Fn button
...
741
Attaching a lens
..........................................
83
Attenuator
....................................................
589
Auto (Set Picture Control)
...............
193
Auto (White balance)
..........................
159
Auto bracketing
.......................................
177
Auto bracketing (mode M)
.............
641
Auto distortion control
.........
517
,
584
Auto
c
ISO sensitivity control
......
640
Auto ISO sensitivity control
...........
156
Auto rotate info display
....................
713
Auto select for upload
...........
358
,
392
Auto-area AF
...............................................
117
Autoexposure lock
................................
141
B
Backup (Role played by card in Slot
2)
.......................................................................
503
Battery
........................................................
72
,
77
Battery charger
............................................
72
Battery info
...................................................
742
BKT button
............................
178
,
183
,
187
Bluetooth
.......................................................
313
Bracketing
............................
178
,
183
,
187
Bracketing order
......................................
642
Brightness (Set Picture Control) 196
Built-in AF-assist illuminator
.........
609
Bulb
.......................................................................
138
Bulb (Long time-exposures)
.........
138
Burst photography
................................
145
C
C30
.......................................................................
149
C120
....................................................................
149
Calibration
....................................................
850
Camera control
.........................................
361
Camera Control Pro2
...........................
361
Camera sounds
.........................................
733
Candidates for deletion
....................
262
Center-weighted area
........................
614
Center-weighted metering
............
520
Charging AC adapter
..............................
75
Choose color temperature (White
balance)
......................................................
160
Choose image area
...............................
103
Clarity (Set Picture Control)
...........
196
Clean image sensor
.................
719
,
858
Cloudy (White balance)
.....................
159
Color space
...................................................
511
Color temperature
....................
162
,
167
Conformity marking
.............................
741
Connect to computer
.........................
760
Connect to FTP server
...........
392
,
765
Connect to other cameras
..............
770
Connect to smart device
..................
757
Continuous AF
...........................................
111
Continuous high-speed
....................
145
Continuous low-speed
......................
145
Continuous shooting speed
.........
619
Contrast (Set Picture Control)
......
196
Control lock
.....................................
665
,
682
Control ring
..................................................
129
Control ring response
.........................
669
Copy image(s)
............................................
699
Copyright information
.......................
725
Creative Picture Control
...................
193
Custom controls
......................................
674
Custom controls (playback)
..........
659
Custom controls (shooting)
..........
647
Custom monitor shooting display
....
634
,
689
Custom Settings
......................................
593
Custom settings bank
.........................
597
Custom viewfinder shooting display
636
,
691
D
Darken
..............................................................
287
Delete
.......................................
101
,
259
,
693
Delete pictures from both slots
.
695
Destination
...................................................
578
909
Index
Detaching lenses
........................................
84
Diffraction compensation
..
517
,
584
Diopter adjustment control
..............
52
Direct sunlight (White balance)
.
159
DISP button
.................................
44
,
48
,
230
Distortion control
...................................
282
D-Lighting
.....................................................
280
Dual-format recording PB slot
....
695
DX (24×16) (Image area)
..................
103
DX format
......................................................
103
DX-based video format
.....................
219
Dynamic-area AF (L)
.............................
115
Dynamic-area AF (M)
..........................
115
Dynamic-area AF (S)
............................
115
E
Easy Connect
.....................
338
,
375
,
404
Easy exposure compensation
.....
613
Effect level (Set Picture Control)196
Electronic VR
...............................................
587
Encryption key
.................
340
,
377
,
406
Energy saving (photo mode)
.......
746
Ethernet connection
...............
346
,
382
EV steps for exposure cntrl
............
612
Exposure
...............................
141
,
143
,
177
Exposure comp. for flash
.................
639
Exposure compensation
..................
143
Exposure indicators
..............................
136
Exposure info
.............................................
232
Extended menu banks
.......................
496
Extended shutter speeds (M)
.......
621
External rec. cntrl (HDMI)
................
592
External recorder
....................................
302
F
File Information
.......................................
231
File naming
......................................
502
,
578
File number sequence
.......................
622
Fill flash
...........................................................
429
Filter effects (Set Picture Control)
......
196
Filtered playback
....................................
255
Filtered playback criteria
.....
255
,
696
Finder display size (photo Lv)
.....
712
Fine-tune optimal exposure
.........
615
Firmware version
....................................
754
Flange-back distance
..........................
131
Flash (White balance)
.........................
160
Flash bracketing (Auto bracketing
set)
..................................................................
178
Flash burst priority
................................
643
Flash compensation
.............................
432
Flash control
...............................................
521
Flash control mode
...............................
426
Flash mode
...................................................
429
Flash off
...........................................................
431
Flash photography
................................
422
Flash shutter speed
..............................
639
Flash sync speed
.....................................
637
Flat (Set Picture Control)
..................
193
Fluorescent (White balance)
........
160
Focal plane mark
.....................................
131
Focus indicator
.........................................
130
Focus lock
.....................................................
126
Focus mode
.....................................
110
,
129
Focus mode restrictions
.......
606
,
683
Focus peaking
...............................
131
,
610
Focus point
..................................................
123
Focus point display
...............................
607
Focus point persistence
...................
605
Focus point wrap-around
...............
606
Focus points used
..................................
601
Focus ring
......................................................
129
Focus ring rotation range
...............
668
Focus shift shooting
............................
568
Focus tracking with lock-on
.........
600
Focus-mode selector
...........................
129
Format memory card
..........................
708
Frame rate
.....................................................
216
Frame size/frame rate
........................
216
910
Index
Frequency response
.............................
589
Full-frame playback
..............................
227
Full-frame playback flicks
................
670
Full-time AF
..................................................
111
FV lock
..............................................................
434
FX (36×24) (Image area)
...................
103
FX format
.......................................................
103
FX-based video format
......................
219
G
Grid type
............................................
630
,
688
H
HDMI
.....................................................
300
,
736
HDR overlay
.................................................
537
Headphone volume
.............................
590
Hi (ISO sensitivity)
..................................
155
High ISO NR
....................................
515
,
583
High sensitivity (Hi)
...............................
155
Highlight display
.....................................
232
Highlight-weighted metering
.....
520
High-speed frame capture
.............
149
Histogram
......................................................
233
HLG
......................................................................
223
HLG quality
...................................................
582
HLG video
......................................................
223
Hue (Set Picture Control)
.................
196
I
Image area
.......................................
102
,
218
Image comment
......................................
724
Image Dust Off ref photo
................
720
Image frame
................................................
630
Image quality
.............................................
105
Image size
.....................................................
108
Incandescent (White balance)
....
159
Infrastructure mode
................
336
,
373
Interval timer shooting
......................
542
IPTC
.....................................................................
726
S
(
Q
) button
......................................
154
ISO sensitivity
.............................................
154
ISO sensitivity settings
..........
508
,
580
ISO sensitivity step value
.................
612
J
JPEG Slot 1 - JPEG Slot 2 (Role played
by card in Slot 2)
.................................
503
K
Keep exp. when f/ changes
...........
616
L
Landscape (Set Picture Control) 193
Language
.......................................................
708
LCD illumination
......................................
627
LCD Illuminator
...............................
40
,
627
Lighten
.............................................................
287
Limit AF-area mode selection
.....
606
,
683
Limit monitor mode selection
....
713
Limit release mode selection
.......
620
Limit selectable image area
..........
621
Limit zebra pattern tone range
..
688
Lo (ISO)
.............................................................
155
Location data
.............................................
204
Location data (built-in)
.........
204
,
737
Location data (smart device)
........
759
Log recording
............................................
225
Long exposure NR
..................................
514
Long time-exposures
..........................
138
Low sensitivity (Lo)
................................
155
M
MAC address
...............................................
774
Manage Picture Control
....................
199
Manual (Shooting mode)
................
135
Manual focus
.................................
111
,
129
911
Index
Manual focus ring in AF mode
...
611
Matrix metering
.......................................
520
Matrix metering face detection
.
613
Maximum shots per burst
..............
619
Memory card
.....................................
81
,
886
Memory card capacity
.......................
887
G
button
......................................................
59
Metering
.........................................................
520
MF (Manual focus)
.......................
111
,
129
Mic jack plug-in power
......................
590
Microphone (for voice memos)
.
295
Microphone sensitivity
......................
588
Mid-range sharpening (Set Picture
Control)
......................................................
196
Mired
.................................................................
166
I
button
.................................................
132
Modeling flash
..........................................
640
Monitor brightness
...............................
709
Monitor color balance
........................
710
Monochrome
.............................................
284
Monochrome (Set Picture Control)
..
193
Multiple exposure
..................................
528
My Menu
........................................................
775
N
Natural light auto (White balance)
...
159
NEF (RAW) processing
........................
267
Network menu
..........................................
755
Network settings (Connect to
computer)
................................................
760
Network settings (Connect to FTP
server)
..........................................................
765
Neutral (Set Picture Control)
........
193
N-Log
.................................................................
225
Non-CPU lens data
................................
718
NX Studio
.......................................................
323
O
On-camera flash photography
...
422
Overflow (Role played by card in
Slot 2)
............................................................
503
Overlay (add)
..............................................
285
Overview
........................................................
239
P
Pairing (Bluetooth)
................................
757
Perspective control
...............................
283
Photo flicker reduction
.....................
518
Photo information
.................................
230
Photo shooting menu
........................
491
Photo/video selector
.....................
88
,
93
Picture review
............................................
696
Pictures shot on selected dates
.
262
PIN-entry WPS
..................
338
,
375
,
404
Pinpoint AF
..................................................
114
Pixel mapping
...........................................
723
Playback display options
.................
694
Playback folder
.........................................
694
Playback menu
.........................................
692
Playback zoom
..........................................
247
Portrait (Set Picture Control)
........
193
Power connector
....................................
852
Power off delay
...............................
80
,
618
Preset manual (White balance)
.
160
,
170
Press the shutter-release button all
the way down
..........................................
91
Press the shutter-release button
halfway
...........................................................
90
Programmed auto
.................................
133
Protect
..............................................................
249
Push-button WPS
..........
338
,
375
,
404
Q
T
button
..................................
105
,
108
912
Index
Quick crop
.....................................................
241
Quick release-mode selection
....
146
,
148
Quick sharp (Set Picture Control)196
R
Rating
................................................................
251
RAW recording
..........................................
507
RAW Slot 1 - JPEG Slot 2 (Role played
by card in Slot 2)
.................................
503
Rear-curtain sync
....................................
431
Recent settings
.........................................
780
Rechargeable Li-ion battery
............
72
Red-eye reduction
.................................
430
Release button to use dial
..............
666
Release mode
.............................................
145
Release timing indicator
..................
629
Remote flash photography
............
437
Remote photography
.........................
312
Reset
..........................................
209
,
495
,
597
Reset all settings
......................................
754
Resize
.................................................................
274
Retouch
...........................................................
264
Reverse dial rotation
............................
666
Reverse indicators
..................................
667
Reverse ring for focus
.........................
667
Role played by card in Slot 2
........
503
Rotate tall
......................................................
698
Router frequency band
.....................
774
S
Saturation (Set Picture Control)
.
196
Save focus position
...............................
718
Save/load menu settings
.................
748
Security slot
....................................................
40
Select for upload (FTP)
.......................
390
Select for upload to computer
...
356
Select pictures for upload
...............
253
Select pictures for upload (Connect
to smart device)
...................................
758
Selected pictures
....................................
261
Self-timer
...............................
146
,
152
,
617
Sensor shield behavior at power off
719
Set Picture Control
................................
192
Set the clock
...................................................
85
Setup menu
.................................................
706
Shade (White balance)
.......................
159
Sharpening (Set Picture Control)196
Shooting data
............................................
235
Shooting menu bank
..........................
493
Shooting mode
.........................................
132
Shutter speed
................................
133
,
135
Shutter-priority auto
............................
133
Shutter-release button AE-L
.........
617
Silent mode
..................................................
735
Single AF
.........................................................
111
Single frame
................................................
145
Single-point AF
.........................................
114
Slide show
.....................................................
257
Slot empty release lock
.....................
747
Slow sync
.......................................................
430
SnapBridge
...................................................
311
Spot metering
............................................
520
Standard (Set Picture Control)
....
193
Standby timer
...............................................
80
Starlight view (photo Lv)
.................
626
Start via LAN
................................................
773
Stereo microphone (for videos)
....
94
Storage folder
............................................
497
Store points by orientation
............
602
Straighten
......................................................
281
Subject-tracking AF
..............................
117
Sub-selector
...................................
123
,
141
Sync. release mode options
..........
620
Synchronized release
..........................
402
T
Thumbnail playback
............................
228
Time
......................................................................
138
Time (Long time-exposures)
.........
138
913
Index
Time zone and date
....................
85
,
709
Timecode
.......................................................
591
Time-lapse video
....................................
556
Toning (Set Picture Control)
.........
196
Touch controls
.................................
53
,
736
Touch shutter
............................................
124
Trim
.....................................................................
273
Trim video
.....................................................
290
Two-button reset
...................................
209
U
Upload while off
......................................
759
USB
......................................................................
773
USB cable
..............................................................
4
USB connection priority
...................
737
USB power delivery
..............................
744
V
Vibration reduction
..............................
526
Video file type
...........................................
214
Video flicker reduction
......................
585
Video recording menu
......................
576
Video-record button
...............................
93
View all in continuous mode
.......
629
View assist
.....................................................
685
View mode (photo Lv)
.......................
624
Viewfinder brightness
........................
711
Viewfinder color balance
................
712
Vignette control
..........................
516
,
584
Virtual horizon type
.............................
631
Vivid (Set Picture Control)
..............
193
Voice memo
................................................
295
Voice memo options
...........................
732
W
Warm display colors
............................
626
WB bracketing
...........................................
183
U
button
....................................................
158
White balance
...........................................
158
Wide-area AF (L)
......................................
116
Wide-area AF (S)
......................................
116
Wi-Fi connection
.....................................
758
Wi-Fi mode
...................................................
317
Wind noise reduction
.........................
589
Wired LAN
.....................................................
756
Wireless LAN
...................................
329
,
367
Wireless remote (WR) options
....
738
Wireless Transmitter Utility
...........
328
WR-R10
................................................
439
,
738
WR-R11a
.............................................
439
,
738
Z
Zebra pattern
.............................................
686
No reproduction in any form of this document, in whole or in part
(except for brief quotation in critical articles or reviews), may be made
without written authorization from NIKON CORPORATION.
SB1L01(11)
6MO02511-01
